Latin prose composition; with exercises on Caesar, Livy and Cicero. / Fletcher, John, 1850-

LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, 



WITH 



EXERCISES IN CAESAR, LIVY, AN1 CICERO 



BY 

J. FLETCHER, M.A. 

of Latin, f'-mrirV f-r'rrr 



J. HENDERSON, M.A. 

Principal of St. Catharines Collegiate Institute. 




I 

TORONTO: 

PUBLISHED BY TH-E COPP, CLARK COMPANY, LIMITED, 

1894. 



Entered according to Act of the Par1ia?nent of Canada, in the year one thousand 
eight hundred and ninety -four, by THE COPP, CLARK CO., LIMITED, Toronto, 
Ontario, in the Office of the Minister of Agriculture. 



PREFACE. 



This book contains two parts. Part I. consists of a concise and 
simple statement of the main principles of Latin syntax, with illus- 
trations and exercises. The rules of Syntax are not intended to be 
learned by heart ; they are to be studied carefully in connection with 
the illustrations, many of which should be committed to memory. 
The exercises have been made longer than is customary, in order 
to afford a wider scope for selection. A knowledge, on the part of 
the pupil, of the Latin declensions and conjugations is presupposed. 
The authorities followed in the treatment of Latin Syntax are mainly 
Madvig, Roby, Kennedy, Bradley, and Hime. A few sections have 
been added on Latin Style, for which we are mainly indebted to the 
works of Bradley, Potts, Postgate, Nixon, Klotz, and Nagelsbach. 

Part II. consists of exercises in continuous English based on 
Caesar pe Bell. Gall, B. l.-vi.), on Livy (B. XXI. and xxn.), 
and on some of the common orations of Cicero. These exercises 
are intended to be written, but it is recommended that they be 
translated orally as well. In no case should an exercise be attempted 
until after a thorough study of the Latin on which the exercise is 
based. The exercises do not, of course, exhaust the material 
of the Latin text, and teachers will find it necessary to give their 
classes additional exercises of a character similar to those given 
here, and adapted to the grade of the pupil. Passages taken from 
English authors and involving a knowledge of vocabulary similar 
to that of the exercises, may also be given with advantage to 
advanced pupils. 

J. F. 
J.H. 
June joth, 1894. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



PART I. LATIN SYNTAX. 

SECTION. PACK. 

I. Concord and Apposition i 

2. Accusative with Infinitive 4 

3. Accusative with Infinitive (Continued) 5 

4. Pronoun of Third Person with Infinitive Verbs of Hoping 

and Promising 6 

5. The Relative 8 

6. The Relative (Continued) 10 

7. Final Clauses Ut with Subjunctive pv-sv^v^-v^ . . 12 

8. Consecutive Clauses f^u^^J^- J 4 

9. Ut-Clauses with Verbs of Asking 16 

10. Verbs of Fearing. Modal Verbs 17 

II. Classification of Tenses.,. .Law of Sequence 19 

12. Verbs of Doubting and Hindering. Quominus. Quin. . . 22 

13. Subjunctive in Simple Sentences. Utinam 24 

14. Imperative 26 

15. Interrogative Sentences. Use of ne, nonne, num 28 

16. Indirect Question 30 * 

17. Use of Indirect Question for an English Noun 32 

18. May, Can, Must, Ought how translated 33 

19. Notes on the Tenses. Fore ut for Inf. Fut 34 

20. Idiomatic Uses of Latin Verbs 38 

21. Supine, Gerund, Gerundive 41 

22. The Gerund and Gerundive (Continued) 45 

23. The Participle 47 

24. The Participle (Continued). Ablative Absolute 51 



Vlll TABLE OP CONTENTS. 

SECTION. PAGE. 

25. The Participle (Continued). Active Periphrastic Conjugation 53 

26. The Infinitive. Tenses of Infinitive 55 

27. The Genitive. Possessive Genitive, Partitive Genitive 59 

28. Genitive of Quality, Subjective and Objective Genitive, Gen. 

of Price. Gen. of Definition. Gen. with Adjectives 62 

29. The Genitive with Verbs. Interest and Refert 65 

30. The Dative 68 

31. Dative with Verbs 70 

32. The Ablative. Cause, Manner, Instrument 73 

33. Ablative of Comparison and Ablative of Difference. Ablative 

of Respect and of Price 76 

34. Ablative with Verbs and Adjectives of Plenty and Want 80 

35. Relation of Place. Locative. To, from, in, with names of 

places 82 

36. Relation of Time. Time When. Time How Long 85 

37. Personal and Demonstrative Pronouns 87 

38. Reflexive Pronouns. Use of se 91 

39. On the translation of " Any." Quis, quisquam, quivis 94 

40. Classification of Sentences. Noun, Adjectival, and Adverbial 

Clauses 98 

41. Adverbial Clauses. Local and Temporal Clauses. Postquam, 

Dum, Priusquam 102 

42. Temporal Clauses ( Continued). Syntax of Quum. Substitutes 

for a Perf Part. Act 106 

43. Final and Consecutive Clauses. Qui final. Qui consecutive .. 109 

44. Causal and Concessive Clauses 113 

45- Comparative Clauses. Idiomatic uses of ut (as) Il6 

46. Conditional Sentences 1 19 

47. Classification of Conditional Sentences. Exceptions to the 

Rules 122 

48. Indirect (or Oblique) Narration .... 127 

49. Summary of Rules for Turning Direct into Oblique Narration . 131 

5' Conditional Sentences in Oblique Narration 134 

51. Virtual Oblique Narration. Assimilation 137 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX 

SECTION. PAGE. 

52. On Some Special Idioms of Latin Syntax. " Without " and a <\S 

Participial Noun 139 

53. Notes on the Numerals 143 

54. The Roman Calendar I 147 

55. Roman Currency 150 

56. Weights and Measures. Interest. 153 

57. Latin Idiom in the use of words. Abstract Noun 156 

58. Other Substitutes in Latin for the Abstract Noun 160 

59. Abstract Adjectives and Adverbs 164 

60. Difference of Idiom (Continued) . . 168 

6l. Equivocal Words, Metaphor, etc. . 172 

62. Order and Emphasis 176 \f 

63. Connection, Rhythm, etc. 181 

64. The Latin Period , 186 

Appendix 193 

Preposition 193 

Rules for Gender 198 

Verbs followed by ut 201 

On Certain Conjunctions, etc 201 

Vocabulary 205 

Index to Part I 245 

PART II. 

Exercises on Caesar. ". 255 

Exercises on Livy 309 

Exercises on Cicero 334 



PART I. 

LATIN SYNTAX, 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



1. CONCORD A&P APPOSITION. 

1. If a sentence has two or more subjects, the verb must be 
plural ; and if the subjects differ in person, the verb will agree with 
the first person rather than with the second and with the second 
rather than with the third : as, 

Ego et soror mea ambulabamus. My sister and I lucre walking. 

Et tu et frater tuus ridetis. Both you and your brother are 
laughing. 

Here in the first example ambulabamus is plural because there are 
two subjects, and it is in the first person, because it agrees with 
ego rather than with soror. Kot^ |foa.t in Latin the first person 
comes before the second. _ 

Note also that the personal pronouns ego (/), tu (you, sing.), 
nos (we), vos (you, pi.) are expressed when emphatic. 

2. Tf_a._gfMTtginrp_hafi two ojjmnrp subjects all of the thircl_per- 
sonjjthe verb as^..mle agrees with the_nearest^ : as, 

Cibo potioneque fames et sitis depellitur. Hunger and thirst 
are removed by food and drink. 

Mini principatus et imperium delatum est. Sovereignty and 
power have been conferred on me. 

Rex et regia classis profecta est. The king and the royal fleet 
set out. 

Neque mores neque fortuna spectari solet. Neither character 
nor wealth is wont to be considered. 



2 LATIN PUOSE COMPOSITION. 

Other forms, however, are common. Thus : 

Uxor mea et filius rgprtui sunt. My tuife and son are dead (verb 
plural, and participle agreeing with masculine rather than with 
feminine), 

Nox et praeda hostes remorata sunt* Night and plunder 
delayed tJie enemy (participle neuter, though both subjects are 
feminine. This is often the case when the subjects are names 
of things.) 

3. A collective noun may have a plural verb, the verb agreeirlg 
with the idea of number expressed by the noun : as, 

Magna pars interfecti sunk... A rcat part lucre killed. 
The singular would, however, be more usual. 
Such a construction is called a sense construction. 

4. The words 'Mnen " and "things " need not be expressed when 
joined with an adjective, if the meaning is sufficiently shown 
by the ending of the adjective : as, 

goni, good DJCZL: mala^jfo^ thi?te r s evils. 
But, if ambiguity arises, the noun is expressed : as, 

Tntnrn (n,fint pi V, flfrtf fiffit"" but rerum futurarum, of the 
future (futurorum might mean of posterity, i.e. men about to be}. 

APPOSITION. 

5. An appositive noun agrees in case and, where possible, in 
gender with the noun to which it refers : as, 

Ille leg-is inventor fuit. He was the inventor of the law. 
Athenas, omnis doctrinae inventricem, omitto. 7 omit Athens 
the inventor of all learning. 

6. The words ivhen, as, for, used before an appositive in 
English, are omitted in Latin : as, 

Hoc consul feci. Tin's I did 'Ji'hen consul. 



CONCORD AND APPOSITION. 3 

7. The Latin for The city of Rome is TTrhs l Rffr* an d f r tne 
island of Cyprus, insula ^Cyprus Latin using nouns like city r 
town, etc., appositively. 

Note. The verb usually agrees with urbs or oppidum used' 
thus appositively : as, Volsinii, Tuscorum oppidum, crematum est.- 
Volsinii, a town of the Tuscans, was burned. 

8. Latin avoids the addition of adjectives to proper nouns or 
names of persons. It prefers to add the adjective to the genetid 
word vir, homo, etc., used appositively : as, 

Frater tUUS.JPJrJr.^jaairnna Vn^r ftftllantjirntkpr 

Athenae, urbs amoenissima. The lovely Athens, or the lovely 
city of Athens. 

Note. This idiom will translate the unemphatic English so 
added to an adjective : as, Nemo hunc reg-em, virum stultissimum, s/' 
observat. No one respects so foolish asking. 



EXERCISE I. 

N.JS.Put the verb at the end of the tentence. 

I. You and he are well and we are well. 2. Both riches and 
poverty influence the mind. 3. And a large multitude of men cast 
the corn into the river. 4. Power and honors were decreed you by 
the people. 5. Both his father and mother were dead. 6. The: 
city of Athens had been besieged for many days (ace.) 7. He was. 
going to the island of Sicily. 8. Philosophy is the knowledge of 
things human and divine. \ 9. Even so wise a man as the magistrate 
does not know everything. v 10. He did the same things when a 
boy. ii. You and all my friends will be killed to-day. \ 12. The 
lovely city of Thebes has been stormed. 13. Both you and I will 
see the games. j 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



2. ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 

In English we say either I know him to be wise or / knew 
that he is wise; but Latin has only the former of the two construc- 
tions. Thus : 

Scio eum sapere. / know that he is wise. 

This is one of the commonest of Latin constructions and is called 
the accusative with infinitive. 

RULE. The rule is as follows : Verbs meaning to know, think, 
say (or the like), and expressions like iUjuxztain, it is clear, it is 
true are followed not as in English by a noun clause introduced 
by that (ut) but by the accusative with infinitive. . 

The following examples should be learned by heart : 

Dicit Caesarem advenire. He says that Caesar is approaching. 
Puto te errare. / think that you are wrong. 
Bern ita esse video. / see that the thing is so. 
Sentimus ignem calere. We perceive that fire is hot. 
Respondet hostes adesse. He answers that the enemy is near. 
Negat se id fecisse. He denies that h^ has done it (i.e., he says 



that he has not done it; TLego = Jsqy not?) 

Certum est te amari. // is certain that you are loved. 

Incredibile est sues volare. // is incredible that pigs should fly. 

Note i. The accusative before the infinitive is called the subject 
of the infinitive. 

Note 2. The verb of saying, thinking, etc., is usually put at the 
beginning instead of at the end of a sentence. 

Note 3. A statement depending on a verb of saying, thinking 
or the like, is said to be in indirect narration or oratio obliqua. 
Thus in Dicit Caesarem advenire, Caesarem advenire is in indirect 
narration as opposed to Caesar advenit, Caesar is approaching^ 
whichus said to be in direct narration or oratio r?cta. 



ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. 

EXERCISE II. 

i I think that he will attack this city. 2. They say that he has 
gone away. 3. I believe that we shall defeat them. 4. Many 
think that books are useless. 5. He says that each man loves his 
own. 6. He says that we shall see the king. 7- He believes that 
the gods exist. 8. They will answer that you have offended against 
the laws. 9. We see that snow is white. 10. I think that he calls 
Rome the nurse of heroes. 1 1. They say that life is short. 12. I 
is clear that thev are all away. 13. He says that he loves 
beautiful city of Athens. 



3. ACCUSATIVE WITH 

1. The verb of a Mat-elapse, depending on a verb of saying or 
thinking is changed in English after a past tense. Thus : 

He says that Caesar is approaching becomes He said that 
Caesar was approaching, 

I think that you are wrong becomes I thought that you were 
wrong* 

There is no such change in the tense of the infinitive in Latin. 
Trius : 

Dixit Caesarem advenire. He said that Caesar was approaching 
(direct narration = Caesar advenit, Caesar is approaching}. 

Putavi te errare. I thought that you were wrong (direct nar- 
ration =tu erras, you are wrong). 

2. In turning English into Latin, the simple and effective rule 
for determining the tense of the infinitive in such cases as the above 
is this : Find first the direct narration (see 2, note 3) ; the 
tense of the verb in direct narration is the required tense of the 
infinitive. Thus : 

He said that they were writing. Pixit eos scribere (direct = 
ji scritmnt, they are writing} 



/ 
V 



6 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

He said that the messenger had come. Dixit nuntium advenisse 
(direct = nuntius advenit, the messenger JULS come}. 

He said that the man 'would die. Dixit hominem moriturum 
esse (direct = homo morietur, the man will die]. 

Note. The perfect inf. does duty in indirect narration for the 
imj|gj^:t and pluperfect of direct : as, 

They said that he used to sleep every day. Dixerunt eum quotidie 
dormiisse (direct = do'rmiebat, he used to sleep). 4/fy Titu^f 

He said that they ha,d fled lefavjgjgzaied. Dixit eos fugisae 
priusquam advenisset (cfirect "= fugSrant, they hadjtfd), 

EXERCISE III. 

i. He knew that the wicked were not happy. 2. He told us 
that the end of life was near for all. 3. He thought that the many 
were always wrong. 4. He said that a poet was born and not 
made. 5. It was clear that they would take up arms against their 
country. 6. They told him that he could not write Latin. 7. They 
answered that the place pleased them very much, 8. He thought 
that the multitude of the stars was great. 9. AH expected that he 
would attack the city. 10. He said that he was a Roman citizen, 
ii. He knew that my brother was brave. 12. He answered that 
children were always loved by their parents. 



4. PRONOUN OP THIRD PERSON WITH 
INFINITIVE. 

Verbs of Hoping- and Promising 1 . 

1. Balbus dicit se id facturum esse and Balbus dicit eum id" 
facturum esse, both mean Balbus says that he will do it. What is 
the difference between them ? A very important one. Balbus 
dicit se id facturum esse means B. says that he (B.) will do it j 
Balbus dicit eum id facturum esse means B. says that he (some 
One else than B.) will do it. 



PRONOUN WITH INFINITIVE. 7 

RULE. The rule, therefore, is this : He, she, they, referring to the 
subject of the main verb are translated by se; not referring to the 
subject of the main verb, by is, or, if emphatic, ille. 

Note. Similarly his, her, its, their, referring to the subject of the 
main verb are expressed by suus ; not referring to the subject of 
the main verb, by the genitive of is: as, Balbus domum suam 
vendit. Balbus sells his house ( - his own house). Balbus domum 
eras vendit. Balbus sells his house ( = the house of some one else). 

2. In the use of the ace. with inf., care should be taken to 
avoid ambiguity that is apt to arise from joining a personal subject 
and object together. Thus : 

Aio te Romanes vincere posse may mean / say that you can 
conquer the Romans; or, I say that the Romans can conquer you. 

To avoid ambiguity say : 

Aio Romanos a te vinci posse, for / say that you can conquer the 
Romans (i.e., I say that the Romans can be conquered by you). 

3. Verbs meaning t*Jiate l JlW&&< > J3U^^ a 

' future infinitive and not a present infinitive as in English : as, 

Sperat se diu victurum. He hopes to live a long time. 
Note. Esse may be omitted from the fut. inf. act. 
luro me haec facturum. / swear to do it. 
Promittit se venturum. Pie promts to come. 
Note. After such verbs as the above, the ace. of the pronoun 
must be used before the infinitive. 

4. The use of a verb of saying or thinking parenthetically is not 
common in Latin. Thus : 

'You were absent, he thought is Putavit te abesse. 

Note.-lnquit, he says, is the only exception. It is used to intro- 
duce the exact words of a speaker : as, 

'DicamtibVMnquit,'<omnia.>> I will tell you" says he, "every- 
thing? 



O LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, 

EXERCISE IV. 

I. You promised to bring everything with you. 2. He undertook 
to finish the business. 3. I believe that he killed his slave. 4. We 
knew that they would waste the land. 5. They will storm the city, 
he thinks. 6. They called out that he had fallen. 7. He hopes to 
make war upon them. 8. No one denied that the soul was the 
better part of us. 9. He swore to destroy their cities. 10. They 
felt that a great danger was at hand. n. He said that he was 
their friend. 12. He swore that he would not do it. 



5. THE RELATIVE. 

1. The case of a relative pronoun is determined by the verb of 
its own clause ; its gender, number and person by the antecedent r 
as, 

Ego, qui, te laudavi^rex sura. /, who praised you, am king. 

Ego, quern tu laudavisti, rex sum. /, whom you praised, am 
king. 

Is, cui librum dedisti, adest. He, to 'whom you gave the book, is 
here. 

2. The relative in the objective or accusative case so often 
omitted in English is never omitted in Latin : as, 

Artem, quam novi, exerceo. I practise the art I know. 

3. A relative may agree with the predicate of its own clause * 
instead of with the antecedent: as, 

Thebae, qugd Boeotiae cagu.t est. Thebes, which is the capital o f 
Boeotia. 

4. The relative, like the adjective or participle ( I., 2), when 
referring to one or more nouns of different gender, may always 
agree with the last : as, 

Neque homini neque ferae quam consoiciunt parcunt. They 
spare neither man nor beast they sec. 



THE RELATIVE. 9 

Note. Other forms of agreement are common : as, Pater et 
mater qui mortui sunt. Father and mother who were dead (rela- 
tive plural, and agreeing with masculine rather than feminine). 

Inconstantia et temeritas quae digna non sunt deo. Fickleness 
and rashness which are not worthy of a god (relative neut. pi., be- . 
cause the antecedents are the names of things). 

5. The antecedent of a relative pronoun is often omitted : as, 

Dividebat agros quibus volebat. He distributed lands to those to 
whom he wished. 

6. When the antecedent is emphatic, the relative clause is thrown 
forward and the main clause introduced by is or idem (same) : as, 

Qui id fecit, is abiit. The man who did it, is gone. 

The antecedent (when a noun) is in that case put in the relative 
clause : as, 

Quos campos viridissimos videram, eosdem vastatos vidi. / saw 
the fields desolate, which I had seen very green. 

7. A superlative referring to the antecedent is often put in the 
relative clause : as, 

Urbem, quam habebant optimam, perdiderunt. They have lost 
the best city they had. 

So too emphatic adjectives of number and amount : as, 

Duces qui pauci supersunt. Leaders few of whom survive. 

8. A noun used appositively as an antecedent is attracted into 
the relative clause : as, 

Abiit Roma, qua in urbe a puero habitaverat. He departed from 
Rome, a city in which he had lived from boyhood. 

9. A relative referring to a whole sentence is expressed by 
id quod or quae res: as, 

Invidiam vicisti, id quod difflcillimum est (or quae res diffl- 
cillima est). You have vanquished envy, which is a most difficult 
thing to do. 



10 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

10. What, as a relative, is translated by id quod or ea quae 
(that which, the things which) : as, 

Ea, quae recta sunt, laudantur. What is right, is praised. 
EXERCISE V. 

i. A young man hopes to live a long time, a thing which when 
old he can not hope to do. 2. The horse, which drew him, shook 
off the >oke. 3. He who easily believes, is easily deceived. 4. 
We miss Pompey, who was the light of Italy. 5. Govern your 
temper, which, if it does not obey, commands. 6. They value 
patriotism by which they have become great. 7. I will send you 
the best horseman I have. 8. What is crooked, is base. 9. The 
part of the state, which had made war, was punished (invert rel.). 
10. Fortune and honor which come to all. u. He sent away the 
few ships he had. 12. He used to say (impf.) that wisdom was the 
principal thing. 



6. THE RELATIVE. (Continued.) 

1. Many demonstrative pronouns and adjectives are often fol- 
lowed by a corresponding relative pronoun. These are called 
correlatives. 

The following correlatives should be learned : idern^ . -fl.ui .__/&? 
same.... as j talis qualis, such as : tant_u_..,_ji" o -p*-" g . as great 
as ; tot...^mQ|j r ..^r? many as : as, 

Idem est qui semper fuit. He is the same as he always was. 

Res eodem statu quo antea stat. The matter stands in the 
same position as before. 

Talis est qualis semper fuit. He is of the same character as he 
always was. 

Tantam voluptatem habeo quantam tu. I have as much plea- 
sure as you. 

Tot erant milites quot fluctus maris. The soldiers were as 
many as tJic waves of the ^j^ 

Note. The adverbs JBrn, so (limiti, adjectives or adverbs) are 
expressed by tarn: as, Tarn bonus homo. Such a good man. 
As good as you, is Tarn bonus quam tu. 9 



THE RELATIVE. 11 

2. The adjectives primus (first), ultimus (last), solus and 
< unus (alone), are used adverbially in Latin, where in English they 

are used as predicates of a relative clause or joined to an infinitive : 
as, 

Primus mala nostra sensit. He was the first who perceived our 
evils. 

Primus venit ; ultimus abiit. He was the first to come and the 
last to go. 

3. The verb of a relative clause in indirect narration (i.e. depend- 
ing on a verb of saying or thinking) is in the subjunctive mood : as, 

Laudat quod honestum est. He praises what is honorable. But: 
Dicit se, quod honestum sit, laudare. He says that he praises 
what is honorable. & 

Note. If, however, the person using the indirect narration 
(a historian for example) makes a statement on his own authority, 
the indicative will be used in the relative clause : as, Gaius dicit se 
captives, quos habebat, dimisisse. Gaius says that lie lias dismissed 
the captives whom he had (i.e. whom the narrator affirms Gaius 
had ; habsret would mean, whom Gaius says he had). Hence, 
too, in orations the indicative is used in a relative clause depend- 
ing on a verb of saying or thinking in the ist person : as, Dicam 
quae dicenda esse arbitror. / will say what I think ought to be said. 

4. Who . . .not, or but, after a negative is qu^^qui+ne, not : old 
form of non) : as, Nemo esb quin te dementem putet. There is 
no one who does not think you mad (or but thinks you mact). Qui 
non is rarely found. 

EXERCISE VI. 

i. They were the only ones who did it. 2. He s^s that they 
will praise what is expedient. 3. Their love towards us is the same 
as it always was. 4. No one denies that you are such as your 
father was. 5. He says that what is right is praised. 6. The ships 
were as many as they ever were. 7. He thought that the ships 
were as many as they ever were. 8. He was the first who prom- 
ised to help us. 9. I think that what isdkt is praised. 10. There 
was none who did not think?*riim the sS^| 11. He says that he 
admires the animal that is called man. 12. I believe that he was 
the first to call down phildlophy from heaven. 



12 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

7. FINAL CLAUSES. 
Ut with Subjunctive. 

1. In the sentence He sends ambassadors to sue for peace, the 
words to sue for peace express the Purpose for which the ambas- 
sadors were sent, and the infinitive is called the infinitive of purpose. 
The infinitive of purpose is never found in Latin, an adverbial 
clause introduced by ut (in order that) being used instead : as, 

Legates mittit ut pacem petant. He sends ambassadors to sue 
for peace. 

Note i. Ut, meaning that, requires the subjunctive. 

Note 2. The ut-clause of purpose is called a final clause because 
it expresses the purpose or end (finis) of the action of the main 
verb. 

2. When a not is required in the final clause, ut becomes ne: as, 

Hoc dico ne te laedam. / say this not to offend you (i.e. to 
avoid offending you). 

Note. Ne in a final clause will often translate the English to 
to prevent: as, Aves pennis fovent pullos ne frigore 



laedantur. Birds dj&ish their young with their feathers to prevent 
them from being hunby the cold. 

3. When a comparative is used in the final clause, quo is often 
used for that instead of ut : as, 

Hoc facio quo sis tutior. / do this that you may be safer. 

4. The verb of a final clause after a past tense in the principal 
clause becomes imperfecrsubjunctive : as, "~ 

Te laudavit ut a te laudareHr. He praised you that he might be 
praised by you. ^ 

Note. This is due to a special law (known as the Law o* 
Sequence of Tenses) which requires that after a past tense the 
verb of a subordinate clause should be imperfect or pluperfect. It 
will be illustrated in 1 1. 



FINAL CLAUSES. ^ 

5. In a final clause, That nobody is ne quis (and not ut nemo) ; > 
ttotnoiking is ne quid (and not ut nihil) ; /to*g(adj.) is ne ullus 
(not ut nullus) ; that never is ne unquam (not ut nunquam) : as, 

Portam claude ne quis excedat. Shut the gate that no one may 
go out. 

Abii ne quid viderem. / went away that I might see nothing. 

Clamant ne ullum verbum audiatur. They are^houting that no 
word may be heard. 

Hoc fc*te ne unquam vituperent. Do this that they may never 
revile. 

6. For et ne (following ut or a previous ne), neve (or neu) is 
used , as, 

Hoc dico ut bono animo sit neve perturbetur. / say this that 
he may be of good courage and may not be disturbed. Abibo ne 
eum videam neve audiam. / will go away that I may not see or 
hear him. 

EXERCISE VII. 

jfbst Ut for "to" and " in. order to" expressing jntrtose... 

I. He went away that he might not see us. 2. They pretend to 
be mad, that they may not be banished. 3. I think that prizes are 
given to boys that they may be more zealous. 4. He wrote to 
warn us. 5. He killed himself that he might not^ee-the country 
overthrown. 6. We teach our children in order that they may be 
good citizens. 7. They took him from the plough in order to make 
him consul. 8. I did it that I might displease no one. 9. We do 
not live to eat. 10. He sent us away that we might have no hope 
of safety. 11. Do this that you may be free. 12. In order to be 
free we obey the law. 13. In order that no one may lie hid (lated) 
or escape, he has sent out all the cavalry. 



14 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION 



8. CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES, 

1. In the sentence He lives in such a way that he has nothing, 
the clause introduced by that expresses the result or consequence 
of the action of the main verb. Such a clause is called a con- 
secutive clause and must be carefully distinguished from a final 
clause. 

2. A consecutive clause is usually introduced by ut (so l^p\ and 
requires the subjunctive : as, 

Ita vivit ut nihil habeat. He lives in such a way thct he has 
nothing. 

3. The rule for the sequence of tenses (laid down in 7, 4) does 
not apply to consecutive clauses after a past tense. The perfect 
subjunctive is used of a single act, the imperfect of a repc: 
orTorTttrrSSuTone : as, 

Tantus timer omnes occupavit ut rex ipse fugerit. Such fear 
seized all, that the king himself fled (pi a single act). 

Tanta tempestas coorta est ut nulla navis cursum tenere posset, 
So great a storm arose that no ship could hold its couKJjjjjjfi a con- 
tinuous act). \ 

Note. The impf. is used of a repeated, continuous, or habitual act. 

4. If a negative is required in the consecutive clause, ut non is 
used and not as in a final clause ne : as, 

Tarn caecus fuit ut me non viderit. He was so blind thai lie did 
not see me (or as not to see me). So too : That no one is ut nemo, 
fh'.* f nothing is ut nihil, that no (adj.) is ut nullus, and that never 
is ut nunquam : as, 

Talis erat ut nemo ei crederet. He was of such a character 
that uo one used to believe him. 

Tarn improbus fuit ut nihil eum unquam a scelere revocaverit. 

He was so wicked tJiat nothing ever recalled him from crime. 

Ita insulam vexavit ut ea restitui in aiitiquum statum nullo 
modo potuerit. He so harried the island that it could in no way 
be restored to its ancient condition. 



CONSECUTIVK CLAUSES. 

Note. ^ limiting- a verb, is ita, sic, or adeo; limiting an adjec- 
tive or adverb it is tarn ( 6, i. Note). 

5. Ut consecutive is used after the following demonstrative words : 
Tails, such; eiusmodi, such (in a disparaging sense) ; tantus, so gredt, 
stick; tot, so many; toties, so often; sic, ita, tarn, so; adeo, to 
such a degree. .^ 

It i^ted"used after the following impersonal verbs and pjirases ; 
acciditSwrenit, contingit, fit, it happens ; restat, reliquum est, /'/ re- 
mains; fieri potest, it is possible (literally^ it may happen} ; 
nullo modo fieri potest, it is impossible; sequitur, ik fallows; 
tantum abest, itisj;ofar_from; expedit, it is expediett; ^ccedit, 
// is~added : as, 

Qui fit ut nemo contentus vivat? How does it happen that no 
one lives contentedly ? 

Accidit ut primus id nuntiaverit. // happened that he was the 
first to announce it. 

Tantum abest ut omnes miremur ut nobis non satisfaciair ipse 
Demosthenes. So far are we from admiring all, that Demosthene~s \ 
himself does not satisfy us (lit., so far off is it that we admire all, etc.) 

EXERCISE VIII. 

i. Italy is so covered with trees that it seems an orchard. 2. 
Their strength was such that we did not dare to take up arms. 3. 
It was so hard that no one could do it. 4. His ears are so closed 
to the truth that he will not hear it from a friend. 5. It remains 
that I should say a few words about good fortune. 6. He was so 
far from loving, that he even hated Jier. 7. Such is the power'of 
goodness that we love it even in an enemy. 8. The river was so 
deep that no one could cross it. 9. I am not so ignorant.as not to 
know that. 10. He was so grieved that he never took anything 
more deeply to heart. 1 1. He broke his word so often that no one 
ever believed him. 12. They took away his sword that he might 
hurt no one. 13. He said that he had been fighting for (pr0 + ab\.) 
the country 14. It may happen that he is sometimes wrong. 15. 
To this was added tht--he was blind. 



1C LATIK PROSE COMPOSITION. 



9. UT-CLAUSE WITH VERBS OF ASKING. 

1. Verbs meaning to ask, command, or advise, are followed by 
an ut-clause, not as in English^by the infinitive : as, 

Rog-o te ut id facias. / ask you to do it. 

Ixnperat ut clipeos gergujjiaijt. He orders them to strike their 
shields. 

Moneo te ut aurum reddas. / warn you to restore the gold. 

Note. lubeo (order), and veto (forbid), take the inf. and not 
the ut-clause : as, Eos pedem referre iussit (vetuit). He ordered 
(forbade) them to retreat. 

2. After a past tense, the verb of the ut-clause becomes imperfect 
(7, 4. Note) : as, 

Rog-avi ut id faceres. I asked you to do it 

Imperavit ut clipeos percuterent. He ordered them to strike 
their shields. 

3. When not is required in the ut-clause, ne is used instead of 
ut non : as, 

Monui te ne uxorem duceres. 1 warned you not to marry. 
So too ;_ne quis is used for ut nemo (thai no one), ne quid for 
ut nihil (that nothing), ne ullus for ut nullus (that no), and ne 
unquam for ut nunquam (that never) : as, 

Te rogo ne quid facias. / ask you to do nothing. 

Obsecravit eum ne fidem unquam violaret. He entreated him 
never to break his word. 

4. Or, and not, after a verb of asking, is neve : as, 

Te rogavi ne eum accusares neve multares. / asked you not to 
accuse and not to punish him. 

Neither . . . . nor would be neve. . . .neve. 

5. Verbs meaning to effect, decide, or strive are also followed by 
an ut-clause : as, 




EARING. MODAL VERBS. 17 



Sol efflcit ut omnia floreant. The sun makes everything flour- 
ish. 

Decernit ut consules dg^ggfcma habeant. He decrees that the 
consuls shall hold a levy. 

Cura ut hoc facias. Take care to do this. 

Note. Statuo, constituo and decerno, resolve, take the infinitive 
when they are followed by an infinitive in English : as, Statuit 
redlre. He decides to rettirn. 

6. Verbs meaning to warn^ when stating a fact, become verbs of 
saying (2, i ) and require the accusative with infinitive : as, 

Nos monet hostes adesse. ffe 'warns us that the enemy is at 
hand. So too : Hoc tibi persuadebo te errare. I ivill persuade you 
of this, that you are wrong. 

EXERCISE IX. 

I. I will persuade him to return. 2. I begged them to help us. 
3. He ordered us to supply him with corn. 4. I warned him to set 
out at once. 5. I warn you that they will set out at once. 6. We 
implored them not to kill women and children. 7. Take care to 
understand this. 8. They passed a decree that no one should 
scourge a Roman citizen. 9. They warned us that as many had 
been banished as ever. 10. He said that we were asked to assemble 
in the market-place. 1 1. I beg of you not to decree anything. 12. 
I resolved to ask him to go away. 13. Beg them not to come. 14. 
He was so timid that he was afraid to enter the city. 15. So far 
were we from reviling, that we even admired them ( 8, 5). 



10. VERBS OP FEARING. MODAL VERBS. 

1. Latin verbs meaning to fear, take a peculiar construction 
which seems to admit of no explanation. Thus : 

Vereor^te veniat. / am afraid that he will come. 
Vereor ut venial / am afraid that he will not come. 



18 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Note. The English future after verbs of fearing, is expressed by 
the subjunctive the present subjunctive, if after a present or 
future tense, the imperfect if after a past (7, 4, Note): as, 
Timeo nt labores sustineas, / am afraid tJiat you will not endure 
your labors ; timebam ne ea evenlrent, / was afraid that those 
things would happen. 

2. Phrases like periculum eat, there is danger, take the construc- 
tion of verbs of fearing : as, 

Periculum erat ne te verbis obrueret. There was danger that 
he would overwhelm you with words. 

3. Many verbs (called modal verbs) take an infinitive after them 
to complete their meaning : as, audeo (dare), cogo (compel), conor 
(endeavor}, constituo and statuo (determine), cunctor (hesitate), 
cupio (desire}, debeo (oughf), desino (cease), disco (learn), dubito 
(hesitate^, incipio (begin), malo (prefer), nescio (not /enow how), 
nolo (be unwilling), obliviscor (forget), paticr .(allow}, paro (pre- 
pare}, possum (be able}, scio (know how}, soleo (be accustomed}, 
vereor (fear), volo (be willing** as, 

Malo mori. I prefer to die. 

Debeo id facere. / ought to do it. 

Desme mirari. Cease to wonder (or cease wondering). 

Note i. Of these verbs volo and nolo often take the subjunctive 
with or without ut : as, 

Hoc (ut) facias velim. / should like you to do this. 

Note 2. Vereor (fear) has the inf. in Latin when it has the inf. 
in English : as, Veretur redire. He is afraid to return. 

4- A noun or adjective with the modal infinitive is in the nomina- 
tive and not in the accusative : as, 

Vult esse servus. He wishes to be a slave. 



CLASSIFICATION OF TENSES. LAW OF SEQUENCE. 19 

EXERCISE X. 

CD I am afraid that you will not bear it . 2. I do^not think that 
you are afraid to die. ^ There was danger that he would attack 
the camp. 4. We were afraid that all his soldiers would desert 
him. L 5. I fear I can not grant you that. 6. I am afraid that you 
do not love me. \ I begin to think that the man is mad. 8. I 
wish to speak but I N do not dare. 9. He said that he knew how 
to conquer the country's enemies. 10. They thought that he was 
afraid lest he should be captured by brigands, n. Stop talking. 
12. He said that they were accustomed to walk every day. 13. I 
warn you that your ships are lost., 14. No one is so good as never 
to sin (8, 4). 15. He said that he could not respect so foolish a 
king (use nego, say nof). 1 6. They have warned us never to enter 
the city. 17. Persuade him not to restore the gold. 18. I forgot 
to say that he has gone to see the king. 19. He seemed to be the 
first man in the state. 



11. CLASSIFICATION OF TENSES. 
LAW OF SEQUENCE. 

1. The following classification of Latin tenses should be carefully 
mastered. 

Latin tenses are divided into two classes, Primary and Secon* 
dary (or Historical}. Thus : 

(Present, amat, he loves 

Perfect (pres. perf.), amavit, he has loved. 
Future, amabit, he will love. 

Future-perfect, amaverit, he will have loved. 

f Imperfect, amabat, he was loving. 

jPSHp^tindef.), amavit, he loved. 
\ Pluperfect, amaverat, he had loved. 



20 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Note. The only difficulty in this classification lies in the per- 
fect, which has a double force. Thus : amavit means either he has 
loved or he loved. In the former case, it. is called tint present perfect 
(or perfect with have) ; in the latter the past indefinite (or aorist 
perfect}. 

2. This classification is important in view of the fact that the 
tense of the subjunctive in a subordinate clause is primary when 
the tense of the verb of the main clause is primary, and secondary 
when the tense of the verb of the main clause is secondary. This 
law, known as the Law of sequence of tenses has been referred to 
already. It may be stated thus : 

LAW OF SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 

A primary tense in the principal clause, is followed by a primary 
tense in the dependent clause ; a secondary tense in the principal 
clause, is followed by a secondary tense in the dependent clause. 
Thus: 

Rogat ~\ He asks 

Rogabit He will ask 

\youtocom*. 

Rogaverit J He will have asked 

Rogabat J He was asking \ 

Rogavib vteut venires He asked \ you to come. 

Rogaverat J He had asked 

EXAMPLES OF PRIMARY AND SECONDARY 
SEQUENCE. 

Laudant ut laudentur : They praise that they may be praised 
(primary sequence in final clause ; p. 12, i). 

Laudabant ut laudarentur. They praised that they might be 
praised (secondary sequence in final clause). 

Obsecrat eum ne fratrem occldat. He implores him not to kill 
his brother (primary sequence). 

Obsecravit eum ne fratrem occideret. He implored him not to 
kill his brother (secondary sequence). 



CLASSIFICATION OF TENSES. LAW OF SEQUENCE. 

Timeo ne peccaveris. / am afraid that you have done wrong 
(primary sequence). 

Timebam ne pecavisses. / was afraid that you had done wrong 
Secondary sequence). 

Video causas esse multas quae eum impellant: / see that there 
are many causes which urge him on (primary sequence). 

Vidi causas esse multas quae eum impellerent. / saw^-that the 
causes were many which iirged him on (secondary sequence). 

Eum monui ne hoc faciat. / have warned him not to do this 
(primary sequence). 

Eum monui ne hoc faceret- I warned him not to do /^(second- 
ary sequence). 

Note. Occasionally the secondary sequence is found even with 
the present-perfect (perfect with have} : as, Haec non ut vos excit- 
arem locutus sum. / have not said this to rouse you. 

EXERCISE XI. 

I. He will easily persuade you not to come. 2. They have asked 
him to stand for the consulship. 3. We asked him to help us. 4. 
I was afraid that he would not return. /. A law is short in order 
that it may be more easily understood (teneo). 6. I will ask him 
not to do anything against his will. 7. I was afraid that he would 
ruin the country. 8. He strove to teach them wisdom in war. 9. 
He said that he would obey all the laws that were passed. 10. 
There was danger that he would not do it ( 10, 2). u. I was 
afraid that he would die. 12. He was so timid that he did not dare 
to enter the camp. 13. He used to say that the life, which had 
been given us, was short. 147 He said that he hoped to finish the 
business shortly (p. 7, 3). 15. He was the last of all to promise to 
obey. 1 6. He wrote us to tell him what we had heard (p. 9, 9). 
17. He broke his word so often that no one believed him. 18. 
They said that they had come to learn. 19. He was so angry that 
he answered nothing. 20. He used to say that many lived to eat. 






22 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



12. VERBS OF DOUBTING AND HINDERING. 

1. Verbs meaning to doubt, when used_jadth a negatj^ are fol- 
lowed in Latin by the subjunctive with quin ( = c^xfnow, and ne, 
not, old form of non) : as, 

Non dubito quin me mirere. / do not doubt t fiat you wonder at me 
Nemo dubitat quin hoc turpe sit. No one doubts that this is 
base. 

2. Verbs meaning to hinder, prevent, and the like, are followed 
in Latin by the subjunctive with quominus ( = by which the less 
in order that not} : as, 

Senectus non impedit quominus literis utamur. Old age does 
not prevent us from enjoying literature. 

Per me stetit quominus ad te scriberet. // was owing to me that 
he did not write to you (impf of secondary sequence: i r, 2). 

"Note. Of verbs of preventing, prohibeo is more usually followed 
by the infinitive: as, Prohibent eumexire. They preve?it him from 
going out. 

3. Verbs of hindering when used with a negative, or with a 
virtual negative (like vtx, hardly), may be followed by the subjunc- 
tive with quin : as, 

Vix inhiberi potuit quin saxa iaceret. He could hardly be pre- 
vented from throwing stones. 

4. The following verbs and phrases, of much the same nature as 
the above, are also followed by quin (but that} with the subjunctive : 

Nemo est (quin). There is none but (p. u, 4). 
Quid causae est (quin)? What reason is there against? 
Fieri non potest (quin). // can not be but that. 
Temperare mini non possum (quin). / ca?i not refrain from. 
Minimum (baud multum) abesse (quin). Be very near. 
Facere non possum (quin). / can not help. Thus : 
Facere non potuit quin bellum inferret. He could not heCp 
making war. 



VERBS OP DOUBTING AND HINDERING. 23 

Nihil praetermisit quin nobis persuaderet. HeJ^e^mthmg un- 
done to persuade us. 

Mil mil urn (iihfnifaquig.j^mnes interficerentur. All were within cc 
little of being killed. 

Quid causae est quin id velit? What reason is there against 
his wishing it ? (lit., what of cause is there}. 

Fieri non potest quin exclamem. // is impossible for me not to 
cry out. 

Note. Quin is used with the indicative In the sense of (a) why 
not, (b) nay: as, (^uin conscendimus equos? \<lki> don't we mount 
our horses ? (Quin=qui ne, how not ?) Quin, uno verbo die. Nay, 
say it In one word. 

EXERCISE XII. 

i. Nothing prevented us from building a city. 2. Nothing shall 
deter me from speaking the truth. 3. No one can doubt that he 
has returned. 4. He could hardly be prevented from laughing. 
@ No one doubted that he had killed his friend. 6. They never 
saw him but (quin) they called him thief. 7. The storm will pre- 
vent them from coming. 8. We can not object to others dissenting 
(use quin). 9. No one is so wise that he can not learn. 10. He 
has left nothing undone to finish this business, n. It was owing 
to you that the wedding did not take place. 12. Nothing ever 
deterred him from praising what deserved praise. 13. I was afraid* 
that they could not be prevented from making war. "14. I do not 
hesitate to say that he has gone away to see the king. 15. No one 
was so powerful that he could do everything. 16. He could not 
help sending a letter every day. 

- 



24 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



13. SUBJUNCTIVE IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 

1. The Subjunctive is used in simple sentences: 

(a) In Wishes: as, 

Moriar. May I die! Felix sis. May you be fortunate! 
The negative is ne : as, 

Nevivam si scio. May I not live if I know! 

(b) In Commands or Exhortations : as, 

Abeat. Let him go away. Hoc facianaus. Let us do this. 
The negative is ne : as, 

Ne abeat. Let him not go away. Hoc ne faciamus. Let us iwt 
do this. 

Note. Of commands in the second person, the imperative is 
used when the command is affirmative ; ne with the perfect sub- 
junctive, when the command is negative: as, Ad me veni. Come to 
me. Ne id feceris. Do not do it. 

(c) To soften an assertion : as, [me. 
Velim mini ignoscas (ut omitted). / should like you to pardon 
Mallem te videre. / shotild prefer to see you. 

Crederes. Y/iu wnnJi1._Ji'we believed. 
Hoc dixerim. This I would have said. 

(d) In questions that imply deliberation: as, 

Quid faciam ? What am I to say ? ( What shall 1 say ?) 
Quid facerem? What was I fo have said? $*/*- 

This is called the deliberative subjunctive. 

It is often introduced by an : as, 

An ego non venirem P O tig] it I not to have come? 

(e) To express duty or possibility (see iS) : as, 
Hoc non fecisses. You ought not to have done it. 
Aurum reddidisses. You should have restored the gold. 

This is called the potential subjunctive. It is of rare occurrence. 



SUBJUNCTIVE IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 25 

SYNTAX OF UTINAM. 

2. When the subjunctive is used in wishes, utinam (Of that, 
would that!) is usually added. It is used as follows : 

When the fulfilment of the wish is possible, utinam is joined with 
the present or perfect subjunctive : as, 

Utinam adsit. O ! that he may be there (in the future). 
Utinam adfuerit. O ! that he may have been there (just now). 

When the wish can no longer be realised, the imperfect or pluper- 
fect subjunctive i^ used the imperfect when the wi^h is referred to 
the present, the pluperfect when it is referred to the past : as, 

Utinam adesset. .. O ! that he were here (now ). 

Utinam adfuisset. O ! that he had been here (in the past). 

The negative is ne (rarely non) : as, 

Utinam ne hoc in mentem incidisset. Would that it had not 
occurred to my mind ! 

EXERCISE XIII. 

i. Let us not lose this opportunity. 2. I should be unwilling to 
do it. 3. Let us remember that we owe this to our parents. 4. Do 
not think that we shall often have such a fleet. 5. Do not ask him 
to remain. 6. O ! that you had never been born. 7. Would 
he were alive ! 8. Would that they had sent me the bravest men 
they had ! 9. May all traitors perish ! 10. O ! that I could find 
him. ii. I was afraid that he would not be safe. 12. Let us 
remember that life is short. 13. I should like you to come to 
this city. 14. O ! that he may listen to you. 15. Let us always 
be the same. 16. O ! that we had been living then. 17. What 
should I have said? 18. I should advise you to be silent. 19. You 
would suppose she was a goddess. 20, Why should I enumerate 
the multitude of their ships ? 



26 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



14. THE IMPERATIVE. 

1. The second person of the imperative is used (in both 
singular and plural) when the command is affirmative : as, 

Vive valeque. Live and farewell. Audite hoc. Hear this. 

2. A command in the third person is usually expressed by the 
present subjunctive : as, 

Aut bibat aut abeat. Let him either drink or go away. 

3. When the command is negative, ne is used with the perfect 
subjunctive for the 2nd person of the imperative, and with the 
present subjunctive for the 3rd person of the imperative : as, 

Ne transieris numen. Do not cross the river. 
Ne cantet. Let him not sing. 

4. The present subjunctive may be used for the 2nd person of 
the negative imperative when the prohibition is of a general 
character: as, 

Ne multa discas sed multum. Do not learn many things but 
much. 

5. In prohibitions, instead of ne and the perfect subjunctive, noli 
(pi. nolite) with the infinitive, or cave (pi. cavete) with ne and the 
subjunctive, is frequently found : as/ 

Noli aljire. Do not go away. Cavete ne Ulud faciatis. Take 
care not to do that, Do not do that. 

Note. The ne is often omitted after cave, cavete. 

6. Or, or and not, in negative imperative sentences is neve or 
neu: as, 

Illud ne feceris neve dixeris. Do not do or say that. 
Sequere neve retrospexeris. Follow and do not look back. 



THE IMPERATIVE. 27 

7. The imperative of facio (do) is used also as a paraphrase for 
a mild command : as, 

Fac ut sciam. Take care that I know (let me know). 
Fac ut sciat. Let him know. 

8. The imperative in-to (-tote) often called the future imperative 
is usually found in wills and laws, though it is sometimes used 
merely for emphasis : as, 

Mortuum in urbe ne sepelito. Thou shalt not bury a dead man 
in the city. 

Servus meus liber esto- Let my slave be free. 

EXERCISE XIV. 

I. Go away ; depart from this city. 2. -Let him not lose such an 
opportunity. 3. Do not believe that I am afraid that you will 
desert. 4. Preserve this town, Jupiter, and the citizens who dwell 
in it. 5. Thou shalt not kill (use ne). 6. Do not be moved by pity. 
7. Do not be troublesome. 8. Do not praise the wicked. 9. Let 
them not believe that they will live long. 10. Take care that you 
write me soon. 1 1. Do not think that this will prevent him from 
coming. 12. Let no one deter you from praising what deserves 
praise. 13. Let us advance that we may hear more easily. 14 
Let us start now in order to arrive earlier. 15. Let him leave 
Athens, a city in which no one is safe. 16. I believe that he was 
buried in the same tomb in which his distinguished father lies. 17. 
He has ordered them to attack the camp. 18. It often happened 
that the best men were rejected. 19. So far was he from wishing 
to have the province, that they could not persuade himto leave the 
city. 20. He was so ill that he could not write. 



28 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

15. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 

NE, NONNE, NUM. 

1. Interrogative sentences in Latin (when not headed by an inter- 
rogative pronoun or adverb) are usually distinguished by one of the 
interrogative particles, -ne, nonne, num. The order of words does 
not, as in English, mark an interrogative sentence. 

2. The particle -ne (which is written after the first word in the 
sentence), asks for information : as, Amatne? Does he love? The 
answer will be either, amat, he loves (i.e., Yes\ or nonamat, he 
does not love (i.e., No). The particle -ne is generally appended to 
the emphatic word (which is then put first): as, Filiusne amat? 
Does the son love? (i.e. = 7s it the son that loves?) 

Note. Yes or No, in answer to questions, has no single 
equivalent in common use. They are usually expressed by repeat- 
ing the verb, as seen above. 

3. Nonne expects the answer Yes: as, Nonne puer amat ? Does 
not the boy love? The answer expected is, amat, he loves (i.e., Yes) 
Nonne is generally the first word in the sentence. 

4. Num expects the answer No: as, Num puer amat? Does the 
boy love? or the boy does not love, does he? 1 he answer expected 
is, non amat, he does not love, (i.e., No). Num is generally the first 
word in the sentence. 

5. The following are tha more common interrogative pronouns 
and adverbs : 

Quis or quisnam, who? Quo, whither? 

Uter, which of the two? Quando, when? (quum is never 

Quantus, how great? interrogative.) A 

Quotus, which in the series ? Qui, how? 

ateet, how many? Quam, (with adjs., or adverbs) 

Qualis, what kind? how? 

Quemadmodum, ) ; 

or <l uom 6do, \ 



Cur, 1 Quoties, how often? 

Quare, \why? Quamdiu, how long? 

Quamobrem, Quousque, how fan? 



INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 29 

Thus : 

Quis es? Who are you? Quota hora est? What o'clock is it? 
Cur id rog-as ? Why do you ask that ? 

Quae tandem causa te impellit? What motive, pray, impells you? 
Note. Tandem, in an v jnterrogative sentence, means prav. 
Quisnam hoc fecit? Who in the world has done this? 

Quod facmus admlsit? What crime has he committed? 

Note. Quod is the adjectival form of quid, what? If quid were 
used, it would take the genitive : as, Quid facinoris admisit ? 

6. Whether . . . . or in a double question, is utrum .... an; 
whether . . . .or not, utrum. . . .an non: as, 

Utrum Pallas hoc fcit an luno ? Whether has Pallas done this 
or Juno ? 

Utrum haec vera sunt an non ? Whether is this true or not ? 

Note. Utrum is sometimes omitted, sometimes replaced by the 
appended -no: as, Hoc an illud fecisti? Whether did you do this 
or that ? Nostine me an ig-noras ? Do you know me or dorft you 
know me? 

7. A rhetorical question is often introduced by an; as, 

An servi esse vultis ? Can it be that you want to be slaves ? 

EXERCISE XV. 

\ I. Do you think that he will come ? 2. Who said that he re- 
fused to obey? 3. Whether is it water or wine? ^'4. Is there one 
world only, or more? 5. Are those your words or not ? 6. Is the 
number of the stars odd or even ? ^j. Do you think that death is 
an eternal sleep or the beginning of another life ? 8. Does he 
know the glory of virtue ? Yes. 9. Why do you not ask him to 
follow justice ? V 10. Has he not sejit an ambassador to persuade 
us? 11. How do you know all this ? (plur.) 12. Where are you 
coming from ? 1 3. Whither are you going ? 1 4. Are you asking 



30 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

him to betray his country? 15. You don't hear me, do you? 16. 
Can it be that they are taking up arms against their country ? 17. 
Why does he pretend that he is teaching his brother? 18 Don't 
you hope that he will find what you have lost? J I9. How did it 
happen that there was no one present ? 20. When did you hear 
the orator ? 21. Why do you give nothing to the poor? \J22. How 
could he pretend that he was unwilling ? 



16. INDIRECT QUESTION. 

1. A question dependent upon a verb of asking, knowing, telling, 
or the like, has its verb in the subjunctive : as, 

Unde venis? Where are you coming from. But : 
Scio unde venias. __/ know where you are coming from. 
Here unde venias is called an indirect (or dependent) question 

2. Whether, or if, in an indirect question, is num : as, 
Die mini num venerit. Tell me whether (if) he has come. 

Whether . ... or is utjnini_. ... an ; but or not is necne and not 
annon (as in the direct question) : as, 

Quaeritur utrum interfectus sit necne. The question is whether 
he has been put to death or not. 

3 The law of sequence of tenses ( n, 2) is to be strictly 
observed in the indirect question. , Thus : 

Primary. Secondary. 

Rogo 1 fagas. Rogabam \ fageres. 

Rogabo I quid -j egeris. Rogavi L quid -] egisses. 

Rogavi [acturus sis. RogaveramJ [acturus esses 

/ ask \ Cyou are doing. I was asking\ (you were doing. 

I shall ask \youhavedone I asked < \youkaddone. 

\whatl (or did]. \what\ 

I have asked I \yoit are going I had asked I \ you were going 



<-- ; I ^ 

to do. J { to do. 



INDIRECT QUESTION. 31 

Note I. The future subjunctive active* is formed from the future 
participle with sim, which becomes essem after a secondary tense : 
as, Rogo quid acturus sis. / ask what you will do. . Rogavi quid 
acturus esses. I asked what you vyquia an. "" 

Note 2. From reluctance to join an impf. subjun. with a primary 
tense, Latin says Rogo quid turn egeris (not ag-eres) for / ask you 
what you were doing then. 

4. After nescio or haud scio (I don't know), dubito (/ doubt), 
incertum est (It is uncertain) implying an affirmative whether 'is 
an : as, 

Constantiam dico? "NTftsmo .n n^iing pa.tiftnt,ia.m possim dicere. 
Consistency, do I say ? I dont know whether I can not better say 
long- suffering. 

Note I. In cases like the above, nescio an has the force of I al-~ 
most think (i.e., is used affirmatively). 

Note 2. Nep^1r^j3Jiii a ~ :hr>n dixit is Some r~(\ 0r athcr 7< 1T said it. 
Nescio quis hoc dixerit is 7 dorit know who has said it. In the 
former nescio quis is an indefinite pronoun, Some one or other, I 
dortt know who. 

5. In sentences like You know the skill with which he speaks, 
Latin prefers the indirect question and puts the noun in the depen- 
dent clause : as, 

Scis quanta arte loquatur. You know the skill with which he 
speaks. 

EXERCISE XVI. 

l. Don't you know* whether you have conquered or not? 2. I 
should like to know whether these are your words or not. 3. Ask 
him what he thinks about the matter. 4. Tell me if your friend has 
returned. 5. We all know how daring you are. 6. You will never 
believe how often I have advised them. 7. Take care to inform 
me when you will set out. 8. Why don't you ask him where he has 
been? 9. I almost think that he is not happy. 10. I did not know 
whether he was a wise man or a fool. 1 1 . I saw what you would 
do. 12. I asked them where they had laid my book. 13. Did you 
know by whom the city was founded? 14. Tell me how many 
letters you wrote yesterday. 15. Have you heard how many they 
are? 16. I will ask the road by which he will return. 



32 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

17. USE OF THE INDIRECT QUESTION FOB* 
AN ENGLISH NOUN. 

1- Latin often uses the indirect question where English uses an 
abstract or verbal noun : as, 

Rogavit quot hostes essent. He asked the number of the enemy. 
Scio cur redieris. I know the reason of your return. 
Dicam tibi quo eamus. / will tell you our destination. 
Quid de ea re sentiat exponet. He will explain his view of 
the matter. 

Vides quaLe periculum sit. You see the nature of the danger. 

2. The indirect question must be distinguished from the relative 
clause. Thus : 

Scio quid quaeras. / know your question. But, Scio quod 
quaeris. / know the answer to your question. 

Dico quae sentiam. / state my opinion. But, Dico quae sentio. 
/ say what I mean. 

EXERCISE XVII. 

Use the indirect question for italicised nouns. 

^rT^I see the suddenness of the danger (use quam). 2. Can you 
tell the source of that rumor. 3. I have heard the origin of the 
custom*.. -4. You see the character of the man. 5. Let us ask him 
the date of his departure. 6. Shall we ever know the manner of 
his death ? 7. I did not know the size of the city. 8. Let us wait 
that we may see the issue of the matter (use evado, turn out). 9 
No one foresaw the extent of the danger. 10. They knew the 
reason for his action, n. The motive of his act was plain to all. 
12. Tell me his opinion of the whole affair. 13. You know now the 
manner of his life from boyhood. 14. Have they discovered the 
enemy's position ? 15. You know the agents, in this crime. 
What prevented them from attacking us? 17. The plan was such 
that I could not praise it. 18. How does it happen that you did 
not allow them to return? 19. Why were you afraid that I would 
not speak the truth? 20. It happened that no one opened the gate 
of the city. . 



MAY, CAN, MUST, OUGHT. 33 

18. MAY, CAN, MUST, OUGHT. 

I 1. May, in a principal sentence, is expressed by licet with the 
miinitive: as, Mihi ire licet. / niay go.- 

2. Ca?i is possum : as, Id facere possum. I can do it. 

Note. Licet expresses permission, possum power j but Fieri 
potest ut is, // may happen that (it is possible that): as, Fieri potest 
ut opus confectum sit. // is possible that the work has been 
finished. 

3. Ought or should, expressing duty, is debtor oportet : as, 
Venire debes. You ought to come. 

Hoc me facere oportet. / ought to do it. 

Note. Ought or should is usually expressed, however, by the 
gerundive in -dus with the verb to be: as, Id faciendum est. This 
ought to be done (p 45, a)t 

4. Must is expressed by necesse est and the infinitive, or (or 
persons) the subjunctive, with or without ut: as, 

Tibi mori necesse est (or Tibi rnoriare necesse est). You must 
die. 

Must, implying obligation, is usually expressed by the 



geruncrWe in -d^is and the verb to be: as, Hi audiendi sunt. These 
men must he listened to. 

Note ^E-Must, expressing strong, probability, is Haud (or non) 
fieri potuit quin, it could not have been but thai : as, Haud (or 
ncn) fieri p^fciit quin earn vidsret. He must have seen her. 

5. The English perfect infinitive used after might, could, ought, 
is expressed in Latin by the present infinitive : as, 

Hoc mini facere licuit. / might have done it. 

Hoc facere potui. / could have done it. 

Hoc facere debuisti. You ought to have done it. 

6. An adjective joined to an infinitive with licet or necesse est, is 
in the dative, if the pronoun is expressed ; if not, in the accusa- - 
tive : as, 

Licet vobis esse igjiavis. You may be cowards. But, 

Licet esse ignavo. We may be cowards (lit., // is allowable to 
be cowards). 
4 




34 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XVIII. 

i. You should have warned him to consult the judge. 2. They 
should tell us their names. 3. It may be that he advised them to 
surrender. 4. They could not have killed women and children. 
5. Do not ask them whether they could have done it or not. 6. 
Will you ask how many prisoners have been taken ? 7. You might 
have left the city immediately. F. O ! that he would not do it. 
9. She was so blind as not to see him. IO; He must have forgotten 
his friend (gen.}. 1 1. You can allow none to go away. 12. I ought 
to have asked him to set out at once. 13. I should like to know how 
many cities were taken. 14. O ! that we had warned him not to 
come. 15. She was the first to ask when we would do it. 16. 
Were you afraid that I would not speak the truth? 17. Who 
can hope to persuade him? 18. He said that he did not speak 
Latin. 19. They began to write at once in order that they might 
go out. 20. He promised that he would remain there. 21. May I 
go into the garden to pluck a flower ? 



19. NOTES ON THE TENSES. 

1. Latin has only one form for the three forms of the English 
present. Thus : Scribo is / write (indefinite), I am writing 
(progressive) and / do write (emphatic). ^ 

2. The present is used, for vividness, of past time : as, 
Continue milites in castra mittit- Forthwith he sends the soldiers 

into the camp. This is called the historic present. 

3. The present is used with adverbs of past time, for the English 
perfect : as, 

Hoc iamdudum (or iampridem) facio. / have been doing this 
for a longtimg, 

So too : Tertium iam annum hie sumus. We have been here 
now three years. Tres iam menses te videre cupio. / have been 
longing to see you for three months. 



NOTES ON THE TENSES, 65 

Note. The imperfect will of course be used for the English 
pluperfect : as, Illud iamdudum faciebam. / had been doing that 
for a long time. 

4. The imperfect represents an action in past time as incomplete, 
repeated, continuous, or habitual ' : as, 

Saxa in eos dovolvobant. They were rolling down stones on 
them. 

Hunc saepe audiebant. They often heard of him. 

Hie ara vetus stabat. Here an old altar used to stand. 

Consilium mutavit; videbat enim nihil confici posse. He changed 
his plan; for he saw that nothing could be done (imperfect of con- 
tinuous action.) 

Note. The impf. will often translate the English began, tried, 
attempted, etc.: as, Ad proelium sese exjDgdiafcant. They began 
to jirepjire themselves for battle. Urbem servabam. / was try- 
ing to save the city. 

5. The Latin perfect represents both the English present perfect, 
(perfect with have} and the English past indefinite (or aorist per- 
fect) fas, 

Scripsi. / wrote, or / have written. 

6. The Latin perfect indicative with postquam, quum pri- 
mum, ut prfmum, ut, simul ac (or, before a vowel, atque) is used 
for the English pluperfect with when, after (that), as soon as : as, - 

Postquam haec audivit, abiit. After he had heard this, he went 
away. 

7- The pluperfect represents an action as finished in past time : 
as, Scripseram, I had written. 

After qui or quum it is used idiomatically, in a frequentative 
sense (i.e. to express frequency or repetition), for the English 
perfect: as, 

Qui id dixerat, poenamdajaat. Whoever said that, was punished. 



36 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Quum rosam viderat, turn ver esse arbitrabatur. Whenever he 
saw the rose, then he judged that it was spring, 

8. The future represents an action as going on, and the future- 
perfect an action as complete, in future time : as, 

Scribam, I shall write; scripsero, I shall have written. 
After when, if, etc., English often uses the present tense refer-- 
ring to the future: as, / will send him, when he comes. In such a 
case Latin requires the future, or if the action of one verb is repre- 
sented as over before that of the other begins the future-perfect : 
as, Eum mittam quum redibit (or redierit). / will send him, when 
he comes. 

Note. In fact when there is a future in the main clause, there is 
usually a future or a future-perfect in the subordinate clause : as, 
Haec civitas, dum erit, eum laudabit. This country, while it ex- 
ists, will praise him. 

FORE UT FOR FUTURE INFINITIVE. 

9. Many verbs have no supine and, therefore, no future infini- 
tive (active or passive), which is formed from, the supine. Such 
verbs form their future infinitive by means of fore or futurum esse 
(to be about to be), and ut with the subjunctive : as, 

Dicit fore ut haec poscant. He says that they will demand these 
things (lit. , he says it to be about to be that they demand these 
things}. 

Dixit fore ut ea poscerentur. He said that these things would 
be demanded (imperfect, in accordance with the law of sequence J 

H,2). 

Note. This construction is often used (as more convenient) even' 
with the verbs that have a supine : as, Dixit fore ut rex mitteretur. 
He said that the king would be sent. 

FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 

10. It has been shown (p. 31, 3. Note i.) that the future subjunc- 
tive active (which is wanting) is supplied in Latin by the future 
participle and the verb sum. Thus : 

Scio quid acturus sis. / know what you will do. 



NOTES ON THE TENSES. 37 

Sciebam quid acturus esses. / knew what you would do (im- 
perfect, after a secondary tense). 

The future subjunctive passive, and the future subjunctive active 
of verbs that have no supine, are formed by means of the impersonal 
futurum sit (or esset) with an ut-clause. Thus : 

Future Subjunctive Active. 

Rogo num futurum sit ut puer discak / ask whether the boy 
will learn. 

Rogavi num futurum esset ut puer cGsceret. I Basked whether 
the boy would learn. 

Future Subjunctive Passive* 

Non dubito quin futurum sit ut puer doceatur. / do not doubt 
that the boy will be taught. 

Non dubitavi quid futurum esset ut puer doceretur. / did not 
doubt that the boy would be taught. 

EXERCISE XIX. 

i. You will do it when you please {volo). 2. When it is ordereu, 
it will be done. 3. After he had left the city, he fled to his father. 
4. Philosophy flourished in Greece. 5. Whenever he came to a 
town, he shut himself in his litter. 6. He used to say that the boy 
would learn. 7. I doubt whether the gate will be open. 8. I have 
long known that he was a fool. 9. He began to tell me where he 
was coming from. 10. I did not doubt that the king would be 
killed, ii. Let those come who are (will be) able. 12. I had long 
thought that it could never happen. 13. I never doubted that he 
would tremble. 14. It was uncertain whether the boy would learn. 

15. No one doubted that he would be put-at-the-head-of the army. 

16. They knew what we would ask. 17. Tell me who you are and 
what you wish. 18. You now see how hard it is, 



38 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



20. IDIOMATIC USES OF LATIN VERBS. 

1. Some verbs like dicor (7 am said), videor (/ seem), putor (/ 
am thought}, and feror (7 am said), prefer the personal to the im- 
personal use : as, 

Dicitur rex fuisse. It is said that he was king. 
Videtur esse sapiens. It seems that he is wise. 

2. Many verbs (especially verbs of motion) prefer an impersonal 
passive use te-fche personal use in the active : g, 

Ad aedem ventum est. They came to the temple (literally, // was 
come.) So too : Itur, people go (lit., it is gone). 

The agent is expressed by a (or ab) with the ablative : as, 
Ab omnibus ambulatum est. Everybody walked. 
Note. Such verbs are often best translated by substituting an 

appropriate noun as subject : as, Clamatum est, a shout was raised. 

3- A verb that governs a dative must, when used in the passive, 
be used impersonally, the nominative in English becoming the da- 
tive of the indirect object in Latin : as, 

Tibi credo. 1 believe you. But: Tibi creditor. You arc believed. 
Gloriae tuae invidetur. Your glory is envied. 

4. Some verbs are followed by an accusative of kindred form or 
meaning : as, 

Somnium somniare. To dream a dream. 

This is called the cognate accusative. Such verbs are generally 
used only in the passive. 

5. Latin often uses a neuter pronoun or adjective with a verb, 
where English has a noun : as, 

Id rogxx 7 make this request. 
Idem promitto. 7 make the same promise. 
Nihil respondet. He gives no answer. 
Hoc gloria.tur.__/7/? makes this boast. 



IDIOMATIC USES OF LATIN VERBS. 39 

Eadem peccat. He commits the same sins. 
Nihil succenset. He is not at all angry. 
Illud tibi assentior. In that I agree with you. 

Note. Such idioms as the above, are very characteristic of Latin 
style, which loves brevity, simplicity, ami point. 

6. Verbs meaning to ask, teach, or conceal, govern two accusa- 
tives, one of the person, another of the thing : as, 

Me primum sententiam rogavit. He asked me my opinion first. 
Quis te musicam docuit ? Who taught you music ? 
Nihil nos celat. He conceals nothing from. us. 

In the passive, the accusative of the person becomes the subject, 
and the accusative of the thing is retained : as, 

Filius musicam a patre doctus est' The son was taught music 
by his father. 

7- Many intransitive verbs become transitive in Latin when 
compounded with a preposition : as, 

. Convenire aliquem. Have an interview with a person. 

So too : Circumvenire (cheat), aggredi (attack), oppugnare (at- 
tack a place), obsidere (besiege), mire consilium (form a plan), 
coire societatexn (form a partnership), obire mortem (die). 

Note. Peto, I ask, and postulo, I demand, take the accusative of 
the thing and the ablative of the person wi-th a (or ab), from : 
as, Pacem ab Romanis petiverunt, they asked the Romans for peace 
(=they asked peace from the Romans) librton ab amico postula- 
vit, he .demanded a book from his friend. Quaero, to ask, seek, 
takes the accusative of the thing and the ablative of the person 
with a (or ab), e (or ex), or de : as, Causara e viro quaesivit, he 
asked a reason from the man (or, he asked the man for a reason). 

8. Many intransitive verbs (especially those expressing motion) 
when compounded with the preposition ad (to), circum (around), 
per (through), praeter (past), trans (across), or super (above), 
take an accusative after them governed by the^pjrejgo.si^ofl ; M agj 



40 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Cato rostra advolat. Cato flies to the hustings. 

Equites Roman! senatum circumstant. Roman knights surround 
the senate. 

Murmur contionem pervasit. A murmur went through the 
assembly. 

Here the accusative depends on the preposition. The sentences 
might have been expressed thus : Ad rostra Cato volat ; equites 
Roman! circum senatum stant ; murmur per contionem vasit . 

So too, the transitive verbs, transduco (or tradnco), I lead across, 
and transporto, / bear across, may take two accusatives in the 
active, one depending on the verb and the other on the preposi- 
tion : as, 

Hannibal copias Iberum traduxit. Hannibal led the forces across 
the Ebro. 

Caesar milites navibus flumen transportat. Caesar conveys his 
soldiers across the river in ships. 

9. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, naming, regarding and 
showing, take two accusatives in the active : as, 

Populus Romanus Ciceronem consulem creavit. The Roman 
people elected Cicero consul. 

Here Ciceronem is the direct object, and consulem is a part of the 
predicate and is called the predicate accusative. 

In the" passive, these verbs take two nominatives ; the direct object 
of the active becomes the subject nominative, and the predicate 
accusative of the active becomes the predicate nominative of the 
passive : as, 

Cicero consul a populo Romano creatus est. Cicero was elected 
consul by the Roman people. 

Such verbs are called factitives. 

EXERCISE XX. 

i. Tell them not to ask you the same question again. 2. I; id 
you think that I would ask peace from you ? 3. Were you afraid 



SUPINE, GERUND, GERUNDIVE. 41 

that he had formed the same plan as before ? 4. Who doubte 
(quifi) he would be made consul? 5. He ought not to have con 
these plans from you. 6. Do not suppose that he can lea 
army across the river. 7. I believe that he will ask nothing from 
you. 8. He tried to persuade (impf.) us that only fools were fortu- 
nate. 9. He thought that his fault had been pardoned. 10. He 
wishes to be thought wise. 1 1. I warn yo i that they can not be 
trusted. 12. It is said that the gallant Crassus has been killed. 
13. He was so silent that he seemed to be wise. 14. It was said 
that he was the father of his country. 15. Did you bring him here 
to teach us this? 16. It seemed that all the tribes had conspired 
against them. 17. You have been long envied. 18. You will be 
answered that this can not be done. 19. Did they not make the 
same answer as before ? 20 I was afraid that he would wish to 
have an interview with me. 




21. SUPINE, GERUND, GERUNDIVE. 

1. Latin verbs have two supines, one in -turn and one in -tu : as, 
Amatum, to love; amatu, to be loved. 

Note. These forms are really the accusative and ablative respec- 
tively of a verbal noun in -tus (Gen., -tus). 

2. The supine in -turn denotes purpose, and is used only after 
verbs of motion : as, 

Legates mittunt pacern petitum. They send ambassadors to sue 
for peace. 

Note. The supine in -turn governs the same case as the verb 
from which it is formed. 

3. The supine in -turn is used with iri (pres. inf. pass, of ire, 
to go), to form the future infinitive passive : as, 

Dicit urbem jcaptum iri. He says that the city will ue taken, or, 




42 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

lly, He says that people are gone (i.e., it is gone j p. 38, 2) to 
city. TJrbem is the ace. after the supine captum. 

w . The supine in -tu is used after adjectives expressing difficulty, 
ease, credibility, pleasure, worth or the reverse, and after a 
few substantives, like fas (right\ nefas (wrong), scelus (wicked- 
ness): as, 

Difficile est dictu. // is difficult to be said, or /'/ is difficult to say 
(literally, in the saying). 
Scelus est relatu. Horrible to relate ! 

GERUND. 

5. The gerund is a neuter verbal noun ,n -dum, corresponding 
to the English participial noun in -ing. It is inflected as follows : 

FIRST CONJUGATION. SECOND CONJUGATION. 

GEN. amandi, of loving. monendi, of advising. 

DAT. amaiido, to or for loving. monendo, to or for advising. 

ACC. amandum, loving. monendurn, advising. 

ABL. amando, with, by, from or monendo, with, by, from or 
in loving. in advising. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

GEN. regendi, of ruling. audiendi, of hearing. 

DAT. regendo, to or for ruling. audiendo, to or for hearing. 

ACC. regondum, ruling. audiendum, hearing. 

ABL, regendo, with, by, from or audiendo, with, by, from or 
in ruling. in hearing. 

6. The gerund has partly the nature of a noun and partly that of 
a verb. As a noun, it may be governed by another noun, or by an 
adjective, or by a preposition. It resembles a verb in governing a 
case and in being limited by an adverb : as, 

lus vocandi senatum. The right of summoning the senate. 
(Here the gerund is governed in the genitive by ius, and governs 
senatum in the accusative, because vocare governs that case.) 

Docendo discimus. We learn by teaching. Natus ad regendum. 
Born for ruling. 



SUPINE, GERUND, GERUNDIVE. 43 

Parcendo inimlcis gloriam paravit. He won distinction by spar- , 
ing his enemies, 

Note I. The gerund has often the force of a passive : as, 
Res difficilis ad tolerandum. A matter hard to be borne. Dedit 
eos ad trucidandum. He gives them up to be butchered, 

Note 2. The norhinative and (except after a preposition) the 
accusative of the gerund is supplied by the infinitive : as, 
Ambulare iuoundum est, walking is delightful / odit servire, 
he hates being a slave. 

GERUNDIVE. 

7- Instead of the gerund with an accusative, Latin idiom uses a 
peculiar construction of its own. Thus : Born for ruling men is 
not often expressed by Natus ad viros reg-endum, but by Natus 
ad viros regendos, where reg-endos agrees with viros in gender, 
number, and case, and is called the gerundive. So too : In episto- 
lis scribendis (in writing letters) is used for In scribendo epistolas 
and Consilium urbis capiendae (the plan for taking the city) for 
Consilium capiendi urbem. 

Note. The gerundive seems to have a passive meaning. Thus : 
In epistolis scribendis = In letters to be written = in writing letters. 
Consilium urbis capiendae = The plan of the city to be taken = of 
taking the city. 

8. The rule for turning the gerund into the gerundive is easily 
deduced from the above examples. The direct object of the gerund 
is attracted into the case of the gerund, and the gerund (then called 
the gerundive) made to agree with the object in gender, number and 
case. 

9. The genitive of the gerund, and of the gerundive, is often used, 
to express purpose, with causa, on account of, for the sake of, 
which is written after its case : as, 

Hue querendi causa venerunt. They have come here for the 
purpose of complaining. 

Vestis est frigoris depellendi causa. Dress is intended for keep- 
ing off cold (lit., is for the sake of, etc.). 



44 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Note. It has been seen that the English infinitive of purpose 
may be turned into Latin in several ways. Thus : 
They send ambassadors to sue for peace. 

(a) Legates mittunt ut pacem petant (Final clause; p. 12, I. 

Note 2). 

() Legates mittunt pacem petltum (Supine ;'p. 41, 2). 
(r) Legates mittunt ad pacem petendam (Gerundive). 
(d) Leg-atos mittunt pacis petendae causa. * ;. /_ 

EXERCISE XXI. 

I. He sent his boys to hear the orator Cicero. 2. We are now 
ready for reading a book. 3. They have formed the plan of cross- 
ing the river to attack the enemy. 4. There is no doubt that he 
is the most suitable man for carrying on the war. 5. Have they 
come here for the sake of refitting their ship? 6. Tell me when 
they will have an opportunity of finishing the work. 7. He used to 
say that we learned by seeing and hearing. 8. What prevented 
him from becoming skilful in conducting the government? 9. He 
has gone to ask them wher < : .:il. 10. He used to say that 

a short life was long enough lor living well. I r. I went to walk; 
he, to sleep. 12. I tuld him how much gold was given for restoring 
the temple. 13. They said that they would not go there to be 
slaves. 14. He gained great glory by burning their villages. 15. 
Horrible to say, they butchered both women and children. 16. I 
believe that they came to the camp to complain of their wrongs. 1 7. 
He was the only one who ever saved the country by delaying. 18. 
He used to say that ruling a state was easier than resisting pleasure. 
19. They thought that seeing was not always believing. 20. Spring 
is the time for sowing seed. 21. Can you tell whence this comes ? 



THE GERt Y ND AND GERUNDIVE. 



22. THE GERUND AND 

1. The gerund and not the gerundive -is to be used : 

( a ) In the case of verbs that do not govern an accusative : as, 
Parcendo inimlcis. By sparing enemies (not parcendis inimicis). 

(b) Where euphony would be violated : as,- 

Amicos videndi causa. For the sake of seeing friends (not 
amicorum videndorum causa). 

(c) Where ambiguity results : as, 

Aliquid docendi causa.' For the sake of teaching something (not 
alicuius, which would mean some one). 

PASSIVE PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 

2. The gerundive is often used to express obligation: as, 
Hostis timendus. An enemy that ought to be (or must be) feared. 

From this use of the gerundive, a whole conjugation called the 
Passive Periphrastic Conjugation-is formed from the gerundive 
;and the verb sum, / am. Thus : 

/ amandus sum. / am to be loved. 
Present, | ama ndus es, thou art to be loved, etc. 

f amandus eram, / was to be loved. 
Imperfect, | amandus eraS) thou wast to be loved, etc. 

(amandus ero, / shall have to be loved. 
amandus eris, thou wilt have to be loved, etc. 
And so on. 

3. The agent is expressed in the passive periphrastic conjugation 
by the dative : as, 

Parentes nobis amandi sunt. Our parents should be loved by us. 

4. The passive periphrastic conjugation is generally used to trans- 
late the English should^ ought, must (expressing obligation) ; as, 

Ex civitate pellendi sunt. They must be banished. 



46 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

When the verb in English is active, the object becomes the sub- 
ject in Latin, and the subject becomes the dative of the agent : as, 

Aqua mihi bibenda est. 1 must drink water (water must be 
drunk by me). 

5. Intransitive verbs and verbs that govern the genitive, the 
dative, or the ablative, must be used impersonally in the passive 
periphrastic conjugation : as, 

Nobis eundum 1 est. We must go ( = it must be gone by us). 

Omnibus moriendum est. All must die. 

Civibus a te consulendum est. You should consult the interests 
of the citizens. 

Inimicis a nobis parcendum est. We must spare our enemies. 

Utendum est iudicio a te. You must use your judgment. 

Dixit tibi credendum esse. He said that you should be believed 
(lit., that it must be believed to you). 

Note. When a verb does not govern the accusative, the agent 
(to avoid ambiguity) is expressed in the passive periphrastic con- 
jugation by a (or ab) with the ablative. This appears from the 
above examples. 

6. With do (give), trado (hand over), euro (take care of), loco 
(let out a contract), conduce (take a contract), the gerundive is 
used for the English infinitive : as, 

Terrain habitandam dat. He gives them the land to dwell in*. 
Pontem faciendum curat. He has (or gets) a bridge built. 

EXERCISE XXII. 

Translate "'should" "ought" and '''must" by the Gerundive. 

I. You ought to have advanced your friends to offices. 2. He 
did not know what ought to be done. 3. Do you think that he 
should sell his house? 4. We must spare those who resist us. 5. 
He has come in order to help his friends. 6. He has promised to 



1 This idiom is also explained as the nominative of the gerund. Thus : Eundum 
nobis est = Going istow=we must go. 



THE PARTICIPLE. 47 

hand over this bridge to us to guard. 7. You should consult the 
interests of the state. 8. The citizen must obey the magistrate. 
9. He said that it was both hard to do and hard to tell. 10. The 
army marched to the river for the purpose of fighting the Gauls. 
ii. Am I to answer them or not? 12. He said that he must find 
the book that he had lost. 13. Tell us when you formed the plan 
of selling the house. 14. They Say that the baggage ought to be 
left in the camp. 15. They have come here for the sake of learn- 
ing something about the city, 16. He won glory by aiding the 
poor and sparing the vanquished. 17. He ought to have been loved 
on account of his goodness. 18. We must go to the harbor to see 
the ships. 19. Don't you think we ought to obey the law? 20. He 
used to say that the art of conducting the government was a diffi- 
cult (one). 



THE PARTICIPLE. 

1. The participle has partly the nature of a verb and partly that 
of an adjective. Hence the name (pars and capio). Like a verb, 
it has voice, tense, and number, and governs the same case as the 
verb from which it is formed ; like an adjective it has declension 
and gender, and agrees with nouns. 

2. Apart from the gerundive (explained p. 43), transitive verbs 
have in Latin three participles : 

(a) A present participle active : as, amans, loving. 
(<) A future participle active! as, amaturus, about to love, 
(c) A perfect participle passive: as, amatus, loved, having been 
loved. 

3. The Latin participle is used to express an English clause in- 
troduced by who, when, while, as, if, though, because: as, 

Non parcimus resistentibus. We do not spare those who resist us. 
Epistola ad me scribentem venit. The letter came to me when 
(while, as) I was writing. 



48 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Eis vel morientibus non ig-noscet- He will not forgive them, 
even though (if) they are dying. 

Caesar, haec veritus, suos eduxit. Caesar, be cause he was afraid 
of this, led out his men. 

Note. The above principle, which is one of the most important 
in Latin syntax, may be stated as follows : The Latin participle, 
apart from its adjectival force, is used to express the adverbial 
relations of time, condition, cause, concession, or attendant circum- 
stance. 

4. Of two co-ordinate verbs in English connected by and, one is 
usually to be turned by the participle : as, 

Eum arreptum Romam trahgjjajnt. They seized him and began 
to drag him to Rome. 

Ingressus consedit. He entered and sat down. 

Note. This is also a most important principle and, taken in con- 
nection with the principle of 3, largely accounts for the compactness 
of the Latin sentence. 

5- The present participle is strictly used to denote time contem- 
poraneous with that of the main verb : as, 

Hoc dixit moriens. This he said while dying. 

It is often, however, especially in the oblique cases used in a 
more general sense : as, 

Pugnantium clamor. The shouting of combatants. 

6. The present participle is often used in Latin to express an 
English abstract noun : as, 

Mini interrog-anti respondit. He replied to my question. 

Lug-entium lacrimae. Tears of mourning (i. e., of persons 
mourning?) 

Gratulantium clamores. Shouts of congraticlation. 

Note. This is quite in accordance with the genius of Latin 
which avoids personification and the use of abstract terms. 

7- The case absolute in Latin is the ablative not, as in English, 
the nominative. It is often found with the participle : asj ., 



THE PARTICIPLE. 49 

Haec facta sunt, Tullio regnante. This -was done in the reign 
*f Tullius (i.e., Tullius reigning). 

8- Of all Latin verbs, deponents alone have a perfect participle 
active. '1 bus : locutus is having spoken, and secutus, having 
followed; but victus is not having conquered, but having been con- 
quered; auditus is not having heard, but having been heard : as, 

Hac re audita, abiit. This fact having been heard, he departed. 
The use of the perfect participle passive as a perfect participle 
active is a common elementary mistake. 

SUBSTITUTE FOR PERFECT PARTICIPLE ACTIVE. 

9. How then shall we translate Havi?ig taken the city* By 
the perfect participle passive in the ablative absolute 1 : as, 

Urbe capta, rediit. Having taken the city, he returned. 

Note. The absence of a perfect participle active accounts for the 
frequent use in Latin of the ablative absolute. 

10- The present participle active, when used as it is so com- 
monly in English for the past participle, must be translated by 
the perf. part, of a deponent or by one of the substitutes for the 
perf. part. act. Thus : 

Leaving home, he came to Athens. Domo profectus, Athenas 
venit. 

Having heard this, he departed. Quo audito, abiit. 
Proflciscens would mean while leaving; audiens, while hear- 
ing. In fact it is a good rule never to use a present participle 
in the nominative in Latin, unless you can put while before the 
participle in English. 

11. A demonstrative pronoun can not be joined, as in English, 
to the participle. Thus: Those doing this, will be punished, is 
Qul hoc facient, poenas dabunt (not ii facientes). See paragraph 
5 above. 



1 Other substitutes will be mentioned further on. Thus : Quum urbem 
Cepissefe, and postquam urbem cepit, are both common forms for having 
taken the city. 

5 



f.O LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

12. The agent with the perf. part. pass, is frequently expressed 
by the dative instead of by a (or ab) with an ablative : as, 

Omnia haec xnihi perspecta sunt. All these points have been 

studied by me. 

13. Instead of the perfect indicative active, the perf. part. pass, 
with habeo I have, is used (chiefly with verbs meaning" to know ot 
find ouf) to denote a continuous effect: as, 

Fidem quam habent diu notam. Faith which they have long 
known. 

14. The perfect participle passive (in agreement with a noun) is 
often used in Latin for an English abstract or verbal noun : as, 

Nuntiata clades eos pennovit. The announcement of the disaster 
moved tJiem. 

So too : Ab urbe condita. From the foundation of the city. 
Post regem interfectum. After the murder of the king. 

EXERCISE XXIII. 

The asterisk * shows where a participle should be used. 

I. Seize * the man and slay him. 2. I spoke these words to 
those * standing by. 3. When * departing, he handed over the 
army to me. 4. Mounting * his horse, he rode past the whole line. 

5. It is said that he was killed by a pirate while * crossing to Africa. 

6. Forming * this design, he left the camp. 7. This city, though * 
it desired to do so, could not detain him. 8. I believe that he will 
gi.ve up * his province and return immediately. 9. Having heard 
their words, he ordered them to be arrested * and thrown into 
prison. 10. We are all desirous of hearing many things, n. Let 
us ask if he will attack them while * crossing the river. 1 2. Receiv- 
ing * the letters, he dismissed the messenger. 13. He defeated * 
and pursued them. 14. I think that I hear shouts of joy *. 15. 
Seizing * a spear, he prepared to defend himself. 16. To my com- 
plaint * that he had broken his word, he made no answer. 17. The 
weather was such that no ship could set out. 18. We will attack 
them as * they are starting from the camp. 19. He determined to 



THE PARTICIPLE. 51 

return at once, because * he had delayed there so long. 20. Do 
you think (that) they have been ordered to go? 21. I doubted 
whether the gate of the city was open (use pateo). 22. We do 
not believe a liar, even if he * speaks the truth. 23. After the ex- 
pulsion * of the son, the father came to Italy. 24. The reading * 
of the letter caused loud clamor. 



^24. PARTICIPLE. -(Continued). 
The Ablative Absolute. 

1. The case absolute in Latin as has been said is the ablative ; 
and the ablative absolute with a participle is one of the commonest 
of Latin idioms. 

The ablative absolute is used as we have seen as a substitute for 
the perfect participle active (which is wanting) and also for trans- 
lating the English present participle active when used as it fre- 
quently is for the perfect participle active. Thus : 

Having heard this, he suddenly returned to the camp. Hoc 
audlto, ad castra subito rediit (abl. abs. used for perf. part. act. of 
audio). 

Taking the citadel, Caesar entered the city. Caesar, arce capta, 
urbem intravit (abl. abs. for the English present part. act. used as 
a perf. part. act.). 

2. The ablative absolute is also constantly used to express an 
English main clause or a clause (or phrase) of time, cause, condi- 
tion, concession, or attendant circumstance: as, 

They charged and defeated them t Impetu facto, eos vicerunt 
(abl. abs. for main clause). 

Caesar, when he had learned this, returned to the senate-house. 
Caesar, hoc cognito, ad curlam rediit (time). 

Though everything is lost, courage remains. Perdltis omnibus 
rebus, virtus manet (concession). 



52 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

As the general had been killed, they fled. Imperatore interfecto, 
diffugerunt (cause). 

Note. The ablative absolute is always placed at or near the be- 
ginning of the sentence. It should not include more than a noun 
and participle, or a noun, participle and object : as, Me haec verba 
dicente, abiit. As (while) I was saying these words, he went away. 

3. The ablative absolute must introduce a new subject. Thus : 
The enemy, as they were retreating, laid waste the land. Hostes, 

se recipientes, agros vastabant (not hostibus se recipientibus). 
Manlius, having killed a Gaul, spoiled him. Manlius Gallum 

caesum spoliavit (not caeso Gallo, eum spoliavit). 

The abl. abs. would here be wrong because the nouns (hostes and 

Gallum), which would naturally be in the abl. abs., are requirec 

the sentence, one in the nom. and the other in the ace. 

4 As the verb sum has no present participle, a noun in the 

ablative absolute is often joined predicatively to an adjective , 

other noun : as, 

Vivis fratribus. In his brother* life-time (i.e., his brothers being 

alive). 

Salvis legibus. Without violation of the laws (i.e., the laws 
Te duce. Under vour command (you being leader] 
Te invito. Against your will (you being unwilling). 
Without success (the thing being undone). 
Without waiting for a guide. 



5. The following uses of the ablative absolute should be noticed: 

Bruto consule. In the consulship of Brutus. 

Suadente Gaio. By the advice of Gaius. 

Adiuvantibus Gallis. With the assistance of the Gauls. 

Te non adiuvante. Without your assistance. 

Caesare necato. After the killing of Caesar. 

Te repugnante. In spite of your opposition. 

,6 It will be seen, then, that the Latin ablative absolute repre- 
fents in English (a) a principal verb, (*) a perfect participle a 



THE PARTICIPLE. 53 

(<r) a present participle active when used for the perfect participle 
active, (d} a clause beginning with when, while, though, if, etc., 
(*) adverbial phrases of manner or attendant circumstance. 

Care should be taken in translating Latin, to turn the ablative 
absolute idiomatically (i.e., into the proper English equivalent)', 
this will soon make the student familiar with its main uses. 

EXERCISE XXIV. 

7'he asterisk * shows where the ablative absolute should e used. 

I. After* wasting the land, they returned. 2. On * the receipt of 
the letter, he left the city. 3. The money was paid in * my pres- 
ence. 4. They came to Italy, I believe, during * the reign of 
Romulus. 5. Will he go away without * consulting any one? 6. 
The enemy were * disturbed by our arrival and we immediately 
attacked the camp. 7. On * the defeat of their army, the city sur- 
rendered. 8. When * he had spoken thus, the ambassadors with- 
drew. 9. He promised not to fight against * my will. 10. When* 
the war is ended, we shall restore our prisoners, n. He \vas un- 
willing, in the absence of* the first legion, to join battle 12. This 
victory he gained with * very few wounded. 13. He called * his 
friends together and killed himself. 14. A gate * was opened and 
they sallied forth. 15. He called the merchants together and 
consulted them. 16. They set out when * the winter was not yet 
ended. 17. On * the approach of summer they begin to sail the 
sea. 1 8. He ought to have told us when he would return. 19. I 
should have restored you the money. 20. I am afraid that many 
have been persuaded. 



Active Periphrastic Conjugation. 

1. The future participle active is used to express futurity or 
intention : as, 

Plura locuturos dimisit. When they were about to say more, he 
dismissed them. 

Venio agros visurus / come to see the fields. 



54 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

2. From the fut. part. act. and the verb sum, is formed a whole 
conjugation called the active periphrastic conjugation. 

Amaturus sum. / am about to love (or I intend to love). 

Amaturus eram (fui). / was about to love ( or I intended to love). 
And so on. 

Note This conjugation- as has been seen-supplies the place 
of the future subjunctive active, which is wanting : as, Bogo quid 
facturus sis. 7 ask what you will do. (Primary sequence). 

Bogavi quid facturus esses. 7 asked what you would do. 
(Secondary sequence ; "~rrpa}. 

EXERCISE XXV. 

f i They will tell you when they intend to come. 2. They asked 
hhrTwhy he was going to betray the country. 3 - He said that n 
was easy to do. [>~ Ask them what they are going to do a 
5 I intended to ask him what kind of people they were. 6. I doub 
whether he would ever drink it.Q^hall we ask them what o'clock 
it is? 8 He said he would come with me to find the rest. 9- 1 
not forget why you have come here. (ic^He used to say that 1 
ox had been given us for the sake of ploughing the fields. 
lieve that they took the city and set it on fire (use part.}. 
Shall we ask him whether he is ready or not? (_14-He used to say 
that judges should favor nobody. 14- When you have done you 
work (abl. abs.\ you must help me. 1 5. Do not forget that I warned 
you not to come. Cl6_Hesaid that, in his judgment, it was not suit- 
able weather for sailing. 17. The river was so deep that no , 
could cross 18. To my question whether his father had retu 
he answered No. l*T You should not have delayed there so long 
against the will of your father. 20. After the capture of the 
he put all the magistrates to the sword. 



THE INFINITIVE. 55 

26. THE INFINITIVE. 

1. The infinitive is properly a neuter noun and is often therefore 
used as the subject or object of a verb : as, 

Humanum est errare. To err is human. 

Multis displicet totum hoc philosophari. AH this philosophis- 
ing displeases many. 

Meum est parere. // is mine to obey. 

Invidere morbum appellat. He calls envying a disease. 

2. The subject of the infinitive, if indefinite, is omitted : as, 
Incolumem redire licet. One may return unhurt. 

3 Many verbs take an infinitive after them to complete their 
meaning : as, 

Vincere scis; victoria uti nescis. You know how to win a 
victory ; you do not know how to use one. 

Such verbs are called modal verbs- For a list of modal verbs, sefe 
p. 1 8, 3. 

4. In the historians, the present (or, rather, imperfect) infinitive 
is often used instead of the imperfect indicative, especially when 
a series of actions is described; as, 

Omnes clamare. All kept crying out. 

Caesar quotidie eos frumentum flagitare. Caesar kept importun- 
ing them daily for corn. 

Pars cedere, alii insequi ; neque signa, neque ordines observare ; 
nihil consilio agi ; fors omnia regere. Some retired, others ad- 
vanced; they observed neither standards nor ranks ; nothing 
was done of design ; chance guided everything. 

This is called the historic infinitive. 

5. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative : as, 

Te hoc facere mirum est. That you should do this, is strange. 

Note But the subject of an infinitive depending on dicor 
(/ am said\ videor (/ seem\ and the like (see p. 38, i), is in the 
nominative : as, Homerus dieitur ca-ecus fuisse. // is said that 
Homer was blind. 



56 LATIN PKOSE COMPOSITION. 

6. After verbs of saying and thinking, the accusative with in- 
finitive is used, as explained in 2. 

TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. 

The tense of the infinitive after verbs of saying and thinking must 
be carefully noticed. Thus : 

The pres. inf. represents the pres. ind. of direct narration (p. 4, 
note 3). 

The//. inf. represents the/w/. ind. 

The perf. inf. represents both the imperf. ind., the perf. (both 
present and indefinite ; 1 1, i), and the pluperfect. Thus: 

are afraid. 

used to sleep every day. 

He says that they 

arrived yesterday, 
had fled before he came. 

timere (for timent : actual words used). 

quotidie dormiisse (for dormiebant). 

morituros esse (or fore) (for morientur, they wit* 

die). 
Dicit eos < advenisse (for advenerunt, they have come). 

\ heri advenisse (for heri advenerunt, they came yes- 
terday). 

fugisse priusquam venerit (for fugerant, they had 
fled}. 

7- The tense of the infinitive after a verb of saying or thinking 
in the past tense, causes more difficulty (see 3) ; but the rule is the 
same as the above : 

The tense of the infinitive is present, past, or future, according as 
the tense used in the actual words is present, past, or future. Thus : 

He said that snow was white. Dixit nivem esse albam (actual 
words : nix alba est.) 

He said that he was a young man once. Dixit se olim adoles- 
centem fuisse (actual words : olim adolescens eram, / was a young 
man once). 



THE INFINITIVE. 



57 



He said that they would not forgive. Dixit eos non ignoturos 
(actual words : non ignoscent, they will not forgive. 

They said that he bequeathed the kingdom to his son. Dixerunt 
eurn nlio regnum legavisse (actual words : filio regnum legavit.) 

He knew that the city had been fortified. Scivit urbem munitam 
esse (actual words : urbs munita est, the city has been fortified^) 

He said that they had fled before the Romans arrived. Dixit eos 
fugisse priusquam Romani advenissent (actual words : fugerant 
priusquam Romani advenerunt, they had fled before the Romans 
arrived?) 

8. An infinitive to correspond to the future-perfect active is 
formed from futurum esse (or fore) and ut with the perfect sub- 
junctive : as, 

Dicit fore ut ceciderit. He says that he shall have fallen (actual 
word: cecldero). 

Dixit fore ut cecidisset. He said that he should have fallen 
(n,2.) 

9. An infinitive corresponding to the pluperfect indicative pas- 
sive is formed from the perfect participle passive and fuisse: as, 
He says that the city had been attacked before the king arrived. Dicit 
urbem oppugnatam fuisse priusquam rex advenerit (actual words : 
urbs oppugnata erat, the city had been attacked}. 

10. An infinitive corresponding to the future-perfect of de. 
ponent or passive verbs is formed from the perfect participle and 
fore: as, 

He said that the war would soon be finished. Dixit debellatum 
mox fore (actual words : debellatum mox erit, the war will 
soon be finished. ) 

11. When a verb has no supine,, fore (or futurum esse) ut with 
the subjunctive is used as the infinitive for the future, active or 
passive (see p. 36, 9) : as, 

IJiopeJkaf ii iviU 4rr//rf '" '*- Scero_fle ut eontingat id nobis. 
/ hoped that it would happen to us. Speravi fore ut contingeret 
id nobis. 

He says that this will be demanded, Dicit fore ut hoc poscatur. 



58 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

He said that that would be demanded. Dixit fore ut illud pos- 
ceretur. 

12. Memini, I remember, is used with the present infinitive (and 
not the perfect) of a past event within the knowledge of the per- 
son referred to : as, 

Memini te hoc dicere. / remember that you said this (direct : 
dicebas). 

Meministis Tiberim corporibus compleri. You remember thai 
Tiber was filled with bodies. 

13. For verbs followed by an infinitive in English and an ut- 
clause in Latin, see 9. 

14. For the infinite of purpose, see p. 43, 9, note. 

15. The accusative with infinitive is used to express indignation 
or surprise. It is called the infinitive of exclamation. The inter- 
rogative -ne is frequently added to the first word, as if the sentence 
were interrogative in form : as, 

Mene abiisse.liullo salutato. To think that 1 should have gone 
away, without saying farewell to anyone! 

Note. The accusative alone is often used in the same way. It 
is called the accusative of exclamation : as, Me miserum. Wretch 
that I am! O! contumeliosum honorem. What an insulting 
honor! 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

i. He believes that the city will have been captured. 2. He said 
that in this way I would have gained the crown. 3. To think that 
I should have been so unlucky ! 4. He determined to compel us 
to fight. 5. He used to say that it was base to deceive. 6. He 
thought that it was sweet to die for one's country. 7. When he had 
encouraged the soldiers (p. 47, 3), he ordered them to advance. 8. To 
live honorably is to live happily. 9. Ought I not to send a messen- 
ger to warn the consul ? 10. To think that I should be here and 
you in Italy ! n. I was not so foolish as to tell him everything 
(p. 14, 4). 12. I believe that he will gladly learn it. 13. I remem- 
ber hearing that he died in his own house. 14 I hoped that 
he would recover (convalesce). 15. He used to say that it was 



THE GENITIVE. 59 

better to give than to receive. 16. It is said that he was the wisest 
of all who lived at that time. 17. He had long been anxious to 
know the truth. 18. I should like to know your reason for doing 
this. 19. He asked me to get the field ploughed (p. 46, 6). 20. He 
thought (that) the city had been taken before that time. 

Note. That, after an English verb of saying or thinking, is 
sometimes omitted. 



27. THE GENITIVE. 



1. One noun in the genitive is added to another to express pos- 
session or cause : as, 

Romanorum naves. The ships of the Romans. 
Iniuriae Gallorum. The wrongs done by the Gauls. 

Note i. This genitive usually stands before the noun it governs 
and, if there is an adjective with the noun, the genitive stands be- 
tween the two, in order to give compactness to the phrase : as, 
Pulchra regis fllia. The beautiful daughter of the king. 

Note 2. The genitive of possession may often be used for an 
English adjective : as, Corporis robur, bodily strength; regis exer- 
citus, the royal army. 

Note 3. In phrases like ad Vestae (to the temple of Vesta); 
ad Apollmis (to the temple of Apollo), the possessive genitive is used 
with the governing noun templum or aedem understood. 

2. The possessive genitive is used with sum, / am, in the sense of 
to belong to: as, 

Hie versus Plauti non est. This verse is not Plautufs. 
Summae est dementiae. It is. the-keigkt-^/-~mudness. 

This genitive may often be translated by a noun like part, mark, 
characteristic \ duty, etc. : as, 

Stulti est in errore perseverare. // is the mark of a fool to 
persist in error. 

Imperare Caesaris est. // t$ Caesar's fastness to command. 



60 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Note. The possessive pronoun is used, however, instead of the 
genitive of the personal : as, Tuum est parere. // is yoifr business 
to obey (not tui est). 

PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 

3. The genitive, as in English, denotes the whole of which a part 
is taken : as, 

Magna exercitus pars. A great part of the army. 

Gallorum fortissimi sunt Belgae. The Belgae are the bravest of 
the Gauls. 

This is called the partitive genitive. 

The governing word usually expresses number or amount : as, 

Multi vestrum. Many of you. Quid novi? What news? (lit., 
what of new?) 

This genitive is common after satis (enough), nimis (too much), 
parum (too little), nlhil (none), aliquid (some), tantum (so much), 
quantum (how much} : as, 

Satis eloquentiae, sapientiae parum. Enough eloquence, too 
little wisdom. 

It is also found after adverbs of place : as, 

Ubi gentium? Where in the world? 

Eo stultitiae venit. He has reached such a pitch of folly (lit., 
come thither of folly). 

Note. Nostrum and vestrum (not nostri and vestri) are used 
with partitives for of us and of you: as, Uterque nostrum. Each 
of Us two. But Memor nostri fuit, he was mindful of us. 

4. The partitive -genitive must ncrtbe used in the following cases: 

(a) To express the English of, where there is no partition implied: 
as, Nos omnes, all of us ; tota Asia, the whole of Asia; nos trecenti 
vemmus, three hundred of us have come. 

(V) With an adjective of the 3rd decl. : as, Nihil turpe, nothing 
base (not turpis). 



THE GENITIVE. 61 

(<:) After a preposition : as, Ad multam noctem, to a late hour of 
the night ('not ad multum). 

(d} If the governing word is in any case but the nominative or 
accusative: as, Tanta pecunia, at so much money (not tanto 
pecuniae.) 

(e) After words like top, bottom, middle, etc., which are expressed 
by adjectives in agreement : as, B summo monte, from the top of 
the hill; medio in foro, in the middle of the forum : ad imam 
quercum, to the foot of the oak; reliquae copiae, the rest of the 
forces; primum ver, the beginning of spring; in extreme Mbro, 
at the end of the book. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 

was the only one who escaped of all the Greeks. 2. They 
said that you could see stars from_the bottom of a well. 3 v Let us ask 
him whether he got this much (tantum) profit out of it. 4. I know 
which of you two is favored. 5.,; Don't you see how much glory you 
have lost ? 6. He used to say that no one ever thought that he had 
too much money. (_jL~ He used to say that everybody thought he 
had wisdom enough. 8. Don't you think that it is the part of a 
judge to obey the laws ? ; c^ Ask him if this house belonged to his 
excellent father. 10. They said that all of the cities belonged to 
their empire. ,- ii> Is it not the duty of children to obey their 
parents? 12. To love riches is the mark of a small mind. 13. 
They have gone away to receive the beautiful gifts of the queen. 

14. I believe that there is much good and nothing mean in the man. 

15. You do not know how much pleasure you will receive. 16. I 
believe that his friends of whom he has tery many saved him. 
17. They were so grateful that they built an altar in the middle of 
the city. 18. Let us come to the living, two of whom are left. 19. 
Tell me which of you two came first. 20. May we never reach such 
a pitch of misery \ 



62 LATltf PROSE COMPOSITION. 

28. GENITIVE OP QUALITY. 

1. A noun in the genitive is added to another to express a 
quality: as, Vir summi ingenii, a man of Ike highest ability. 

The ablative is used to express a quality in much the same 
way, except perhaps that the genitive denotes rather permanent 
qualities, the ablative external and accidental ones : as, Vir longis 
cruribus, a man with long legs (or a long-legged man). 

Note. Quantity and amount are expressed by this genitive: as, 
Agger viginti pedum, a mound of twenty feet high; puer decem 
annorum, a boy of ten years. 

2. Neither the genitive nor the ablative of quality can be used 
without an adjective. Thus : A man of courage, vir fortis (or 
vir summae fortitudinis ; not vir fortitudinis.) 

Note. When the corresponding adjective is wanting, praeditus 
(pndowed with) is used with the simple ablative : as, Vir virtute 
praeditus. A man of valor. 

SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. 

3. A genitive is used, with nouns derived from verbs, to denote 
the subject of the verb implied in the governing noun : as 

Morsus canis. The bite of a dog. Here canis repiesents the 
subject of the verb mordeo (bite) implied in morsus. (See p. 
59, i). 

A genitive is also used, with nouns derived from verbs, to denote 
the object of a verb implied in a governing noun : as, 

Timor mortis. The fear of death. 

Here mortis represents the object of timeo (1 fear), implied in 
timor. Thus, propter mortis timorem=quod timeo mortem (be- 
cause 1 fear death). 

This is called the objective genitive. 

The objective genitive may represent even a dative case or the 
object of a preposition : as, 



THE GENITIVE. 63 

Literarum studium. Zeal for literature (where the gen. rep- 
resents the object of studeo, am zealous for). 
Aditus laudis, an avenue to honor (from adire ad laudem). 

So too : Fiducia virium, confidence in strength. Consensio omnium 
rerum, agreement in everything. Dissensio reipublicae, disagree- 
ment on politics. Contentio honorum, a struggle for office. 

GENITIVE OF PRICE. 

4. The price at which a thing is bought or sold is expressed by 
the genitive, when the price is stated indefinitely : as 

Magni, at a great price. 

Parvi, at a small price* 

Tanti, at so great 'a price. 

Quanti, at how great a price. 

Pluris, at a greater price. 

Minoris, at a less price. 

Maximi or plurimi, at the greatest price. 

Minimi, at the least price. 

Quanti id vendit? At what price does he sell it? 

Minoris decumae venierunt. The tithes sold at a lower figure 
[veneo, to be sold, from venum, to sale (adverbial ace.) + eo, to go~\. 

Note. When the price is definitely stated, it is expressed by the 
ablative : as, Emit domum duobus talentis et pluris, he bought a 
house at two talents and more. 

GENITIVE OF DEFINITION. 

5. A genitive is often added to a noun, to limit or define it : as, 
Virtus iustitiae. The virtue of justice. 

Haec vox voluptatis. This word "pleasure." 
Nomen insaniae. The word "madness". 

This is called the genitive of definition. 

GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 

6. Adjectives are followed by a genitive when they express plenty 
and want or contain a verbal notion: as, 



64 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Plenus avium. Full of birds. 
Bationis expers. Destitute of reason. 
Patiens laboris. Capable of (enduring) labor. 
Conscius recti. Conscious of rectitude. 
Impotens sui. Powerless over one's self. 
Tenax propositi. Tenacious of purpose. 
Cupidus contentionis. Longing for contention. 
luris perltus. Skilled in law. 
Spei egenus. Destitute of hope. 
Imperil capax. Capable of command. 

Note i. A present participle, when it loses all idea of time and 
simply expresses a fixed quality, governs the genitive : as, Amans 
patriae, devoted to his country ; appetens gloriae, desirous of glory j 
patiens laboris, capable of enduring labor (as opposed to patiens 
laborem, while enduring labor). It is, in that case, compared like 
an ordinary adjective. 

Note 2. Similis (like), dissimilis (unlike\ andproprius (peculiar 
to), are followed by the genitive and (more rarely) the dative : as, 
Similis sui, like one's self; virorum proprium, peculiar to men. 

Similis and dissimilis seem to be used with the genitive of internal 
likeness (character etc.) ; with the dative, of external likeness 
(form etc.) 

EXERCISE XXVIII. 

i. I am afraid he thinks that life is full of care. 2. He used to 
say that this city was eager for revolution. 3. Tell me whether this 
fault is peculiar to old men. 4. Do you think that we shall have 
gained an escape from labor ? 5. I believe that this hunger for gold 
has been the cause of ma^y evils. 6. Do not ask them to sell at a 
lower price. 7. He should have had some gratitude for kindness. 
8. -X>o not forget that he has the strongest love for his friends. 9. 
I was afraid that he valued the safety of the country less (say at 
less) than his own. 10. O ! that he had been more like you. n. 
I have never known a man of such ability as he is. 12. Where 
shall we find a man of greater sense ? 13, Nothing prevented him 
from becoming a leader of experience. 14. He used to say that 
men of authority were rare. 15. So great was the rejoicing that a 



THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 65 

thanksgiving of fifteen days was decreed. 16. I believe that snakes 
of vast size are found in the island of Cyprus. 17. Cato used to 
say that a useless thing was dear at a penny. 18. Do not buy at 
so high a price a useless thing. 19. I forgot to say that he sold 
the house for five talents. 20. Tell us at how great a price this 
ship will be sold. 



29. THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 

1. Verbs meaning to accuse ', condemn, and acquit, take the ac- 
cusative of the person and the genitive of the thing : as, 

Accusat me furti. He accuses me of theft. 

Repetundarum damnatus est. He was condemned for extortion 
(lit., things that should be recovered j supply rerum). 
Sacrilegii absoluta est. She was acquitted of sacrilege. 



. Th e punishment, after such verbs as the above, is ex- 
pressed in the genitive or (more commonly) the ablative : as, Morte 
damnatus est. He was condemned to death. Capitis (or capite) 
damnatus est. He was capitaflv condemned (caput, a man's poli- 
tical rights.} 

2. Verbs meaning to remind, remember, forget, ex pity, take the 
genitive : as, 

Me beneflcii sui admonebat. He reminded me of his kindness. 

Note. Admoneo may also take tfye ace. of a neuter pronoun : 
as, Hoc nos admonet. He reminds us of this. 

Huis diei semper meminero. / shall always remember this day. 
Offlcii ne obliviscaris. Do not forget your duty. Miserere nostri. 
Pity us. 

Note i. Instead of memini, / remember, the phrase Mini in 
mentem venit (it comes into my mind), may be used with the gen- 
itive : as, Mini in mentem venit eius diei, / recollect that day* 
Q 



66 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Note 2. Miser-eor, -eri, -tus (or -itus) sum is I pity; but miseror, 
-ari, -atus sum, I deplore, bewail: as, Casum nostrum miseratur, 
he bewails our misfortune. 

3. The five following impersonal verbs, expressing emotions, take 
the accusative of the person feeling, and the genitive of the source 
of the emotion : Miseret, piget, poenitet, pudet, taedet : as, 

Miseret me tui. I pity you (lit., it fills me with pity for you}. 
Me non solum poenitet stultitiae sed etiam pudet. 1 am not 
only sorry for my folly but even ashamed of it. 

Notice the phrase Non solum -sed etiam, not only but also. 

Me fratris et piget et taedet. / am annoyed at and disgusted 
with my brother. 

Credo eos huius belli poenitere. I believe that they are sorry 
for this war (lit., that it repents them for). 

Note. These five verbs respectively express to fill with pity, an- 
noyance, sorrow, shame, or disgust. They are all transitive. Thus : 
Eum facti nee poenitet nee pudet, he feels neither remorse nor 
shame for his act. 

INTEREST AND REFERT. 

4. Interest and refert, it is of importance (or consequence} to, it 
concerns, take a peculiar construction. If the person to whom it is of 
importance is expressed by a noun, the genitive of the noun is 
used ; if by a personal pronoun, the ablative sing, feminine of the 
corresponding possessive adjective : as, 

Regis interest. // is of importance to the king. But 
Mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, interest. // concerns me, you 
(sing.), him, us, you (pi.) [eius=/#z>/z her, not referring to the sub- 
ject of a sentence ; p. 7, i]. 

The degree of importance is expressed by a neuter adjective, an 
adverb, or a genitive of price : as, 

Multum (or magni) eius interest. // is of great importance, it 
makes a great difference, to him. 

Nihil eorum interest. // is of no importance to them. Plus 
interest. // is of more importance. 



TEE GEtfltlVE WITH VERBS. 67 

5. Interest and refert may have as a subject an infinitive, an ut- 
clause, a pronoun, or an indirect question : as, 

Omnium interest bene vivere. // is for the interest of all to 
live well. 

Multum interest ut copiae nostrae conveniant. // is of much 
importance that our forces should assemble. 

Non possum dicere quantum intersit. / can not say how impor- 
tant it is. 

Nihil interest quot sitis. // makes no difference how many you 
are. 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

i. Do not forget the poor. 2. Is it not the proof of a good man 
to remember the poor? 3. He was within a little of being con- 
demned to exile. 4. Everybody accuses the general of rashness 
and is tired of this war. 5. It makes a great difference to us whether 
they are innocent or not. 6. O ! that they had not accused him of 
impiety. 7. They are sorry for their fault. 8. Others feel neither 
shame nor sorrow for their folly. 9. He is said to have pitied his 
brother. 10. It is the mark of a mean mind to love wealth, n. I 
am ashamed that you should say that it is not your part to obey. 
12. It is of the utmost importance to a country that the men of the 
highest ability should take part in politics. 13. I forgot to say that 
they are sorry for their conduct. 14. Do not say that it makes no 
difference whether you learn or not. 15. I will ask him whether he 
thinks that it concerns our safety. 16. Is it a mark of folly to be 
sorry for one's sins ? 1 7. Let us ask him when the captives will be 
pardoned. 18. It is for both your interest and mine that they 
should do this. 19. When the war was ended, all the soldiers were 
dismissed. 20. He said that it was of great importance not only 
to us but to you. 21. And so it happened that I was not presejit. 
22. I remember allowing him to do it. 23. I am afraid this will 
remind them of death. 



68 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

30. THE DATIVE. 

1. The dative is derived from dare (give), because it often 
follows verbs of giving : as, 

Da mihi aliquid. Give me something. (Me here is for to me, 
and is called the indirect object). 

So : Suadere alicui, give advice to some one, and auxiliari alicui 
give aid to some one. 

2. The dative, as a rule, may be used for the English to or 
for: as, 

Modum pone irae. Set a limit to anger. 

Non mihi sed meis. Not for myself but for my friends. 

3. The dative is used with sum, I am, in the sense of to belong to, 
to have : as, 

Est tibi liber. You have a book. 

Est tibi nomen Marcus. Your name is Marcus. 

Note. Instead of the nominative, in the last example, the dative 
(Marco) or the genitive (Marci) may be used. 

4. The dative is used for the English from, after verbs meaning 
to take away : as, 

Earn morti eripuit. He snatched her from death. 

5. The dative of a personal pronoun is used idiomatically of a 
person remotely interested in a statement : as, 

At tibi subito Racilius venit. But^ I tell you, suddenly came 
Racilius. 

An ille mini liber, cui mulier imperat? Shall I call him free 
whom a woman commands? (lit., to me, in my opinion}. 

This is called the ethic dative. 

6. The dative is also used idiomatically where we should expect 
and use a genitive : as, 

Pompeio ad pedes se proiecere. They threw themselves at 
Pompey's feet. 



THE DATIVE. 69 

7. Instead of the usual a (or ab) with the ablative, the dative is 
use 1 of the agent after a passive verb, in the following cases : 

(a) With \hz gerundive (p. 45, 3). 

(b) With the perfect participle passive (p. 50, 1 2). 

8. A dative is added to certain verbs (especially sum, do, habeo, 
venio, mitto) to express the purpose or design of the action of the 
verb : as, 

Cui bono est? To whom is it useful? .(lit., for a good). 
Hoc mini culpae dedit. He set this down to me as a fault. 
Nobis auxilio venient. They will come to our aid (lit., for an 
aid to us). 

This is called the dative of purpose. 

9. Adjectives and adverbs expressing usefulness, ease, nearness, 
likeness or the opposite (usually followed by to or for in English), 
are usually followed by the dative in Latin : as, 

Utilis reipublicae. Useful to the country. 

Tibi facilis, nobis difflcilis. Easy for you, difficult for us. 

Patri similis. Like his father (i.e., in appearance). 

Note. Similis takes the genitive when it expresses likeness of 
character (p. 64, note 2). 

Locus urbi propinquus. A place near the city. 
Convenienter naturae vivit. He lives agreeably to nature. 

Note i. Propior (nearer), and proximus (nearest), often take 
the ace. ; prope, propius, proxime, always : as, Prope te sedet, he 
is sitting near you. 

Note 2. Adjectives expressing fitness are followed by ad (with 
ace.) rather than by a dative: as, Ad bellum gerendum aptus, fit 
for carrying on war. So too, natus (born), paratus (ready) and rudis 
(inexperienced ) . 

Note 3. Many adjectives are followed by in, ergu, or adversus, 
towards, to: as, Acer in hostem, benignus erga amicos, fierce to 
the <,nemy, kind to friends. 



70 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Correct usage in this, as in other respects, can only be learned 
from a study of the Latin writers. 

EXERCISE XXX. 

i. He shall pay me the penalty. 2. I will tell him that all should 
have done it. 3. I must make provision for the safety of the 
country. 4. I was afraid that they would become unfriendly to us. 
5. Don't you think that he is unlike himself? 6. Ask him why he is 
so disagreeable to us. 7. I am ashamed that he is not better fitted 
for the work. 8. O ! that they had a cottage near the sea. 9. 
Nothing can prevent him from being hostile to the multitude. 10. 
They were so savage (acer) at him that he dared not visit the city, 
i r. Let us ask him whether he will show us the way or not. 12. It is 
of the utmost importance to our safety that you should be friendly 
to the country. 13. He used to say that it was the lot of all to err 
(p. 59, 2). 14. Did they not think that he was a mean-minded 
man? (p. 62, i). 15. O ! that this had never occurred to his 
mind. 16. I believe that he used to be very kind to us. 17. 
He used to say that the sea was destruction (p. 69, 8) to sailors. 
18. Ask them to stay in order to be a protection to the city. 19. 
He said that their ship was now a hindrance to them. 20. A 
man of honor will never be persuaded to betray the country. 



31. DATIVE WITH VERBS. 

1. Sum, I am, and its compounds (except possum, / am able} 
are followed by the dative : as, 

Est mini liber. / have a book. 

Amici non ttbi desunt. Friends are not lacking to you. 

Proelio interfuit. He took part in the battle. 

2. Most impersonal verbs are followed by the dative : as, 
Mini licet et expedit. // is allowed me and expedient for me. 

So too : Hbet (it pleases}, accidit and contingit (it happens}, liquet 
(it is dear), convenit (it is agreed upon). 



DATIVE WITH VERBS. 71 

3. Verbs compounded with bene, male, satis, are followed by a 
dative : as, 

Optimo viro maledixit. He reviled a most excellent man. 
Mihi nunquam satisfecit. He never satisfied me. 

4. Transitive verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante 
con (for cum), in, inter, ob (on, against), post, prae (before), sub 
(under), or super (above\ often govern an accusative of the direct 
and a dative of the indirect object : as, 

Populus Romanus bellum Gallis intulit. The Roman people 
made war on the Gauls, 

Note. In the passive the direct object of the active becomes the 
subject, while the indirect object is still retained : as, Bellum Gallis 
a populo Romano illatum est. War was made on the Gauls by the 
Roman people. 

5. Intransitive verbs compounded with the above-mentioned 
prepositions, often govern the dative : as, 

Caesar exercitui praefuit. Caesar commanded the army. 
Consiliis consulis obstat. He opposes the plans of the consul. 

6. The following is a useful list of verbs (other than those men- 
tioned) that govern a dative : 

firedo believe. ' subvenio, aid. 

fides ) ig-nosco, pardon* 

\ trust (of a person). f 

confido. J servio, serve. 

faveo, Jayor. invideo, envy. 

- pareo, obey. indulgeo, indulge. 

nubo, wed (of a woman). placeo, please. 

studeo, am zealous. displiceo, displease. 

vaco, have leisure. repugno, oppose. 

obsto, stand in the way. knmlneo, threaten. 

impero, command. occurro, mee. 

suadeo, recommentf. \ ^ resists, resist. 

- persuadeo, persuade. noceo, hurt. 

irascor, am angry. - medeor, heal, 

tempero, set bounds to, refrain. 



72 . LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

7. The following verbs differ in meaning according as they 
govern the dative or accusative : 

Consulere aliquem. Consult a person. 
Consulere alicui. Consult a persons interest, 
Prospicere aliqxiid. Foresee something. 
Prospicere alicui. Provide for some one. 
Cavere (aliquem). Be on one's guard against. 
Cavere (alicui). Consult interest of. 
Moderari (aliquem). Govern (some one}. 
Moderari (alicui rei). Set limits to (some tiling). 

8. The verbs dono (give) and circumdo (surround) have a double 
construction. Thus : 

He surrounds the city with a wall. Urbem muro (abl.) circum- 
dat, or Urbi murum circumdat. 

They give him a crown. Bum corona (abl.) donant, or Ei 
(dit.) coronam donant. 

9. The following idiomatic uses of the dative with verbs should 
be noticed : 

Mortem alicui minari. To threaten a person with death. 
Pecuniam alicui imperare. To demand money from a person. 
Aliquid alicui probare. Justify a thing to a person. 
Aliquid alicui suppeditare. To supply one with something. 
Hunc tibi antepono. I prefer this man to you. 
Hunc tibi posthabeo. I prefer you to this man (lit., / reckon 
tJiis man ajter you). 

10. Verbs that govern a dative can not be used personally in the 
passive ; they are still joined with a dative, but must be used im- 
personally : as, 

Nemini a te invidetur. No one is etivied by you. 
Dicit divitibus invideri. He says that the rich are envied (\\\.., 
that it is envied to the rich.) 

Ne illi quidem nocetur. Not even he is injured. 

Note. Observe the Latin for not even and that the emphatic 
word is placed between ne and quidem. 



THE ABLATIVE. 73 

EXERCISE XXXI. 

I. You do what pleases you. 2. It was agreed upon between 
(dat.) Balbus and me. 3. He said that what pleased me, pleased 
him. 4. He could not persuade me that he helped the poor. 5. Will 
they not set so excellent a general as this at the head of the army? 
(P- 3> 8). 6. Ask them how it happened that no one was spared. 
7. It is not the part of a good man to consult his own interest. 8. 
Do not be angry with those you love. 9. It is not a mark of 
wisdom for a man to revile men (use inf.). 10. Are you advising 
him not to feel sorrow for his conduct? 1 1 . Do you think he fears 
for the safety of the country? 12. I was afraid that the peace 
would satisfy no one. 13. It is of the utmost importance to all that 
the laws should be obeyed. 14. So just was he that he favored no 
one. 15. Have not the gods made provision for the life of man? 
16. Will he prevent this city from being wrested from us? i7/He 
wishes to know how he can please everybody. 18. I believe that 
money has been demanded from almost all the states. 19. I should 
recommend him to get Caesar's approval for the act (use profyo). 
20. Let us advise him to provide for his own safety. 21. Does he 
prefer the country's safety to everything? 22. He used to say that 
everything threatened us with death. 23. He said that his consul- 
ship did not please Antonius. 24. The idle will one day repent of 
his idleness. 



32. THE ABLATIVE. 

1. The ablative gets its name from auferre {take away}, because 
it expresses separation or motion from : as, 

Urbe excedes. You 'will depart from the city. 
Fugit Corintho. He fled from Corinth. 

2. The ablative without a preposition expresses motion from with 
names of towns and small islands and with domus and rus : as, 

Rhodo, Roma prefect! sunt. They set out from Rhodes, from 
Rome. 

Domo, rure, exiit. He departed jrom home, from the coimtry. 



74 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

From, with the name of a country, is expressed by the prepositions 
a or ab, e or ex, or de, with the ablative : as, 

Aut ex Asia aut ex Graecia venit- He came either from Asia 
or from Greece. 

3. The ablative without a preposition is used with any noun for 
the English from, after the following verbs : abstinere (abstain 

from), abire (depart from, abdicate}, desistere (desist from}, 
cedere (retire from}, pellere (drive from}, liberare or solvere 
(free front), levare (lighten from), prohibere (keep away from): as, 

Bello abstinuit. He abstained from war. 
Nos tecto prohibet. He keeps us from the house. 
Oppugnatione desistunt. They desist from the attack. 
Italia cedit. He retires from Italy. 

Civitatem dominatu liberavit. He Jreed the country from des- 
potism. 

4. The ablative is used, without a preposition, for the English 
from or of, after adjectives expressing want, freedom from, sprung 
from : as, 

Liber (or vacuus) cura. Free from care. 

Orbus parentibus. Bereft of parents. 

Extorris regno. Banished from the kingdom. 

Consulari familia ortus. Sprung from a consular family. 

CAUSE, MANNER, INSTRUMENT. 

5. The ablative is used to express the cause, manner, or in- 
strument : as, 

Gaudio exsultat, He leaps with ioy. 

Deum pura mente veneramur. We worship God with pure 
minds. 

Hastam manu tenet. He holds the spear in his hand. 
Eum gladio interfecit. He killed him with a sword. 

Note i. The agent after a passive verb, is usually expressed by 
a (or ab) with the ablative ab before vowels and consonants, a 



THE ABLATIVE. 75 

before consonants only : as, Ab illis deserti sumus, we have been 
deserted by them; a (or ab) Caesare interfectus, killed by Caesar. 
A secondary agent (one through whose instrumentality a thing is 
done) is expressed by per (with ace.) : as, Omnia haec per te facta 
sunt. All this was done through your instrumentality. 

Note 2. Unless to express a mental state, the ablative of cause 
is not common ; cause is usually expressed by ob or propter (with 
ace.), on account of; by causa or gratia (with gen.), for the sake 
of; and, of a negative cause, by prae (with abl.) : as, Beatiores 
sunt propter illam scientiam, they are happier by reason of that 
knowledge; hoc reipublicae causa facit, he does it for the public 
interest; prae lacrimis loqui non potuit, he could not speak for 
tears. 

Note 3. The ablative of manner is not used unless there is an 
adjective with the noun ; in other cases the preposition cum (with 
abl.) is to be used : as, Hoc summa diligentia feci, / did it with 
the greatest care. But hoc cum dilig-entia feci, / did it with 
care. 

In the following phrases of manner, cum may be omitted : 
consilic (from design), casu (by chance), iure (rightly), iniuria 
(wrongly), iussu (at the command of), iniussu (without the com- 
mand of). 

6- With, when it means in company with, is cum : as, 
Cum fratre veni. / came with my brother. 
So too : Cum febri, with a fever; cum telo, with a weapon. 

Note. Cum when used with a personal or relative pronoun, is 
written after its case: Pax vobiocum, peace be with you. But 
Quicum is often written for quocum. 



EXERCISE 



SE XXXII. 

I. I have heard that he behaved with the greatest kindness. 2. 
He could not hear you by reason of the clamor. 3. Tell me why 
he was banished from Thebes. 4. O ! that he had set out from 
home immediately. 5. Though born of the noblest parents, he did 



76 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

not abstain from crime. 6. Do not imagine that he will desist from 
his attempt. 7. He set out from Rome to free his friend from debt. 
8. Freed from this fear, he will depart from Italy. 9. It makes no 
difference whether you perish by pestilence or the sword. 10. No 
one can doubt that he won the good-will of all by his character, 
ii. They will be sorry for this some day. 12. Are not the walls 
without defenders? 13. It is of importance to the country that 
commerce should be exempt from taxation. 14. The Latins ob- 
tained the citizenship by the Julian law. 15. Was he killed by his 
own soldiers? 16. I regret that he could depart from Athens with 
resignation. 17. I believe that they are disgusted with their for- 
tune. 1 8. I will say, with your permission, that he acted with 
honesty. 19. He said that he always satisfied others, never himself. 
20. You, whom I preferred to all others, have shown yourselves 
unworthy of confidence. 



33. ABLATIVE OP COMPARISON AND ABLA- 
TIVE OF DIFFERENCE. 

1. The word than after a comparative is usually expressed by the 
conjunction quam: as, 

Tu callidior es quam ego. You are more cunning than I. 

Note. The second member of the comparison is in the same 
case as the first, when each is joined with the same verb ;' as, 
Nemini plura tribuit quam mihi, on none has he bestowed more 
than on me; maius est specie quam re, /'/ is greater in appear- 
ance than in reality. But when the first member of the comparison 
is in the ace., the second is also in the ace., whether the verb can 
be repeated with it or not : as, Putat victoriam meliorem esse 
quam cladem, he thinks that victory is better than defeat (-quam 
clades sit). 

2. Instead of quam after a comparative, the ablative may be 
used when the first member of the comparison is in the nominative 
or accusative : as, 



ABLATIVE OF COMPARISON AND DIFFERENCE. 77 

Ille patre melior est. He is better than his father. 
Putat Europam minorem Asia esse. He thinks that Europe is 
less than Asia. 

Note. The ablative must be used, in this construction, with 
a relative : as, Punicum bellum quo nullum mains gessere, the 
Punic war, than which they did not wage any greater. 

3. Unless in short phrases (like those given in paragraph 5 
below), an adverb in the comparative is usually followed by 
quam, and not by the ablative : as, 

Nihil dulcius quam luscinia cantat. Nothing sings more sweetly 
than the nightingale. 

4. Plus and amplius (more) and minus (less), when joined with 
numerals, are indeclinable and do not affect the case of the word 
to which they are joined : as, 

Plus quing-enti capti sunt. More than five hicndred were taken. 

Minus septingentos occiderunt. They killed less than seven 
hundred. 

Plus tertia parte interfecta, se receperunt. More than a third 
part being slain, they retreated. 

Plus annum tecum vixit. He lived with you more than a year. 

Here the case following the comparative is the same as if no com- 
parison were instituted. 

5. Comparatives are often joined with sp^, opinione, exspecta- 
tione, iusto or aequo (right), solito (usual) : as, 

Serius spe omnium. Later than all hoped. 

Celerius opinione venit. He came sooner than was expected. 

Plus aequo. More than right. 

6. An ablative is added to comparatives and superlatives to 
define the degree of difference : as, 

Multo me senior. Mitch older than I (\\\.., by much). 
Paulo acrius. A little more sharply. 
So too : paulo ante, a little before j paulo post, a little later* 



78 lATitf PROSE COMPOSITION. 



Note. The English the .... the with two comparatives (Anglo 
Saxon instrumental case=j/ that ---- by that} is expressed by quanto 
tanto (by how much . . . . by so much) or quo eo (by what . . . . by 
that), with two comparatives : as, Quo quis melior est, eo beatior, 
the better one is, the happier he is. 

7. To express phrases^ like With more courage than success, 
Latin uses two comparatives : as, 

Bellum fortius quam felicius^gerit. He carries on war with 
more courage than success. 

Magis eloquens quam sapiens est. He has more eloquence 
than wisdom. 

Note. Plus and amplius express amount, are used with a verb, 
and correspond to the comparative of much; magis expresses 
degree, is used with an adjective or adverb, and corresponds to the 
comparative of truly, highly : as, Hoc mag-is idoneum est quam 
illud, this is more suitable than that ; ilium plus amo quam te, / 
love him more than I do you. 

8. Quam pro, with a comparative, is used to express dispro- 
portion : as, 

Proelium atrocius quam pro numero pug-nan tium. A battle more 
severe than might have been expected from the number of combatants. 

9. The Latin comparative has often the force of too, rather j 
the superlative, the force of very : as, 

Liberius vivit. He fives too freely. 

Maximas copias armat. He equips very large forces. 

Note. Quam is often added in this latter case to the superlative 
with or without possum, to express the highest possible degree : as, 
Exercitum quam proximo hostem (possum) habeo, I have the army 
very near the enemy ; quam maxima m vastitatem efficit, he 
spreads the widest possible devastation. 

10. Phrases l-ike Too great for may be expressed by the compara- 
tive and the ablative ; phrases like Too great to by the comparative 
and quam ut with the subjunctive : as, 



ABLATIVE OF COMPARISON AND DIFFERENCE. 79 

Ampliores humane genere honores consecutus est. He obtained 
honors too great for the human race. 

Maior fuit quam ut servus esset. He was too great to be a 
slave. 

ABLATIVE OF RESPECT. 

11. An ablative is used to express that in respect to which a 
statement is true of the subject : as, 

Ennius arts rudis erat. In respect to art, Ennius was rude. 
Non tu tota re sed temporibus errasti. You were not wrong 
with respect to the whole matter^ but in the dates. 

ABLATIVE OF PRICE. 

12. The price at which a thing is bought or sold is, when 
stated definitely, expressed by the ablative : as, 

Unam orationem viginti talentis vendidit. He sold one oration 
for twenty talents. 

So too : Religionem pecunia mutavit. He changed his religion for 
money. 
For the genitive of price, see p. 63, 4. 

13. For the ablative absolute, see p. 51, i. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 

i. He is more spirited than you. 2. That speech was fitter for a 
public meeting than for a court. 3. The more one has, the better. 
4. He helped no one more than me. 5. He has a larger house 
than I (have). 6. They say that he has been long lame in one 
arm. 7. I believe that in appearance the city is free. 8. Don't 
you think that a shameful flight is worse than death? 9. Do you 
think that he is wiser than we? 10. Do not grieve more than is 
just. 11. He used to say that nothing was sweeter than the light 
of truth. 12. Is not necessity more powerful than art? 13. He is 
an old man in body ; he will never be an old man in mind. 14. Do 
you think that life contains more joy (gen.) than sorrow. 15. I be- 
lieve that he might have been much happier than he was. 16. 
Shall we sell our native land for gold? 17. That victory cost them 
much blood. 18. On what terms does he teach? At a very small 



80 - LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

fee. 19. Shall we give him fess than them? 20. Is he not more 
like you than me? 21. I am afraid that he has become very unlike 
himself. 22. I heard that our men, after attacking the place in 
vain, retreated to their ships. 23. It is so easy to do, that even I 
could have done it. 24. Advancing to the river as quickly as pos- 
sible (gitam + superl.\ they attacked us there. 25. In the absence 
of the general, very many of the men deserted. 26. I believe that 
more than a thousand men fell. 27. He had more kindness than 
wisdom. 28. He spoke with more spirit than sense. 29. The 
enemy are so many that we do not dare to go forth from the camp. 
30. Where are the friends I had in the consulship of Plancus? 31. 
Who can tell us at what price the slave was sold? 32. It is of 
great consequence to all that the house should be sold at the highest 
possible price (use quant). 33. I believe that they excel all other 
tribes in courage. 34. He was too good to be put to death. 35. 
The figure was too large to be human. 



34. ABLATIVE WITH VERBS AND 
ADJECTIVES. 

1. The verbs utor (use\ fruor (enjoy), fung-or {perform^ potior 
(gain}, vescor (feed on), dignor (deem worthy), and their com- 
pounds, are followed by the ablative : as, 

Fung-ar vice cotis. / will perform the office of a whetstone. 
Viribus male utuntur. They make a bad use of their strength. 

Note. This ablative is really instrumental : thus utor=7 busy 
myself with j fruor = / enjoy myself with, etc. 

2. Verbs meaning to fill with (compleo) or abound in (abundo 
affluo), are followed by an ablative without a preposition : as, 

Mundum hominibus complevit. He has filled the world with 
men. 

Affluit divitiis. He abounds in wealth. 

3. Verbs meaning to be without, or to need, govern an abla- 
tive ; as, 



ABLATIVE WITH VERBS AND ADJECTIVES. - 81 

Sensu caret. He is devoid of feeling. 
Pane eget. He is in need of bread. 

Note. Egeo and indigeo (need), govern also a genitive : as 
Pecuniae indiget, he is iW need of money. 

4. Opus est aud usus est (there is need), take a dative of the 
person to whom and the ablative of the thing : as, 

Quid tibi opus est verbis? What need have yott of words ? 
So : Opus est consulto, properato. There is need of deliberation^ 
haste. 

Note. Opus may, however, take the accusative of a neuter pro- 
noun : as, Quod non opus est, asse carurn est, what you do not 
need, is dear at a penny. 

5. The following verbs are also followed by an ablative : fido 
and confido (rely on\ of a thing, (see p. 71, 6); g-lorior (boast of\ 
doleo (feel grief at), gaudeo (delight in) : as, 

Natura loci confldit. He relies on the nature of the ground. 
Casu meo dolent. They feel pain at my disaster. 

Note i. These verbs may also take a neuter pronoun in the 
accusative : as, Hoc g-loriatur, he makes this boast j id doleo, I feel 
this pain (see p. 38, 5). 

Note 2. Fido and confido take the dat. of the person, but the 
ablative of the thing : as, non tibi sed exercitu meo confido, / do 
not trust in yoti but in my army. 

6. The ablative is used after the adjectives digrnus (worthy of), 
indignus (unworthy of), fretus (relying on), praeditus (endowed 
with\ contentus (content with) and plenus (full of) : as, 

Poena dig-nus. Worthy of punishment. 
Fretus praesidio tuo. Relying on your protection. 
Virtute praeditus. Endowed with courage. 
Plenus ira (or irae). Full of anger (see p. 74, 4). 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

I. Tell me why you performed this idle office. 2. Have you need 
qf my protection? 3. I saw that the hill was destitute of men. 4. 



&2 - LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

This does not need skill so much as labor. 5. Do not put too much 
reliance (use verb) in your general. 6. I believe that he performed 
the duties of his office with fidelity and courage. 7. What could 
have been more fortunate than this? 8. man endowed with the 
highest ability, he was considered (Jtabeo) unworthy by his country- 
men of even the lowest office. 9. He used to boast that he had a 
mind that was without care. 10. Departing from Rome, he en- 
joyed his good fortune as a private person in Africa. 1 1. He made 
a good use of victory, a very difficult thing to do. 1 2. He wished to 
know on what herbs they fed. 13. He said that he would be con- 
tent with the smaller part. 14. I was considered more like him 
than you are. 15. Tell me at what price he bought the horse. 16. 
He said that you could not procure (paro) friends with gold. 17. I 
believe that we shall get possession of the town. 18. We must ask 
them to come and help us (p. 69, 8). 19. In their father's life-time 
they abounded in gold ; now they are in need of bread. 20. I beg- 
ged them to show themselves worthy of the liberty they enjoyed 
(use have). 21. We must order the rest of the forces to start before 
the beginning of spring. 22. I have heard that they fortified a camp 
on the top of the hill with the utmost speed (use quam + superl.). 
23. Nothing is more uncertain than life. 24. He was so in need of 
money that he sold a house for two talents. 25. These facts he 
ascertained through the instrumentality of scouts. 26. How vain 
the hope ! 27. That done, I had no fear that the city would be 
taken. 28. What is more excellent than virtue? 29. Do not tell 
me that a merchant will sell for less than he buys at. 30. I believe 
that they buy at the lowest price and sell at the highest. 31. I 
prefer writing to speaking. 



35. RELATION OP PLACE. LOCATIVE. 

1. At a place (place where) was originally expressed by a separ- 
ate case in -i (pi., -is). This case is called the locative; it is seen 
in domi (at home)) ruri (in the country), humi (on the ground). 

2. To express at or in a place, when the noun is the name of a 
town or small island, the locative takes the following forms : If the 



RELATION Otf PLACE. LOCATIVE. 83 

noun is of the ist or 2nd decl. sing., the genitive is used ; if not, 
the ablative : as, 

Romae (at Rome}, Rhodi (at Rhodes), Tibure (at Tibur\ Athenis 
(at Athens}. 

3. To express at or in a place, when the noun is not the name of 
a town or small island, in with the ablative is used : as, 

In urbe. In the city. In Italia. In Italy. 

But if there is an adjective with the noun, the preposition may be 
omitted : as, 

Media urbe. In the middle of the city. 
Tota Italia. In the whole of Italy. 

4. Motion to a place, when the noun is the name of a town or 
small island, is expressed by the accusative without a preposition ; 
motion from a place, by the ablative without a preposition : as, 

Romam rediit. He returned to Rome. Corintho fug-it. He fled 
from Corinth. 

Note. Ad Romam would mean in the neighborhood, or in the 
direction, of Rome. 

With other nouns a preposition is required : as, Abiit ad forum. 
He went off to the forum. In Africam venit. He came to Africa. 
Ex Asia decedens. While departing from Asia. 

5. In expressing the relation of place, rus (country) and domus 
(home) take the same construction as the names of towns and 
small islands : as, ruri, in the country; domi, at home ; rus, to the 
country ; domum, homes domo, from home. 

6. For phrases like To his father at Rhodes, Latin says To his 
father to Rhodes : as, 

Rhodum ad patrem venit. He came to his father at Rhodes. 
So too : Ab Italia domo iit. He came from his home in Italy. 

For phrases like In the city of Rome, to the city of Rome (p. 3, 7), 
the preposition is required : as, 

Ad urbem Romam legati missi sunt. Ambassadors were sent to 
the city of Rome. 



84 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

In urbe Athenis diu doraicilium habebat. He lived long in the 
city of Athens. 

Note. The preposition is retained here even if an adjective is 
added; but the proper noun is then placed first in the case re- 
quired by paragraph 2 or 4 above : as, Antiochiae, in urbe opu- 
lentissima, moratus est, he delayed in the wealthy city of Antioch. 

7- An adjective can not be joined to a noun in the locative 
case. Thus : 

In the whole of Corinth is tota Corintho, not totlus Corinthi. 
The possessive adjective may however be added to domi : as, 

Domi meae. In my house. But, Veterl domo, in I he old house. 
So too : Domum meam venit. He came to my home. But, Ad 
veterem domum, to the old home. 

8. Motion along is expressed by the ablative : as, 

Ibam forte Via Sacra. I chanced to be going along the Via Sacra. 

9. Extent of space is expressed by the accusative : as, 
Aggerem, pedes trecentos latum, exstruxerunt. They built a 

mound three hundred feet broad 

Note. Distance is sometimes expressed by the ablative : as, 
Duobus millibus passuum aberat. He was two miles off. 

EXERCISE XXXV. 

I. Do you know when they will bring the corn from Rhodes to 
Karthage ? 2. I believe that their camp was pitched in a suitable 
place. 3. He was considered the most eloquent speaker in the 
whole of Greece. 4. Nothing prevented him from sailing from 
Corinth to Athens. 5. What place in the whole sea was safe? 6. 
It was said that he came to Italy in the reign of Tarquinius. 7. 
He says that he has studied in the learned city of Athens. 8. Ask 
him how long he stayed at Utica. 9. He said that he intended to 
cross to Brundisium in Italy. 10. They went to see the king at Capua. 
v 1 1. Tell me when the army will set out for its winter quarters in Gaul. 
12. Has he not come here from the camp at Aricia? 13. He must 
go to my house at Tibur. 14. I believe that they have come here. 



RELATION OF TIME. TIME WHEN. TIME HOW LONG. 85 

from a very populous (celeber) city. 15. He has collected a very 
large fleet from Tyre and Sidon to intercept their ships. ^16. I had 
an interview at Baiae with men fresh from Rome. 17. They were 
defeated by the Romans both by sea and land. 18. It was said 
that an ox had fallen from heaven. -19. They seldom come from 
the country into the city. 20. They escaped from the city by the 
Colline Gate. 21. He came, a little before, from Ephesus to Italy. 
22. Their camp was about thirteen miles from the sea. 23. He was 
the only one who ever reached the top of the mountain. 24. Many 
men in ancient Rome did not know how to read. 25. They must 
send an army to Scipio in Spain: ^ 26. Have you ever stayed in 
the populous city of London ? 27. I believe that they enjoy their 
leisure better than we. 28. The beautiful city of Antioch was only 
a few miles from the sea. ; 29. I could not sell my house in Capua 
at the price I bought it at. ^ 30. To our enquiry whether the Gauls 
had conquered, he answered Yes. 31. Do not forget that you are 
sprung from an honorable family. 



36. RELATION OF TIME. TIME WHEN. TIME 
HOW LONG. 

1. Time at which (time when), and time within which, are ex- 
pressed by the ablative without a preposition : as, 

Hora sexta. At the sixth hour. 

Vere et 'aestate. In spring and summer. 

Faucis diebus. Within a few days (inter or intra paucos dies, 
is also used). 

Note i. The preposition in (with the abl.) is used of time to 
express emrjhasis : as, In tempore, at the right moment ; in aetate 
provecta, in spite of advanced age. 

Note 2. Words that do not strictly denote time, when used to 
mark a period of time, require a preposition : as, In bello, in the 
war. But when an adjective is added, the preposition is omitted : 
as, Bello Puiiico ; in the Punic war. 



86 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

2. Duration of time (time how long) is expressed by the accusa- 
tive without a preposition : as, 

Ag-er multos annos quievit. The field lay fallow many years. 

Note. Per is used to express duration when greater precision is 
required. 

3. Ago is abhinc, followed by the words expressing time, in the 
accusative or ablative : as, 

Abhinc decem dies (or diebus) Romarn profectus est. He set 
out for Rome ten days ago. 

Note. Abhinc precedes the expression of time. 

4. The following phrases will be useful : 

Decem annos post. Ten years after (post is an adverb). 

Decem annos ante. Ten years before. 

Nonaglnta annos natus. Ninety years old. 

Minor decem annos hatus. Less than ten years old. 

Maior decem annos natus. More than ten years old. 

Priore anno quam e vita excessit. The year before he died. 

Pridie quam pervenit. The day before he arrived. 

Postridie quam. . . . The day after . . . . 

In posterum diem. For the following day. 

Solvet ad Kalendas. He will pay by the first of the month. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

i. I asked him why the nights were so long in winter. 2. Do 
not tell me that you knew this four years ago. 3. There is nothing 
to prevent him from doing it within three hours. 4. It is said that 
he died at Tarentum when scarcely thirty years of age. 5. It was 
to the interest of the country that he should be shut up in pris'on 
during (per} the rest of his life. 6. At dawn he will move his camp 
to the foot of the hill. 7. Six months ago, he might have acted 
otherwise. 8. He knew better than you that we could not cross ra 
ditch twenty feet deep. 9. Are not the swallows absent in the 
winter months? 10. O ! that I had seen him the day before he 



PERSONAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 87 

died. vil. Ask them to do it within the next ten days. 12. Tell me 
how many months you intend to be "a way. 13. I believe that they 
will stay in the beautiful city of London for a few years. 14. Will 
they remain in this city the whole summer ? 15. On the fourth day 
they will sail to the island of Rhodes. 16. On the same day the 
Romans had a bridge built across the stream. 1 7. Tell me at what 
o'clock they intend to be here. 18. We should have sent them 
flowers in summer. 19. In three months these two legions will be 
sent into camp. 20. Are not our harbors closed all winter by ice ? 
21. I set out from home in the morning and returned home in the 
evening. 22. After delaying in Rhodes for three months, they 
were unwilling to return. 23. He ordered the fleet to follow within 
ten days. 24. I regret that I should have been deceived by this 
man for three whole months. ',,.-25. Wretch that I am ! I promised 
to pay him to-morrow. 26. The same day I asked him how much 
the ship had cost. 27. They attacked the place with more daring 
than discretion. 28. Don't you think that he is more than thirty 
years of age ? 2Q. I believe that in this battle more than five 
hundred men fell. 30. The art of writing was invented many years 
ago. 



37. PERSONAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE 
PRONOUNS. 

1. The pronouns of the first and second persons are rarely ex- 
pressed, except for emphasis or contrast : as, 

Ego laudo sed tu vituperas. / praise, but you blame (pronouns 
expressed because in antithesis, i.e., opposed to each other). 

Bg-o illud dicam. For my part I will say this (pronoun expressed 
because emphatic). 

Note. The genitives nostrum and vestrum are always used 
partitively : as, Unus nostrum, one of us. Otherwise nostri and 
vestri are used : as, Memor nostri, mindful of us. 

2. The personal pronouns of the third person are wanting, but 
are supplied by the demonstratives is, hie, or ille, this, that. 



88 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

The common words for he, she, it, when they are expressed in 
Latin, are is, ea, id. Is is used to refer to some person or thing 
already mentioned : as, 

Apud Helvetios long-e nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit Org-etorix I 
is coniurationem nobilitatis fecit. Among the Helvetians, Orge- 
torix was by far the noblest and most wealthy; he formed a con- 
spiracy among the nobility. (Here is refers to Org-etorix.) 

Note. Is expresses the article a or the, used emphatically 
before a relative : as, Redde eum librum quern abstulisti, restore 
the book which you took away. 

3. Hie, this, is the demonstrative of the ist person. It refers 
to the person or thing near me (the speaker) : as, 

Hie liber, this book. So too : Haec patria, this land of ours ; 
haec vita, this present life ; his sex diebus, within the last six days. 

4. Iste, that of yours, is the demonstrative of the 2nd person. 
It refers to the person addressed : as, 

Iste liber, that book near you; ista opinio, that opinion you Jwld; 
iste amicus, that friend of yours. It often has the idea of contempt, 
and is therefore often found in the sense of an opponent in a law- 
suit, just as hie means my friend here, my client here (i.e., the one 
near me). 

5. Ille, that yonder, is the demonstrative of the 3rd person. It 
refers to a person or thing other than those present. It may ex- 
press, therefore : 

(a) The remote in time, as opposed to the present (which is 
expressed by hie) : as, Ilia antlquitas, that far-off past ; illis diebus 
in those by-gone days. 

(b} That well known, the celebrated : as, Ilia Medea, the far- 
famed Medea; ille Caesar, the renowned Caesar. 

6. Hie and ille are often contrasted. They are then used : 
(a) Of two persons already mentioned. In this case hie 

relates to the nearer, the latter; ille, to the more remote, the 
former ; as, Romulum Numa excepit; hie pace, ille bello melior 
fuit. To Romulus Numa succeeded; the latter excelled in peace^ 
the former in war. 



PERSONAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 89 

(b) For the one and the other : as, Neque hoc neque illud, 
neither the one nor the other y et hie et ille, both the one and the 
other (et eb=both and). 

(f) For some and others: as, Hi pacem, illi bellum cupiunt, 
some wish peace,, others war. 

7. Ille is joined to quidem (indeed), with a concessive force : as, 
Non multum ille quidem nee saepe dicebat, sed Latine loquen- 

do cuivis erat par. He did not speak much or often, but in speaking 
Latin he was equal to any one (=although he did not.., yet...). 

Note i. -The pronouns tu and vos, when used with quidem, 
have the same concessive force, but are of rare occurrence : as, 
Oratorias exercitationes non tu quidem reliquisti sed certe phil- 
osophiam illis anteposuisti. Rhetorical exercises you have not in- 
deed abandoned, but you have at all events preferred philosophy to 
them. 

Note 2. Certe, at all events ; certo, for certain. 

8. Ille often begins a sentence to refer to a noun-clause coming 
after : as, 

Illud vereor ne fames in urbe sit. This is what (the following 
is what) I am afraid of, that there will be famine in the city. 

Scitum est illud Catonis. The following saying of Cato is good. 

9. In phrases like My house and that of my friend, Latin omits 
the demonstrative : as, 

Domus mea et amici veniit. My house and that of my friend 
have been sold (p. 63, 4). 

Oblivionis artem quam memoriae malo. I prefer the art of for- 
getting to that of memory (malo, being compounded of mag-is, 
more, and volo, I wish, is naturally followed by quam). 

Note. If a change of case is required, the noun must be 
repeated: as, Liberi nostri cariores sunt amicorum liberis, our 
children are dearer than those of our friends (liberis, abl. after 
comparative ; p. 76, 2). 

10. In phrases like This is life, the demonstrative agrees in 
Latin with the predicate noun : as, 



90 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Haec est vita. This is life. 

Ea demum est vera feHcitas. This (and this only] is true 
happiness. 

11. And that too is et is (or isque): as 

Bum cognovi optimis studiis deditum, idque a puero. / have 
known him to be de-voted to sound learning and that too from a boy. 

12. Idem, same, is often used to express our also, at the same 
time, at once: as, 

Cicero orator erat idemque philosophus. Cicero was an orator 
and, at the same time, a philosopher. 

13. Ipse, self, may be added for emphasis to a noun, a pronoun, 
or a numeral : as, 

Caesar ipse imperavit. Caesar Jiimself commanded. 

Tu ipse lioc fecisti. You yourself did this. 

Se' ipsum interfecit. He killed himself. 

Ipse navem aedificavit. He built the ship by himself. 

Triginta ipsi dies. Exactly thirty days. 

Adventu ipso hostes terruit. By his mere (very) arrival, he 
frightened the enemy. 

Ipse hoc vidi. / saw this with my own eyes. 

Ipse is also added in the genitive, singular or plural, to a posses- 
sive pronoun to express the English own : as, 

Mea ipsius culpa. My own fault. 

Sua ipsius domus. His own house. 

Vestra ipsorum amicitia. Your own friendship. 

This gen. is in apposition with the gen. implied in the possessive 
(mea=mei, of me, gen. of eg-o). 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 

I. He thought that the town would be stormed on the same night. 

2. Tell me when that friend of yours intends to set out for Rhodes. 

3. I believe that he sailed in seven days from Athens to Italy. 

4. Ask him how long this legion will remain in camp. 5. You have. 



REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 91 

a small town, no doubt (p. 89, 7), but a very populous one. 6. He 
says that he belongs to a very large city and that too a famous one. 
7. Restore us the freedom you have snatched away from us. 8. He 
complained that his own house had been burnt by the soldiers. 9. 
Of these two gods, the former was distinguished as a horseman, the 
latter as a boxer. 10. For my own part I do not know how it was 
done; ask him. n. Do not inquire with regard to that matter of 
yours. 12. The following saying of the poet is well known, that 
Fortune aids the bold. 13, You must give back this money to-day. 
14. Fool that I was! I preferred gold to honor. 15. What need 
have you of these ships? 16. Tell that friend of yours that I don't 
know what I ought to say. 17. You have had a bridge built, no 
doubt; but who will use it? 18. One ought not always to believe 
even the master himself. 19. Everyone says that those things 
should be left in camp. 20. He said that he had come to Karthage 
within the last few days. 21. He also begs us to wait for him in 
Corinth. 22. I saw him on the same day with my own eyes, lead- 
ing an army across the river. 23. Ask him why he sent us the 
same things as before. 24. He says that on that very day he will 
be in Greece. 25. Was he not at the same time a great philoso- 
pher? 26. This only, he said, was true wisdom, to control one's 
self. 27. The top of the mountain was occupied by him at dawn. 
28. He undertook the war in the end of winter and finished it in 
the middle of summer. 29. He said that we had always preferred 
our safety to that of the country. 30. Is it not your business to de- 
cide whether this concerns you or not? 



38. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. A reflexive pronoun is one that refers to the subject of a 
verb : as, 

Tu te laudas. You praise yourself. Here te is a reflexive re- 
ferring to the subject of laudas. 

The first and second personal pronouns are used as reflexives of 
the first and second persons : as, 



92 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Ego me laudo. I praise myself. 

Nos nos laudamus. We praise ourselves. 

Tu te laudas. You praise yourself. 

Vos vos laudatis. You praise yourselves. 

Note. The suffix -met is added to a reflexive for emphasis : as, 
An temet contemnis? Do you despise yourself? 

USE OF SE. 

2. The forms sui, sibi, se (himself, herself, itself, themselves, 
oneself; or him, her, etc.), usually refer to the subject of the~ mairT 
verb : as, 

Brutus se interfecit. Brutus killed Jiimself. 

Cicero effecerat ut Curius consilia Catilmae sibi proderet. 
Cicero had managed that Curius should betray Catiline's plans to 
him (Cicero). 

3. When used as the subject of an infinitive, se refers to the sub- 
ject of the verb on which the infinitive depends : as, 

Scio eum dixisse se id fecisse. / know he said that he had 
done it (Here se refers to eum). 

4. Se may refer to the object of a sentence, if it may do so with- 
out ambiguity : as, 

Reliquos se converters cog-it. He compels the rest to turn. 

5. In certain phrases, se is used for self, without any reference 
to the subject of the sentence : as, 

Haec per se expetenda sunt. These things are to be sought in 
themselves (i.e., for their own sake). 

So too : Sui compos, master of one's self; sui flducia, self-con- 
fidence. 

6. When him, her, etc., refer to the subject of a subordinate 
clause, ipse is generally used : as, 

Rogavit ut eos dederent qui ipsos prodidissent. He asked them 
to surrender those who had betrayed them (se would refer to the 
subject of rog-avit). 



REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 

7. The rules for the use of suus are the same as for the use of 
se. Thus : 

(a) Suus usually refers to the subject of the main verb : as, Eos 
gladio suo interfecit. He killed them with his sword. 

(b) Suus may be used of the object, if no ambiguity arises : as, 
lussit eos ad sua quemque signa redire. He ordered them to 
return each to his own standard. 

Note. Quisque, each, is often joined in this way with suus. 

(c) Suus is used in certain phrases without any reference to the 
subject : as, Sui cives, one's own countrymen; sua sponte, of one's 
own accord. 

(d) His, her, etc., referring to the subject of a subordinate clause, 
are expressed by the genitive of ipse: as, Rogavit ne se dederent iis 
qui inirmci sui et ipsorum essent. He begged them not to give him 
up to those who were his enemies and theirs. 

8. In turning He killed Cams with his own sword (i.e., Caius's 
sword), it is better to make Caius the subject of a passsive verb in 
order that suus may, as usual, refer to the subject : as, 

Caius gladio suo ab eo interfectus est. Caius was killed by him 
with his own sword. 

9. Inter se may be used to express the English reciprocal pro- 
noun one another : as, 

Furtim inter se aspiciebant. They looked furtively at one an- 
other. 

Inter se differunt. They differ from one another. 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

I. He said that he did not pity you, but himself. 2. Hannibal 
his own countrymen banished. 3. Don't you think that he said he 
could do it? 4. I believe that they were all killed with his sword 
5. He said there were many in the city who would never forgive 
him. 6. He should have known that they had destroyed his native 
city and their own allies. 7. After selling his house, did he not re- 
main many years at Athens? 8. He begged them not to injure him 



94 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

and their own friends. 9. Have they not begged Caesar to Kelp 
them? 10. It does not concern me whether he returned to his 
countrymen or not. 1 1. I hear that Caesar has been obeyed by all. 
12. It is said that the cityof Rome was founded by Romulus. 13. He 
asks whether he ought not to be believed. 14. You know how to praise 
yourselves. 15. He said that he would drive the enemy from our 
borders. 16. I believe that his father begged his son to come to 
him at once. 17. He took these precautions that the enemy might 
not surprise him. 18. The following was what I was afraid of, that 
they would be banished. 19. This he said was life, to have the 
greatest freedom and knowledge. 20. He thought that, without 
his aid, they would never cross the river. 21. I hear that you are 
ashamed of your conduct, and that he is not. 22. Don't you think 
that the man (use is) who is always praising you is not a true friend? 
23. He says he will lead them back to camp at dawn. 24. Advise 
him to go into the city and look for his friend (supine). 25. To 
this (hue) was added (the fact) that he had killed himself (use ut). 
26. He said that the birds returned in the spring. 27. I am afraid 
that riches are dearer to many than honor. 28. I am persuaded 
that you should take a walk every day. 29. Have they made a 
good use of this opportunity? 30. We ought to grieve, not only 
at our own troubles, but also at those of our friends. 



39. ON THE TRANSLATION OP "ANY." QUIS, 
QUISQUAM, AND QUIVIS. 

1. The English any is translated by the indefinite pronoun quis, 
quae (or qua), quid (or quod), after si (if), nisi or ni (unless), ne, 
num, quo or quanto (p. 78, 6, note) : as, 

Si quis hoc dicit, errat. If anyone says this, he is wrong 

Nisi quid vis, abibo. Unless you want anything, I will go away. 

Ne quid nimis facias. Do not do anything to excess. 

Num quis infantibus irascitur ? Is anyone angry with children? 

Quo quis callidior est, eo invisior. The more cunning anyone is* 
the more hated he is. 



TRANSLATION OF "ANY.'* QUISQCAM AND QUIVIS. 5 

Note i. Instead of quis, quisquam may be used for aa em- 
phatic any : as, Si quisquam sapiens erat, is erat. If anyone was 

wise, he was. 

Note 2. Of the two neuter singular forms, quid is a pronoun, 
quod, an adjective : as, Vereor ne quid subsit doli, / am afraid 
lest any guile may lurk beneath; num quod offlcium aliud maius 
est ? Is any other duty greater ? 

2. Any, in the sense of any you please, every, is quivis (from 
quis, any, and vis, you wish) : as, 

Non cuiusvis est adire Corinthum. // is not every one who can 
visit Corinth (p. 59, 2). 
Instead of quivis, quilibet may be used : as, 

Periculum quodlibet adire paratus. Ready to face any danger 
you please. 

3. After a negative, any is quisquam, or if used as an adjective 
ullus : as, 

Nee quisquam hoc dicet. Nor will anyone say this. 
Negat quemquam id velle. He denies that anyone wishes this. 
Nee ulla res unquam atrocior fuit. Nor was anything ever 
more atrocious. 

In all these cases the pronoun, taken in conjunction with the nega- 
tive, has the force of none or no one. 

Note. Instead of And no one at the head of a sentence, Latin 
prefers Nor anyone; nee quisquam, therefore, often begins a Latin 
sentence. So too, for et nullus use nee ullus (as above), and for 
et nunquam, nee unquam. 

4. Quisquam and ullus are also to be used for any after what is 
called a virtual negative, i.e., a word or construction that im- 
plies 'a negative. Such words are vix (scarcely}, sine (withouf), 
comparatives, and interrogatives that expect the answer No : as. 

Vix quisquam reperiri potuit. Scarcely anyone could be found. 
Hoc sine ullo auxilio feci. / have done this without any help. 
Fortior fuit quam quisquam amicorum. He was braver than 



96 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

any of his friends (a virtual negative, because virtually none of his 
friends was so brave}. 

Num tu me existimas ab ullo malle mea legi quam a te ? Do 
you think that I would prefer my works to be read by anyone rather 
than by you ? 

5. Any, where it means some (i.e., not none} is aliquis or, rarely, 
quispiam : as 

Si ad aliquam spem commodi Fortuna nos reservavit, bene est. 
If For time has reserved us for any hope of advantage, it is well. 
Nemo est sine aliqua virtute. No one exists without some virtue. 

Note. Aliquis has usually the force of some one : as, Vult aliquie 
videri, he wishes to seem some one. 

6. Other compounds of the indefinite quis should be noticed. 
Thus: 

(a) Quidam, some o?ie, a certain one, a, is used of a person or 
thing known to the speaker but not fully described : as, 

Tempore quodam quidam homo Aesopo lapidem impegit. Once 
upon a time a certain man threw a stone at Aesop. 

Note i. Quidam is frequently used to apologise for the use of a 
bold or figurative expression : as, In vigilia quadam mansi. I kept 
(as it were} upon the watch. In that case, in translating into Eng- 
lish, quidam may usually be omitted. 

Note 2. Quidem (indeed), so commonly joined to pronouns, 
should be carefully distinguished from quidam. See p. 89, 7. 

(b) Nescio quis, some or other, is used as a single word : as, 
Nescio quis prope me loquitur. Somebody or other is speaking 

near me. 

Hoc nescio quo pacto contigit. This, in some strange way> has 
happened (p. 31, 4, note 2). 

(c) Quisque is the English each, every ; it never begins a sent- 
ence: as, 

Quod cuique obtingit, id quisque teneat. What falls to each, let 
each person keep (notice the relative clause, as usual thrown 
forward). 



^TRANSLATION OF "ANY." QUISQUAM AND QUIVIS. 97 

Quisque is frequently joined to the reflexive suus, in which case 
it is written after, never before, suus : as, 

Suae quemque fortunae maxime poenitet. Every one is greatly 
dissatisfied wzth his own fortune. 

Quisque is frequently found with a superlative : as, 

Ex philosophis optimus quisque confltetur multa se ignorare. 
All the best of the philosophers admit that they are ignorant oj 
many things. 

(d) Instead of num quis, ecquis is often used to express im- 
patience : as, 

Ecquis hoc ostium aperiet ? Will anyone open this door ? 

(e) Quisnam, who, pray, is also frequently used for quis in 
questions, to express impatience : as, 

Quidnam titai negotii fuit in meis aedibus ? What business had 
you, pray, in my house ? (p. 60, 3). 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 

i. No one will attempt anything without assistance. 2. Scarcely 
anyone knew the magnitude of the disaster. 3. Do not be angry 
with anyone. 4. Such a thing may happen to anyone. 5. Nature 
can do anything, and indeed without any trouble. 6. When he 
hears anything of that kind, he always says that the story is in- 
vented. 7. Let each one keep his own. 8. Do you think that 
justice ever injured anyone? 9. He knew better than anyone that 
some of the soldiers had been killed. 10. If anyone will dare to 
defend him, he shall live. 11. What may happen to anyone, may 
happen to you. 12. Don't you think that the cleverer a person is, 
the more hated he is ? 13. Once upon a time a certain man set 
out to find Atlantis. 14. Is it my fault, if some persons are afraid 
of me ? 15. He thought that he was something in oratory (gerund 
of dico). 1 6. He begged that some part of his work might be 
reduced (minuo). 17. If anyone bore the hardships of life bravely, 
it was he. 1 8. I believe that he was more learned than any of us. 
19. Was it of importance to anyone that this man should be 
spared ? 20. I will hardly say this, that all good mien are sorry for 
him. 21. It is clear to anyone that the farmer must plough hi= 
8 



98 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

fields in spring. 22. I believe that scarcely anyone intended to 
come to Rome that day. 23. I am afraid that some disaster is 
threatening. 24. Scarcely any letters can reach us. 25. Do not 
hesitate to say whether you need any help. 26. It seemed that all 
loyal men were estranged from us. 27. Does anyone know the 
purpose of his coming ? (p. 32, i). 28. It happened that I was in 
the city on that day. 29. It remains that I should show that every- 
thing has been made for the sake of man. 30. Will anyone believe 
that he is ashamed of his mistake ? 31. Whom does this concern 
pray ? 



40. CLASSIFICATION OP SENTENCES. 

1. Sentences are either simple, compound, or complex. A simple 
sentence contains only a single statement : as, 

Civitas pacem amat. The state loves peace. 

A compound sentence contains two or more statements, usually 
connected by a conjunction or a relative : as, 

Fratrem tuum vidi et eum (or quern) brevi consulem fore spero. 
I saw your brother and I hope that he will soon be consul. 

Each statement in a compound sentence is called a clause, and the 
clauses are said to be co-ordinate, i.e., of equal grammatical value. 

Note. The relative is often used in Latin to connect co-ordinate 
clauses. 

2. A complex sentence contains two or more clauses, one of 
which (the main clause) contains the principal assertion, while the 
others (the subordinate clauses) stand in a subordinate or depend- 
ent relation to it. 

3. Dependent or subordinate clauses are called noun-clauses, ad^ 
jectival clauses, or adverbial clauses, according as they perform the 
function of a noun, adjective, or adverb. Thus, in I know who he 
is, the clause Who he is is a noun-clause, object of know; in I saw 
the man whom you seek, the clause Whom- you seek is an adjectival 



CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES. 99 

clause, qualifying man ; in He came that he might see the town, the 
clause That he might see the town is an adverbial clause of purpose, 
modifying came. 

NOUN-CLAUSES. 

4. As shown in 9, a noun-clause introduced by ut follows verbs 
meaning to ask, command, or advise : as, 

Peto ut aurum reddatur. I ask that the gold be restored ( =the 
restoration of the gold). 

5. As shown in 16, a noun-clause (indirect question) is found 
depending on verbs of asking, knowing, etc. : as, 

Scio quis sit. / know who he is. 

6. Quod meaning because, the fact that, with the indicative, often 
introduces a noun-clause in Latin : as, 

Magnum est hoc, quod victor victis pepercit. This is an im- 
portant matter, the fact that when victorious he spared the van- 
quished. 

Quod, with the indicative, is often found in this sense after verbs 
and phrases of emotion like gaudeo, laetor (rejoice), queror (com- 
plain), glorior (boast), iuvat (it delights), dolet (it grieves), 
gratum est (it is pleasant), minim est (it is wonderful) : as, 

Vehementer laetor quod scripsisti. / am very glad that you 
have written. 

Mini gratum est quod venisti. Your coming is very welcome 
to me. 

So too : Peropportune accidit quod id rogasti. Your asking that 
was a lucky accident. 

This quod will often be useful in translating English verbal or 
abstract nouns : as, 

His saving the country is a wonderful thing. Mirum est quod 
patriam servavit. 

I pass over his betrayal of the king. Quod regem prodidit, 
omitto. 

7. A noun-clause, introduced by ut with subjunctive, or by quod 
with iudic., is used after accedit, in the sense of it is added: as, 



100 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Hue accessit ut caecus esset. To tJiis was added the fact that 
he was blind. 

Accedit quod patrem tuum amo. There is added the fact that 1 
love your father. 

8. A noun-clause, introduced by ut with the subjunctive, is used 
to define a previous noun (usually the subject of sum, I am} : as, 

Commune vitium est in liberis civitatibus ut invidia g-loriae 
comes sit. // is a common vice in free states that envy is the at* 
tendant of glory. 

Cultus deorum est optimus ut eos pura mente veneremur. The 
best worship of the gods is to adore them with a pure heart. 

ADJECTIVAL CLAUSES. 

9. All clauses introduced by the relative qui, quae, quod, are 
adjectival when they can be changed into an attributive adjec- 
tive : as, 

Reges, qui boni sunt, amantur (=boni reges). Kings, who are 
good) are loved. 

Virum video quern quaeritis. / see the man whom you seek. 

ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 

10. Adverbial clauses modify verbs and adjectives, and are in 
troduced by a conjunction or a relative adverb. They are divided 
into eight classes as follows : 

1. Local (those that denote place), introduced by ubi (where), 
und (whence), and quo (whither). 

2. Temporal (those that denote time), introduced by quum 
(when), dum (while), postquam (after that), priusquam (before 
that), etc. 

3. Final (those that denote an end or purpose) ; see 7. 

4. Consecutive (those that denote a consequence or result) ; 
see g 8. 

5. Causal (those that denote a cause or reason), introduced by 
or quia (because),, quum or quoniam (since). 



CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES. 101 

6. Concessive (those that denote a concession) introduced by etsi, 
quaxnquam, quamvis, etiamsi (although). 

7. Comparative (those that denote comparison or proportion), 
introduced by ut (as), quasi, velut (as if) &c. 

8. Conditional (those that denote a condition), introduced by si 
(if), nisi (unless), dum (provided that). 

EXERCISE XL. 

I. To this will be added the fact that the accused (use is quij is a 
rich man. 2. The second thing is that you should do something great. 
3. I was afraid that the letter you wrote me was lost. 4. It seems 
he is very like the brother whom you saw. 5. Don't you think that 
many things are better than wealth ? 6. He wrote me to come as 
quickly as possible to Italy. 7. I saw your sister at Athens and 
heard that she was soon to start for Rome (co-ordinate rel.). 8. 
You loiew how slow he was. 9. We shall soon know which of you 
is favored. 10. Tell him to give you the gold to keep. n. I be- 
lieve he will take a contract for burying the dead. 12. You should 
not linger in town against the wish of your father. 13. Shall I ask 
him to tell us whether the house is selling low or not ? 14. I asked 
him to do it at once. 15. I told them the date of the intended 
abdication (use verb). 16. There is no doubt that there were 
brave men before Agamemnon. 17. After he had set out to attack 
the camp, he heard that it had been taken by storm. 18. Learn- 
ing this, he did not hesitate to follow them. 19. I believe there is 
less water in the well than ever. 20. The ships were so high that 
we could not climb into them. 21. This was their custom, to sell 
their horses in the spring. 22. Does he intend to go to his country- 
house at Baiae to-day ? 23. I believe he denies that he has sent 
anyone to us. 24. He used to say that anything at all was 
enough for him. 25. This is a great thing, namely, that all will be 
spared. 26. It is not for anyone to assert that they will obey the 
laws. 27. What does it matter to you whether he has accepted 
gifts or not ? 28. It is a wonderful thing their being unwilling to 
consult their own interest. 29. I am very sorry that you came to 
help us. 30. He used to complain of men's forgetting their friends. 
31. Let us not boast of doing what so many others have done, 



102 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

J 

41. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. LOCAL AND TEMP- 
ORAL CLAUSES. 

1. Local adverbial clauses add to the statement of the main 
clause the idea of place : as, 

Nolo vivere ubi tyrannus est. I do not wish to live where there 
is a tyrant. 

Quo vult et qua vult, vagatur. He strolls where he will and in 

what direction he will. 

| 

Note. Ubi expresses rest\ quo, motion towards; and qua, di- 
rection. \ 

2. The verb of the local adverbial clause is in the indicative 
except (a) in indirect narration (p. 4, note 3) ; (b) when it has a 
final force (i.e., is used to express a purpose) : as, 

Dixit se, quo vellet, vagari. He said that he strolled where he 
wished (direct=quo volo vagor. / stroll where I wish]. 

Massiliam abiit ubi exulet. He has gone off to Massilia to live 
in exile there. (Here the adverbial clause expresses both place 
and purpose; i.e., ubi=ut ibi, that there}. 

TEMPORAL CLAUSES. POSTQUAM. DUM. 
PRIUSQUAM. 

3. Temporal adverbial clauses define the time of the action of 
the main verb : as, 

Haec feci, dum potui. I did this while I could. Here the clause 
dum potui is temporal, limiting the main verb feci. 

POSTQUAM. 

4. Temporal conjunctions meaning after that, as soon_.as^ like 
postquam, simul, simul ac (or, before a vowel, atque), ubi, ut 
(primum), quum primum, are followed by the indicative: as, 

Simul atque fcaec audivit, abiit. After he had heard this, he 
went away, or No sooner had he heard this, than, Q^c. 

Note. -The perfect is used after these conjunctions for the 
English pluperfect. 



TEMPORAL CLAUSES. DUM. 103 

Postquam id animadvertit, copias suas Caesar in proximum col- 
lem subducit. After he had noticed this, Caesar withdraws his 
forces to the nearest hill. 

Ubi se paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida incendunt. When 
they thought they were ready, they set fire to the towns. 

Ea res ut Helvetiis nuntiata est, eum causam dicere coegerunt. 
When this fact was reported to the Helvetii, they compelled him to 
plead his cause. 

Nostri, simul in arido constiterunt, impetum fecerunt. Our 
men, as soon as they had set foot on dry land, made an attack. 

Note. Postquam with the perfect indie, may be sometimes used 
to supply the place of the perfect part. act. which is wanting in 
Latin (p. 49, 8) : as, Seeing (i.e., having seen) this, he groaned. 
Postquam haec vidit, ingemuit. 

DUM. 

5. Temporal conjunctions meaning while or until, like dum, 
donee, quoad, take the indicative when they mean while, as long 
as : as, 

Dum ea Romani parant, iam oppidum oppugnabatur. While 
the Romans were making these pi eparations, the town was already 
being besieged. 

Dum hie ero, te amabo. I shall love you, while I am here. 

Note i. When the time expressed by the dum-clause includes 
the time of the action of the main verb, the present tense is used in 
Latin instead of the English past. 

Note 2. When the time of the temporal clause is really future^ 
the future tense is used in Latin for the English present. 

6. Dum, donee, quoad, meaning until, take the indicative when 
used to express time alone : as, 

Dum rediit Marcellus, silentium fuit. There was silence until 
Marcellus returned. 

Milo in senatu fuit eo die, quoad senatus dimissus est. Milo 
was in the senate on that day, until the senate was dismissed. 

Non veniet dum scripsero. He will n?t c<um till / write. 



104 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Note. Dum (until) is followed by the fut.-pf. for the English 
pres., when the action expressed by the verb of the temporal clause 
is to be over before that of the main verb begins. 

But when dum, &c., express some further idea of purpose or 
expectation (i.e., are final as well as temporal), they require the 
subjunctive: as, 

. Dum naves convenirent, exspectavit. He waited till the ships 
should assemble (i.e., in order that they might assemble; purpose). 
See p. 20, 2. 

Differant dum ira defervescat. Let them put off till their anger 
cools (i.e., in order that their anger may coot). 

Impetum hostium sustinuit quoad ceteri pontem interrumperent. 
He -withstood the attack of the enemy till the rest should break down 
the bridge (i.e., that they might break down the bridge). 

Note. Dum for dummodo, provided that, is joined with the 
subjunctive : as, Oderint dum metuant. Let them hate^ provided 
that they fear. 

PRIUSQUAM. 

7. Temporal conjunctions meaning before that, like priusquam 
and antequam, take the indicative when they mark simple priority 
in time : as, Priusquam lucet, adsunt. They are here before it is 
light. 

Filios convocavlt, antequam mortuus est. _He called together his 
sons before he died. 

Note. These take the future-perfect for the English present, 
when the action expressed by the verb of the temporal clause is to 
be over before that of the main verb begins : as, Antequam aliquo 
loco consedero, ne longas a me litter-as exspectaverfs Before I 
settle (literally, shall have settled) somewhere, do not expect a long 
letter from me (p. 26, 3). 

8. Antequam and priusquam take the subjunctive, however, 
when used to express soH!e further v&K&jtiUkttiention or purpose 
or of a prevented result : as, 

Priusquam se hostes ex terrore reciperent, in fines eorum ex- 
ercitum duxit, Before the enemy recovered from their panic^ he 



TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 105 

led his army into their territory (final \=in order that they 
might not recover , etc.) 

Priusquam pugnaretur, nox intervenit. Night came on before 
the battle 'was fought (result prevented). See p. 38, 2. 

Note, Antequam and priusquam are often written in two 
words : as, Ante rorat quam pluit, it drops before it rains. Written 

thus, they are often used for the English not until: as, Non 

prius respondebo quam tacueris, I shall not answer until you 
are silent, 

9. In indirect narration, the verb of a temporal adverbial clause 
is in the subjunctive : as, 

Dixit eos, ut primum luceret, adesse. He said that they were 
there^ as soon as it was light. 

EXERCISE XLI. 

i. As soon as he hears this, he will go away. 2. No sooner had 
they departed, than a second army was seen approaching. 3. I 
should like you to be in a country where you are known. 4. He 
will wait until the rest of the ships assemble there. 5. They will 
not come here until we write them. 6. Before I answer him with 
regard to the other matters, I wilt answer him with regard to my- 
self. 7. They kept gradually advancing until they came to the 
camp. 8. I believe that they had already crossed the Alps into 
Italy, two hundred years before they captured Rome. 9. He did 
not leave the city before he had an interview with me. 10. He 
told me, that before he set out he would have an interview with me. 
1 1. Wait until he comes. 12. I will not tell him why I sent for you, 
unti-l I return to Rome. 13. He did not take part in the battle 
until his father was killed. 14. He falls into Scylla while he 
desires to avoid Charybdis. 15. He used to say that, while there 
was life (anima\ there was hope. 16. He was detained until the 
consul was consulted. 17. While he was fortifying the hill, the 
enemy stormed the camp. 18. They did%t cease to fly until they 
reached the river. 19. Before he had any pleasure in life, death 
took him away. 20. They were sent back to the place (eo) from 
which they came. 21. Wait until you are obeyed.- 22. He decided 



106 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

to consult the senate before he set out. 23. I thought that he was 
in the senate that day until it was dismissed. 24. Do you believe 
that it always drops before it rains ? 25. He sustained the attack 
until the bridge was broken. 26. All this was done before I left 
Italy. 27. You can do nothing more pleasing to me than this. 
28. I can make him as gentle as a lamb. 29. He used to say 
that nothing dried. more quickly than a tear. 30. Nothing is more 
worthy of a good man than compassion. 31. Tell me where they 
are who say that he did not know Greek. 32. They did not take 
up arms until the trace had expired (exeo). 33. It is his part to 
say whether he thinks that this concerns him or not. 34. Provided 
that you have the zeal, you will always have the ability. 



42. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. SYNTAX OP 
QUUM. 

1. Quum (cum) when, simply expressing contemporaneous time 
(called quum temporal} takes the indicative : as, 

Quum Caesar in Galliam venit, alterius factionis principes erant 
Aedui. When Caesar came into Gaul, the Aedui were the leaders 
of the one party. 

Quum verba faciunt, maiores extollunt. When they speak, they 
extol their ancestors. 

Nondum profectus erat quum haec g-esta sunt. He had not yet 
departed when these thi?igs took place. 

Te videbo quum potero, / shall see you when I can. 

Quum rure rediero, tu Eomae eris. When I return from the 
country, you will be in Rome. 

In these sentences, quum is a relative adverb and corresponds to 
a suppressed correlative turn (then) in the main clause. 

Note. Quum when it refers to the future, takes the fut. tense for 
the English pres., and the fut.-perf. when the action of the verb of 
the temporal clause is over before that of the main verb begins. 

2. Quum meaning since (called quum causal], requires the sub- 
junctive : as, 



TEMPORAL CLAUSES. SYNTAX OF QUUM. 107 

Quae quum ita sint, Catilina, perge. As this is so, Catiline ', 
go on. 

3. But when used with the imperfect or pluperfect tense, quum 
usually takes the subjunctive, even when no idea of cause is 
implied : as, 

Decessit Agesilaus quum in portum venisset. Agesilaus died 
when he had entered the harbor. 

SUBSTITUTES FOR PERFECT PARTICIPLE ACT. 

4. Quum with the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive, is a com- 
mon substitute for the perf. part, active, which is wanting in 
Latin : as, 

Quum haec dixisset, abiit. Having spoken these words, he de- 
parted. 

There are, therefore, four substitutes for the perf. part, active : 

(a) Quum + imperf. or pluperf. (b) Postquam + perf. indie, 
subj. 

(f) The ablative absolute. (d) The perf. part, of a synony- 

mous deponent. 

Thus : Having spoken these words, is : 

(a) Quum haec dixisset. (b) Postquam haec dixit. 

(c) His dictis ( = these things (d) Haec locutus. 
said). 

5. Quum with the indicative (called quum frequentative) is 
often used for quoties, as often as, whenever. 

In this sense, the perfect is used for the English present, and the 
pluperfect for the English past : as, 

Quum rosam vidi, turn ver esse arbitror. Whenever I see the 
rose, then I judge that it is spring. 

Quum impetum fecerant, hostes cedere cogebantur. Whenever 
they made a charge ', the enemy were forced to retire. 

After quum, however, in this sense, the subjunctive is used by 
Livy and Tacitus : as ? 



108 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Cum hoc vidissent, convolabant. Whenever they saw this, they 
flocked together. 

6. Quum with the subjunctive, sometimes has a concessive force 
meaning although : as, 

Pylades quum sis, dices te esse Orestem. Though you art 
Py lades, you will say you are Orestes. 

Note. This meaning of quum may be used to translate the 
English instead of or without, with a verbal noun : as, 

Quum dicere deberet, tacuit. Instead of speaking, he held his 
peace (literally, when he ought to have spoken). 

Quum hostes persequi deberet, ad urbem rediit. Instead oj 
(or without) following up the enemy, he returned to the city. 

7. Quum with the impf. subjunctive, is often joined with 
audivi : as, 

Saepe eum audivi quum diceret. / have often heard him saying 
(dicere or dicentem might also be used). 

8. Quum is never used interrogatively. Thus : 

When do you intend to speak ? Quando (never quum) dicturus oa? 

9. Cum. . . .turn are often found in the sense On the one hand 

on the other, both and : as, 

Hie cum ab ceteris turn a Xenophonte laudatus est. He was 
praised both by the others and by Xenoplion. 

EXERCISE XLIL 

i. When this bridge is destroyed (fut.-pf), who will contract to 
build another ? 2. When he had conquered Carthage, he returned 
to Rome. 3. When I hear him speak, I shall know whether he is 
the man or not. 4. When the ships were approaching Britain, a 
violent storm arose. 5. Being persuaded myself that we needed 
his help, I wrote to him to come. 6. When you have finished your 
work, you may go. 7. When they had reached the top of the hill, 
they saw a broad plain below them. 8. Phocion always remained 
poor, though he might (possum; p. 33, 5) have been rich. 9. When 
I was at Athens, I used to hear Zeno. 10. Instead of going to 



FINAt AND CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 100 

Athens, you remained at Rome. 1 1 . When I see him, I shall go on 
vo Arpmum. 12. When you read this, I shall perhaps have had an 
interview with him. 13. Being discontented (use poenitet) with his 
lot, he left the country. 14. Who can tell me when he intends to 
return ? 1 5. The more they have, the more they ask for. 16. When 
I saw that he spoke with judgment, I applauded. 17. Caesar told 
Cato that his (Cato's) words dipleased him. 18. He did not show 
what he thought himself. 19. The battle was not ended until the 
general was killed. 20. He used to say that a storm always threat- 
ened before it rose. 21. Though they could not have done much, still 
they might have spoken (p. 33, 5). 22. It never seemed to me that 
anyone could be happy when he was in misfortune (pi. of malum). 
23. Having conquered the greater pa^rt/of"the island, he died at 
Citium. 24. Whenever he came to a to\vR, he demanded hostages. 
25. Observing this, he marched against them at once. 26. Nature 
wished one (alter) man to stand in need of another (alter] ; for what 
one has, another lacks. 27. He said that we must return the 
money to-morrow. 28. When you had finished your work, you 
should have helped your friend. 29. By disbanding the army, he 
declared that the war was ended. 30. I did not know how many 
men there were. 31. You must pay when the day of payment 
(gerund) conies. 32. It is many years since you have been doing 
this (cum 4- pres. ind. : p. 34, 3). 33. Do you think that anything 
is harder than stone ? 



43. FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 
QITI FINAL. QUI CONSECUTIVE. 

1. For the syntax of ordinary final clauses, see 7. 

2. The relative qui (called qui final) is often used with the sub- 
junctive to express a purpose : as 

Misit legates aui pacem peterent. He Snt ambassadors to sue for 
peace (qui=ut ei, that they). 

Note. Relative adverbs, like ubi (where) and undo (whence), 
are used, like the relative pronoun, to express a purpose : as, 



110 LATI* PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Domum ubi habitaret leg-it. He chose a house where he might 
dwell (ubi=ut ibi, that there)\ 

Cupit habere unde solvat. He wants to have means to pay 
(unde-ut inde, that thence). 

3. In English, the infinitive is often used to denote a. purpose, 
but in Latin it is never so used in good prose. Such an infinitive 
may be expressed in Latin, as shown already, in various ways. 

Thus : He sent ambassadors to sue for peace may be expressed as 
follows : 

Legates misit ut pacem peterent (v& final). 

Legates misit qui pacem peterent (qui final). 

Legates misit ad pacem petendam (gerundive ace. with ad). 

Legates misit pacis petendae causa (gerundive genitive with 
causa). 

Legates misit ad pacem petendum (gerund ace. with ad). 

Legates misit pacem petendi causa (gerund genitive with causa). 

Legates misit pacem petitum (supine after verb of motion). 

Legates misit pacem petituros (future part, active, expressing a 
purpose). 

4. For the syntax of ordinary consecutive clauses, see 8. 

QUI CONSECUTIVE. 

5. The relative qui (called qui consecutive} is often used with the 
subjunctive to introduce a consecutive clause : as, 

Non is sum qui hoc faciam. I am not the one to do it (qui=ut ego, 
that 7). Here is qui has the force of such as to, of such a kind as to. 

6. Qui consecutive is used in the following constructions : 

(a) With certain indefinite expressions, like sunt qui (there are 
some who), habeo qui, (/ have who), reperiuntur qui (there are 
found who), nemo est qui (there is no one who), quis est qui? 
{who is there who ?), niliil est quod (there is nothing that), est cur 
(there is reason why), quotusquisque est qui (how few there are 
who) : as, 

Sunt qui putent nihil sibi litteris opus esse. There are some 
who think that they have no need of literature. 



QUI FINAL AND QUI CONSECUTIVE. Ill 

Nihil eat quod dicere velim. There is nothing that I wish to say. 

Nihil est cur irascare There is no reason why you should be 
angry. 

Nil habet quo se defendat. He has nothing to defend himself 
with. 

(b) After dignus (worthy), indignus (unworthy), and idoneus or 
aptus (fit} : as, 

Dfgnus est qui ametur. He is worthy to be loved (he is worthy 
that he should be loved, he deserves to be). 

(c) After quam (than) with a comparative : as, 

Maior est quam cui resist! possit. He is too great to be resisted 
( -greater than to whom it can be resisted). 

Note. Possum, 1 can, is used impersonally, only when joined 
with a passive infinitive. 

(d) In negative and interrogative sentences, after tarn, sic, adeo 
(so), or tantus (so great); as, Nemo tarn (or quis tarn) ferreus est 
qui haec faciat. No one is (or who is) so iron-hear ted as to do this. 

7. Instead of qui non, quin with the subjunctive is often used : 
as, 

Nemo est quin sciat. There is no one who does not know. 

So, too, after dubito (doubt), nego (deny), ignoro (be ignorant), 
when joined with a negative or virtual negative,* that is expressed 
by quin (=qui ne, how not) : as, 

Negari non potest quin turpe sit fidem fallere. // cannot be de- 
nied that it is dishonorable to break one's word. 

Non dubitat quin animus sit immortalis. He does not doubt 
that the soul is immortal. 

Num quis ignorat quin haec vera sint? Is anyone ignorant 
that this is the truth ? 

Note Quis means any after si (if), nisi (unless), ne, num, quo 
and quanto. 

* Words like vix, scarcely , and questions that expect the answer No. 



112 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

8. Qui, with the subjun., is also used in a restrictive sense : as^ 

Nemo, qui quidem paulo prudentior sit, hoc dubitat. No one, 
who at least is a man of some sense, doubts this (p. 78, 9). 
So, too : Nemo quod sciam. No one as far as I know. 

9. Qui with the indie., refers only to the antecedent ; qui with 
the subjun., involves also the idea of a class : as, 

Is sum qui id feci. I am the one who did it. But : Is sum qui id 
faciam. / am the one to do it (i.e., of such a kind as to do it). 

EXERCISE XLIII. 

i. Nothing is so obscure that it can not be found out by inquiry, 
(gerund). 2. Men were sent to pick out a place suitable to en- 
camp on. 3. I she not worthy to rule? 4. They have nothing to talk 
about (re!.). 5. He is not the man to make a bad use of his oppor- 
tunities. 6. Is he the man to say one thing (alter) and think 
another (alter) ? 7. He is a fit person to be trusted. 8. Is he not too 
wise to be here ? 9. This book is too difficult to understand. 10. 
There are some who are too faithful to sell their country for gold. 
ii. He has committed a crime too great to be forgiven. 12. I do 
not doubt that you have spoken the truth. 13. He had nothing to 
say. 14. I sent a man to tell you the truth. 15. Aelius used to 
write speeches for others to deliver (use qui). 16. They are always 
asking me what I am doing. 17. Men are found who take from 
some (alius) that (relative) they may give to others. 18. Is anyone 
so foolish that he can understand nothing? 19. He was unworthy to 
have that honor conferred upon him. 20. He sent forward five 
legions to attack the camp, 21. How few there are who are like 
him ! 22. They were too proud to ask for money. 23. There is 
nothing that can prevent him from doing it. 24. He is asking for a 
pen to write with. 25. Who is there who would wish this ? 26. It 
happened that he was the first to announce it at Rome. 27. He 
left a legate to finish the business (reL) 28. We need a consul to 
influence (flecto) the populace. 29. This I had to say (rel.) on 
friendship. 30. There was nothing new to ask you (re/.) 31. He 
wishes to have a place (quo) to go to. 32. No one if at least he 
is a. man (use rel.) will be absent 



CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 113 

44. CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CLASSES. 
Because and Although. 

1. Causal adverbial clauses state the cause or reason for the fact 
mentioned in the main clause. In English they are usually in- 
troduced by because : as, 

Tacent quia periculxun metuunt. They are silent because they 
fear danger. 

2. Causal clauses are usually introduced by quod, quia \because) 
or quoniam (=quum iam, since now), seeing that. 

They are followed by the indicative when the reason they intro- 
duce is given on the speaker's own authority ; they are followed by 
the subjunctive when the reason they introduce is given on the 
authority of another : as, 

Patria expulsus est quia iustus erat. He was banished because 
he was just (or for being just). Here esset would mean that this 
was the reason usually given, for the truth of which, however, 
the speaker would not vouch. 

Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet iuventutem. Socrates 
was accused because (as was alleged] he was corrupting the young 
men (corrunapebat would mean that the speaker vouched for the 
truth of the charge). 

Note. This quod is common after queror (complain), laudo 
(praise), gaudeo (be glad), doleo (be sorry). See p. 99, 6. 

3. Quum (cum), in the sense of since, is often used to introduce a 
causal clause (p. 106, 2) : as, 

Haec quum ita sint, abibo. As this is so, I shall go away. 

4. The relative qui (called qui causal) is often used with the sub- 
junctive to introduce a causal clause : as, 

Pecasse videor qui a te discesserim. It seems I have done wrong, 
inasmuch as I have parted from yoti (peccasse=peccavisse). 

Note. In this sense, qui is often strengthened by the addition of 
quippe or utpote, indeed, as being: as, Multa de me questus est 
9 



114 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, 

quippe qui in me incensus esset. He complained at length of me 
inasmuch as he had been exasperated against me 

5. Qui causal is very commonly found after exclamations: as, 
Me miserum, qui haec fecerim. Wretch that I am for doing 

this / 

Note. The accusative case is often used in exclamations. It is 
called the acctisative of exclamation. 

6. Non quod or non quo, with the subjunctive, is often used to 
introduce a rejected reason : as, 

Hoc laudo non quod honestum sit, sed quod utile est. I praise 
this, not because it is honorable but because it is expedient. 

De consilio meo non scrips!, non quo celandum esset sed quia, 
&c. I did not write you about my plan , not because it required to 
be concealed but because ', c. 

So too : Non quin, not but that : as, 

Non quin me anaes sed quod abire cupio. Not but that you love 
me, but because I am anxious to go. 

CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 

7. Concessive adverbial clauses are those that make some con- 
cession, in spite of which the statement of the main clause is true. 
They are usually introduced in English by although : as, 

Bomani, quamquam proelio fessi erant, tamen procedunt. The 
Romans, although they were weary with fighting, nevertheless ad- 
vance. * 

8. Concessive clauses, when they state a fact, take the indica- 
tive ; when they state a supposition, the subjunctive : as, 

Caesar, quamquam nondum eorum consilia cog-noverat, tamen 
suspicabatur. " Though Caesar had not as yet discovered their 
plans, he nevertheless was suspicious. 

Etsi falso in suspicionem venisses, tamen mini ignoscere de- 
buisti. Although you had been falsely suspected ( which you were 
not: a supposition), still you should have pardoned me [li? suspicio- 
nem venire=the passive of suspicor, I suspect}. 

9. The following are the commor. concessive conjunctions, and 



CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 115 

the moods with which they are used : Quamquam (though), and 
utut (however), with indicative ; licet, quamvis (lit., as you wish\ 
ut, quum ("all meaning although}, with subjunctive ; etsi, etiami, 
tametsi (although, even if} all compounds of si (if}, and following 
the same rules for mood (p. 119). 

Note. Quamvis is also used with single words as an adverb 
and without influence on the verb of the clause : as, 

Ille, quamvis facetus, odio est. He however witty, is hated (or 
whatever his wit [Odio esse, to be for an object of hate, is the 
passive of odi, / hate\. 

10. The relative qui, with the subjunctive, is often used conces- 
sively. It is called qui concessive : as, 

Caesar, qui haec videret, tamen aciem instruxit. Though Caesar 
saw this, still he drew up his line ( qui = quamvis). 

11. Latin concessive conjunctions may be used to express Eng- 
lish phrases like In spite of, notwithstanding, whatever : as, 

In spite of his being a good man, he was condemned. Is quam- 
quam vir bonus erat, condemnatus est. 

However guilty he may be (whatever his guilt\ he will be ac- 
quitted. Is, quamvis nocentissmus sit, absolvetur. 

12. Quamquam is often used co-ordinately, in the sense of and 
yet: as, 

Quamquam ego putabam id non posse. And yet I for my part 
thought it was impossible. 

EXERCISE XLIV. 

i. Although they are brave, still they may be defeated. 2. See- 
ing that you had promised, you should have kept your word. 3. 
As they were not able to withstand our attack, they retreated to 
their camp. 4. They were glad because they had recovered their 
ship. 5. Unhappy man ! in that (since) you have been banished 
from your country. 6. He was accused of corrupting the young 
men (use because). 7. He was thrown into prison because he had 
killed his friend. 8. That being the case, take up your arms. 9. 
He was angry with me for preferring gain to friendship (as he said).' 
10. Was he not banished because he was just? ii. You are praising 



116 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

him for doing what I am sure he did not do. 12. There are some 
who deny that it is true. 13. He was despised by them for they knew 
him(ret.) 14. He is not a proper person to be received. 15. They are 
too brave to be conquered. 16. This life is too short to be the whole 
life of man (re!.) 17. I pity you who have not slept for three whole 
nights. 18. How few there are who believe him! 19. He sent 
two sons there, that they might be taught literature. 20. There are 
some who think that mind and body perish together. 21. Hand 
me a sword to kill with. 22. You have reason to rejoice. 23. He 
wished to hinde$ me from coming. 24. There was no one but 
thought him mad. 25. The general, who saw that he could not 
prevent it, ordered the men to advance. 26. Who is there of you 
who is worthy of his country who will not pray for this ? 27. He 
was too merciful to punish them. 28. Though he is worthy of 
punishment, I pity him. 29. To think that you should be unable 
to hear it ! 30. You will hardly find anyone to believe it. 31. Give 
me a stick with which I may drive away the birds. 32. Of all 
men of those at least I know (re/.) he has the best ability. 



45. COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 

1. A comparative adverbial clause expresses agreement (or the 
opposite) with the statement of the main clause : as, 

Ut sementem feceris, ita metes. You shall reap according' as 
you do (lit., shall have done) your seeding. 

Here the clause introduced by ut is an adverbial comparative 
clause. 

The following words, used to introduce a comparative clause, are 
followed by ac (or, before a vowel, atque) for than, as, from, &c. : 

Alius (other), aliter or secus (otherwise], similis (like), dissimilis 
(unlike), par (equal), pariter or aeque (equally), perinde or pro- 
inde or iuxta (just as), contrarius (opposite), pro eo (in propor- 
tion) : as, 



COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 117 

Se gerit long-e aliter ac tu. He behaves very differently from 
you. 

Simili fortuna atque antea utimur. We are having the same 
fortune as before. 

Amicos aeque ac semet dilig-ere oportet. We should love our 
friends as much as ourselves (lit., one should, &c. ; p. 55, 2). 

Contra (opposite) takes quam : as, 

Contra quam pollicitus es, fecisti. You have acted in violation 

of your froinise. 

Nihil aliud {nothing else) is followed by quam or nisi : as, 
Bellum suscipitur ut nihil aliud quam (or nisi) pax quaeslta 

videatur. War is undertaken in such a way that nothing but peace 

seems sought for. 

2. Comparative clauses introduced by quam may take the 
construction of the main clause, or the subjunctive with or without 
ut: as, 

Nee ultra saeviit quam satis erat. Nor did he show any need- 
less cruelty ('lit., nor was he cruel further than was enough). 

Perpessus est omnia potius quam (ut) indicaret. He endured 
everything rather than inform. 

Bum aggrediamur potius quam propulsemus. Let us attack 
rather than repel him. 

Note. In the same way, quam connects two infinitives : as, 
Dixit se quidvis potius perpessurum quam exiturum. He said 
that he would endure anything rather than go forth. 

3. Comparative clauses fall into two classes : 

(a) Where the comparison is stated as a fact : as, 

Omnia, sicut acta sunt, memoravit. He has narrated every- 
thing, just as it was done. 

(b) Where the comparison is stated as a mere supposition : as, 
Honores petunt quasi honeste vixerint. They seek office , as if 

they had lived honorably (=while they have nof). 

The first class take the indicative j the second, the subjunctive. 



118 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

4. The following are the common comparative conjunctions that 
are usually joined with the subjunctive : Tanquam, or tanquam si, 
quasi, velut, or velut si, as if: as, 

Tanquam hoc difficile sit. A s if this were hard. 

Velut si Asia sit clausa, sic nihil perfertur ad nos. Just as if 
Asia were closed, no news reaches us [p. 123, II. (b)~\. 

5. The English the. . . .the with two comparatives, is expressed in 
Latin in two ways : 

(a) By quo eo (or quanto tanto) with two comparatives : as 

/Quo (or quanto) quis est melior, eo (or tanto) difficilius 
suspicatur. The better a man is, the more difficulty he has in 
suspecting (p. 78, 6). 

(b) By Ut quisque,...ita, with two superlatives: as, Ut quisque 
vir optimus est, ita difflcillime suspicatur. The better a man is, &c. 

Note. This might also be translated : In proportion to a marts 
goodness, &c., or, In proportion as a man is good, &c. 

IDIOMATIC USES OF UT, AS. 

6. The following idiomatic uses of ut, as, should be noticed : 

(a) Ut fortasse vere, sic parum utiliter respondit. Though 
his answer was true, yet it was not very expedient (concessive and 
restrictive). 

(b) Valde frugi erat, ut servus. He was very thrifty for a slave. 

(c) Multum, ut illis temporibus, valuit. He had great influence 
for that time. 

(d} Multae etiam, ut in nomine Romano, litterae. A good know- 
ledge of literature, too, for a Roman. 

(e) Pauca, ut semper taciturnus erat, respondit. With his usual 
reticence, he made a brief reply. 

. (f) Magnus pavor, ut in re improvisa, fuit. The panic was 
great, as was natural in so unexpected an occurrence, 



CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 119 

EXERCISE XLV. 

I. He shall be punished as he deserves. 2. I will bear it as I 
can. 3. They acted as if the enemy were already at the gates. 4. 
Though he is absent, I will come to your aid. 5. We will fight as 
you direct. 6. You speak as if he were here. 7. He praised us 
for having behaved so well (p. 1 13, 2). 8. He spoke as if no one 
were dissatisfied with his lot. 9. He shut the gate to keep out the 
enemy. 10. He talks as if he thought that it was all over with 
him. IT. He was too proud to accept money. 12. He acts as if 
I were a fool. 13. The more a man reads, the more he knows. 
14. Though I am angry with you, you may say what you wish. 15. 
As if 1 cared for that ! 16. Even Varius does not hesitate to lead 
out his troops (use ne-quidem). 17. However you have behaved 
towards me, still I will praise you. 18. They tell a very different 
story from you (say : tell other things than). 19. They placed the 
image in the opposite direction to what it had been (use contra 
quarn). 20. You are acting otherwise than I wished. 21. They 
have not been praised as much as they deserve. 22. She gave him 
a sword to kill himself with (p. 1 1 1, 6). 23. I wish he< would come 
(use utinam). 24. I spoke just as I felt. 25. Philosophy is not 
praised as much as it deserves. 26. They move backwards with 
an opposite motion to that of the sky. 27. He will be punished in 
proportion as he deserves. 28. She has as much sense as beauty 
(use par). 29. He asked me whether I was in good health, and I 
answered Yes. 30. A boy should know more than he says. 31. 
After dismissing the army, he returned to Rome. 32. He said 
that he would perish sooner than that I should be harmed. 33. 
Let them fight rather than be slaves. 34. Though they had rest 
from battle, still they did not cease from labor. 



46. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 

1. A conditional sentence contains (a) a main clause, (b) an ad- 
verbial clause stating the condition on which the statement of the 
main clause is, or would be, true : as, If he says this, he is wrong, 
The clause containing the condition is called the z/-clause, 



T 



120 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

2. The common types of the conditional sentence are as 
follows : 

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 

IF- CLAUSE. MAIN CLAUSE. 

1. Si quis haec dicit, errat. 

If anyone says this^^ he is wrong. 

Si quis haec dixit, erravit. 

If anyone said this, he was wrong. 

2. Si quis haec dicet (or dixerit), errabit. 
If anyone says (literally, shall 

say or have said} this, he will be wrong. 

f 3. Si quis haec dicat. erret. 
If anyone were to (or should} say 

this, he would be wrong. 

4. Si quis haec diceret, erraret. 

If anyone were saying this (now}, he would be wrong. 

5. Si quis haec dixisset, erravisset. 

If anyone had said,Jhis (in the past) he would have been wrong. 

Note. Instead of the English present, referring to the future (as 
in type 2), Latin uses the future, or if the action of the verb in 
the if-clause is over before that of the main verb begins the future- 
perfect. 

3. Unless, or if ^ not with tfce force of u?iless, is nisi or ni: as, 

Nisi arma sumpsisses, deletus esses. Unless you had taken up 
arms, you would have been destroyed. 

Nisi medicus adesset, puer moreretur. If the doctor were not 
here, the boy would be dying. But when if not cannot be turned 
into unless, it is expressed by si non: as, 

Cur mihi noces, si ego tibi non noceo? Why do you harm me 
if I do not harm you ? 

4. Any, after si or nisi, is quis: as, 

Si quis ita fecerit, poenas dabit. If anyone does s0, he will be 
punished (literally, shall have done so). 



CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 121 

5. Whether ... .or, introducing alternative conditions (i.e., with 
the force of if. . . .or if\ is expressed by sive (seu)....sive (seu) : as, 

Sive adfuisti sive abfuisti, nihil dico. Whether you were present 
or absent^ I say nothing. 

Note Sive.... sive must be carefully distinguished from utrum.. 
an (p. 29, 6), introducing a dependent double question and used as 
the subject or object of a verb : as, 

Utrum velit an nolit rog-o. I ask whether he is willing or un- 
willing. 

6. But if, introducing a corrected condition, is sin (=si+ne, if 
not); if not (without a verb) is si minus (or, rarely, si non) : as, 

Si rogas, respondeo ; sin nihil rogas, taceo. If you ask, I answer; 
but if you dorft ask, I hold my peace. 

Si haec fecerit, gaudebo ; si minus, aequo animo feram. If he 
has done it, I shall be glad; if not, 1 shall bear it with patience. 

7. Nisi forte (or vero) is often used to express an ironical ob- 
jection : as, 

Nisi forte existimatis eum dementem fuisse. Unless indeed you 
think that he was mad (==you surely do not think). 

EXERCISE XLVI. 

I. If you should ask me that, I would answer nothing. 2. If I 
knew the name of this flower, I should value it more highly. 3. If 
you bore adversity well, you will bear prosperity joyfully. 4. If I 
should deny it, I should be telling a falsehood. 5. If dogs barked in 
the day-light, they would be killed. 6. If you were here, you 
would think otherwise. 7. If I had set out that night, I should 
have seen him. 8. If I am present, I will speak. 9. Whether you 
were absent or whether you were present, you will be punished. 
10. If they had distrusted him, they would not have put him at the 
head of the army. n. If he were to deny it, it would be the 
height of folly. 12. I should not ask you to do this, if I thought you 
would refuse. 13. Whether this is true or false, all will believe it. 
14. If he had not come to our aid, it would have been all over with 
us. 15. If he were here, he would be laughing. 16. If you had 
not applauded, he would have been ashamed. 17. If they had not 



122 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

detained me, I should have been here first 18. If he is at the 
head of the army, the country will be safe. 19. If they should 
swear they were innocent, I would not believe them. 20. Will you 
ask how much I ought to give ? 21. He asked me whether I would 
rather be an orator or a poet. 22. Let us return home for fear they 
come in our absence. 23. If anyone had ordered this, he would 
not have been obeyed by anyone. 24. If he should ask at what 
hour he would be put to death, they would tell him. 25. If he is a 
man of courage, he will refuse ; if not, he will do it. 26. Learning 
is nothing else but recollecting. 27. You surely do not suppose 
that all the captives have been put to death. 28. If I am at 
home, my heart is abroad ; but if I am abroad, my heart (animus) 
is at home. 29. If this were not so, he would be here. 30. Don't 
think that I write longer letters to any one. 31. Whether he 
reads or writes, he wastes no time. 



^ 47. CLASSIFICATION OP CONDITIONAL 

SENTENCES. 

Exception to the Rules. 

1. The common types of the conditional sentence are easily 
learned with a little attention and practice. They are classified as 
follows : 

Conditional sentences are divided into three classes : 

I. SIMPLE PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS. 

This class will be easily recognised when the second and third 
classes are known. It includes all conditional sentences in which 
nothing is implied as to the fulfilment of the condition. It has the 
indicative in both clauses : as, 

Pecuniam si habet, dat. If he has money ^ he gives it. 

Pecuniam si habuit, dedit. If he had money, he gave it. 

Note. Si rarely stands at the head of the sentence. Hence the 
common use of quodsi (but if) for si, at the head of a si-clause. 



CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 123 



II. FUTURE CONDITIONS. 

This class includes conditional sentences in which the fulfilment 
of the condition is referred to the future. Of these there are two 
types : 

(a) Where the condition is regarded as likely to be fulfilled : as, 

Pecuniam si habebit, dabit. If he has (Old Eng., shall have) 
money, he will give it. 

Here the fut. indie, is used in both clauses. But the fut.-perf. is 
used in the z^-clause when the action of the verb of that clause is 
to be represented as over before that of the main verb begins : as, 

Hoc si fecerit, morietur. If he does this, he shall die (literally, 
shall have done). 

(b) Where the condition is regarded as unlikely to be fulfilled. 
Such sentences have in English would or should in the main 
clause : as, 

Pecuniam si habeat, det. If he should have money ^ he would 
give it. 

Here the present subjunctive is used in both clauses. 

III. CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT. 

This class includes all conditional sentences in which the con- 
dition is represented as not fulfilled. Of these also there are two 
types : 

(a) Where the condition is referred to the present. These have 
in English the word now (expressed or understood) in both clauses : 
as, 

Pecuniam si haberet, daret. If he had money (now), he would 
give it (now). 

Here the imperfect subjunctive is used in both clauses. 

(6) Where the condition is referred to the past. This type ha 
in English woitld have in the majn clause : as, 



124 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Pecuniam si habuisset, dedisset. If he had had money, he would 
have given it. 

Here the pluperfect subjunctive is used in both clauses. 

Note i. In sentences of Class III., the ^-clause may refer to 
the past, while the main clause refers to the present, or vice versa: 
as, Illi si haec fecissent, viverent. If they had done this, they 
would now be alive. 

Note 2. The first type of Class III. is also used of past time to 
express continuous action : as, Haec si sentirent, sapientes essent. 
If they had held these views, they would have been wise. 

2. Instead of the usual forms for would or would have (in the 
main clause of the conditional sentence), the following forms are 
frequently found : 

(a) The active periphrastic conjugation (p. 54). 

(b) The passive periphrastic conjugation (p. 45). 

(c) Any verb or phrase denoting duty, possibility, or propriety, 
like possum, oportet, debeo, decet (it is becoming) : as, 

Quid, si hostes ad urbem veniant, facturi estis? What would 
you do, if the enemy should come to the city ? (here facturi estis, are 
you likely to do, do you intend to do, is much the same as faciatis, 
would you do, the ordinary form). 

Si unum diem morati essetis, omnibus moriendum fuit. If you 
had delayed a single day, all would have had to die (or would have 
died}. 

Si similem hostem habuisset, magna clades accipi potuit. If he 
had had a similar enemy, a great defeat would (or might) have been 
sustained. 

Hunc, si ulla pietas in te fuisset, colere debebas. This man, if 
there had been any affection in you, you should have (i.e., would 
have) honored. 

Si ita putasset Milo, optabilius ei fuit. If Milo had thought so, 
it would have been preferable for him. 

3. An important exception to the regular rules for mood in 
such conditional sentences must be noted. It is as follows : 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 125 

The indicative, and not the subjunctive, is used in the main 
clause of the conditional sentence when the verb of that clause is 

(a) In the periphrastic conjugation, active or passive (p. 54, 45). 

(b) Possum, I can; debeb, / ought; oportet, it is needful \ &c. : 
as, 

Ni litteras misisset, agros relicturi erant. If he had not sent the 
letter, they would have lejt their lands. 

Consilia si processissent, interflciendus fuit. If the plans had 
succeeded, he would (or must) have been put to death. 

Totus exercitus deleri potuit, si persecuti essent victores. The 
whole army would (or might) have been destroyed, if the victors 
had followed up. 

4. Provided that is expressed by dum, by modo, or by dummodo, 
all with the subjunctive (with ne for non in negative clauses) : as, 

Oderint dum metuant. Let them hate provided that they fear. 
Veniant dum ne maneant. Let them come, provided that they 
do not remain. 

5. Si, nisi, si non (or minus) may be used with single words : as, 

Historia nil nisi annalium confectio fuit. History was nothing 
but the compiling of annals. 

Cum spe, si non optima, at aliqua tamen vivere. To live with 
some hope, if not the highest. 

Note. At tamen should always be joined to single words, never 
used to introduce a sentence. 

EXERCISE XLVII. 

i. If they make an attack upon this town, they will capture it very 
easily. 2. H ad he listened to my warning (p. 48, 6), this would 
never have happened. 3. If you do not return, you will injure all 
of us. 4. If you had been consul that year, you would have shown 
the same courage as he did (p. 54, 2). 5. If I had gone there, I 
should have had to put up with his insults (p. 45, 2). 6 If the rest 
were killed, would you be likely to escape ? (p. 54, 2) 7. If you had 



126 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

wished to capture this city, you should have collected more troops. 

8. Even if he had been a stranger, you should have helped him. 

9. Had he been a good man, I might have influenced him. 10. Pro- 
vided you ward off this danger, we shall consider you a friend. 

11. If he had remained in Rome, he might have been destroyed. 

12. If your country were to speak thus to you, she ought to obtain 
her request. 13. Provided I can collect an army, I will join you 
immediately. 14. Though you are away, we shall never forget you 
(use lit ita). 15. Whether you will trust it to him or not, I do 
not know. 16. Whether you are willing or unwilling, I shall always 
be grateful. 17. Whether you were present or not, concerns your- 
self alone. 18. He promised that he would never return to Rome 
unless victorious. 19. Unless indeed you fancy it was the old man 
who was applauded (p. 121, 7). 20. Even if your father had punished 
you, you should have remembered that he was your father. 21. If 
you had acted otherwise, the same result would have occurred (say : 
the same thing was about to happen). 22. He wanted to prevent me 
from speaking. 23. O ! that the king were here himself. 24. Hav- 
ing answered thus, he departed without saying good-bye to anyone 
(p. 52, 4). 25. He ought to have done what he promised. 26. You 
are not the one to consider poverty a disgrace. 27. What does it 
matter to us that the city has been captured ? 28. Even if you had 
been falsely suspected, you ought to have pardoned me. 29. If he 
had not manumitted them, they must have been given up to torture. 
30. If they had delayed a single day, all must have died. 31. They 
were thrown into prison until they paid the fine. 32. He was too 
cautious to admit that he preferred you to us. 33. Hardly any 
one doubted that the consul would be obeyed. 



INDIRECT NARRATION. 



48. INDIRECT (OR OBLIQUE 1 ) NARRATION. 

1. A statement depending on a verb of saying ', thinking, per- 
ceiving, knowing, or the like, is said to be in indirect or oblique 
narration. 

Thus, in 

Dixit se civem Romanum esse, he said that he was a Roman 
citizen, the words se civem Romanum esse are in indirect narra- 
tion. The actual words used were Civis Romanus sum, / am a 
Roman citizen; these are said to be in direct narration. 

2. The main verb of direct narration becomes infinitive in 
indirect narration, and the subject of direct narration becomes 
accusative before the infinitive (p. 4). The tense of the infinitive 
will be present, perfect, or future^ according as TrTe~-~tense Crf~the 
actual words was present, perfect, of future. Thus : 

DIRECT. INDIRECT. 

Civis Romanus sum. Dixit se civem Romanum esse, 

/ am a Roman citizen. He said that he was a Roman citizen. 

Civis Romanus ero. Dixit se civem Romanum fu- 

turum esse (or fore.) 

I shall be a Roman Citizen. He said that he should be a Roman 

citizen. 

Civis Romanus eram (or fui). Dixit se civem Romanum fuisse. 

/ was (or have been) a Roman citizen. He said that he was (or had been) a 

Roman citizen. 

Note. After verbs meaning to hope or promise, the future infinj-_ 
tivfr is used in^ead of the English present infinitive : as. Promisit^ 
se venturum esse. _Je promised to come (p. 7, 3). -*v 

3. To determine the tense of the infinitive in indirect narration, 
it is best to find the tense of the main verb in direct narration : 

the tense of tJic main verb in direct narration is the tense of the 
infinitive in indirect narration. Thus, in Caesar said that he had 

1 The term* oblique narration is sometimes limited so as to apply only to reported 
speeches. It is more convenient to use it in the wider sense. 



128 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

written, the direct narration is / have 'written, scrips! ; the indirect, 
therefore, is Caesar dixit se scripsisse ; he said that he was an 
orator, is dixit se oratorem esse (direct=orator sum). 

Note. Pronouns of the ist or 2rd person become pronouns of 
the 3rd person, in reporting speeches in indirect narration. 

4. All adjectival and adverbial clauses in indirect narration must 

vp ---- T^^ " ------ -~^> ^==^-C> > --- i -- --- "- '- 

havej:lie^subiunctiy&:^s. __ 

Dixit se eos, queS cepisset, doxnum misisse. He said that he had 
sent home those whom he had taken (direct eos quos cepi domum 
misi, / have sent home those whom I have taken). 

Dixit se, quoties potuisset, rediisse. He said that he had re- 
turned as often as he could (direct=redii quoties potui, / have re- 
turned as often as I could). 

Note I. In accordance with the rule for the sequence of tenses 
(p. 20, 2), the verb of the dependent adjectival or adverbial clause 
will be in the impf. or plupf. subjunctive in indirect narration after 
a secondary tense. 

Note 2. A subordinate clause, when inserted in a passage in 
indirect narration on the authority of the writer or reporter, takes 
the indicative : as, Oertior factus est Xerxes id agi ut pons, quern 
ille in Hellespont fecerat, dissolveretur. Xerxes was informed 
that this was intended, i.e., to break down the bridge which he 
(Xerxes) had built over the Hellespont. 

Here the clause quern.... fecerat has the indicative, because the 
writer vouches for the truth of the statement himself. 

5. 



iunctive. ip ^rp-Hanre with foe law of sequence : Sim as. 

Ne cunctarentur. Let them not delay (he said) (direct^ne cuncta 
mini, do not delay). 

Ne illud faceret. Let him not do that (dir. =ne feceris ; p. 26, j). 

6. Questions that expect an answer arg_pnt- ir^he subjuqctivq in 
jndirect narration ; rhetorical questions (exclamations afldapjJgaJg), 
in the infinitive: as, 



INDIRECT NARRATION. 129 

(Scnpsit) quid de praeda faciendum esse censererit? {He wrote) 
what did they think sJiould be done 'with regard to the booty? (direct 
= quid ____ censetis? what do you think?}. 

Quid esse turpius? cur eos dubitare ? What was more dis- 
honorable? why did they hesitate? (direct = quid est turpius? cur 
dubitatis ? what is more dishonorable ? why do you hesitate ?} 



7- A fut.-perf jndi'rgtk-f* in a 



becomes, in indirect, jgerf. subjun. after q primary fpnsp arn^ plunerf. 
subjun. after a secondary : as, 

Dicit eum qui id fecerit, poenas daturum esse. He says that 
the one who docs this^ shall be punished. 

Dixit eum qui id fecisset, poenas daturum esse. He said that 
the one who did that, should be punished (direct = qui id fecerit, 
poenas dabit, he who shall have done that shall be punishea). 



8- 



narrative hy the Tiis^ria.n 




being^expressed : as, 

Regulus reddi captives neg-avit esse utile : illos enim bonos 
duces esse. Regulus denied that it was expedient that the captives 
should be restored: that they were good leaders. 

9. I sav ---- not in Latin is nego. which, owing to the tendency 
in Latin to put the negative forward in the sentence, is usually put 
firsts -as, 

Neg-abat se praemium ullum accepturum. He said that he 
would not accept any reward. (Note. Esse with a participle is 
often dropped in indirect narration). 

EXERCISE XLVIII. 
(N.B. Indirect narration is to be used all through the exercise). 

i. What (they asked) was more base than to adopt a policy at 
the suggestion of the enemy? 2.. Let them remember (he said) 
what he had told them. Let them not forget the kindness they had 
received. 3. He said that he had not sold his house. 4. They 
said that he used to groan as often as he saw his son (p. 107, 5). 
10 



130 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

5. He did not doubt (he said) that all were weary of the war. 

6. They voted (censeo) that they should march by night : (saying) 
that they could easily reach the defile. 7. He promised that he 
would not be wanting to his friends. 8. Why (he asked) did they 
obey a few centurions ? When would they dare to demand redress? 
(rhetorical quest.) 9. He called out (clamo) that, as far as he was 
able, he would follow their footsteps. 10. He used to say that the 
soul was immortal, u. What was he to do (he asked)?. They 
were calling out that it was all over with us. 12. He said that he 
was ready to die for the country. Must not all die some day? (he 
asked). 13. Did they intend to destroy the city? (he asked). 
14. Don't you think that they should have fought with men, and 
that women and children should have been spared? 15. Do not 
ask him whether he did all this at the instigation of your brother 
or not. 1 6. He maintained that the assassination of the father 
would not profit them until they banished the son. 17. He 
answered that he blushed (pudet) for the country that could banish 
a man of such ability. 18. They said that they were ready to sacri- 
fice (posthabeo) their liberty to that of the nation. 19. For -myself, 
even in-the-face-of (in) this great danger, I could not believe that it 
was all over with the army. 20. He was easily persuaded that men 
are valued in proportion to their public usefulness (say : in propor- 
tion as they have deserved -well of the country; p. 1 16, i). 21. He 
thought that we ought to attack them before they could recover 
their presence of mind. 22. Whenever he heard anything of the 
kind, he said that the story was a fiction (use fing-o). 23. The law 
(he said) forbade anything to belong to anyone who refused to obey 
the magistrates. Let them, therefore, take away all his property 
from him. 24. He said that no one who was worthy of his country 
held such a view. Let them lay aside their fear. Would they ever 
have such a golden opportunity? 25. He used to say that the 
more hidden a danger was, the more difficulty there was in 
avoiding it. 



DIRECT INTO OBLIQUE NARRATION. 1 31 



49. SUMMARY OF RULES FOR TURNING DI- 
RECT INTO OBLIQUE NARRATION. 

1. The following is a summary of the rules already given for 
turning direct into oblique narration : 

"""*( i) The main verb of direct narration becomes infinitive in - 
indirect narration. 

(2) All adjectival and adverbial clauses take the subjunctive in _ 
indirect narration. 

(3) Pronouns of the ist and 2nd persorVusually become pronouns 
of the 3rd person. E.g.: 

ego, nos become se 
meus, noster " suus 
tu, vos " iUe, illi 

tuus, vester " illius, illorum 
hie, iste " ille, is " 

(4) Adverbs of present time become (after a secondary tense) 
adverbs of past time. E>g. : 

mine becomes iara, tune 

heri (yesterday) " pridie (the day before) , 

hodie (to-day) " illo die (that day) 

eras (to-morrow) " postridie (next day) 

So : Hie (here) becomes ibi (there)^ 

(5) Imperatives become subjunctives (usually imperf. subjunc- - 
tives). A 

(6) Rhetorical questions are expressed by the accusative and > 
infinitive ; questions that expect an answer, by the subjunctive. 

(7) A future-perfect used in a dependent clause for the English 
present, becomes perfect subjunctive after a primary tense, and 
pluperfect subjunctive after a secondary. 

2. The following examples of oblique narration should be care- 
fully studied : 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



(a) Aristotle says that there 
are certain animals produced 
which live a single day. 

(ft) As to his having iinex- 
pectedly fallen on one canton, 
when those ivho had crossed the 
river were not able to bear help 
to their comrades, he should not 
(i.e., let him not) on that account 
presume exceedingly on Ids valor 
or look down on them; that 
they had learned this from their 
fathers and ancestors, i.e.,/0 fight 
with valor. 

(c) What would happen (he 
asked), if he carried the law? 



(ct) Why were they living (they 
asked)? Why were they reckoned 
as citizens ? 

(e) They said that, while he was 
delaying, the city had been taken. 

(_/) He said that he ate to live. 

(g) Let them go (he said)where 
they wished. 

(h) Let me die (he said), if I 
am not glad. 

(i) He said he would do what 
they wished. 



Aristoteles ait bestias quas- 
dam nasci quae unum diem vi- 
vant. 

Quod improvise unum pag-um 
adortus esset, quum ii, qui flu- 
men transiissent, suis auxilium 
ferre non possent, ne ob earn 
rem aut suae mag-nopere virtuti 
tribueret aut ipsos despiceret; 
se ita a patribus maioribusque 
suis didicisse, ut virtute con- 
tenderent. 



Quid fie- e^ si leg-ern pertulis- 
set? (direct = quid fiat si legem 
pertulero ? The deliberative 
subjun. [24, (d)] is unchanged in 
indirect narration, unless in 
accordance with p. 20, 2). 

Quid se vivere? quid cives 
censeri? (direct=quid vivimus? 
quid cives censemur?) 

Dixerunt urbem, dum ille 
moraretur, captam fuisse. 

Dixit se, ut viveret, edere. 
Abirent quo vellent. 

Se velle mori nisi g-auderet 
(direct=moriar nisi g-audeo, let 
me die, &c.). 

Dixit se, quod vellent, factu- 
rum[direct=faciam quod volent, 
I will do what they (shall) wisti\. 



OBLIQUE NARRATION. 133 

EXERCISE XLIX. 
(N.B. Use indirect narration all through the exercise.} 

I. " Go x " he said, " create consuls. " 2. We had all to die some 
day (he said). What was the use, by declining the contest and 
deferring the day of death, of earning the coward's reputation ? 3. 
He told us that we ought not to wait till we ascertained whether they 
intended to fight or not. 4. He sent a horseman to the army to say 
that our hope of victory was in proportion to the speed with which 
we could advance (p. 1 18, 5). 5. He said that it was of the utmost 
consequence to the country what they did ; let them remember the 
ancestors from whom they were sprung. 6. He said that one's 
difficulty in suspecting others was proportionate to one's own good- 
ness. The man who had made such an assertion was impious him- 
self. ^,/They ought to wait until they saw what the result would be. 
7. Could anyone have supposed that so able a general would not 
have sent out scouts to ascertain the number of the enemy ? 8. 
Let them advance (he said) and resolve that they must either con- 
quer or die. 9. He said that he did not blush to own that he owed 
all his training to the literature of Greece. 10. I believe that, in 
pardoning enemies and aiding friends, he will out-do all of us. 1 1. 
He said that he required more men to prevent our lands from being 
laid waste by the enemy. 12. Consider (he said) the greatness of 
your debt to your ancestors. 13. What ought he to have done? (he 
asked). Should he have obeyed so unworthy a man as the magis- 
trate? 14, They answered that nothing would prevent them from 
being put to the sword. 15. He said that he was ashamed to think 
that they did not see what ought to be done. 16. Do not believe 
that I will lose such an opportunity of seeing you. 17. Do you 
think that he will ever forget how much you, have injured him ? 18. 
He answered that he had not as yet learned to sacrifice the safety 
of the country to his own. 19. I believe that twenty years ago he 
gained some credit at Athens. 20. I know that all the wise are 
convinced of this, that a man's obstinacy is in proportion to his 
folly. 21. He said that their children were dead. Let them follow 
him and avenge them. 22. How few there are who would venture 
to say that he is hated by all ! 23. It is said that he led the army 
through our territory till he reached the foot of the hill. 24. He 



134 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



said that they had to carry on war with an enemy who despised 
treaties. Let them, therefore, refuse to believe him or trust to his 
promises. 25. He denied that anyone had asked how long he had 
stayed at Veii. 



50. CONDITIONAL SENTENCE IN OBLIQUE 
NARRATION. 

1. The above rules may now be applied to turning the common 
types of the conditional sentence into oblique narration. The verb 
of the main clause becomes ace. with inf., and the verb of the 
z/-clause subjunctive, as follows : 

OBLIQUE. 

becomes Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- 
beat, dare. 

He says that if he has money, 
he gives it. 

Dicit se, si pecuniam habu- 

erit, dedisse. 

He says that if he had money, 
he gave it. 

Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- 
beat (or habuerit), datu- 
rum esse. 

He says tliat if he has money, 
he will give. it. 

Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- 
beat, daturum esse. 

He says that if he should have 
money, he wo^^ld give it. 

Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- 
beret, daturum fuisse. 

He says that if he had money 
(now), he would give it. 

Dicit se, si pecuniam habu- 
isset, daturum fuisse. 

He siys that if he had had 
money, he would have given 
it. 



\ 

DIRECT. 

1. Pecuniam si habet, dat. 

If he has money, he gives it. 

Pecuniam si habuit, dedit 

(or dabat). 
If he had money, he gave it. 

2. (a) Pecuniam si habebit (or ha- 

buerit), dabit. 

If he has money, he will give it. 

(b) Pecuniam si habeat, det. 

If he should have money, he 
would give it. , 

3. (a) Pecuniam si haberet, daret. 

If he had money (noru), he 
would give it. 

(3) Pecuniam siUabuisset, de- 

dlsset. 

If he had had money, he would 
have given it. 



CONDITIONAL SENTENCE IN OBLIQUE NARRATION. 



135 



Note i. The future (habebit) in the z/-clause of direct narration, 
becomes present subjunctive (habeat) in the indirect, after a primary 
tense. 

Note 2. The present subjunctive (det), in the main clause, 
becomes future infinitive (daturum esse) in indirect narration. 

Note 3. The imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive in the main 
clause (i.e., daret and dedisset), are expressed in indirect narration by 
the future participle with fuisse (i.e., daturum fuisse, to have been 
about to give}. 

2. After a secondary tense, the verb of the ^/-clause is changed 
in accordance with the rule for the sequence of tenses (p. 20). 
Thus : 

OBLIQUE. 

Dixit se, si pecuniam 
haberet, dare. 

Dixit se, si pecuniam 
habuisset, dedisse. 



DIRECT. 

1. Pecuniam si habet, dat. 

Pecuniam si habuit, dedit 
(or dabat). 

2. (a) Pecuniam si habebit (or 

habuerit), dabit. 

() Pecuniam si habeat, det. 



becomes 



Dixit se, si pecuniam .j 
haberet. (or habuis- 1 
set), daturum esse. '? 

Dixit se, si pecuniam 
haberet, daturum 



3. (a) Pecuniam 
daret. 



si haberet, 



(b) Pecuniam si 
dedisset. 



habuisset, 



Dixit se, si pecuniam 
haberet, daturum 
fuisse. 

" Dixit se, si pecuniam 

habuisset, daturum 
fuisse. 

Note i. The future-perfect in the z/"-clause of direct narration, 
becomes pluperfect subjunctive in oblique. 

Note 2. For 2 (b\ the form Dixit fore ut, si pecuniam haberet, 
daret, is often found (p. j6, 9). 

EXERCISE L. 

(a) I. Do you think that if anyone had suggested such a course 
at Rome, he would have been opposed by anyone ? 2. Do not 
think that, if this general had been more unlucky than any of his 
contemporaries, he could have won such a glorious victory as this ? 



136 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

3. He said that, had they been (i.e., if they had) in office, they would 
have encountered the same storms as we had. 1 4. He said that, 
if the enemy once reached the top of the hill, it made no difference 
to anyone whether we stood our ground or fled. 5. He answered 
that, if we had known the extent of the danger, we would never have 
asserted that our army was too brave to be routed. 6. I believe 
that if the announcement of this victory had been made, you would 
tear the whole city ringing with shouts of joy and triumph. 7. Do 
you think that, if you had ordered the soldiers to desist from butcher- 
ing the vanquished, you would have been obeyed? 8. He said that, 
if they had obeyed the general, they would have conquered. 9. He 
told them that, if they wished to have peace, he must be consulted. 
10. They answered that it was of no importance to them whether 
they stayed or went. 1 1. Don't you think that, if he were here, all 
would be well ? 12. He said that, if he were here, he would give no 
quarter (use parco). 13. He said that, if the harvest was large, the 
country would be rich. 14. They thought that, if we had not de- 
tained them, they would have arrived sooner. 15. If they had not 
put as experienced a general as yourself (p. 3, 8) at the head of the 
army, I believe we should have had no hope of safety. 16. I thought 
that, if anyone else had said this, he would not have been believed 
by anyone. 17. I am persuaded that, if he showed remorse for his 
conduct, he would be acquitted. 18. He answered that, if we knew 
the extent of the danger, we would not go out. 19. I always 
thought that, if you used your own judgment, you would do better 
than anyone. 20. He wrote that, if he had received the letter, he 
would have hastened as quickly as possible to Rome. 

(&) Turn into oblique narration after dixit, the sentences in Exer- 
cise 47. 

'Apply, all through, the important rule of p. 127, 3. 



VIRTUAL OBLIQUE NARRATION. ASSIMILATION. 137 

51. VIRTUAL OBLIQUE NARRATION. 
ASSIMILATION. 

1. A subjunctive is frequently used in a Latin subordinate clause 
to express that the statement of the clause depends on some verb 
of saying understood : as, 

Laudat Panaetius Africanum quod fuerit abstinens. Panaetius 
praises Africanus because (as he says) he was abstemious. 

This elegant use of the principle of oblique narration is called 
virtual oblique narration. It is often found in a causal clause 
(p. 113, 2): as, 

Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet iuventutem. Socrates 
was accused because (as was alleged) he was corrupting the young 
men. Here the subjunctive implies oblique narration. 

2. Virtual oblique narration is used when a speaker quotes the 
word or words of some one else : as, 

Frumentum, Aedui quod polliciti essent, flagitabat. He de- 
manded from the Aedui the corn which they Jiad promised (here the 
verb of the rel. clause is -quoted in virtual oblique -narration from 
the original words of the Aedui ; hence the subjun.). 

Socrates exsecrari eum solebat qui primus utilitatem a hire 
seiunxisset. Socrates used to execrate the man who first had separ- 
ated expediency from right (here the fact referred to in the rel. 
clause is not vouched for ; it is given on the authority of Socrates). 

3. The verb of a subordinate clause, when depending upon a verb 
in the subjunctive, is itself often put in the subjunctive. This is 
called assimilation : as, 

Concedit ut absim cum aliquid agatur. He allows me to be 
away when something is going on (agatur is assimilated to the 
mood of absim). 

Erat in eo memoria tanta ut, quae commentatus esset, verbis 
eisdem redderet quibus cogitavisset. There was in him such 
power of memory that ideas he had excogitated^ he reproduced 
in the same words in which he had thought them out (the verbs of 
the two rel. clauses are assimilated to the mood of redderet). 



138 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

4- Verbs of saying and thinking are not inserted parenthetically 
into a sentence in Latin. Thus : 

You were, he said, mistaken. Dixit te errare. 
He has, you think, gone away. Putas eum abiisse. 

Note. Phrases like ut aiunt (as they say), ut opinor (as 1 
think), ^t puto (as I fancy), are, however, found. 

5. Inquit, he says or said, is the only verb of saying that is never 
used to introduce oblique narration. It is always used in quoting 
the exact words of another and it is placed after the first two or 
three words of the quotation : as, 

At Caesar: "Minime vero," inquit, "hoc probo." But Casar 
said : " 2 by no means approve of this." 

6. Credo, I believe, is sometimes used parenthetically, but always 
in an ironical sense : as, 

Credo, etiam tabulae proferentur. The account-books, I suppose, 
will even be produced. 

EXERCISE LI. 

i. They accused him of having (as they alleged) betrayed the 
king (use quod). 2. He used to walk at night because (as was 
said) he could not sleep. 3. He gave me all the books which (as 
he said) his father had left him. 4. He demands that you should 
remove this scruple which (as he says) is goading him day and 
night (pi.) 5- When he had reached the top of the hill, he pointed 
out streams which (he said) flowed towards Italy. 6. Cato used to 
wonder that a soothsayer did not laugh whenever he saw a sooth- 
sayer. 7. He sent them another king since the one that had been 
given them was useless. 8. You complain that we do not hold the 
same views. 9. He passed a law concerning the murder which (as he 
said) had been committed (facio). 10 Avail yourself of this bless- 
ing while you have it (subjun.). n. The person who saw it (sub- 
jun.) would wonder. 12. He begged them, since they had not 
helped him in his life-time, not to leave his death unavenged. 13. 
This man so they tell me was born rich. 14. He said that, if 
the Romans made peace with him, he would remain where they 



SPECIAL IDIOMS OP LATIN SYNTAX. 139 

ordered him to remain. 15. When I do it, I shall return to Rome. 
1 6. He, I believe, will quickly recover. 17. Thereupon the other 
(ille) said: " All this I will do." 18. Ask him whether he expects 
ever to be rich by sacrificing his own interests to those of his 
friends, 19. At your suggestion they were persuaded to set out to 
the attack upon our camp, without waiting for a guide. 20. If he 
did this, I would show my gratitude ; if not, it would be of small 
consequence to me. 21. It is not easy to say whether this man 
should be spared by us or thrown into prison. 2 :. To my com- 
plaint that he had broken his word, he replied that he had done 
nothing of the kind. 23. At your suggestion, they attacked and 
stormed the camp. 24. Fearing for the safety of his father, he fled 
to me in Italy. 25. The announcement of this victory filled the 
city with shouting and singing. 26. It is difficult to see how he 
could have gained the battle by withdrawing his troops. 27. Don't 
you think that he felt shame and remorse for esteeming so highly 
such a wicked man as Catiline ? 28. If they had defeated our 
army and captured this city, not a soul would be alive to-day. 29. 
When the soldiers had reached the summit of the mountain, they 
congratulated the general upon the conquest of Italy (use quod+7^.) 
30. I believe that, if he had made the same mistake as you, he 
would long ago have repented of it. 31. After saluting the general 
of the enemy, he rode rapidly away without waiting for anyone. 



52. ON SOME SPECIAL IDIOMS OP 
LATIN SYNTAX. 

"Without" and a Participial Noun. 

1. The ablative of the gerund can not be joined with sine, the 
usual preposition for without. . Phrases, therefore, like Without in- 
juring himself, 'without your perceiving it, c., must be paraphrased 
into some synonymous form of words, and this turned into Latin. 
Thus: 



140 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

He aids others without injuring himself. Allis subvenit, non 
sibi nocens. 

I did it without your per ceivi?ig it. Hoc feci, te non sentiente. 
They condemn him without hearing him. Eum damnant inau- 
ditum. 

He cries without feeling grief. Flet nee dolet. 
He never led out his army without examining- the position of the 
ground. Nunquam exercitum eciuxit nisi explorato locorum situ. 

He speaks without persuading anyone. Dicit nee cuiquam per- 
suadet. 

We returned without accomplishing anything. Re infecta 
rediimus. 

Those cannot fall without these falling with them. Cadere ilia 
non possunt ut haec non concldant. 

To think of my going away wit Ji out saying good-bye to anyone ! 
Mene abiisse, nullo salutato ! See p. 58, 15. 

2. It has been seen (p. ji, j>y note i) that the fut. subjun. act. ia 
formed from the fut. participle with sim, which becomes essem after 
a secondary tense. Therefore : 

They are so terrified that they will not fight is Adeo territi sunt 
ut non pug-naturi sint. 

They were so terrified that they would not fight. Adeo territi 
erant ut non pug-naturi essent (would, here, is simply the histori- 
cal tense of will.} 

"WOULD HAVE" IN A DEPENDENT CLAUSE. 

3. Would have (of the main clause of a conditional sentence) 
when inserted in a dependent clause that already requires the sub- 
junctive, is not to be turned by the pluperf, subjun., but by the 
periphrastic conjugation. Thus : 

/ did not doubt that he would have taken the city. Non dubitavi 
quin urbem capturus fuerit. (consecutive sequence ; p. 14, 3). 

I ask you "what you woultt have done. Rog-o te quid facturus 
fueris. 

So great was the slaughter that you would not have survived. 
Tanta caedes fuit ut non superfuturus fueris. 



SPECIAL IDIOMS OF LATIN SYNTAX. 141 

And so in the passive : 

Therefore it happens that, if I had given the order, a disaster 
would have been sustained. Eo fit ut, hoc si iussissem, clades 
accipienda fuerit (or accipi potuerit). 

Note. These examples show the Roman fondness for strict 
adherence to rule. They chose a form which would express (a) that 
the clause was conditional ; (b) that it was consecutive, or an 
indirect question, etc. (i.e. a double dependence). 

4. Would have been (in the main clause of an ordinary condi- 
tional sentence) requires in oblique narration the periphrasis 
futurum fuisseut. (to have been about to be) : as, 

He said that, if life could have been longer, it would have been 
adorned with many arts. Dixit, si vita longinquior esse potuisset, 
futurum fuisse ut multis artibus ornaretur (dir. = ornata esset). 

This periphrasis is also used (a) in the active, when a verb has no 
supine.; (b) for the sake of variety, when there is no necessity for it : 
as, 

(a) I had hoped that this would have happened. Speraveram 
futurum fuisse ut id contingeret. 

(b) I know that we should have taken the city, if he had not 
been there. Scio futurum fuisse ut urbem caperemus nisi ille ad- 
fuisset. 

5. Certain idiomatic uses of the si-clause deserve notice. 
Thus: 

(a) Exspectabat si hostem elicere posset. He was waiting in 
the hope that he could draw out the enemy (here the si-clause is in 
virtual oblique r&x\3.\\QVi= determined that, if he could draw the 
enemy out, he would fight them}. 

(b) Mortem mini denuntiavit si pugnavissem. He threatened 
me with death in case I fought (here the main clause of the condi- 
tional sentence is contained in mortem=si pugnaveris, moriere). 

(c) Nuntium ad te misi si forte non audiisses. / sent a messenger 
to you, in case you had not heard (\\eve the si-clause expresses pur- 
pose and therefore has the subjun.;= that you might hear). 



142 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

6. Coepi means both / begin and / began. The active form is 
used when an active infinitive follows : as, 

Urbem aedificare coepit. He began to build the city. 
The passive form, coeptus sum, is used when a passive infinitive 
follows : as, 

Urbs aediflcari coepta est. The city bega?i to be built. 

7- Other common ways of turning although, beside those men- 
tioned, may be given. Thus : 

Though he is a good man, he sometimes sins 

(a) Ita est vir optimus ut interdum peccet (i.e., on this condi- 
tion he is a good man, that, etc.; restrictive use). 

(b) Vir sane optimus est, sed tamen peccat (usual concessive 
force of sane, no doubt, if you will). 

(c) Licet vir optimus sit, tamen peccat (licet, it is granted, 
though). 

8. For the present participle pass, (if required), a relative clause 
may usually be employed : as, 

The accused is rich. Is, qui accusatur, vir dives est. 

9. For the future participle passive, a periphrasis must be 
found : as, 

Caesar, when about to be killed, etc. Caesar, quum in eo esset ut 
periret (or iam periturus) &c. 

EXERCISE LI I. 

i. They poured round in the hope of finding some means of 
approach. 2. I believe that, if this had been said, it would have* 
been heard. 3. ^ ou will find out, when you come. 4. Had he 
done so, there is no doubt that he would have done it to the public 
disadvantage (abl.) 5. He tried in the hope of helping us. 6. 
Why was he exempted from the law, in case he should be absent 
from the city ? 7. The enemy were waiting, in the hope that we 
would cross. 8. There is no doubt that, if I had ordered it, you 
would have done it. 9. There was no doubt that, if he had not 
been there, the city would have been taken. 10. If it had been 



NOTES ON THE NUMERALS. 14$ 

right, you were the one (tails) who would have done it. n. 
Nothing shall happen without my giving you notice. 12. He went 
away without consulting anyone. 13. I never visit you without 
coming away more learned. 14. All this he did without your 
approval. 15. He never saw him without flinging a stone at him. 
1 6. He couid not have condemned him without hearing him (say 
unheard}. 17. He returned to Rome without waiting for the army. 
1 8. I believe that if they had delayed a day, the city would have 
been destroyed. 19. The storm was so great that the fleet would 
not set sail. 20. You showed on that day how you would have 
behaved, if you had been there. 21. It came (p. 38, 2) to this (eo, 
thither) that, if they had had a high-spirited enemy, they would have 
been defeated. 22. There is no doubt that, if enough daylight (dies) 
had remained, they would have been stripped of their camp. 23. 
Ask them what they would have done, if the enemy had come to the 
city. 24. He was so able that he would have been chosen, if he 
had been in a private station (privatus). 25. You showed what kind 
of magistrate you would have been. 26. There is no doubt that the 
enemy would have turned their backs. 27. They rushed from the 
temple with such speed that they would have filled the city with 
tumult. 28. He said that he had received the thanks of parliament 
because he had not despaired of the country. 29. Whether it is 
constitutional or not may be questioned ; but whether it is or not, 
it is approved of by all patriots. 30. I shall advise him to go from 
Rome to Athens and to remain there three months. 31. He told us 
that the man would have recovered, if the doctor had not arrived too 
late. 32. The besieged (p. 142, 8) were not altogether without 
water. 



53. NOTES ON THE NUMERALS. 

1. Cardinal numerals are indeclinable except (i) unus, one; 
duo, two; tree, three; (2) the hundreds, beginning with ducenti, 
two hundred; (3) the plural of mille, a thousand. 

2. Mille, a thousand, is indeclinable in the singular, but in the 
plural it is declined. 



144 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION 

Note. Mille, in the singular, may be either an adjective or a 
noun with the word depending on it in the genitive : as, Mille 
homines or rnille hommum, a thousa7id men. In the plural it is 
always a noun : as, Decem millia hominum, ten thousand men 
( = ten thousand of men). 

3. Compound numbers like 21, 22, &c., when between 20 and 
loo, are written unus et viginti, duo et viginti, or viginti unus, 
viginti duo, &c. 

Above one hundred, the greater number precedes (with or with- 
out et) : as, Ducenti unus, or ducenti et unus, two hundred and 
one. Et is rarely expressed : as, 

Caesar Gallorum duo millia quingentos sex cepit. Caesar cap- 
tured 2^506 Gauls. 

4. Firs^ second, third, in enumerations, is unus, alter, tertius : as, 
Bquibus generibus, unum est ex iis qui...., alterum ex iis, &c- 

Of these classes the first consists of those who. . the second of those, etc. 

5. The ordinals are used in expressing dates : as, 

Anno post urbem conditam septingentesimo < quinquagesimo 
quarto natus est Christus. Christ was born 754 years after the 
foundation of the city. 

A.D. millesimo octingentesimo octogesimo t&rtioA.D. 1883. 

Anno urbis conditae quinquagesimo quarto. In the 54th year 
of the building of the city (i.e. the beginning of the Roman era ; 
subtract from 754 for year B.C.). 

Quota hora est? Hora, prima, secunda, tertia, &c. What hour 
is it? Seven, eight, nine o* clock, etc. (i.e., reckoning from sun-rise at 
six o'clock ; time was measured by a sun-dial). 

6. The distributive numerals are used : 

(a) To express our so many at a time, so many each, with a car- 
dinal numeral : as, Pueris binos libros donavit. He gave the boys 
two books apiece. 

(b) To express multiplication : as, Bis bina quattuor sunt. Twice 
two are four. 



NOTES ON THE NUMERALS. 145 

(c) With substantives that have no singular or a different mean- 
ing in the singular and plural, respectively : as, Bina castra, two 
camps. Castrum is a fort; duo caatra, would mean two forts. 

Note I. In that case the plural of unus is used for singuli: as, 
Ex unis duas mini confides nuptias. You will make for me two 
weddings out of one. 

Note 2. When the distributives are used with a numeral adverb, 
they have the force of cardinals : as, 

Ter deni, thrice ten; vicies centena, two thousand. 

7. Mille and sescenti (six: hundred) are used to express an in- 
definitely large number : as, 

Nonne millies mori satins est? Is it not better to die a thousand 
times? (i.e., deaths?) 

Sescentas epistolas uno tempore accept / received a thou- 
sand letters at one time. 

8. Fractions with i for the numerator are expressed by an 
ordinal with pars : as, 

Tertia pars, \ centeslma pars, yig- (=i per cent.) ; milleslma 
pars, yyViJ' Dimidium, however, is ^. 

9. Where the numerator is one less than the denominator, the 
cardinals with partes are used : as, 

Duae partes, f ; tres partes, f . 

Tres quintae is f ; quattuor septimae, \ ; decumae (tenths), 
tithes. 

Dimidio plures, half as many again ( = more by half);- duplo 
plures, double as many ; alterum tantum, half as much again. 

10. In the first place, in the second place, in the next place, lastly 
is primo, deinde, turn, postremo. 

EXERCISE LI 1 1. 

I. One camp seemed now made out of two. 2. His wine was 

guarded with a hundred keys. 3. The Lacedaemonians have now 

been living seven hundred years with one set-of-customs (mores). 

^ ' heard that he had a thousand horsemen in that place. 5. Have 

11 



146 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

you heard that he arrived at three o'clock ? 6. If he had given 
that order, I believe that 1200 good men would have been lost. 7. 
So great was the slaughter the 12,422 of our men were slain. 8. 
The towers were carried up to 120 feet each. 9. He was born in 
the year 1889. 10. Let us ask him what he would have done with 
only 220 horsemen, n. Speaking thus, he sent forward more than 
looo men (#. 77, 4). 12. I believe that he has surrounded the city 
with five camps. 13. Out of 100,000 citizens, no one came to his 
aid. 14. I almost think that as many are missing as have been 
killed. 15. So reasonable was your request (say : such just things 
you asked) that it would have been spontaneously (ultro) granted. 
1 6. Seeing that the forces of the enemy were too numerous to be 
routed in a single engagement, he resolved to prepare for a pro- 
tracted war. 17. If we had remained for more than six months at 
Rome, we should not have been able to see anyone when we re- 
turned to Athens. 18. It was most fortunate for me, fighting in 
spite of your opposition (abl. abs.)> that I gained the victory with- 
out the loss of a single soldier. 19. Your friends were persuaded 
to condemn these men to death. By pardoning them now, you will 
show that you blush (use pudet) for such cruelty. 20. Do not be 
angry with anyone without some cause. 21. We must admit that 
he gained much credit by amassing wealth and aiding the poor. 
22. Whenever summer began, he used to go to Athens. 23. Are 
you not ashamed and penitent for the desertion of your friend ? 
24. In proportion to a man's apparent meanness, will be his severity 
in pronouncing judgment. 25. Can we doubt that the universe 
is administered by divine wisdom ? 26. He said that we would 
make our style (oratio) more copious (plenus) by reading his books. 

27. Is anything good which does not make its possessor (rel.) good? 

28. Thereupon, after saluting the general, he rode away, without 
anyone answering him. 29. Throwing themselves at the king's 
feet, they begged him not to destroy them. 30. Nor should we 
listen to those who tell us that we ought to be angry with children. 
31. Let us ask him how he lived both at Veii and at Rome, and 
when he set out from Utica for Carthage. 32. He said that it was 
of the utmost importance what steps they took. Let them wake 
up (expergiscor) at last and follow him. 



THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 147 



54. THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 

1. The days of the month at Rome were reckoned bacitwards 
from three points of the month called respectively Kalendae, Nonae, 
and Id-us (-uum). 

2. The word Kalendae is derived from the old Latin calo, / 
call. It was the day on which the new moon was proclaimed, i.e., 
the first of the month. 

Idus (from root vid, to divide) was the name given to the I3th of 
eight of the months, and to the I5th of the other four : 

In March, July, October, May, 
The Ides were on the fifteenth day. 

The Nones (or ninths) was the name given to the 5th of eight of 
the months, and to the 7th of the other four : 

In March, July, October, May, 
The Nones were on the seventh day. 

The word Nonae or Nones is derived from nonus (ninth), being 
according to the inclusive Roman method of counting, " the ninth 
day before the Ides." The Romans, in counting the days before a 
particular date, counted in both the day from which they reckoned 
and the day to which they reckoned. Thus the Ides of March 
were on the i5th and, therefore, the Nones (i.e., the gth day before 
the Ides) fell on the 7th, counting in both the i$th and the 7th. 

3. The names of the twelve Roman months are as follows : 

lanuarius, Februarius, Martius, Aprllis, Maius, lunius, lulius (or 
Quintilis), Augustus (or Sextllis), September, October, November, 
December. 

These names are all adjectival and are used in agreement with the 
names (given above) of the divisions of the month. Each month 
had the same number of days as at present. 

4. On the third day before the Ides of March, would naturally be 
Tertio die ante Idus Martias (p. 85, \). this form, however, is not 
found, but, instead of it, the strange corruption Ante diem tertium 
Idus Martias (the preposition being regarded, apparently, as govern- 
ing diem instead of Idus). 



148 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Thus : On the third day before the Ides of March. Ante diem ter- 
tium Idus Martias, or, as usually written, A. d. iii Id. Mart. 

N te. Instead of the above, the form iii Id. Mart, is also found. 

5. To translate : 

We shall expect you on March nth. Find how many days 
before the Ides (or I5th) the nth falls, and add i, in accordance 
with the inclusive method of the Romans. Thus 15- 11=4 ; and 
adding i, the I ith of March- is the ^th day. before the Ides of March. 
(The days, according to Roman ideas, were these : the I5th, I4th, 
1 3th, 12th, nth, i.e., five]. Therefore: We shall expect you on 
March nth is A. d. v. Id. Mart, te exspectabimus. 
For convenience, it is better to add the i before subtracting ; thus : 
15+1-11 = 5. 

I was 'present on August ^rd. A. d. iii. Non. Aug. adfui (date of 
Nones of August = the 5th ; 5 + 1 3 = 3). 

He was born Sept. 231' d. Natus est a. d. ix. Kal. Oct. (32 - 23 = 9 ; 
30 days in Sept. + i in Oct. + i, for the Roman method). 

He died on the $rd of June. A- d. iii. Non. lun. mortuus est 
(Nones on 5th ; 6-3 = 3). 

/ spoke in the Senate on October 2ist. A. d. xii. Kal. Nov. in Senatu 
dixi (31+2-21 = 12). 

6. The day immediately before the Kalends, Nones, or Ides is 
called pridie: as, 

On the I4th March. Pridie Id. Mart, (ace.) ; Dec. Jist, prid. 
Kal. Ian. 

7. The phrase ante diem came to be regarded as an indeclinable 
noun, and was joined with a preposition : as, 

He invited me to dinner for Nov. idth. In a. d. xvi Kal. Dec. me 
in coenam invitavit. 

8. In leap-year the Romans intercalated a day between the 25th 
and the 26th of February : i.e., between a. d. vi. Kal. Mart, and 
a. d. vii. Kal. Mart. The day inserted was called bissextus (i.e., 
the 6th twice] because the 6th day before the Kalends was reckoned 
twice. Leap-year was called annus bisextUis. 

Thus : A. d. bisextum Kal. Mart, pugnatum est. The battle was 
fought on the intercalary day in February. 



THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 149 

EXERCISE LIV. 

i. I believe that the man died on the 7th of June. 2. The city 
began to be blockaded (p. 142, 6) on the 8th of May. 3. He remained 
at Rome from the 3rd of August till September 8th. 4. Did you 
hear that he left for home on the 2oth of March ? 5. Shall you be 
here on April 13th? 6. The Senate was called together for the 2ist 
of November. 7. He promised that he would pay on the Greek Ka- 
lends. 8. If he had arrived by (ad) the 28th of June, he would have 
been safe. 9. Don't you think that, if he had been killed on the 
2nd of June, we should have heard of it by this ? 10. On the 5th 
of May, at sunrise, he led out the 5th and 7th legions to (qui) attack 
the enemy in the rear. 1 1. O ! that he had been in Rome on the 
5th of December. 12. I believe that he did not start for Rome till 
the loth of April a circumstance that he regretted to the last day 
of his life. 1 3. I believe that he went to Rome that winter on 
April 22nd, and remained there twenty days. 14. I heard that he 
stayed at Lucca from March 3rd until April 2ist, and that then he 
crossed from Lucca to Athens. 15. I understood that he had 
denied again and again having promised to pay you at Tibur on 
May 1 7th, 1894. 16. We have been expecting you since April 
loth. 17. 1 believe that he would have set out on July I4th. 18. 
They have ordained a thanksgiving from the nth to the 2oth of 
October. 19. You promised to stay with me on May 2ist. 20. 
Instead of joining his father at Rome on the last day of August, 
he preferred to linger a whole month in the beautiful city of Athens. 
21. In the battle of Cannae (Cannensis) more than 46,000 Romans 
fell. 22. I think that he has already reigned six years (p. 34., j>). 23. 
It is said that Homer flourished before the foundation of Rome. 
24. The town was besieged from the I4th of March till the i5th 
of May. 25. Let us ask him whether he will come to Rome on 
December 4th. 26. Have you not heard that he gained the vic- 
tory without the loss of a single man ? 27. All this he did at my 
suggestion, without hoping for any reward. 28. I did not know 
when they intended to come to our assistance. 29. Will anything 
prevent those standing near from ridiculing us? 30. Don't you 
think that, if he had remained at Aricia six months, the town 
would have been saved ? 



150 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



55. ROMAN CURRENCY. 

1. The following is the table of Roman money true for the last 
two centuries, approximately, of the Republic : 

I as = Xd. (i cent). 
4 asses = i sestertius = 2d (4 cents). 
4 sestertii (16 asses) =i denarius=8d (16 cents). 
25 denarii (100 sestertii or 400 asses) i aureus^iys (over $4). 
The as was a copper coin; the sesterce and denarius, silver; and 
the aureus, gold. 

2. The following table of approximate values is useful, and easily 
remembered : 

1,000 sestertii = 8 los (over $40). 

10,000 " == ^8 5 

100,000 " = .850 
1,000,000 " =^8,506 

3. The sesterce* was the common unit for expressing sums of 
money at Rome. 

It was used as follows : 

(a) Up to 2,000, the ordinary numeral adjectives were used with 
sestertius : as, 

Centum sestertii a hundred sesterces; undeni sestertii, eleven 
sesterces each. 

(b) Above 2,000 and up to a million, the neut. plur. sestertia was 
used for the thousands : as, 

Triglnta quinque sestertia. Thirty-five thousand sesterces. 
Sestertia tria et quadring-enti octoginta sestertii=j,^So sesterces. 
Sestertia unum et triginta et quingenti sexaginta sestertii= 
31,560 sesterces. 

* Sestertius is derived from semis (half) and tertius (third), i.e., the third a 
half= 2J ; hence it is often written H S (ii semis). It was originally worth 2J asses. 



ROMAN CURRENCYc 151 

(c) For a million and sums above a million, the numeral adverbs 
were used with one hundred thousand sesterces. Thus : 

Decies centena millia sestertium (for sestertiorum). One million 
sesterces (lit., ten times one hundred thousand sesterces). 

Vicies centena millia sestertium. Two million sesterces. 

Quadragies, etc. Four million sesterces. 

But, for the sake of brevity, each of the above was written without 
the centena millia. Thus : Decies sestertium, vicies sestertium 
etc., or H S decies, H S vicies, etc. 

(d) When a sum requires more than one numeral adverb to 
express it, the numerals must be added together if the larger stands 
first, but multiplied if the smaller stands first : as, 

Millies quingenties sestertium. One hundred and fifty millions, 
Ter vicies sestertium. Six million sesterces ( = 3 x 20 x 100,000). 

(e) If the sum was written in figures, thousands were denoted by 
a line over the figure, hundreds of thousands by top and side lines. 
Thus: 



H S | XXI 1 | XXXVCCCCXVI I = vicies ducenta triginta quin- 
que millia quadringenti decem et septem nummi =^,^5,^/7 ses- 
terces. 

Note. Nummus (a coin) is frequently used instead of sestertius. 

(/) The genitive plural sestertium, used in expressing large sums, 
is sometimes treated as a neuter noun and declined : as, 

Syngrapha sestertii centiens facta est. A bond of 10,000,000 
sesterces was drawn up. 

In vicies sestertio splendide se gessit. He kept up great state 
on a for tune of two millions. 

EXERCISE LV. 

i. He paid a debt to the amount of (ad) 800,000 sesterces. 
2. He will lend you 10,000 sesterces each. 3. I believe that he 
took away from them forty millions of sesterces. 4. There was no 
doubt that he borrowed 600,000 sesterces. 5. He kept up greater 
state with a fortune of five millions than we did. 6. Can you call 



152 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

him a miser who was willing to throw away (perdo) twen 
of sesterces ? 7. He restored gold and silver to the amount of ten 
millions. 8. He ordered 640,000 to be carried to your house ; 1 
believe he draws from his estates 600,000 sesterces. 9. He hired a 
house for six thousand sesterces (abL\ 10. He left less than two 
hundred thousand sesterces, n. He promised to pay me $65,000 
at Rome on March 2ist. 12. I believe he still owed them 1,800,000 
sesterces on January 3rd. 1 3. If you had been there, you would have 
received 1,036,696 sesterces. 14. If six or seven thousand sesterces 
are wanting (desunt) to make up (ad) the four hundred thousand, 
you shall be a plebeian. 15. If he had been a rich man, the $50,000 
would have been paid. 16. Do you think he will give a hundred 
millions of sesterces for this villa? 17. Tell me how he can buy it 
for less than twenty thousand sesterces. 18. I have bought an 
estate at forty millions. 19. On the I4th of March he will pay you 
110,000 sesterces. 20. Give them sixty sesterces each. 21. How 
few there are who would venture to say that he wished to be hated 
by all ! 22. And no one knew why he was envied. 23. He asked 
where the seven hundred millions was which was in the account- 
books. 24. It is difficult to see how he could have gained the 
battle by withdrawing his troops. 25. Fearing for his safety, he 
fled to me at Rome. 26. At your suggestion, they attacked and 
stormed the camp. 27. He said that, if had not received your 
letter, it would have been all over with him. 28. If he had not con- 
sulted the interest of the country, he would never have been forgiven. 
29. Let us advance rather than retreat. 30. It was of the utmost 
consequence to us that a general of such high ability as this should 
be at the head of the army. 31. He is more generous than well- 
born. 32. Whatever his poverty, he will give you something. 



WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. INTEREST. 153 



56. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. INTEREST. 

1. The word As (Greek flf) was used to express any unit, and it 
was divided into twelve parts (unciae) to express twelfths of the unit. 

The names of these divisions should be noted. 

DIVISIONS OF THE AS. 

As (the unit). 

Deunx, gen. -uncis (de-uncia=<?72 ounce 0^"}=^. 

Dextans, -antis (de-sextans = a sixth off} = \% or f. 

Dodrans, -antis (de quadrans =tf_/tf2^/^ off} = ^ or |. 

Bes, bessis (bis as?) = T 8 2 =f . 

Septunx, -uncis (septem uncia) = T 7 ^-. 

Semis or semissis, gen. semissis (semi -as, a half ^as) = T 6 3? or \. 

Quincunx, -uncis (quinque uncia) = ^. 

Triens, -entis (tres) = -/^ or \. 

Quadrans, -antis (quattuor) = 1 3 2 - or \. 

Sextans, -antis (sex) = T % or \. 

Uncia = T V 

Note I. Of the above divisions, semis, triens, quadrans, and 
sextans were used as coins. 

Note 2. Both inch and ounce are derived from uncia. 

2. These divisions were used for dividing into twelfths any unit 
like iugerum (an acre), pes (a foot\ libra (a pouna] : as, 

Arare semissem iugeri. To plough half an acre. 
Obeliscus centum viginti quinque pedum et dodrantis. An 
obelisk 125% feet high. 

Tres librae cum semisse. 3^ pounds. 

3. They were commonly used also in bequests : as, 
Heres ex asse. Heir to the whole estate. 

Heres ex semisse. Heir to half the estate. 
Heres ex uncia. Heir to one-twelfth. 



154 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



4. They were used to express not only fractions whose denomi- 
nator was 1 2, but many mixed numbers : as, 

Quartus quadrans, j J (i.e., the fourth number a fourth). 
Semis tertius, 2\. Semis sextus, $\. 

Lignum bessem alterum (or bessem alterum latum). A. log 20 
inches in diameter (i.e., the second f = :-f). 

5. The same divisions were used for reckoning interest (usurae, 
fenus), which was due monthly. Thus : 

Asses usurae (units interest, \ e., one a month for the use of a 
hundred), twelve per cent, per a?mum. It was also called 
centesimae usurae (i e. , the hundredth interest), because in one 
hundred months a sum equal to the principal (sors) would have 
been paid. 

The following table gives the Latin for interest from i to 12% : 

% per annum. 
12 
1 1 (i.e., 



Deunces 

Dextantes 

Dodrantes 



Septunces 

Semisses 

Quincunces 

Trientes 

Quadrantes 

Sextantes 

Unciae 



usurae 



per month). 



So too : Binae centesimae, 24% per annum ; ternae centesimae, 
36% per annum, etc. Thus : 

Pecuniam assibus usuris collocavit. He invested money at 12%. 

Dodrantibus usuris grandem pecuniam apud eum collocavit. 
He placed a large sum of money in his hands at 9%. 



WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. INTEREST. 155 

EXERCISE LVI. 

i. His height was five feet nine. 2. He made him heir to three- 
fourths of his estate. 3. You could have been heir to seven-twelfths 
of his estate. 4. .He has left me fifteen million sesterces, which is 
nearly two-thirds of his estate. 5. I have been waiting for him 
half an hour. 6. If he had begun then, one-third of an acre would 
have been ploughed now. 7. It is said that he jumped twelve feet 
and a quarter. 8. The hill, I believe, was 252 feet 3 inches high. 
9. Two acres and a half (pi,} have been assigned to each. 10. The 
will assigns to each three acres and seven-twelfths, n. I shall 
borrow $40,000 from him on the 1st at 5 %. 12. I hear the boy's 
height is 5ft. 10 in. 13. I understand that the interest will be 
reduced (redigo) from 1 1 to 5 %. 14. He has lost five-sixths of his 
money. 15. He paid them $10,000 on May 2ist. 16. He gave one 
man three hundred sesterces, another three thousand. 17. Can 
anyone plough an acre and a third a day? 18. He left a small sum 
with me at 4 %. 19. I believe the tree was five and a half feet high. 
20. Could anyone have been willing to pay interest at 48 % per 
annum ? 2 r . They will tell us that, having saluted the general of 
the enemy, he rode back to the camp to finish the work. 22. Even 
if anyone had ordered them to remain until our sailors came up to 
their aid, they would have left immediately. 23. No doubt he was 
most deserving of death, but he ought to have been spared when 
he asked for pardon. 24. Did you think that he would gain much 
glory by killing women and children? 25. You should have 
answered that you intended to hand over the bridge to them to 
guard. 26. On receipt of the letter, he dismissed the messenger ; 
then, seizing a spear, he prepared to defend himself. 27. He used 
to say that many evils happened to all of us. 28. I knew that our 
nouse would not sell at as high a figure as we bought it at. 29. To 
my complaint that he had injured his country, he answered that, if 
he had done so, he would pay the p'enalty. 30. Fearing this, Caesar 
led out his men and, in spite of my opposition, attacked the enemy's 
camp. 31. He used to say that, if he could do such a thing at 
Rome, he would have done it at Athens also. 32. On the 27th of 
September he told me that he was tired of war ; that he had won 
glory enough by destroying armies and capturing cities. 



156 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

57. LATIN IDIOM IN THE USE OF WORDS. 

1. Hitherto, attention has been drawn almost altogether to the 
difference between English and Latin in point of grammatical con- 
struction ; the words used to illustrate the rules of syntax have been, 
as far as possible, such as occur in both languages. None but 
the simplest English, however, can be turned word for word into 
Latin, and care and thought will always be necessary, apart alto- 
gether from a knowledge of syntax rules, in order to obiain the 
proper form (i.e., the right words) in which to express in Latin even 
ordinary English ideas. 

2. DICTIONARIES. And here it may be remarked that, though 
the study and verification in the Latin Lexicon of the use of words 
is of the greatest value, the use of the English-Latin Dictionary 
should be discouraged ; it should be restricted, as far as possible, to 
turning up the names of things not commonly mentioned in the 
authors read. Compared to English, Latin has a small vocabu- 
lary, and many words of common occurrence in English have 
no corresponding words in Latin. The idea must be caught from 
the English and expressed in the Latin form. For example : I be- 
lieve in the existence of God, is not to be expressed by Credo in Dei 
existentia ; there is no such word in classical Latin as existentia. 
Knowing that Latin avoids abstract nouns, and changing the noun 
into a verb, we get Credo Deum esse, which is shorter, simpler, and 
more forcible than the English, and could not be got out of the 
English-Latin Dictionary. It can not, in fact, be too often repeated, 
that it is the English idea, and not the English word, that is to be 
expressed in Latin ; the English form must, as a usual thing, be 
entirely re-cast. 

3. IDIOMATIC TRANSLATION. No exercise can be better for 
showing and impressing the great difference between the two 
languages in this respect than the constant translating of Latin 
authors into adequate and idiomatic English. For example : 

Occisus Caesar multis pulcherrimum facinus videbatur. The 
assassi?iation of Caesar seemed to many a -very glorious deed. 

Regnatum est Romae a condita urbe ad liberatam annos ducen- 
tos quadraginta quattuor. Kings reigned at Rome two hundred 



LATltf IDIOM IN THE USE OF WORDS. 157 

and forty -four years, dating from the foundation of the city to its 
liberation. 

Infelicissime pugnatum est. A most disastrous battle has been 
fought. 

Rem prope prolapsam restituit. He restored what was almost a 
lost cause. And so on. 

Such practice extends the student's knowledge of Latin vocabu 
lary and cultivates close observation, without which no intimate 
acquaintance with Latin idiom can be acquired. It is only 
from the careful study of the Latin authors that such acquaint- 
ance is gained. 

THE ABSTRACT NOUN. 

4. Certain differences in English and Latin idiom in the use of 
language have been already pointed out, and may be re-stated here : 

(a) Latin often uses the indirect question where English uses an 
abstract or verbal noun : as, 

Illud quaeritur unde hoc periculum ortum sit. The question 
is what is the source of the danger. 

Read 17 again, and observe generally that Latin uses few abstract 
or verbal nouns. 

(b) Latin often uses an impersonal verb (especially of motion) to 
express an English noun and verb : as, 

Pugnatum est, a battle was fought ; clamatum est, a shout was 
raised; ad arma concurritur, there is a rush to arms (see p. 

3 8, 2). 

So too : Huius rei eum poenituit. This thing filled him with 
remorse (p. 66, 3). 

(c) An English verbal noun may often be turned by changing k 
into a verb : as, 

Tecum pugnat, he is in conflict with you; hoc respondet, he 
makes this reply; haec praecepit, these were his maxims; hoc 
fremebat vulgus, such was the popular cry; multa cogitat, his 
thoughts are many; quid mentitus est? what falsehood has he 
told? occurrebat ei, the thought occurred to him (see p. 38, 5). 



158 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

(cT) The present participle is often used for an English abstract 
noun : as, 

Mini querenti, to my complaint j te repugnante, in spite of your 
opposition; indignant ium voces, expressions of indignation (see 
p. 48, 6). 

(<?) The perfect participle passive is often used in Latin for an 
English abstract or verbal noun : as, 

Propter classem amissam condemnatus est. He was condemned 
for the loss of the fleet. 

Post expulsum fllium. After the expulsion of the son (see p. 
50, 14, and p. 52, 4, 5.) 

(/) A noun-clause introduced by quod will often take the place 
of an English noun : as, 

Mini gratum est quod venisti. The fact of your coming is 
pleasing to me. 

Idcirco adfui quod ei sub venire volui. The reason of my 
presence was my wish to aid Jiim. 

Quod ei subveni mini iucundum est. The reflection that I aided 
him is delightful to me (see p. 99, 6, 7). 

(g) The comparative adverbial clause will often take the place of 
an English noun and preposition : as, 

Feci perinde qf riftVmV / have acted in accordance with my duty. 
[ _. . perinde acjmeritus est. He was punished in 
accordance with his deserTsfseep. 1 16). 

(h) The genitive is used to express the English task, duly, custom, 
characteristic, mark, token : as, ludicis est sequi veru.rn, it is the 
duty of a jtidge to follow the truth (literally : to follow the truth is 
of, i.e , belongs to a jtidge)-, hoc est praeceptoris, this is the busi- 
ness of an instructor ; sapientis est res adversas aequo animo 
ferre, it is the characteristic of a wise man to bear adversity with 
resignation (literally : with an even mind). See p. 59, 2. 

Note. With possessive pronouns, this genitive is not used, but 
the neuter of the corresponding possessive adjective : as, Tuurr: 
(not tui est) videre, it is your duty to see. 

To these may be added the following : 



f LATIN IDIOM IN THE USE OF WORDS. 150 

(z) The Latin infinitive will often supply the place of an abstract 
noun : as, 

Humanum est errare. Error is human. 

Liberius dicere mini non licuit Greater freedom of speech was 
not allowed me. So too: Beate vivere, happiness (also, beata vita) ; 
felicem esse, success (lit., to be lucky). 

(/) A dependent adverbial clause may frequently be used to turn 
an English abstract noun : as, 

Hoc malum ut vitaret, abiit. For the avoidance of this evil^ he 
went away. 

Hoc accidit dum abfui (or me absente). This occurred in my 
absence. And, generally speaking, it may be said that Latin avoids 
the abstract noun and prefers to use the verb instead. 

(k] A relative clause may be used to turn an English noun in -er 
or -or, expressing an agent : as, 

Qui patrem meum interfecerunt. My father's murderers. 

Qui videbant ea, flebant. The spectators wept. 

Note. Nouns in -tor or -sor (expressing an agent), are common 
in Latin ; but the relative clause in this sense is usual. 

EXERCISE LVII. 
(In doing the exercise avoid the use of abstract nouns.) 

i. Will he prefer life to death ? 2. He was angry, I believe, 
with the by-standers. 3. He was better than any of his predeces- 
sors on the throne (use regno, to reigri). 4. During your presence, 
he kept silence. 5. He did not take any account of my threats. 6. 
Such was his fear that he left the city. 7. I went to Rome to have 
an interview with them. 8. He made a voyage in the middle of 
winter. 9. He hopes for freedom at an early date. 10. He 
promised us our freedom, u. You should yield obedience to the 
laws. 12. This tends to (say belongs to ; p. 59, 2) the preservation 
of liberty. 13. This step was taken to secure the safety of the city. 
14. In spite of his innocence (p. 115, 1 1), he was condemned. 15. His 
conduct was very different from yours. 16. My interview with him 
was a lucky accident. 17. What is you opinion of such men? 18. 



160 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Your action in this matter (use facio) was criticised. 19. Their 
sudden transformation is marvellous (use muto). 20. The murder 
of Pompey was a great misfortune. 21. He seemed born for the 
protection of the people. 22. In proportion to his readiness (use 
promptus, ready), each man was advanced to office [p. 1 18, 5, ()]. 
23. Every evil seems harmless at its birth (use part.). 24. I feel 
distress that you have received no information from him. 25. I 
believe he feels regret (p. 66, 3) for his conduct. 26. By the removal 
of the tyrant (rex\ the safety of the city has been secured. 27. This, 
he said, was the earnest wish of his heart. 28. The general, after a 
brief exhortation, induced them to remain. 29. Fancy how great 
was the joy I felt (say How much do you think I rejoiced?}. 30. Shall 
we praise him for being a painter ? {use quia). 31. Let us assume a 
case (aliquid) of somewhat wide application (use patet late, it ex- 
tends widely). 32. He hurried away to announce Caesar's presence 
with all his forces. 33. The resistance ceased after midnight. 34. It 
is quite within the range of possibility that his political opinions are 
identical with your own. 35. This city has always been loved by 
her subjects (use praesum). 36. On reaching the gate, they imme- 
diately demanded admittance. 37. He asked that an investiga- 
tion be made (use quaero) into the loss of the fleet. 38. I have 
never lost my belief in the existence of God. 39. He. believes in 
the nothingness of all this (use nullus esse). 40. Lovers are always 
foolish. 41. He has taken his daughter to bear him company 
(una esse, to be together). 



58. OTHER SUBSTITUTES IN LATIN FOB 
THE ABSTRACT NOUN. 

1. The neuter (sing, or pi.) of an adjective may often be used 
to express an English abstract noun : as, 

Aliud est lion estum , util e aliud. Honor (or duty) is one thing; 
expediency, another. 

Vera et falsa disiungunt. They distinguish truth and falsehood. 



SUBSTITUTES FOB TfiE ABSTRACT NOUN. 161 

In fact, the neuter adjective or pronoun will often be used in Latin 
to express an English noun for which the word thing might be used, 
but a more pretentious noun is preferred. Thus : 

Haec sequebatur, he purstied these objects ; magna ausus eat, he 
ventured on great enterprises ; hoc unum me consolatur, this one 
consideration (or reflection) affords me consolation. 

50 too : 

Amissa erant per quae humus exciditur. The tools for digging 
the earth had been lost. 

Hoc audeo dicere. / venture to make this assertion. 

Hoc mini molestum est me non esse-bonum ciyem. This thought 
is painful to me, that I am not a patrio?T* 

Summa gloria constat ex tribus his : si diligit eum multitude, si 
fidem habet, si honore dignurn putat. The highest glory depends 
upon the following three conditions : if the multitude loves him, 
puts trust in him, thinks him worthy of honor. 

51 modo haec stabunt. If only the present condition of the 
country continues. 

Ea domi conflata esse constat. It is certain that these plans 
were formed at home (lit, kindled}. 

In translating into English, the context in every case determines 
the appropriate noun to use for the neuter adjective or pronoun. 

2. Many English abstract nouns may be expressed by the word 
res, which is of very frequent occurrence, and is (as has been well 
said) a blank cheque, as it were, to be filled up from the con- 
text. Thus : 

Ut re docuit. As the fact showed, 

Res Graeciae constituit. He has arranged the affairs of Greece. 

Multae res, in philosophia non satis adhuc explicatae sunt. 
There are many problems in philosophy 'which have received as yet 
no adequate solution. 

Bonis tuis rebus meas malas res ludis. In your prosperity -, you 
are mocking my misfortune. 
Compare too : 

Res secundae (or prosperae), prosperity j res adversaei adver- 



162 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

sityj res tranquillae, tranquillity; res accisae, impaired f 

reff novae. revolution; T"" ; pnlillrnj- < ' / "* common weal (i.e., />fe 

nation, the government, the public interest, politics, etc.). 

3. An English abstract noun may frequently be expressed by 
making it concrete, z>., referring it to an individual : as, . 

PJnrimum interest inter doctum et mdem. There is the greatest 
different t)el'iVt~en learning and ignorance (lit., between a learned 
man and an ignorant man). 

Ing-eniosi non sunt quales esse nobis videntur. Genius is dif- 
ferent from what we suppose it to be. 

Nullum poetam legerat, nollum oratorem noverat. He had read 
no poetry and was unacquainted with oratory. 

This principle is useful when the name of a class may be substi- 
tuted for the name of the quality that characterises it. 

4. In accordance with this love of the concrete, is the Latin use of 
a proper noun (a) instead of naming the qualities that distinguish 
the individual indicated ; (b} where we refer to a person by some 
impersonal circumlocution (as, e.g., in Parliament) : as, 

Tempera Numae minus apta. A time little suited for Numa 
(i.e., irreligious). 

De hac re iam Servium, virum amplissimum, audistis. With 
regard to this proposal, you have heard the honorable member who 
has just sat down. 

Compare, also, the Latin love of accuracy in naming nations : as, 
Romani cum Carthaginiensibus bellum iam diu g-erunt. Rome 

has Tcing been making war upon Carthage. 

5. It should be noted that the abstract noun must be used : 

(a) When speaking of a quality itself ^ and (often) in ascribing a 
quality to an individual : as, 

Virtus in recte agendo nnnjjiii -^* Virtue consists in right 
action. 

In his artibus^r^gstajaant illi: probitate, industria, temperantia. 
In these qualities they were pre-eminent : uprightness, energy ', and 
self-control. 



SUBSTITUTES FOR THE ABSTRACT NOUtf. 16$ 

(b) Where, though an adjective is used in English, it really ex- 
presses an emphatic quality, or the main idea : as, 

Neque occasionis tarditas exspectabitur. Nor will men 'wait 
for slow-footed opportunity. 

Adde hue montium altitudines immensitatesque camporum. 
Add to all this the lofty mountains and the boundless plains (the 
ideas emphasised here are the height of mountains and the bound- 
less expanse of plains ; Latin, therefore, with its love of directness, 
uses the abstract noun in each case). 

6. When an abstract noun refers to a plural noun or pronoun, it 
is often itself put in the plural, and thus becomes concrete : as, 

Vitae omnium in periculo erant. The lives of all were in danger. 
So too : Frigora (cold), calores (heat), imbres (ram), fulmina / 
(lightning), grandmes (hail), &c. 

EXERCISE LVIII. 

I. What goal, do you think, has he in view? 2. Some men 
pursue one object ; some, another. 3. Nor should men pursue ends 
they cannot attain. 4. He said that procrastination (inf.} would be 
fatal. 5. You can receive no better gift (vb.) from heaven than 
contentment (inf. + adj.) 6. The assault of this legion (p. 50, 14) left 
no room for doubt that the citadel would be taken. 7. The secret 
of his unbroken success lay in his wisdom and foresight. 8. This 
is the advantage of vehemence and activity, that they soon learn to 
reform themselves. 9. Timidity, however, is a more fatal disease 
of the mind. 10. A man once persuaded that an impediment is 
insuperable, has made it more difficult than before. 1 1. He will never 
discover the unreasonableness of his fears. 12. Tell him the hour 
at which we leave. 1 3. There was no longer any possibility of his 
escape. 14. It will not add one iota to your happiness or pros- 
perity (adj.) 15. To express gratitude is one thing; to feel it, 
another ; to show it, another still. 16. All regard ingratitude with 
detestation (use verb). 17. The Roman loved oratory. 18. The 
betrayal of their plans threw them into confusion. 19. If I had 
made any proficiency in the art myself, I should not use these 
words. 20. Self-confidence (inf.) is a mark of arrogance. 21. Folly 



164 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

delights in trifles. 22. I deferred (obsequor) to your desire. 
23. Obedience to the law began with (ab). the reign of Tullus (say : 
it began to be obeyed to tlie laws'], 24. I believe that there has 
been a disastrous battle. 25. Many promises have been made. 
26. Falsehood is dangerous. 27. Their judgment with regard to 
him is perfectly accurate (use vere). 28. They fled away in con- 
fusion (use turbo) and despair (use spem abicere). 29. Cries of 
mourning were heard. 30. There was a mutual disarmament (say; 
it was departed from arms by each party), 31. Is anything good 
that does not make its possessor good ? 32. This proposal did not 
displease him. 33. The government came back to Camillus. 

34. The experiment was made, to see if (si) the city could be taken. 

35. An envious clique may be despised (say : the envy of a few, 
etc.\ p. 163, ). 36. He denied the possibility of making war on 
Rome. 37. It would not be in keeping with his good sense to arm 
a reckless (p. 163, b) mob with public authority. 38. He crossed 
the river when the cold was almost unbearable. 



59. ABSTRACT ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 

1. Latin, in its love of the simple and direct, avoids personifica- 
tion. Hence combinations of a noun and an adjective like mental 
strength, anxious fear^ and the like, are not common in Latin. In- 
stead of them are used : 

(a) A noun governing another in the genitive : as, 
Corporis et mentis Y^^^bodily_and mental^ strength j scientiae 
cognitio, "-**jYf*'g> v^cr^p/^r//,,,,^. praecepta morum, moral -pre- 
cepts; ad fldem historiae scriptus, described //yyy//*W.. AIL^C//-//- 
"truth j omnium terror, the universal terror* intra hominum 
xnemoriam, within human memory; reipublicae dissensio, poli- 
tical difference; ferocitas iuvenum, the high spirit of youth; brevis 
temporis dolor, momentary pain; servavi temporis ordinem, / 
have followed the chronological sequence; instituta pnilosophiae, 
philosophical principles. 



ABSTRACT ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 165 

(ft) Two nouns connected by and: as, 

Res iuventute geruntur et viribus. Business is transacted by 
youthful strength. 

So: 

nlamores et admirationes. stormy applause ; clamor et admur- 
muratio T loud murmuring; non sine vociferatione et indignatione, 
not without loudly-expressed indignation^; ratio et consillum, 
ratnmal judgment; temeritas "et casus, blind Chance j metus et 
anxietas, anxiotis fear. 

An attributive possessive case may often be turned in the same 
way : as, 

Pennissa est vulgo ultio et satietas. The glutting of its re- 
venge was allowed the mob. 

This is the principle usually denoted by the learned name hendiadys 
(ev 6ta dvolv, one thing throtigh two]. It is of common application. 

(c} Two nouns in apposition : as, 

Tiro exercitus, a raw army j advenae volucres, foreign birds. 

(d) A subordinate clause : as, 

Navis, quum fracta esset, cursum tenere non potuit. The 
shattered vessel could not hold her course. 

ADVERBS. 

2. Instead of the English adverb, or adverbial phrase, Latin 
frequently uses : 

(a) An adjective : as, 

Hoc libens feci, I did it gladly (i.e., was glad to do if). 
Invitus haec dico. / say it rc.l^.^tantly. 
Imprudens erravi. / have erred inadvertently. 
Eos vivus restituit. He restored them during his life-time. 
So too : Iratus. in anger_; metu perterritus, in it fear. 
Adversos, aversos aggredi. To dTtack in front, in rear 

(b) A noun : as, 

Hoc consul fecit. This he did in his consulship (as consul). 
So : Puer, in hi* ^Y^//- ^.dolescens, in his yn^h ^ senex,^|>? 
his 



166 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Rations et via docete. Teach by method and system. 
Hoc memoria et litteris proditum est. This has been handed 
down orally and in writing. 

So too : Arte factus, artistically made; yitio crgatus, jn/pr-in^fy 
elected; natura tardior, na^rni-iy rfiflipr plpm. 

Amicitiam nee usu nec,.rajaQne cog-nitam habent. They have 
known friendship neither practically nor theoretically. 

Ea, quae ex me audistis, re probare possitis. May you be able 
to verify experimentally the principles you have heard from me \ 

Plura verbo quam scriptura mandata, dedimus. We have given 
more commissions verbally than in writing. 

(c) A verb : as, 

I solemnly entreat you. Te cro obsecroque. 
/ loudly protest that it is false. Clamo et tester hoc falsum esse. 
7 managed successfully to effect my object. Egi atque perfect ut 
quid vellem facerem. 

(d) A change of construction : as, 
Abiisse videtur. He is gone apparently. 

Dubitari non potest quin mortuus sit. Undoubtedly he is dead. 

Peropportune accidit ut dives sit. Very fortunately he is rich. 

Hoc quotidie facere soleo. / usually do it every day. 

Manifestum est te errare. You are manifestly wrong. 

3. The following list of equivalent phrases will repay study: 

Accomplice^ scelerum sogius. 

Aristocracy, nobiles. 

Assessment, quod cuique tributum est. 

Atheist, qui decs esse negat. 

Civilisation, exculta bjominum jeita. 

Communism, aequatio bonorum. 

Conservative, qui reipublicae statum conservat. 



Demagogues, turbulejxtLcivs or populi turbatores. 
Enthusiasm, ardor animi. 



ABSTRACT ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 167 

Exports, res q^flg^xgortajg|ar. 
Historian, rerum scriptor., 

Inspiration, divinus quiclam afflatus. 

Lawgiver, qui leges ponit. 

Moral philosophy, quae de moribus et officiis praecepta sunt. 

Patriotism, studium 



Politician, qui in republica versa.tur. 

So : Enter political life, ad remp. accedere ; administer the 
government, remp. gubernare. 

Prejudices, falsae atque inveteratae opiniones. 
Prose, oratio sol] 

lietoric, rhetorum praecepta. 
Statesmanship, reip. regendae et constituendae peritia. 
Tyranny, unius dominatiis.^ 

EXERCISE LIX. 

i. Natural shame might have prevented him from being present. 
2. They will always have a lively recollection of all his services to 
the country. 3. They have neglected the systematic study of 
literature. 4. We feel ourselves impelled towards our philosophical 
writers. 5. All other philosophical systems he despised. 6. All 
these things were made by human handiwork (hend.). 7. They 
always differed in party policy. 8. An abundant variety of food 
has been secured (invenio). 9. These terrible threats of prosecu- 
tion you should never have taken into account. 10. The beaten 
army withdrew to Canusium. 11. I had a thorough knowledge of 
his political views. 12. Fear and anxiety are inconsistent with 
such a disposition (p. 162, 3). 13. The introduction of the games 
did not relieve them from superstition or disease. 14. Unfortu- 
nately they were gone. 15. Towards them, as Christians (use 
quum), great cruelty was shown (use saevio). 16. The shouts of 
congratulation were overpowering. 17. In a charge of this nature 
inquiry should be made as to date, place, means, and agents. 18. 
The historians tell us that human society was a late development. 
19. There is no doubt that he would have returned safely. 20. 



' 168 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

After his death, apparently, he has become very friendly towards 
us. 21. You will never know how zealously and intelligently he 
has managed this matter. 22. We are all attracted by the love of 
scientific inquiry. 23. This phenomenon is of most constant 
occurrence. in the winter season. 24. Error and ignorance are con- 
sidered positive evils (superl.) 25. Many subjects are difficult and 
obscure and at the same time (use idem) unnecessary. 26. Let us 
not lend a blind assent to these theories. 27. Will you never 
regard measures rather than the men who propose them? (auctor). 
28. Were not these people always fond of novelty ? 29. If they 
had not obeyed at once, an ignominious disaster would have been 
sustained. 30. The struggle will be for empire (use decerto). 31. 
Providentially, he has made his escape. 32. He is behaving with 
the greatest folly (adv.}. 33. He made inquiries as to the hea'lth 
of the gentle Tullia. 34. They have come, I believe, with all 
speed. 35. He wished to consult the interest of France. 36. The 
majority of mankind are convinced that philosophy has no utility. 

37. Many are of opinion that it is positively an injury (use vb.). 

38. It is a mark of folly to be scared by empty shadows. 39. They 
professed they had a declaration to make. 40. If the government 
had ascertained the strength of the enemy, this defeat would never 
have been sustained. 41. This bond closely unites states together 
(p. 166, 4 



60. DIFFERENCE OF IDIOM (Continued). 

1. Latin may be said to prefer, as a general thing, the active 
(because of its greater directness) to the passive. Thus : 

The ivise remark of the father was verified by the rashness of the 
son. Patris dictum sapiens filii temeritas probavit. See, how- 
ever, p. 38, 2. 

2. The name of a mere instrument (as opposed to an agent) can- 
not be made the subject of an active verb : as, 

L ' a " f" open the gate. Hac mercede adductua- 



est ut portam aperiret, 



DIFFERENCE OP IDIOM. 169 

Note. An exception to this is seen in the personification of 
emotions, so common in Livy : as, 

Pavor tribunes invaserat. Fear had seized the tribunes. 

Hinc spes, nine desperatio ""jTTini Iral*"* On one s'ide hope, on 
the other, despair is an incentive (lit., incites; see 6.). 
So, too, with habeo, excipio (follow), teneo, &c. : as, 

Insequens annus tribunes habuit. The following year had 
tribunes. 

Tristem hiemem gravis aej^ag^excepit. A sickly summer fol- 
lowed a gloomy winter. 

Hoc miraculum eos stupefactos tenuit. This marvel held them 
spell-bound. 

3. An English adjectival phrase, which might if literally turned 
modify the verb, must be joined to its own noun by a participle or 
a relative clause : as, 

A voice from the temple recalled them. Vox e templo missa (or 
quae e templo mittebatur) eos revocavit. 

Vox e templo eos revocavit would mean A voice recalled them 
from the temple. 

Note. Such an adjectival phrase may, however, be turned liter- 
ally, if it can without ambiguity be joined adverbially to the verb : 
as, His frivolity in great matters was noticed. Levis eius animus 
in magnis reous spectabatur. 

4. An English adjective often expresses a reason or makes some 
distinct predication which must be brought out explicitly by a sep- 
arate clause or participle in Latin : as, 

TMs ma-'tf(rin" u 'r-( J -'' 7 not escape our veteran leader. Ha.ec, r^s im- 
peratorem nostrum, qui belli esset peritissimus, non fefellit. 

5. Where the emphatic verb in English is put in a relative 
clause, Latin demands that it should be made the main verb : as, 

A fresh blow came that crushed the city. Glades nova urbem 
afflixit. 
This is especially common with // is, it was, etc. : as, 

// is you that I want. Te vojo. 



170 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

6. Latin, in its love of the concrete, defines an act much more 
closely than English : as, 

They refresh themselves with food. Corpora cibo curant. 

These proceedings relieved them from their fear. Haec animos 
pavore levabant. 

7- From the Latin love of the direct and concrete, arises the con- 
stant use of the 2nd pers. sing. , and the ist and 3rd pers. pi., for the 
English passive or the indefinite subject (one, people, etc.} : as, 

The truth of this will be found, if the pages of history are turned 
over. Hoc verum esse, si veils temporum memoriam replicare, 
reperies. 

People are born with genius, but are made learned. Nascimur 
ingeniosi, flmus eruditi (= Learning is a product, genius a gift). 

8. The verb sum will often take the place of a more emphatic or 
picturesque verb in English : as, 

Immense indignation reigned i?t the camp. EfiC-castra indignatio 
ing-ens erat. 

From this a false opinion results. Ex hoc est falsa opinio. 

9. Two adjectives qualifying one noun in Latin must be con- 
nected by and : as, 

He had large bright eyes. Oculos magnos et nitidos habebat. 

10. Several consecutive nouns in Latin in the same construction 
are written down one after the other without conjunctions : as, 

Ilia arma centuriones cohortes non nobis periculum denuntiant. 
Those arms, officers and battalions do not threaten us with danger. 
This is called asyndeton ( a. not + avv, together +&<>>, bind.}. 

Note. So too, clauses : as, Redit iuvenis, rem narrat, implorat 
opem. The youth returns, tells his story, and begs for aid. 

EXERCISE LX. 

i. This dagger stabbed the celebrated Pompey. 2. All the 
soldiers in the city were sent to Baiae. 3. A sense of shame suddenly 
changed them. 4. The little gold they had was taken from the 
wretches. 5. As Christians, they were treated very cruelly. 6. He 
was very popular, for a banker, with all classes. 7. I never lose 



DIFFERENCE OF IDIOM. 171 

sight of him (use deicio oculos). 8. A musical ear detects (sentio) 
the slightest discord. 9. I have lost all the vigor of youth. 
10. The men in the ship demanded our destination, u. The 
battle at Cannae (rel.) cut off many thousands. 12. Word was 
brought of the sack of the city. 13. They have perfect confidence 
in men of goodness of character (p. 165, I, &}. 14. It was Balbus who 
built the house. 15. In pursuit of some cherished object, they will 
undergo any hardship (use perpetior). 16. The men descending 
from the mountain attacked us. 17. Firmness and dignity are con- 
sistent with true courage (p. 162, 3). 18. He stationed the cavalry 
that they might make a display (use utor ad speciem). 19. This 
statue will serve you for a god. 20. Orators always have been few 
(p. 163, b}. 21. This, as a general thing, is believed. 22. He might 
be thought a madman. 23. He endured the pain without difficulty. 
24. By this time there was in vogue (p. 170, 8) a better fashion 
(consuetude). 25. Not far away our army was encamped (p. 1 70, 8). 
26. In both cases he acted with dignity (use graviter). 27. He 
attempted to conclude his speech amidst . the loudly-expressed 
detestation (hend.} of the House. 28. When the pleasant spring 
(p. 163, ) is past, then comes summer. 29. The frequent repetition 
of these remarks (itse saepe) terrified all. 30. Open flattery (part?) 
all men hate. 31. The disappointed (p. 169, 4) soldkrs began to 
murmur. 32. This they did, without compulsion from anyone. 
33. He announced that the measure was both practicable and 
expedient (use verbs). 34. There is no doubt that there were poets 
before Homer. 35. There was not one of all the soldiers who was 
not wounded. 36. Have you heard how bravely they fought? 
37. You know how (ut) they surrounded us. 38. We do not know 
how he escaped. 39. They were of the opinion that unless news of 
this battle had been brought, the city would have been lost. 40. I 
have bought an estate at a million of sesterces. 41. This proceed- 
ing proved (p. 170, 8) their salvation. 42. From these pursuits 
arises facility in speaking (p. 165, i, b). 



172 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



61. EQUIVOCAL WORDS. WORDS OF THE 

SAME FORM IN LATIN AND ENGLISH. 

METAPHOR. 

1. Many English words are equivocal (i.e., have two or more 
meanings), and require care in translating into Latin. Thus : 

He is a man of honor. Vir est summa fide. 

He is an honor to his country. Ille est patriae decori (i.e., 
ornament}. 

He is worthy of the highest honor in the gift of the people. 
Dignus est summis populi Roman! honoribus (i.e., office^ political 
distinction). 

They pay him honor. Laudem ei tribuunt. 

He thirsts for honor. "SitrTfamam 'feloriam or laudem). 
So, too : People go into the country. Bus homines eunt (i.e., as 
opposed to the city). 

// is sweet to die for on^* rnunfry. Dnlne est r>ro p^r^ ^* 

He is disturbed for the safety of the country. De reipublicae 
salute perturbatur (i.e., the political community). 

He returned home, to the great joy of his country. Cum 
summo civium gaudio domum rediit (i.e., countrymen). 

1 will march into their country. In eorum fines iter faciam. 
Such examples suffice to show the necessity of thinking out the 
exact meaning of the English, before attempting to translate into 
Latin. 

2. Many English words of Latin origin differ altogether in mean- 
ing from the Latin original. 

Thus : He obtained the highest yjHce^ Summum 
magistratum) consecutus est (tititiax&o=holdj and 
see Lexicon). 

Sulla, as dictator, oppressed the poor. Sulla dictator pauperes 
vexabaiL (opprimo=^y^.y// or surprise). 

The following list of such words (taken from Bradley) deserves at- 
tention : AcQuire(aj&&iscoY > consequor), #r/(facio), alien (externus), 




EQUIVOCAL WORDS. METAPHOR. 173 

be astonished (miror), attain to (pervenio ad), 
cease (desino or desisto), daj^j&miia&\ comjiionl^J&a&Q&\ 
^acftlTjfifl rrniiin (i.e., kingdom, regnum), desire (cupio), destined 
(in fatis esse), expose to (obicio). famous (praecIarUfciJ.''^/^/ (perni- 
ciosus), fathers (maiores), fury ' (ira), heart (animus, indoles), 
heaven (deus, di immortales), injury (damnum), mortal (of a 
wound, mortiferum), nation (civitas, respublica), be obnoxious 
(odio esseL firovoke (animum irrito), ruin (pernicies, interitus), 
scene (locus or ubi, p. 32), secure (tutus), triu mpJi (vinco), urge (agere 
cum....ut), vile fturpis), worlcT (omnes, or homines; mundus= 
universe), study (cog-ratio). 

LATIN METAPHOR. 

3. Metaphor (or language used in a * transferred ' or figurative 
sense) is common in English and rare in Latin ; and in translating 
into Latin, the metaphor may, as a usual thing, be dropped : as, 

He^ ascended the throne of his fathers. Regnum a maioribus 
traditum exceprK 

There is a wide gulf between learning and ignorance. Inter 
doctum et rudem plurimum interest. 

He soon showed himself in his true colors. Brevi sui similis fuit. 

He has always lent me the cotmtznance of Ms support in the 
House. Me sua auctoritate in Senatu semper adiuvavit. 

The political horizon seems overcast with clouds. Reipublicae 
impendere multa pericula videntur. 

4. A metaphor may often be turned into Latin by expanding it 
into a simile. Thus, in the last example : Ut nubes mari saepe, ita 
reipublicae pericula nunc impendent. 

5. The words quasi (as if), tamquam, velut, quidam, ut ita 
dicam, &c., are used to apologise for or introduce a figurative or 
unusual phrase : as, 

The soul Jlies forth from the prison-house of the body. B cor- 
pore, quasi e career e, evolat animus. 

Philosophy was the mother of all the arts. Pmlosophia omnium 
artium quasi parens erat. 



174 lATltf PROSE COMPOSITION. 

6. Roman metaphor is found chiefly (a) in verbs of motion 
(especially in those meaning to flow or gush} ; (b) in words drawn 
from navigation, war, agriculture, the stage, the human body, 
medicine, flowers, building, painting, fire, light and dark?iess, wind. 
Every student of Latin should collect examples for himself ; a few 
only will be given here. Thus : 

Rempublicarn gmbernat. He holds the helm of state (i.e., ad- 
ministers the government). 

Partes (or personam) lenitatis agite. Take the role of leniency. 

In tanto reipublicae incendio sisti non potest. In the midst of 
such public qonfusion, it can not be helped. (Compare the use of 
combustion in i^lizaoethan English). 

Multae tempestates in fluctibus contionum subeundae sunt. 
Many storms tmist be met amid the tides of tJie popular assemblies. 

Quae res magnas civitates pessurn dedit. An evil which has 
se?it great states to the bottom (i.e., ruined). 

Arx fontibus scatet. The citadel is full of springs (i.e., gushes 
with). 

In eo quasi lumen virtutis perspicio. / see in him the light of 
virtue. 

Solo aequandae sunt dictaturae. The office of dictator must be 
levelled to the ground. 

Faber fortunae suae. The architect of his own fortune. 

Propugnacula murique otii. 3]}jLJ2ul3Juarks and ramparts of 
peace. 

Haec spargere me ac disseminare arbitrabar in orbis terrae 
memoriam sempiternam. !f thought I was scattering these achieve- 
ments broadcast (p. 1 66, c) for the undying recollection of the whole 
world. 

In medullis populi Romani et visceribus haerent. They are 
enshrined t)i -tJie affections of Rome (lit., marrow and flesh). 

Nostrae res litter-arum monumentis inveterascent. My achieve- 
ments will live to old age in the pages of literature. 

Compare also : Turnere (be Ixuniutstic), frigere (be spiritless)^ 
fervere (be passionate), used of style. 



EQUIVOCAL WORDS. METAPHOR. 175 

EXERCISE LXI. 

I. Indicate a motive for this detestable crime. 2. I tendered 
him the homage of my support in the House. 3. He was over- 
whelmed by the tide of business (say \ as by a billow). 4. Does 
not the moon revolve round the world ? 5. Was not the world made 
by design? 6. If he had consulted the interests of the country, he 
would have been dear to the country. 7. Rome was mistress of the 
whole world. 8. By teaching these doctrines, he did the world 
much harm. 9. I am afraid I shall never see him again in this 
world. 10. After the death of the father, the son demanded the 
crown, ii. He attained to the highest offices in his native country. 
12. All this district he won with the sword. 13. The love of 
money is the root of all evil. 14. He has held the sceptre for more 
than thirty years. 15. The fact of the existence of God is engraved 
(insculpo) on the heart of man. 16. I never heard him without ad- 
miration. 17. The voice of warning was drowned in the shouts of 
admiration. 18. He says that the administration should be in his 
control. 19. Interest rose (use flo) on August 8th from 4% to 8 
(abL). 20. He drew a broad line between honor and self-interest. 
21. The State must not encroach upon the property of the indivi- 
dual. 22. That older world stood nearer to the dawn and saw 
truth with clearer eyes. 23. The enemy was reduced to submission 
without difficulty. 24. They were admitted to an audience. 25. 
Their exasperation will be proportionate to the good nature with 
which they now proceed. 26. Disaster now stared them in the face. 

27. The cold was of such intensity as to be almost unendurable. 

28. This reverse damped their triumph. 29. His first attempt met 
with poor success. 30. If he had had more, he would have given 
more. 31. He said on April 5th that he would never set foot in my 
province. 32. By the foreign voyages of our ships all the neces- 
saries of life are supplied. 33. He has glutted (pasco) his ad- 
herents with political incendiarism. 34. The forum would have 
been the stage of his genius. 35. The House assigned me this 
role and I sustained the character to the best of my ability. 36. A 
strong and really (use quidam) astonishing feeling of good- will was 
beginning to glow in my breast. 37. From friendship blossom 
many advantages. 38. This spark of genius cannot be concealed 



LATltf PROSE COMPOSITION. 

(lateo). 39. Let us hold the course that the loyal have always held ; 
let us turn a deaf ear to any signal of recall. 40. Who can heal the 
country's wounds ? 41. We are all (as I might say) in the same 
boat and sharers in the same dangers. 



62. ORDER AND EMPHASIS. 

1. Conjunctions, relative and interrogative pronouns, relative 
and interrogative adverbs, usually stand first in their own clause : 



as 



Quae cum 1^, aint. abeat. Under these circus ^nc^^r 7pf him 
depart. 



2. The following words never begin a sentence : Quis 
quisque (each), quoque (also), quidem (at least, indeed), vero or 
autem (but), enim (for), igitur (therefore). See any page of Livy 
or Cicero. 

3. The usual order of words in a Latin sentence is as follows : 
(i) Subject ; (2) adverbs of time, place and manner ; (3) indirect 
object ; (4) direct object: (5) verb : as, 

Caesar enim illo die ei coronam dedit. That day Caesar gave 
him a crown. 

Qui turn civitatibus anna abstulit. At that time he took away 
arms froin the states. 

Note. Since Latin aims at showing, as far as possible, the logical 
connection of each sentence with the preceding, sentences con- 
stantly begin with for, who, which, &c. See again any page of 
Livy or Cicero. 

4. The practice of indicating emphasis by position, often modifies 
the regular arrangement : as, 

Non video in mea vita quid despicere possit Antonius. / do 



ORDER AND EMPHASIS. 177 



not see in my life what any manfyan despise .of the name of Antony 

(subject made emphatic by being put last instead "of first). 

So, too, the verb is emphasised by being put not last but first : as, 

Irridet Clodius Senatum. Clodius is actually mockin<r <the 
Senate. 
Compare : 

Senatum Clodius irridet. // is the Senate that Clodius is mocking. 

Pecunia a patre exacta est crudeliter. The money 'was extorted 
from his father with every circumstance of cruelty (adverb at the 
end for emphasis). 

In miseriam nascimur sempiternam. We are born to misery 
everlasting (adjective last, for emphasis). 

Profluens quiddam habuit Car bo et can drum. Carbo had the 
gift not only of a flowing but of a musical style (adj. last and 
separated from the word with which it would naturally go). 

Note. The use of the emphatic position renders many words, 
that are common in English, unnecessary in Latin. Thus : 

/ should not mention that ajfair at all. Illius rei non mentionem 
faciam. 

That I shall not believe till I actually hear the envoys. Hoc 
non prius credam quam audiero legates. 

SPECIAL RULES OF ORDER. 

5. The following special rules of order should be studied and the 
examples (which are chiefly taken from Potts' Hints Towards 
Latin Prose) carefully committed to memory. 

(a) Everything logically connected with the subject should be 
placed close to it : as, 

Two Numidians were sent to Hannibal with a letter. Duo 
Nojmidae cum litteris ad Hannibalem missi sunt (here the letter 
belongs to the Numidians). 

Democritus could not distinguish black from white after he had 
lost his sight. Democritus, luminibus amissis, alba et atrq. dia- 
cernere non poterat. 

(b) A sentence should not, as a usual thing, have more verbs at 
the end than two : as, 



178 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITtdti. 

Verres so harried Sicily that it could not possibly be restored to its 
former condition. Verres Siciliam ita vexavit ut restitui in anti- 
quum statum nullo modo potuerit (the main verb of a final or 
consecutive sentence is not put at the end). 

He said he saw that this wa^th^aimj-\.e. that the man 
might be compelled to say something false. Dixit se intellegere id 
jigj ut aliquid falsi dicere cog-eretur (the verb introducing 
"oblique narration put, as usual, first). 

So, too : 

They say that he had an incredible memory. Ferunt euro, 
incrsdihili memortarrtHsse. See, also, p. 129, 9. 

(c) The verb of an explanatory clause introduced by enina 
or autem, stands first : as, 

What such achievement has ever been performed? For I may 
boast before you. Quae res unquam g-esta est tanta? Licet enim 
mini apud te g-loriari. 

(d) A colorless verb (like esse, solere, posse, coepisss, &c.) 
stands usually in the riddle of the sentence : as, 

He is usually either bombastic or spiritless. Autk^fcumere (swell} 
solet aut frig-ere (be cold). 

Sum, however, comes first in the sentence (i) when it means to 
exist, (2) to prevent the separation of closely connected words : as, 

Est igitur haec lex. This law^ therefore, exists. 

Erat nemo quicum essem libentius. There was none with 
whom I would more gladly be. 

(e) Words of opposite meaning, words of the same sound or 
derivation, and different cases of the same word, are usually written 
together for the sake of the contrast and the assonance : as, 

In his single hand he controlled everything at Rome. Omnia 
unus Romae poterat. 

I do not think that immortality should be despised by a mortal 
Mortali immortalitatem non arbitror contemnendam. 

You should not ask any question but which of the two waylaid 
the other. Nihil aliud quaerere debetis nisi uter utri insidias 
fecerit. 



ORDER AND EMPHASIS. 179 

(f) Two words in antithesis are often found, one at the beginning, 
the other at the end : as, 

Errace malo cum Platone, quam cum istis vera sentjj e. / pre- 
fer rather to be wrong with Plato than to be right with those 
gentry (p. 88, 4). 

(g) When pairs of words are contrasted, the order of the words 
in the second pair is reversed : as, 

You would have heard the shrieking of women and the shouting 
of men. A_M^r Q fni11n.t.nq ^mrnnrvmn, Yl-"in "i n mr n 

This arrangement is called chiasmus (from the Greek letter chi, x). 
'1 hus : 

ululatus feminarum, 

X 
virorum clamores. 

(h) Adjectives and attributive genitives (except those of posses- 
sion, number and amount) usually follow their nouns : as, 

/ am a Roman citizen. Civis Romanus sum. 

The leader of the Senate. Princeps Senatus. See p. 59, I. 

Two nouns belonging to the genitive, are not separated, unless 
for emphasis : as, 

// is more difficult to find the beginning of this speech than the 
end. Huius orationis difflcilius est exituxn quam principium 
invenire. 

(i) The negative should come jisjigarjhe .head of _the sentence 
as possible : as 



Even the Lacedaemonians were unable. Neque ipsi Lacedae- 
monii poterant. "*~ 1r " 1 ' 

Do not disturb me. Noli me turbare. 

You will find it better not to have uttered a sound. Non erit 
melius vocem misisse (inf. when used as a noun, usually at the 
end). See p. 95, 3, note. 



180 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



EXERCISE LXII. 

I. The Aedui sent ambassadors to him. 2. When he was living 
there with great dignity owing to his many virtues, the Spartans 
sent ambassadors to Athens. 3. They deny that any one should 
see the light who acknowledges himself guilty of homicide. 4. It 
is a matter of history that he rejected this argument (disputatio). 
5. He felt that he was being taken to task even by Brutus. 6. With 
what feelings do you think a man like Alexander lived ? (p. 176, 4). 

7. Till to-day you have followed another general ; now follow Caesar. 

8. On this charge He was condemned, a charge of the most frivo- 
lous character. 9. As long as he lived, he lived in grief (p. 179, g). 
10. Do not sacrifice the safety of your country to the safety of your 
father. 1 1. As far as learning goes, you can do that as long as you 
please (p. 176, 4). 12. I was unable to visit him, for he lives in a 
remote part of the city. 13. Prosperity cannot be secured (efflcio) 
without men's zealous aid (p. 165, i,). 14. He was a man undoubt- 
edly worthy of all honor. 1 5. To think that men should eat human 
flesh ('p. 58, 15) ! 16. It is glorious to die for one's country. 17. He 
used to say that silver was cheaper than gold, gold than virtues 
(p. 179, g). 1 8. Danger comes to one from one quarter, to another 
from another (use aliunde). 19. After the removal of the tyrant 
(rex), I see the tyrant's power still remains. 20. And yet these things 
are not closely connected (p. 166, c}. 21. My thoughts are at present 
employed in guessing the reason of your absence. 22. I am dis- 
tressed at not receiving any information from you by letter. 
23. Truth needs no adornment (use fucus, dye). 24. He says that 
no one lives happily. 25. They prefer to call each thing by its 
own name. 26. The betrayal of their plans threw them into the 
greatest confusion (vb.). 27. Under these circumstances, then, we 
spared them all. 28. He went to Baiae, not for recreation (use 
otior), but for business (use neg-otior). 29. I am now coming to 
the point at issue (iise ago). 30. They were bound to him by 
friendship of long-standing (p. 165, i, <). 31. Have they brought us 
assistance without being requested 1 32. He did this deliberately. 
33. They reached Rome without any interference (vb.). 34. A 
man of wonderful eloquence and profound learning, he did not 
escape condemnation. 



NOTES ON THE LATIN SENTENCE. 181 



63. NOTES ON THE LATIN SENTENCE: 
CONNECTION, RHYTHM, &c. 

1. Latin, as compared with English see Livy and Macaulay 
passim usually shows the logical connection of each sentence 
with the preceding ; and in turning English into Latin, this con- 
nection must usually be expressed. Thus : 

// was too late for him to regain public esteem. Ht had over- 
looked the real difficulties of his position. Nee iarn (by this) potuit 
stadium populi recuperare. Non enim intellexerat (pick up) 
quae pericula sibi impenderent. 

nay conclude that there are some subjects which invite study 
on their own merits. -Quocirca {therefore} intellegi potest esse 
quaedam propter se cognoscenda. 

The question between the believer and the atheist is no light 
matter. It concerns the very constitution of human society. Non 
levi igitur illi de re dissentiunt qui esse Deurn dicunt et illi qui 
nullum omnino esse contenduut : de ea vero qua omnis human! 
generis societas continetur (adversative}. 

2. The most common of all Latin connectives is the relative 
pronoun, and its use deserves careful attention. Thus : 

Horatius was marching in advance. His sister met him before 
the gate. Princeps Horatiup \bat ; cui soror obvia ante portam 
fait (cui=et ei, and him). ^J 

Two and two are four. If this is granted, &>c. Bis bina 
quattuor fiunt ; quod si concessum erit, &c. 

Note. The relative is often used for and with a demonstrative ; 
hence the frequent use in Latin of quamobrem, quare, quam ob 
causam (find on account of this thing^ &c.). 

3. The relative unless referring to an emphatic is or idem 
stands near the antecedent, and an adjective or an appositive 
noun is put in the relative clause : as, 

He sent the most faithful slave he had. Servum, quern habuit 
fldelissiraum, misit. 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

He reduced the Volsci, a nation which is situated not far from 
this city. Volscos, quae gens non longe ab hac urbe est, subegit. 
But : 

Most people are servile to a man from whom they expect some- 
thing. Plerique a quo aliquid sperant, ei (or eidem) inserviunt. 
See p. 9, 6. 

4. The subject of the main verb is often to be supplied in Latin 
from the relative clause : as, 

When this word was brought him, he arose. Cui quum id esset 
nuntiatum, surrexit. 

So too : There are books with which, when we read them, we are 
delighted. Libri sunt, quos quum legimus, delectamur. 

Note. If the connection is not expressly shown by a particle, 
the sentence begins with some emphatic word which serves the 
same purpose : as, 

We began the war with Saguntum. We tmist wage it against 
Rome. Susceptum cum Saguntinis bellum ; habendum cum 
Bomanis est. 

He was killed in the engagement; and Fulvius left him dead on 
the field. Occisus est in acie ; iacentem Fulvius reliquit. 

5. For the sake of clearness and emphasis, a word is often 
repeated at the head of each clause of a sentence : as, 

The panic and confusion were as great as if an enemy were 
besieging the city. Tantus pavor, tanta trepidatio fuit, quanta si 
hostes urbem obsiderent. 

He promised but with diffictilty, with frowns, and grudgingly. 
Promisit sed difficulter, sed subductis superciliis, sed malignis 
(niggard} verbis. 

This is called anaphora. 

6. The subject of a Latin sentence should be kept as far as 
possible unchanged all through the sentence : as, 

The matter was quickly dispatched and the legions returned. 
Qua re confecta, leglones redierunt. 

When his friends asked him his opinion, he replied as follows, 
Hie, eententiam ab amicis rogatus, ita respondit 



NOTES ON THE LATIN SENTENCE. 183 

Note i. The subject should be taken out of a subordinate clause 
and put at the head of the sentence : as, 

When Caesar heard this, he set out. Caesar, quum hoc audiisset, 
profectus est. 

Note 2. If the subject is changed, it should be expressed by the 
pronoun is or hie, when the new subject has been already mentioned 
in the previous sentence : as, 

They came to the king at Pergamum. He received them kindly. 
Pergamum ad regem venerunt. Is eos comiter excepit. 

7. The same noun or pronoun should as far as possible be 
kept in the same case all through the sentence : as, 

When Midas was a boy, some ants piled grains of corn upon his 
lips, when he was asleep. Midae dormienti cum puer esset, 
formicae in os tritici grana congesserunt. 

Note. This will often involve the use of a subordinate clause (or 
a participial phrase ; see p. 47, 3) for an English main clause : as, 
Hannibal ordered him to leave the camp, but he soon returned. 
Qui, cum Hannibalis iussu castris exiisset, paulo post rediit. 

This he persistently repeated and his whole discourse was spent 
in eulogizing virtue. Quibus constanter dictis, omnis eius oratio 
in virtute laudanda consume batur. 

8. A noun, when the object both of the main and of the subor- 
dinate clause, is put at the head of the sentence : as, 

If I cannot crush my annoyance, I will conceal it. Dolorem, si 
non potero frangere, occultabo. 

And, generally speaking, the important word is to be taken and 
put at the head of the Latin sentence, in order that the subject of 
discourse may be emphatically and clearly indicated in advance : 
as, 

When they saw that he had escaped the flames, they hurled darts i 
at him and killed him. Quern, ut incendium effugisse viderunt, Is 
telis emissis, interfecerunt. (S 

Note. This will often involve a change of voice (as in the last 
example) or the use of a pronoun in the subordinate clause ; as, 



181 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

When Hannibal was living in exile at the court of King Prusias, 
and was of the opinion tJiat tJie war should be fought out to the 
end, the king refused. Rex Prusias, quum Hannibali apud eum 
exulanti depugnari placeret, id facere noluit. 

9. Besides insisting on Clearness and Emphasis, the Latin 
writers paid particular attention also to Rhythm (or the clue alter- 
nation of short and long syllables). A knowledge of the correct 
rhythm of the Latin sentence can only be obtained by committing 
to memory sentences from the great masters of Latin prose style 
such as Livy and Cicero. The following model examples are 
given by Postgate (Sermo Latinus) : 

(a) Ad miseriam nascimur gempite^haam. We are born to 
misery that is unending. 

(b) Quid autem agatur cum aperuero, facile erit statuere quana 
sententiam dicatis'. When I show you how much is at stake, it 
will be easy to decide what opinion to express (p. 24, d). 

(c) Magna eloquentia, sicut flamma, motu excitatur, materie 
alitur et urendo clarescit (which was translated by the younger 
Pitt, as follows :) // may be said of eloquence ', as of flame, that it 
requires motion to excite it, fuel to feed it, and that it brightens as 
it burns. 

Cicero himself quotes as a model the following period of his 
own : 

Est igitur haec, iudices, non scripta sed nata lex, quam non 
didicimus, accepimus, legimus, verum ex natura ipsa adripuimus, 
hausimus, expressimus, ad quam non docti sed facti, non instituti 
sed imbuti sumus, ut si vita nostra in aliquas insidias, si in vim 
et in tela aut latronum aut inimicorum incidisset, omnis honesta 
ratio esset expediendae salutis. 

There is, gentlemen of the jury, a law not a written law but a 
natural one which we have not arrived at from study, tradition, 
or books, but derived, imbibed, and drawn from mother Nature 
herself j which was not taught us, but was inborn ; which- we 
reached not by training but by instinct. The law is this : If our 
lives are exposed to the secret attacks, the violence, or the weapons 
of bandits or of enemies, any means of securing our safety is justi*. 



NOTES ON THE LATIN SENTENCE. 185 

10. A sentence should not close with the end of a verse (e.g., 
esse videtur, or placuisse Catoni). The favorite endings are two 
trochees, or a tribrach and a trochee (e-g-, collocavit or esse 
videatur). 

EXERCISE LXIII. 

i. For several days storms followed and they kept us within our 
camp. 2. Which wealth if it fell to our lot we would be dis- 
satisfied with. 3. Desires which arise naturally, are satisfied with- 
out difficulty. 4. When Hannibal had reviewed (recenseo) his 
troops, he set out for Gades. 5. After Alexander had killed his 
friend, he almost committed suicide. 6. Do you believe that the 
mind is strengthened by pleasure and weakened by abstinence ? 

7. There is no doubt that force would have been repelled by force. 

8. The matter was universally approved of, and it was entrusted to 
the general. 9. When the Cretans sent ambassadors to him, he 
did not take away all hope from them. 10. If the occasion (say 
time) be favorable for the change, we shall effect it with more ease. 
1 1 . The augur Tiresias (put the appositive second) is described (use 
flng-o)by the poets as a philosopher, and he is never represented as 
bewailing his blindness. 12. By the common consent of the com- 
petitors, he won fhe prize for valor, but resigned it to Alcibiades, 
whom he devotedly loved. 13. Had Croesus ever been a happy man, 
he would have prolonged his happiness to the end. 14. Tatius cor- 
rupted this man's daughter with gold. She had happened to go 
outside of the ramparts to seek water. 15. This was observed and 
they altered their plan. 16. He had taken the city and the troops 
were marched home. 17. Such was my view and, if the Senate had 
supported me, the country would be safe. 18. Heaven will requite 
you in accordance with your deserts. 19. He was tired of his 
journey and so his slave killed him. 20. Do not imagine there is 
any necessity for haste. 21. This is a kindness which, if you 
confer it upon me, I shall not forget. 22. They felt more sorrow 
for the loss of their countrymen than joy at the rout of the enemy. 

23. They roamed through the city without meeting any resistance. 

24. To think that you should have fallen into such misery 1 25. He 
moved his camp nearer the enemy, to see if he could draw them 



186 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

to an engagement. 26. As soon as the enemy saw us, they made 
a charge ; and we were quickly thrown into confusion. 27. Surely 
this is a greater miracle, the fact of his sparing the vanquished. 
28. Was not this the reason why Aristides was banished, i.e. because 
he was just ? 29. They were not disturbed by these disasters 
because (as they thought) the consuls were managing well (p. 137, i). 
30. I pity you for making so influential (tantus) a person your 
enemy (p. 1 1 3, 4). 31. He is too great a genius to be compared to 
me. 32. As if I cared for that. 33. It was reported that an attack 
had been made on my house. 34. There was no doubt that he 
would have called (cito) witnesses. 35. I am afraid I shall not be 
able to recover the million of sesterces he borrowed. 



64. THE LATIN PERIOD. 

1. The Latin writers and especially the historians were fond 
(as already intimated) of seizing and putting forward some promi- 
nent idea and grouping into one organic and harmonious whole 
(called a period) all connected and subordinate ideas. This period 
the Latin writers used with great skill and developed to a high 
degree of perfection. It is eminently characterized by melody, 
vigor, clearness, and dignity, and justly regarded as one of the 
most perfect linguistic forms ever produced for the expression of 
thought. 

Modern English style has taken quite a different direction. 
Every sentence contains, as a usual thing, a single idea with which 
the subordinate clauses (always very few and simple) are intimately 
connected. Compare, for example, the following passages in which 
the successful attack upon the usurper Amulius by his brother 
Numitor is described : 

THE DEATH OF AMULIUS. 

At the beginning of the tumult, Numitor gave out that the public 
enemy had attached the city a?id had actually assaulted the palace; 
and, under color of this pretext, the wily prince had managed to 
the fighting men of the place from the scene of action 



THE LATIN PERIOD. 187 

and had induced them to occupy their citadel with an armed force. 
Meanwhile tJie youthful conspirators had effected the assassination 
of the tyrant, and they were advancing to congratulate their grand- 
father upon his success. The triumphant chief lost no time in call- 
ing a meeting of the people and in representing to them the 
unnatural conduct of his brother towards himself. He explained 
the extraction of his grand-children, and the mode of their birth 
and education ; and he related the wonderful manner in which they 
had been discovered. Finally, he disclosed the secret of the tyranfs 
death, avowing himself the author of the act. 

Nuinitorjnter primum tumultum hostes invasisse urbem atque 
adoffos regiam dictitans, quum pubem Albanam in arcem prae- 
sidio armisque obtinendam avocasset : posteaquam iuvenes per- 
petrata caede pergere ad se gratulantes videt, extemplo advocate 
concilio, scelera in se fratris, originem nepotum, ut (how*) g-eniti, 
ut educati, ut cogniti essent, caedem deinceps tyranni, seque 
eius auctorem 



The important and central idea here, is the announcement made 
by Numitor; the subject of the Latin period, therefore (and put, as 
usual, first), is Numitor, and the main verb (put, as usual, last), 
ostendit ; all the steps leading up to the climax are described by 
subordinate clauses, participles, or adverbial phrases (abl. ads. , etc.)- 

The use of shorter sentences in English necessitates the repetition 
of the same idea under different forms. Thus, it is unnecessary 
in fact, impossible to express in the Latin pprind, ffr* W/i/ ftri-nre^ 
the triumphant chief ; the subject, when once mentioned, is 
not again referred to except by a prprinnn ; in fact when any 
idea has been once clearly stated, it is not repeated. 

2. Compare, again, the two following passages : 
An exact report of these proceedings was carried to King James, 
who was fired with indignation at the total failure of this hopeful 
project. He saw that the way was now blocked for the employ- 
ment of finesse and concluded that recourse must be had at last to 
open war. The exiled tyrant began accordingly to make the round 
of the French cities, entreating them in pathetic terms not to allow 
an unfortunate monarch, who had been expelled from his kingdom 
by an infamous conspiracy } to perish in destitution before their eyes^ 



188 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

His sicut acta erant nuntiatis, incensus Tarqoiinius dolore tantae 
ad irritum cadentis spei, postquam dolo viam obseptam vidit, 
bellum aperte moliendum ratus, circumire Galliae urbes, supplex 
orare ne se, e regno scelerata coniuratione pulsum, egentem ante 
oculos perire sinerent (notice ad irritum cadere, prove vain). 

It may be remarked here with regard to the rendering of 
modern proper names, for which there is no Latin word, that 
"there are three courses open : 

1. Omit the word altogether andsubstitut_a^pfonotm. 

2. Substitute a real Latin name, e.g., as above, Tarquinius for 

James. 

3. Latinise the word : e.g., the people of Canada, Canadensea; 

the English, Angli ; Peru, Peruvia. 

3. The Latin writers of course employed short sentences in the 
detached style, interspersed, for variety and rhetorical effect, with 
their long sonorous periods. 

Whether an English sentence is to be incorporated in a period 
in Latin or kept separate and detached, is a question for judgment 
to decide ; but the following rules may be given. The detached 
style is employed : 

(a) To wind up a narrative. See any page of Livy : as, 
Palatinum muniit; sacra diis aliis facit. He fortified the Pala- 
tine, and instituted rites in honor of the other gods. 

(b) In graphic narrative and in a detailed summary of facts 
which are not easily subordinated to one central idea : as, 

Bellum ab altero consule prospere gestum ; Suessa in deditionem 
venit, Teanum vi expugnatum. The military operations of the other 
consul were successful; Suessa surrendered and Teanum was taken 
by storm. 

Duo exercitus erant ; scuta alterius auro, alterius argento cael- 
averunt. Forma erat scuti, etc. There were two armies ; the 
shields of the one were embossed with gold; those of the other^ with 
silver. The shape of fiu^Jueu^etc. 

In rapid and graphic descriptions of this kind, asyndeton is 
common. 



LATIN PERIOD. 189 

(V) In conversation or argument : as, 

At enim Cn. Pompeius et de re et de causa iudicavit ; tulit enim 
de caede quae in Appia via facta esset. Quid ergo tulit ? Nempe 
ut quaereretur. Quid porro quaerendum est ? Factumne sit ? At 
constat. A quo ? At paret. But, you will say, Pompey pro- 
nounced upon both the question of fact and the question of law j he 
proposed a measure dealing with the homicide which had taken 
place on the Appian Road. What then was his proposal? Of 
course, that an investigation should be held. But what is the 
subject of investigation ? The fact of the homicide ? That is ad- 
mitted. The author of it ? But that is clear. 

(d) In exclamations, anger, denunciation, scorn, irony, &c. : as> 
Mg_ miserum 1 me infelicem 1 Unhappy and unfortunate man 

that I am / 

Quae cum Ita sint, Catilina, perge quo coepisti ; egredere 
aliquando ex urbe ; patent portae ; proflciscere. Therefore, Cati- 
line, go whither you are preparing to go. Set forth at length from 
the cityj the gates are open; depart. 

(e) In the epistolary style : as, 

Quae res mini non mediocrem consolationem attulit, volo tibi 
commemorare, si forte eadem res tibi minuere dolorem possit. 
Ex Asia rediens, cum ab JEgina Megaram versus navigarem, 
coepi regiones circumcirca prospicere. post me\erat JEgina ; ante 
Megara : dextra Piraeus :\ sinistra Corinthus : quae oppida quodam 
tempore florentissima fuerunt, nunc prostrata et diruta ante 
oculos iacent. Coepi egomet mecum sic cogitare : Hem ! nos 
homunculi indignamur, si quis nostrum interiit, cum uno loco tot 
oppidorum cadavera proiecta iaceant ? Visne tu te, Servi, cohibere, 
et meminisse hominem te esse natum ? Crede mini, cogitatione 
ea non mediocriter sum conflrmatus. In the hope that it may 
assuage your grief, 7 want to tell you a rgflerfTon that brought me 
no small consolation. As I was returning from Asia and sailing > 
from Aegina towards Megara, I began to look out upon the sur- 
rounding countries. Behind me lay Aegina / before me, Megaraj 
on the right, Piraeus ; on the left, Corinth : all of which were once 
flourishing towns, but now they are lying in utter ruin before our 
eyes. I began to reflect as follows : "Dear me! are we poor 
mortals indignant if any one of our number perishes, when in one 



190 lATIrf tROSE COMPOSITION. 

spot the ruins of so many cities are lying spread out before us ? 
Will you not restrain yourself, Servius, and remember that you 
were born a man ? " Believe me, I was not a little strengthened by 
the rejlection. 

4. It may be remarked in conclusion that : 

(a) Translation into Latin is really (as has been well said) a pro- 
ce^s of simplification. The English is thought into some simple 
equivalent ^noufd which can be expressed in Latin. If a Latin 
version does not, when re-translated, read like what is called "a lit- 
eral translation," the chances are that it is not Latin. 

(b) L>nusual expressions and constructions should be avoided. 
Nothing better can be given on this point than the words of Caesar: 
Hoc habe in memoria atque pectore ut, tamquam scopulum 
(rock), sic fugias inauditum atque insolens (unusual) verbum. 

(c) Latin must be rhetorical. 'Its fondness for antithesis (or con- 
trast) and for assonance, has been referred to ; and the frequent use 
of interrogatives-^tuidJL_^/_^2f^* 3"^ quaeris? in short, etc.), 
and of tlig: superlative where Englishis satisfied with the positive 
(e.g., optimus quisque, for all good men), is an illustration of the 
same striving after rhetoncaFeffectJ which is so characteristic of 
Latin style. 

EXERCISE LXIV. 

Turn into a single period and translate : 

(a) The defeat and rout of the allied forces increased the panic 
of the French, and they saw disaster staring them in the face. 
A large body of men who had been completely surrounded by the 
English troops and were fighting in a ring, seeing no hope of succor 
which would enable them to maintain their position, broke through 
the enemy's line and escaped. But they were prevented by a 
blinding storm of sleet from seeing where they were going, and 
rushing pell-mell into the river, they were carried away by the 
current and drowned. 

(b) One of the hostages given to the king was a noble maiden of 
the name of Cloelia. This young lady, eluding the sentries, escaped 
from the royal camp which was pitched at no great distance from 
the river -and, at the head of a band of hostages, swam across the 



LAtflN i>ERlOt). 9 

Stream. Ambassadors were at once sent to demand her surrender 
and to say that the king would regard a refusal as a virtual violation 
of the peace. The hostage was accordingly restored ; but the king ? 
filled with admiration for the exploit, sent her back in safety to her 
friends. 

(c) An officer, who happened to be stationed with a handful of 
men on the bridge, had witnessed the capture of the fort by the 
invading host, and now saw them descending the hill at full speed. 
Knowing that, if he deserted his post, they would immediately cross 
the river, he solemnly implored his countrymen to destroy the bridge 
with fire and steel. Thereupon he advanced to meet the enemy 
and maintained his position with his handful of men until warned 
by the shouts of those who were toiling in his rear that they had 
accomplished their object. 



APPENDIX. 



I. THE PREPOSITION. 

1. Latin prepositions govern either the accusative or the 
ablative ; but In, sub (below), super (above), and subter (be* 
neath}, govern both. 

Note Gratia and causa (for the sake of) govern the genitive ; 
but they are really nouns used as prepositions. 

2. In, sub, super, and subter (beneath) govern the ablative when 
they express rest, and the accusative when they express motion: 
as, In urbe, in the city; in urbem, into the city ; sub muro, under 
the wall ; sub murum, up under the wall; super eo pendet, it 
hangs over him; super eum volat, it' flies over Jinn. 

WITH ABLATIVE. 

3. The following nine prepositions govern the ablative : A (or 
ab), jrom, by; coram, in presence of; cum, with; de, from, con- 
cerning; e (ex), out of; prae, in front of, in consequence of; pro, 
in front of, on behalf of; sine, without; tenus, up to (written 
after its case ; also with gen.). 

WITH ACCUSATIVE. 

4. All other prepositions govern the accusative. A list is given 
for reference : Ad, towards ; adversus, against ; ante, before ; 
apud, beside ; circum (or circa), round ; cis (or citra), on this side 
of; contra, against; erga, towards ; extra, outside of ; inter, 
among ; infra, below ; intra, within; iuxta, near ; ob, on account 
of ; penes, in the power of; per, through; post, behind; praeter, 
past; prope, near to ; propter, close to, on account of; secundum, 
along, after; trans, across ; versus, towards (written after its case); 
ultra, beyond. 

PREPOSITION WITH NOUNS IN -ING. 

5. The prepositions ad, ob, in, inter and (rarely) de, may be 
ioined with the gerund or gerundive, to express an English prepo- 
sition with a noun in -ing : as, 

193 



194 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Ad pacem petendam hue missi sumus. We were sent here for 
the purpose of asking peace. 

Tvtrpe est pecuniam accipere ob rem iudicandam. // is a shame 
to take money for giving a verdict. 

Inter aedificandos muros. During the building of the walls. 

Quae in hac rog-atione suadenda dixerunt. They made these 
remarks in recommending the bill. 

With other prepositions, a periphrasis as often seen already is 
needed. See p. 139, i. 

Other examples may be given. Thus : 
(a) I am in favor of returning. Redeundum esse censeo. 
() Hoping is different from believing. Aliud est credere, aliud 
sperare (lit., it is one thing to believe, another to hope). 

(c) In blaming them, you praise me. Quum culpas eos, me 
laudas. 

(d) I am surprised at your going away. Miror quod abis 

(p. 99, 6 )- 

(e) I 'will not object to your going away. Non recusabo quin 
abeas. See also p. 22, 2, 3. 

(f) I am tired of hearing this. Me taedet hoc audire. 

((r) He urged them to the undertaking of the war. Monuit ut 
bellum susciperetur. 

(Ji) You have no reason for bemg angry. Non habes cur 
irascaris. 

(z) Since setting out, I have written twice. Ex quo tempore 
profectus sum, bis scripsi. 

(j) Before setting out, I wrote twice. Priusquam profectus 
sum, bis scripsi. 

(k) He was late in coming. Serus venit. 

(/) He was foremost in asserting. Primus (or princeps) dixit. 

(;;z) What do you mean by thanking me ? Quid tibi vis quod 
mini gratias agis ? 

(n) By breaking down the bridge, he cut off supplies. Ponte 
rescisso, commeatus interclusit. 



tREPOSITlOtf. 

(o) Instead of loving, you hate me. Odisti me quum amare 
debeas (p. 108, 6). See also p. 15, 5. 

(p) What will you do on going there? Quid facies quum eo 
iveris? 

(q) He was accused of killing them, Accusatus est quod eos 

occldisset (p. 99, 6, and 137, 2). 

He was praised for saving the city. Laudatus est quod urbem 
servaverat. 

(r) They were very near assaulting him. Minimum abfuit quin 
eum violarent. 

(s) He is in the habit of lying. Mentiri solet. 

(/) As to pardoning, I will do no such thing. Quod rog-as ut 
ignoscam, nihil eiusmodi faciam. 

(u) I have no doubt about his going. Non dubito quin iturus sit. 

(v) Besides speaking Latin, he also speaks Greek. Non solum 
Latine sed etiam Graece loquitur. 

(w) By doing this, I shall reach home in time. Quod si fecero, 
domum temperi perveniam. 

(x) I shall not punish him for doing it. Quod hoc fecerit, non 
eum puniam. 

(y) He was condemned without being present. Absens con- 
demnatus est. 

6. The prepositions are widely used with nouns to form idiom- 
atic adverbial phrases of place, time, and manner. Such prepo- 
sitional phrases should be committed to memory as they are met 
with. A list is added for reference : 

A or ab (from, by). 

A fronte, in front (so, a latere, in Jlank; a tergo, in rear); 
a senatu stat, he stands on the Senate's side ; a re frumentaria 
la,borare, to be in distress with regard to supplies; confestim a 
proelio. immediately after the battle. 

Ad (to). 

Ad ludos pecunia decemitur, money is voted for the games; , 
ad fortunam felix, fortunate in point of fortune; ad Cannas, in 



196 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

the neighborhood of Cannae; ad Siciliam, off Sicily; ad aliorum 
arbitrium, at tJie beck of others ; omnes ad unum, all to a man. 

Apud (beside}. 

Apud forum, near the forum; apud me, in my house; apud me 
plus valet, he has more influence with me; apud Terentium, in 
the writings of Terence. 

Cum (with). 

Cum gladio, sword in hand or wearing a sword; magna cum 
cura quaerit, he seeks with great care; confer hanc pacem cum 
illo bello, compare this peace with that war; cum aliquo certare, 
contend with a person. 

De (from, about}. 

De industria, on purpose; bene merer! de patria, deserve well of 
one's country. 

E or ex (put of). 

Ex equis pugnare, fight on horseback ; statua ex aere facta, a 
statue made of bronze; ex consulatu, immediately after his consul- 
ship; ex itinere, while on the march; quaerere ex aliquo, ask from 
a person; ex improviso, unexpectedly ; ex foedere, in accordance 
with the treaty; ex sententia, satisfactorily; ex parte magna, in 
a great measure. 

In (in or into). 

In equo, on horseback; in barbaris, among barbarians; in 
bonis ducere, reckon among blessings; in te unum se tota conver- 
tet civitas, the whole state will turn to you alone; pietas in deos, 
piety to the gods; pecunia in rem militarem data, money given 
for military purposes; in rem tuam hoc est, this is for your 
interest; in dies, every day ; in horas, every hour; denarius in 
singulos modios, a denarius for every bushel; in posterum diem, 
for the next day. 

Inter (between, among). 

Inter me et te hoc interest, there is this difference between you 
and me; inter se aspiciebant, they kept looking at one another; 
inter aedincandos muros, dui ing the building of the walls. 



PREPOSITION. 197 

Per (through). 

Per vim, by violence; per speculatores, by means of spies 
(secondary agent) ; per me, through my instrumentality; per te 
stetit quominus vinceret, it was owing to you that he did not 
conquer; digladientur per me licet, they may fight it out, as far 
as I am concerned; per te stetit quominus venirem, it was 
owing to you that I did not come. 

Praeter (past, except). 

Praeter modum, beyond measure ; decem praeter se, ten besides 
themselves; omnes praeter unum, all except one; praeter naturam, 
outside the course of nature. 

Pro (before, instead of, in behalf of). 

Pro occiso relictus, left for dead; pro meritis gratias agere, to 
thank for services ; pro multitudine hominum, fines angustos 
habent, considering their population, they have limited territory; 
proelium atrocius quam pro numero pugnantium editur, a battle 
is fought fiercer than might have been expected from the number 
of combatants. 

Sub (under, up to). 

Sub nostram aciem successerunt, they came right up to our line, 
quae sub sensus sunt, what is within the range of the senses; sub 
haec dicta omnes procubuerunt, after these words all prostrated 
themselves; sub ipsa profectione, at the very start; sub noctem, 
at night-fall. 

EXERCISE. 

I. Consider what has to be done about this matter. 2. They 
pitched a camp near the river, and a little beyond that place. 3. I 
saw it when I was sailing towards Athens. 4. He descended from 
the mountain and advanced against them. 5. You have the great- 
est influence with him. 6. They have settled under a high hill. 7. 
You will not see the sun for the multitude of spears. 8. Work 
according to your strength. 9. In whose hands is the power ? 10. 
Is there a race that dwells beneath the earth? n. Do not speak 
in his behalf. 12. After so many battles they are tired of way, 
13, Such were the arguments urged against this law, 



J LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

IL-RULES FOR GENDER. 
FIRST DECLENSION. 

Nouns of the first declension ending in -a and -e are feminine ; 
those ending in -as and -es are masculine. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Names of male persons in -a are masculine : as, 
Poeta bonus, a good poet; nauta timidus, a timid sailor. 

2. Dama, a deer; talpa, a mole; Hadria, the Adriatic Sea, are 
usually masculine. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

Nouns of the second declension ending in -us, -er, -ir, -os 
(Greek), are masculine ; those in -urn, -on (Greek), are neuter. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Domus (house), alvus (belly\ carbasus (linen ; pi., carbasa, 
sails), colus (distaff\ humus (the ground), vannus (a winnowing 
shovel}, are feminine. 

Pelag-us (the sea; pi, pelage, nom. and ace.; Greek), vulgus, 
(rarely masc. ; crowd], virus (poison}, are neuter. (The two last 
are used only in sing.) 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

MASCULINE TERMINATIONS. 

Most nouns of the third declension ending in -er, -or, -os, -es, 
(increasing in the genitive), -o (except -do, -g-o, -io), are masculine: as, 
Career Romanus, a Roman prison; honor magnus, a great honor; 
flos albus, a white flower ; paries altus, a high wall; sermo 
Latinus, the Latin language. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

(i) -er : cadaver (dead body), iter (road), papaver (poppy), tuber 
(swelling), uber (udder), ver (spring}, verber (lash\ are neuter. 



RULES FOR GENDER. 199 

(2) -or : arbor (tree), is feminine ; aequor (sea), manner (marble), 
cor (heart), are neuter. 

(3) -os : cos (whetstone), dos (dowry), are feminine ; os (ossis, a 
bone\ 6s (oris, mouth), are neuter. 

(4) -es : compes (Jetter), merces (merchandise}, merges (a sheaf), 
quies, requies (rest), seges (a crop), teges (a covering), are femi- 
nine ; and aes (copper), is neuter. 

(5) o : caro (carnis, yfcy^) and echo (an echo), are feminine. 

FEMININE TERMINATIONS. 

Most nouns of the third declension which end in -do, -go, -io, 
-as, -is, -aus, -x, -es (not increasing in the genitive), -s (preceded by 
a consonant), -us (in words of more than one syllable), are femi- 
nine : as, 

Multitude magna, a great multitude ; imago cerea, a wax image; 
oratio longa, a long speech; aestas callida, a warm summer; 
rara avis, a rare bird; laus parva, small praise ; vox magna, a 
loud voice; clades nostra, our defeat; plebs Eomana, the Roman 
populace; virtus divina, heroic valor. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

(i)-o:ordo (an order), cardo (hinge), ligo (-nattock), margo 
(margin of a river), are masculine. 

(2) -as: as(assis, a small coin), elephas (elephantis, an elephant) 
aremasc.; vas (vasis, vessel), tea (right), KM.&& (wrong), are neuter, 

(3) -is : amnis (river), collis (hill), cinis (cinder, ashes), crinis 
(hair), ensis (sword), fascis (bundle), finis (an end), follis (bellows), 
funis (rope), ignis (fire), lapis (stone), mensis (month), orbis (circle) 
panis (bread), piscis (fish), postis (post), pulvis (dust), sanguis 
(blood), torris (fire-brand), ungois (nail), vectis (crowbar), vermis 
(worm), are masculine. 

(4) x : calix (a cup), codex (a book), cortex (bark of a tree), 
grex (a fiock), pollex (a thumb), silex (Jlint), vertex (top), are 
masculine. 

(5) -es: acinaces (scimitar), is masculine. 



200 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

(6) -s preceded by a consonant : mons (mountain), dens (tooth), 
fons (fountain), pons (bridge), bidens (mattock), rudens (rope), are 
masculine. 

NEUTER TERMINATIONS. 

Most nouns of the third declension which end in -c, -a, -t, -e, -1, 
-n, -ar, -ur, -us (short in gen.), -us (in words of one syllable), are 
neuter : as, 

Lac alburn, white milk; poema longum, a long poem; caput 
suum, his own headj mare magnum, a great sea; animal ferum, 
a wild animal ; Kmen altum, a high threshold; calcar acutum, 
a sharp spur; fulg-ur clarum, a bright flash; tempus antiquum, 
ancient time ; ius magnum, a great right. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

(1) -1: sal (salt), sol (sun}, are masculine. 

(2) -n : lien (spleen), ren, (kidney), splen (spleen), pecten (comb), 
are masculine. 

(3) -ur: fur (thief), furfur (bran), turtur (turtle-dove), vultur 
(vulture), are masculine. 

(4) -us : pecus (pecudis, a single head of cattle), is feminine ; 
lepus (leporis, a hare) is masculine. 

(5) us : grus (gruis, crane), sus (suis, pig), mus (muris, mouse) 
are masculine. 

FOURTH DECLENSION. 

Nouns of the fourth declension that end in -us, are masculine ; 
those in -u, are neuter. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Acus (a ?ieedle\ colus (distaff; also of the 2nd), domus, a house; 
manus (hand), porticus (portico), trjijus (a tribe), Idus (iduum, 
the Ides of the month), Quinquatrus (pi., feast of Minerva), penus 
(store), are feminine. 

FIFTH DECLENSION. 
Nouns of the fifth delension end in -es, and are feminine. 



APPENDIX. 201 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Dies (day\ is masculine or feminine in the singular, and mascu- 
line in the plural ; meridies (midday, used only in sing.), is mas- 
culine. 



III.-VBRBS FOLLOWED BY UT. 

The following verbs take ut with the subjunctive, with ne for 
that not in a final clause : 

adduco, induce. facio, bring about. 

assequor, secure. fero, propose. 

caveo, take care (ne). impello, urge. 

censeo, recommend. inato, press. 

c cogo, compel. molior, endeavor. 

committo, cause, permit. obtineo, secure. 

concede, allow. opto, wish. 

consequor, secure (ne). paciscor, engage (ne). 

constitao, determine. perflcio, bring about. 

contendo, strive. p^rmitto, entrust. 

euro, take care (ne). prpvideo, take care (ne). 

dare operam, take cart (ne). saticio, enact (ne). 

decerno, determine. ste tuo, resolve (ne). 

efflcio, bring about (ne), ter ipto, try. 

enitor, strive. ter eo, secure (ne). 

exspecto, await. vid^o, take care (ne). 
evinco, carry a point. 

But decerno and statuo (resolve) also take a modal inf. (p. 18, 3) 



IV.-ON CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS, ETC. 

fa) Atque (and, moreover) introduces something of greater 
importance than what preceded ; que, something of less import- 
ance : as, 

Senatus populusque Eomanus The Senate and people of 
Rome, 



202 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

Caedes atque incendia appropinquare dixerunt. They said that 
murders, nay, conflagrations, were approaching. 

(b) Aut.... aut usually contrast alternatives that are mutually 
exclusive : as, 

Hoc aut verum aut falsum est. This is either true or false. 

Vel vel contrast alternatives that may co-exist : as, 

Eos vel metu vel spe adstringere potest. He can bind them 
either by fear or by hope (it matters not which). 

Note. Ve ve js poetical for vel vel : as, Nee quod fuimusve 
sumusve eras erimus. What we either were or are, ive shall not 
be to-morrow j but -ve is used alone in prose for aut : as, Tinaet 
ne plus minusve dicat. He is afraid he will say too much or too 
little. 

Sive (seu) is used to correct a previous assertion : as, 
Quid miserius hoc ab urbe discessu sive potius turpissima 
fuga ? What more wretched than this departure, or rather shame- 
ful flight, from the city ? 

Sive sive are used to ntroduce two alternative adverbial 

clauses of condition, where it is unimportant which is chosen : as, 

Seu preces seu superstitio valuit, nil routatum est. Whether 
it was entreaty or superstition that prevailed, no change was made, 

(c) Haud (not} is usually joined with adjectives or adverbs : as, 

Haud procul, not far. It is used, however, with a verb m 
baud scio an (/ almost think}. 

(d} Non solum (or modo) sed etiam is not only. . . .but also. 
Non solum (modo) non sed ne quidem is not only not . . . .but not 
even; but when the two clauses have a common predicate which is 
expressed in the latter only, the non is omitted : as, 

Regnat advena, non modo vicinae, sed ne Italicae quidem stirpis 
The king is a stranger, not only not descended from a neighboring 
stock, but not even from an Italian one. 

(e) An is often used at the head of a rhetorical question : as, 
An me, nisi te audire vellem, censes haec dicturum fuisse? 



APPENDIX. 203 

You surely do not think that I would have said what I did, if I 
had not wished to hear you. 

(f) At is used to introduce an objection ; at enim, a supposed 
objection : as, 

Nunquam nisi honorificentissime eum appellat. At in eo multa 
fecit asperius. He never speaks of him except in the most com- 
plimentary terms. Yes; but in dealing with him he acted on many 
occasions rather roughly. 

At enim ille ab hac ratione dissentit. But, I shall be told, he 
differs from tJiis view. 

(g) Nedum is used for much less : as, 

Vix in ipsis tectis frig-us vitatur : nedum in mari facile sit. ft is 
difficult to avJid the cold in the house ; much less would it be easy 
upon the sea. 

Ne dicarn (without any effect upon the construction) is used for 
not to say : as, 

Crudelem Castorem ne dicam impium. How cruel, not to say 
unnatural, Castor is ! (p. 58, note). 



VOCABULARY. 



N.B. r. l = regular of 1st conjugation 

A. 

a, usually not expressed ; (a certain), 

quidam ; a city which ea urbs 

quae 

abdicate, I, me magistratu abdico, 
(-are, -avi, -atum). 

ability or abilities, ingenmm; to 
the best of my a., use quam possum. 

able, poten-s, -tis ; perltus. 

able, I am, possum, posse, potoi. 

abound, I, af-fluo, -fltlere, -fluxi (p. 
80, 2). 

about (of place), circum (prep, with 
ace.); (= concerning), de (prep, withabl.). 

about ( = nearly), fCre or ferme, adv. 
(chiefly with numeral adjectives or words 
expressing amount ; usually placed after 
the words limited); paene (used with 
verbs) ; ( = in the neighborhood of), circa 
(prep, with ace.). 

abroad, peregre. 

absence (in my), me absente (p. 
51, 1). 

absent, I am, ab-sum, -esse, -fui. 

abstain from, I, abs-tinSo, -tinere, 
-tinui, -ten turn (with abl., p. 74, 3); ab- 
sisto, -sistre, -stiti(with abl.). 

abstinence, abstinentia. 

abundant variety, say plenty (co- 
pia) and variety. 

accept, I, ao-clplo, -cipere. -c6pi 
-ceptum. 

acceptable to, grat-us, a, -urn (with 
dat., p. 69, 9). 

accident, cas-us, us ; or use accido 
accomplish, I, ef-fTcio, ficfre, feel, 
-fectum. 

accordingly, itaque. 



; r. U= regular of Uth conjugation. 

account Of, on, propter (prep, with 
ace.) ; causa with genitive (usually placed 
after the expression governed by it). 

account, I take into, (or take 
a. of) rationem hab-eo, -ere, -ui, -itum 
(with genitive). 

account-book, tabula, ae. 

accuse, I, accuso, -are, -avi, -atum 
(p. 65, 1). 

accused, re-us, -i. 
accustomed, I am, sSleo, -ere, sfll- 
Hus sum (p. 18, 3). 

acknowledge. See admit. 
acquire, I, ad-ipiscor, -Ipisci, -eptus. 

acquit, I, ab-solvo, -solvere, -solvl, 
-s61utum(p. 65, 1). 

acre, iugurum, -i, n. (sing, declined in 
the second declension ; pi. in third; for 
division of, see p. 153, 2). 

across, trans (prep, with ace.). 

act, fact-um, -I. 

act, I, ag-o, -ere, Sgl, actum. 

action, use vb.; by a., agendo. 

activity, use strenuus. 

added, to this is, hue accedib (p. 

15, 5). 

adherent, use suus. 
administer, I, gubern-o (r. 1). 
administration, respublica. 
admiration, use miror ; without 
a. use quin with vb. 

admire, I, admlr-or, -ari, -iitus sum. 
admit, I, con-fiteor, -fitori, -fessus 
sum ; (let in), admitto. 

admittance, use admitto. 

adopt, a policy, consilium capere. 



205 



206 



VOCABULARY. 



adopt, I, iitor, fiti, iistis sum (with 
al.l., p. 80, 1). ~ 

advance (go forward), I, pro- 
cCdo, -cC-dere, -ccssl, -cessuiu ; pro-gre- 
dior, -grCdi, -gressus sum ; I advance 
my friends to office, amicos meos 
ad honores promoveo. 

advantage, is of, 

adversity, res adversae. 

advice, conslll-um, -1, n. 

advise, I, mo"n-eo, -ere, -til, -itum. 

Aedui, Aedti-T, -drum, M. (pi.). 

Aelius, Aell-us, -I, M. 

Aesop, Aes6p-us, -I, M 

afar, prScul (adv.). 

affair, res, rei, f.; affairs, res, or res 
gestae. 

afraid, I am, tim-eo, -ere, -fli ; 
metii-o, -6re, -I; v6reor, vereri, vCritus 
sum (p. 17, 1). 

Africa, Africa, -ae, f.. 

after, post (prep, with ace./; postea 
(adv.); postquam (conj. with perf. indie., 
p. 102, 4) ; quum (with subj.,p. 106, 1); abl. 
abs. (p. 51, 1 ; 107, 4). 

again, ItSrum (a second time); rursus. 

again and again, saepissime. 

against, contra (prep, wita ace.); 
against my will, me invito (p. 51, l). 

against, I offend, visi-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

Agamemnon, Agamemnon, -onis, M. 

agent, often expressed by an indirect 
question ; I don't know the ajent, nescio 
quis hoc Cgcrit (p. 32, 1). 

Agesilaus, Agesila-us, -i, M. 

ago, abhinc (before expressions of time 
and with ace. or abl.) ; ten years a<jo, ab- 
hinc decem annos (or annis.) 

agreeably, convenienter (with dat., 
p. 69, 9.) 

agreed, it is, con-stat, -stare, -stitit ; 
convenit, -venire, -venit ; all are agreed, 
Inter ounnes constat. 



agreement, consensi-o, -onis, F. 

aid, atixTH-um, -I, X. 

aid, I, auxTli-o sum -(with dat., p. 
69, 8); sub-ve;ilo, -venTre, -vOnl, -ventum 
(with dat., p. 71, 6); itiv-o, -are, iuvi, 
iraum (with ace.); I come to your aid, 
tibi subvenio. 

Alexander, Alexand-er, -ri. 

alike, pariter. 

alive, viv-us ; be a., vivo. 

all, omn-Ts, -e (adj.) 

allege, I, diofcito, -are, -avi, -atum. 

allied, socius. 

allow, (let) I, slno, -ere, sivi, situm. 

allowed, I am, mihi licet, -ere, 
licuit (p. 70, 2) ; it fs allowed by all, inter 
omnes constat. 

ally, s6ci-us, -i, M. 

almost, fere, paene, prope (of place) ; 
see about = nearly ; p. 33, 4. 

alone, sol-us, -a, -um, nn-us, -a, -din; 
I am alone in doing this-, hoc solu^ (o 
unus) facio (p. 11, 2). 

Alps, Alp-es, -mm, F. 

already, iam. 

also, qu6que^idem(p. 90, 12). 

altar, ar-a, -ae, F 

alter, muto. 

altogether, omnino. 

always, semper (adv.). 

amass ; I, compar-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

ambassador, legat-us, -T, M. 

among, inter (prep, with ace.); in 
(prep, with abl.). 

ancestors, maior_-.es, -um. 

ancient, (belonging to old time) pris- 
cus, pristinus, -a, -um, ant!qu-us,-a, -um; 
(full of years), v6tust-us, -a, -um. 

and, et, -que (written after), atque 
(ac, before consonants only.) 

anger, Ira, -ae, F. ; Iracundi-a, -ae, F. 

angry, Irat-us, -a, -um (adj.). 



VOCABULARY. 



207 



angry with, I am, iras-cor, -ci, 
iratus sum (with dat., p. 71, 6). 

animal, amm-al, -alis, N. 

announce, nuntio (r. 1). 

announcement, expressed by the 
perf. part. : the announcement of 
the defeat, clades nuntiata. 

annoyed, I am, me piget (p. 66, 3). 

another, alfc-er, -era, -6rum (of two) ; 
alms, -a, -ud (of more than two). 

answer, responsum, -i, N. 

answer, I, respond-eo, -ere, -i, re- 
sponsum; I make the same answer, 
idem respondeo ; he makes no an- 
swer, nihil respondet. 

Antonius, Antonl-us, -I, M. 
anxiety, aolllcltud-o, -mis, F. 
anxious, sollTcit-us, -a, -um. 
anxious, I am, cup-Io, -ere, -ivi -(u), 
Ttum. 

any, quis;(in affirmative clauses) qui vis, 
quilibet; (in negative) quisquam or^ullus, 
(p. 95, 3, 4) ; ecquis (p. 97, d). 

any longer, ultra^adv.) ; diutius. 

anything, (after a neg.), quidquam ; 
(you please), quidvis, quidlibet (p. 
95,2). 

Apollo, Apoll-o, -mis, M. 

apparent, it is, manifestum est ; 
appar-et, -ere, -nit ; use videor forad7T: = 
as each shall seem most mean, &c. (p. 
118, 5). 

apparently, use seem. 

appear, I, videor, -Sri, vlsus sum 

appearance, spCd-es, -el, F. 

applaud, I, plaud-o, -ere, plausi, 
plausum. 

application, studl-um, -i; appli- 
cation to literature, studium lit- 
terarum. 

approach, advent-us, -iis, M. 

approach, I, ad-venlo, -v6nlre, -veni, 
ventum. 



approval, use vb. 

approve, probo (r. i.). 
April, April-is,-e. (adj). 
argument, urge, use dico. 
Aricia, Aricia, -ae, F. 
arise, I, 



-surrectum ; see rise, 
arm, humerus; vb., armo (r. i.). 
arms, arm-a, -orum, N. (pi.), 
army, exerclt-us, -us, M. 
Arpinum, ArpTn-um, -i, N. 

arrest, I, ar-rlpio, -rtpgre, -rlprti, 
-reptum ; cor-ripio, -rlp6re, -ripili, -rep- 
tum. 

arrival, advent-us, -us, M. 

arrive, I, per-venio, -v6nlre, -vCni, 
-ventum ;- I arrive at the city, ad 
urbem pervenio. 

arrogance, use arrogans. 
arrow, sagitt-a, -ae, F. 
art, ar-s, -tis, F. 

as (correlative of same), qui (p. 10, 1); 
corr. of such, qualis ; of great, quantus 

(p. 10, i). 

as not, in consecutive clause, ut-non 
(p. 14, 4). 

as soon as, p. 102, 4. 

ascertain, I, cog-nosco, -noscere, 
-novl, -nitum; certior factus sum. 

ashamed, I am, me pudet (-ere, 
piidiiit); I am, ashamed of you, tui me 
pudet (p. 66, 3). 

ask (or ask for) I, r&g-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum ; posco, -ere, p6posci ; p6to, -ere 
petlvi, petitum. 

assassination, expressed by perf. 
part, pass.; after Caesar's assassination, 
post Caesarem interfectum. 

assault, use immitto (send against). 

assemble, I, (trans.), convoc-o, -are, 
-avi, -atum ; (intr.), conven-io, -Ire, -veni, 
-ventum. 



208 



VOCABULARY. 



assent, lend a blind, temere as- 
sentior. 

assert, I, dico, -ere, dixi, dictum, 
assertion, make, dico. 
assign, I, trib-uo, -tt'ere, -til, -utum ; 
divido. 

assist, assistance. See aid. 
assume, sumo, 
astonishing-, admirabilis. 
at, ad. See p. 82. 
at once, statim. 
Athens, Athen-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). 
Atlantis, Atlant-is, -idis, F 
attack, impet-us, -us, M. 

attack, I, ag-gredior, -gredl, -gressus 
sum (with ace.); impetum facio in (with 
ace.); I make an attack on (a place), 
op-pugno, -are, -avl, -atum (with ace.). 

attain, attinere (ad). 

attempt, coriat-us, -us. 

attempt, I, con-or, -arl, -atus sum. 

attention, animadversi-o, -onis, F. 

attract, traho. 

audience, use audio ; p. 166, c. 

August, August-us, -a, -um. 

authority, p6test-as, -atis, F. ; auc- 
torit-as, -atis, F. 

avail^pjneself of, utor. 
avenge, I, ulcisp-or, -i, ultus sum. 
avenue, adit-us, -us, M. 
avoid, I, vlt-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 
away, I am, ab-sum, -esse, -fQl. 
away, I go, &b-eo, -Tre, -IvI (-ii), -ftum. 

B. 

bad, mal-us, -a, -um (adj.). 
back, terg-um, -I, N. 
baggage, impedimenta, -orum. 
Baiae, Bai-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). 
Balbus, Balb-us, -I, M. 

banish. I, ex civitate pello (pell<5re, 
pepuli, pulsum). 



banished, extorr-is (ex, terra), with 
ahl. (p. 74, 4). 

banishment, exlll-um, -i, N.; I am 
in banishment? exuT-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

banker, argentarius. 

bark, I, latr-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

base, turp-is, -e (adj.). 

battle, pugn-a, -ae, F. ; proeli-um, -I, 
N. ; in battle, in acie ; there has 
been a disastrous b., infeliciter 
pugnatum est. 

bear, I, fero, ferre, tttll, latum ; tQlero, 
-are, -avl, -atum. 

beast, fgra, -ae, F. ; belua, ae. 

beat, use vinco. 

beautiful, pulch-er, -ra, -rum ; (of 
places), amoen-us,- a, -um. 

beauty, pulchrltud-p, -mis, F. 

because, quod, quia, quoniam (p. 113, 
.2). 

become, I, fio, fieri, factus sum. 

before, antea, antehac. ante (adv.); 
ten years before, decem annos ante 
(p. 86, 4), 

before, ante (prep,). 

before, antequam, priusquam (p. 104. 
V). 

beg, I. 6r-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; I beg 
you not, te oro ne (with subj. ; p. 12, 2). 

begin, I, in-ciplo, -cipere, -cepl, -cep- 
tum ; coepi, -isse (p. 142, 6) ; at the be- 
ginning of spring, prlmo verg^, at 
the beginning of night, prima 
nocte. 

beginning, initi-um, -I, N. (see above). 

behave, I, me gero (g6r6re, gessi, 
gestum). 

belief, use vb. 

believe, I, cre-do, -dgre, -didl, -ditum; 
I am believed, mihi creditur (p. 72, 10). 

believing, by, credendo (p 42, G); 
seeing is believing, \idere est credere 
(p. 43, note 2). 



VOCABULARY. 



209 



belong" to, p. 59, 2 ; see have. 

below, infra. 

benefit, commfld-um, -I, N. 

benefit, I, pro-sum, -desse, -fui (with 
dat. ; p. 70, 1). 

bereft, orb-us, -a, -um (with abl., p. 
74, 4). 

beseech, 6r-o, -are, -avi, -atum; 
obsecr-or (r. 1). 

besiege, I (blockade), ob-sldeo, 
-sidere, -sedl, -sessum ; (by actual at- 
tack), oppugn-o, -are, -avi, atum. 

besieged, the, use rel. clause. 

betray, I, pro-do, -d*ure7 -d-Idi, -ditum. 

better, melior, comp. of bonus ; it 
would be better, melius est ; satius 
est (p. 124, 2). 

between, inter (prep, with ace.) 

bewail, deploro (r. 1). 

bind, iungo. 

bird, avis, -is (F.) 

birth, of noble, nbilL_Ioco_patus 
(P- 74, 4). 

bite, mors-us, -us, M. 

blame, culp-a, ae, F. 

blame, I, vltupgr-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

blessing, tjonumT' ~ 

blind, caec-us, -a, -um. ; blinding, 
omit, as being implied. 

blindness, caecit-as, -atis. 

blockade, obsideo, -ere, -sedi, -sessum 

blood (in veins), sanguis, sangulnis, 
M. ; (when shed), cru-or, -oris, M. 

blossom, effloresce. 

blush to do it, I, me pudet hoc 
facere. 

boast, I, glori-or. -arl_-at"g-g" ; I 
makefthe same boast, idem glorior. 

boat, navigium. 

body, corpus, corpdris, N. ; a great 
body of men, magna vis hominum 

bold, aud-ax, -acis (adj.). 

boldly, audact. r or audaciter. 

bond, use neut. pr . 



book, Hb-er, -rl, M. 

borders, fln-es, -mm, M. (pi.). 

born, J^^^iascor, nascl, natus sum. 

born t^l IB natus ad regendum: 

born of^^rable family.^febili gente 
natus (p. 74, 4). 

borrow money, pecuniam mutuam 
accipere or sumere. 

both, xiferTJue, utraque, utrumque; 
ambo, -ae, -o. 

both. . .and,et...et;-que. . .-que; 
vel . . . . vel. 

bottom, fundus, -I, M.;Imus, -a, -um : 
at the bottom of the mountain, 
in monte imo (p. 61 (e)). 

boxer, ptig-il, -His, M. 

boy, pn-er, -en, M. ; from a boy 
(from boyhood), a puero, or, when 
used of more than one u a pueris. 

boyhood, pufirltia, -ae, F. (see above). 

brave, fort-is, -e (adj.). 

bravely, fortiter (adv.). 

bread, panis, -is, M. 

break, I, frang-o, -6re, fregl, fractum; 
I break a law, legem^violo (-care, -avi, 
-atum) ; I break. rtTjfword , fidein fallo 
(-ere, ffifelll, falsum). ~ 

break a bridge, I, pontem inter- 
rumpo(-rumpere, -rupl, -ruptum); pontem 
inter-scindo (-scindere, -scldl, -scissum). 

breast, pectus, -6ris N. 

bridge, pon-s, -tis, M. ; I build a 
bridge over a river, pontem in flu- 
mine facio. 

brief, brev-is, -e. 

brigand, latr-o, onis, M. 

bring, I, fero, ferre, ttill, latum ; duco, 
-ere, duxi, ductum ; I bring this to 
you, hoc tibi affero ; I bring help to 
you, operam (or auxilium) tibi fero ; tibi 
auxilio venio (dat. ; p. 69, 8) 

Br uain, Britannl-a, -ae, F. 

broad, lat-us, -a, -um. 

brother, fnit-er. -ris, M. 

Brunciisium, iirunclisvmn \ N. 



2lO 



VOCABULARY. 



build, I, aedific-o, -are, -fivl, -atum ; 
I build a bridge, pontem facio; I 
build a mound, aggerem extruo (-6re 
extvuxi, extructum). 

burden, on-us, 

burn, I^rcm-o, -are, ^IvI, -atum 
uro, -ere, ussi, ustlllll ; ln-uyndtr;~-cendere 
-cendi^ceusum. 

bury, sepelip, -ire, ivi, ultum. 

business, res, negoti-um ; p. 60, 2, 
note. 

but, sed, verum (emphatic). 

butcher, I, trucid-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

buy, I, em-o, -6re, 5ml, emptum. 

by (of agent), a, before a consonant ; 
ab, before a vowel or h ; abs, before te ; 
(of secondary agent) per, with ace. ; by 
land and sea, terra niarique. 

by-stander, use adsto. 

C. 

call (summon), I, v6c-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum 

call (name), I, appell-o, -are, -svi, 
-atum. 

call down, I, dev6c-o, -are, -avl, 
-atum, (from = de + abl. ). 

call out, ev5co ; (exclaim), I, 
exclam-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

call together, cogo ; convoco. 

camp, castr-a, -orum, N. (pi.). 

can (am able), I, possum, posse, 
p6tfli. 

candidate for, I am, peto, -ere^ 
petivi (petli), petitum ; I am a candi- 
date for the consulship, consul - 
atum peto. 

Cannae, Cann-ae, -arum, F. (pi.); 
the battle at Cannae, pugna Can- 
nensis or pugna apud Cannas. 

Canusium, Canusium. 

capable of command, imperii 
capa-x, i*cio(p. 64> 

Captive, captiv-us, I, M. 



capture, capio; on the capture 
of the city, urbe capta (p. 51). 

Capua, Capua, -ae, F. 

care, cur-a, -ae, F. ; care for, euro 
(r. 1). 

care, take, cave ut (p. 26, 5) ; take 
care that not, cave ne (p. 26, 5). 

care, without, secur-us, -a, -um. 

carry, I, port-o, -are, -avi, -atum; 
f ero, ferre, toll, latum. 

carry away and drown, absumo. 

carry on war, I, bellum gero, (-ere, 
gessi, gestum); I carry on war 
against the enemy, bellum contra 
hostes gero ; bellum hostibus infero. 

carry up, educo. 

Carthage, Carthag-o, -Inis, F. 

Carthaginian, Carthcagmiens-is, -e. 

case, in our, in nobis ; in case, 
si (p. 141, 5, b\ 

case that, it is the, fit ut (p. 15, 
5); p. 106, 2. 

cast, I, iacio, iacere, iecl, iactum ; 
conicio, -icere, -iecl, -iectum. 

cast (of a spear), iact-us, us. 

Catiline, Catilin-a, -ae, M. 

CatO, Cat-o, jonis^ M 

cause, caus-a, -ae, F. ; vb. , facio. 

cause (loss), I, in-fero, -ferre, -tilli, 
illatum. 

cause a panic, I, pavorem inicio, 
-Tcere, -ieci, -iectum. 

cautious, caut-us, -a, -um. 

cavalry, equltat-us, us, M. ; equites. 

cease, I, de-sino, -sin6re, -sivi, -si^um; 
de-sisto, -sistere, -stlti,-st!tum. 

celebrated, ille ; praeclarus. 

centre, medms, -a, -um ; in the 
centre of the city, media urbe; 
the centre of the line, media acies. 

centurion, centuri-o, -onis, M. 

certain (sure), cert-us, -a, -um ; it 
is certain, certun, f.^i; certain vie- 



VoCABtJLARY. 



211 



tory. victoria explorata ; as certain, 
pro certo. 

certain (some), aliquis, aliquae, 
aliquid or aliquod(p. 96, 5); a C., quidam. 

Chance, sors; fortun-a, -ae, F. ; cas-us, 
-us, M. ; by chance, forte, casu. 

change, I, mut-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; a 
change, res. 

character, (natural), inggn^um. -I, 
N. ; often expressed by a d^penSent ques- 
tion: I know the character of the 
man, scio qualis homp sit ;_(good charac- 
ter), virt-us, -utis, F. ; (mode of life), 
mor-es -urn; (the highest character), 
mores optmi; the same character* as. 
talis . . . qualis (p. 10, 1). 

charge (attack), impet-us, -us, M. 

charge (attack), I make, invnd-o 
-ere, -viisi, -vasum ; impetum facto, facere, 
feci, factum ; I make a charge on 
the enemy, hastes. jflvado or impetum 
in hostes facio. 

charge, crimen ; (accuse) I, accus-o, 
are, -avi, -atum ; I am charged with, 
in crimen venid : I am charged with 
treason, in crimen proditionis venio. 

CRarybdis, Charybd-is, -is, F. 

cheap, vilis. 

Cheat, I, circum-vSnio, -vfoiTre. -Yfoy 
-ventum. 

check, I keep in, m6d6r-or, -an, -atus 
sum ; (troops), con-tlnCo, -tingre, -tintii, 
,-tentum. 

Child, pu-er, -erl, M. 

children, liber-i, -orum, M. 

Cicero, Cicer-o, -onis, M. 

circumstance, res, rei, F.; a cir- 
cumstance which, p. 9, 9 ; under 
these circumstances, quae cum ita 
sint; I yield to circumstances, 
tempori cedo. 

Citadel, ar-x, -cis, F. 
Citium, Citlum, -i, N. 
citizen, civ-is, -is, M. 
citizenship, civit-as, -atis, F. 



city, urb-s, -is, F. 
Clamor, clam-or, -oris, M. 
class^renus hominum. 

CleaJ^mb, manif estum est ; appanet, 
-ere, -iiit. 

clear (it is) or light, lucet, -ere, 
luxit. 

clemency, clementi-a, -ae. 

Clever, callld-us, -a, -urn. 

Client, (at law), hie (p. 88, 4); (political 
dependent), clien-s, -tis, M. 

Climb, scan-do, -6re, -di, -sum. 

Clitus, Cllt-us, -I, M. 

closed to truth, ears, aures ad 
veritatem clausae. 

closely unites, say joins and bind 
together (connecto). 

cold, frlg-us, -6ris, N. 

colleague, collegia, -ae, M. 

collect, I, col-llg-o, -ligere, -I5gi, -lec- 
tum ; cogo, -ore, c6cgi, coactum. 

Colline gate, porta Collina. 

colony, c616m-a, -ae, F 

come, venio. * 

command, I, iftbeo, -ere, iussi, 
iussum (p. 16, note) ; impero, -arc, -avi, 
-atum (p. 71, 6) ; I command an 
army, exercitui praesum (p. 71, 5). 

commerce, mercatur-a, -ae, F. 

commit (a crime) I, admitto, 
-mittere, -misi, -missum. 

common, use all. 

compare, I, con-fCro, -ferre, -tiili, 
collatum ; comparo (r. 1). 

compassion, mlscrlcordTa. 

Compel, I, cogo, -ere, cdcgi, coactum. 

competitor, use decerto (r. 1). 

complain, I, quCror, queri, questus 
sum (de) ; to my complaint he an- 
swered nothing, nihil mihi querenti 
respondit. 

compulsion, use cogo. 

conceal, I, cel-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

concerning, de (prep., with "bP 



VOCABULARY. 



concerns me, it, mea interest (p. 
66, 4) ; ad me pertinet (-ere, -tlit). 

conclude, a 
end of speaking. 

condemn, I, con-demno, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

condemnation, escape, say nor 
was he not condemned. 

condition, stiit-us, -us, M. 

conduct (a government), I, 
guhern-o (reinp.) ; conduct myself 
well, I, me bene gero. 

conduct, fact-a, -drum ; or use verb. 

confer, I, d3fero ; don-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

confidence, flducl^a, -ae. F. ; or use 
confido or fidem habeo (dat.). 

confusion, throw into, use turbo. 

congratulation, use gratulor (p. 48, 
6). 

conquer, I, vinc-o, -ere, vlci, victum ; 
super-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

conscious, conscius, a, urn; con- 
SCious of right, conscius reed. 
Consent, consensus, -us, M. 

consequence, event-us, -us, M. ; a 
matter of the greatest conse- 
quence.jNes^r^vjsaiiua ; it is of great 
consequence to me, mea multum 
interest (p. 66, 4). 

consider, I, spect-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; 
aestim-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; hab-eo, -Cre, 
-tii, -itum. 

consistent with, etc., say the man 
who is very brave we wish to be, etc. 

conspire (make a conspiracy), I, 

coniurationem facio (facere, foci, factum). 

constant occurrence, of, say 
happens more often. 

constitutional, e republica ; legiti- 
mus, -a, -um. 

consul- consul, -is, M. 

consulship, consulat-us, -us; I 
stand, am a candidate for the 



consulship, consulatum peto ; in the 
consulship of, use consul (abl. abs.). 

consult, I, consfll-o, -ere, -fli, -turn ; 
I consult you, te consulo; I con- 
sult your interest, tibi consulo (p. 
72, 7). 

contain, I, con-tmeo, -tinere, -tmui, 
-tentum. 

contemporary, aequalis, -is, M. 

content, content-us, -a, -um (with 
abl., p. 81, 6). 

contest, certam-en, -mis, N. 

contract, I, con-traho. 

contract, I let out a, 16co, -are, -avi, 
-atum ; I take a contract, conduce, 
-ducere, -duxi, -ductum ; I contract 
to build a bridge, pontem faciendum 
conduce (p. 46, 6). 

control (noun), use penes. 

control myself, I, mihi moder-or, 
-art,- -atus sum ; mihi tempcr-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

convince, persuadeo. 

Corinth, Corinthus, -i, F. 

corn, frument-um, -I, N. 

corrupt, corrumpo. 

costs, it, constat, -are, -stitit ; it 
costs much, magni constat; it costs 
too much, nimio constat (p. 79, 12). 

cottage, casa, ae. 

council, concili-um, -I, M. 

count, I, enumgro, -are, -avi, -atum. 

country, (one's native), patrl-a, 
ae, F. ; (the State), clvlt-as, -atis, F. ; 
respublica, reipublicae, F. ; (territory), 
fines ; (as opposed to the town), rus, 
ruris, N. ; in the country, run. 

country-house, villa, ae, F. 

countrymen, civ-es, -mm, M. (pi.). 

courage, virt-us, -utis, F. ; constan- 
ti-a, -ae, F. ; fortitud-o, -inis, F. 

course, res, or use neut. pron. ; hold 
(a C.), facio. 



VOCABULARY. 



213 



court, indicium, -1, N. 

cover, I, tego, -ere, texl, tectum. 

coward, cowardly, ignavus. 

Crassus, Crassus, -i, M. ; the gal- 
lant Crassus, Crassus, vir fortissimus. 

create, creo (r. 1). 

credit, laus, -dis, F ; fid-es, -el, F. 

Cretan, Cretensis, -e. 

crime, facin-us, -6ris, N. ; scelus, eris. 

criticise, reprehen-do, -ere, -di, -sum. 

crooked (bent), curvus, a, um ; (of 
Counsels), pravus, a, um. 

cross, I, trans-eo, -Ire, -ivi (li), -itum. 

crown (a circlet), c6ron-a, -ae, F. ; 
often translated by regnum, -i, N. 

CrueL crudel-is, -e ; saev-us, -a, um. 

Cruelty, crudelit-as, -atis, F. 

current, flumen. 

custom, mos, moris, M ; consuetud-o, 
-Inis, Fl 

CUt Off, say kill. 

Cyprus, Cyprus, -i, F. 

D. 

dagger, sica, -ae, F. ; pugio, -onis, M. 

daily, qu^idie (of daily repeti- 
tion) ; (with words expressing 
increase or decrease), in dies. 

damp, say in consequence of (prae, 
vnihah\.)thistheycouldnotexult(exsu\to'). 

danger, perlcul-um, -i, N. 

dangerous, periculosus. 

dare, I, audeo, -ere, ausus sum. 

daring, aud-ax,-acis(adj.); he acted 
with more daring than discre- 
tion, audacius quam p\udentius egit. 

daringly, audac-ter (or audac-iter) 
comp., -lus; sup., -issime. 

dart, iacfil-um, -1, N. ; tel-um, -I, N. 

date, often expressed by an indirect 
question introduced by quando : I don't 
know the date of the event, 
nescio quando acciderit (p. 32, 1) ; at 



an early date, mature, brevi. 

daughter, fili-a, -ae,F. (dat. and abL 
pi., filia^ft 

dawn,,prima lux ; at dawn, prima 
luce ; dawn, nearer to, etc., say the 
nearer they were away from the rising 
(ortus) of things, the better they saw, etc. 

day, dfes, -ei, M. or F.; day by day, 
see daily ; day after day, diem de 
die ; day before, pridie ; of the day 
before, hesternus, -a,~ -um ; for the 
day, in diem ; in my day, meis tem- 
poribus ; one day, postea ; aliquando. 

daybb^ak. See dawn. 

daylight, lux, -cis, F. 
dead, mortuus. 

deaf ear, turn, etc., say let us not 
obey (obtempero) those dissuading (dis- 
suadeo). 

dear, car-us, -a, -um; dearest 
friends, homines amlcisslmi. 

death, mor-s, -tis, F. ; after his 
death, mortuus (p. 48, 3, note). 

debt, aes alienum (literally an- 
other's money). 

deceive, I, de-cipio, -cipere, -cSpi, 
-ceptum. 

Decembfer, Decemb-er, -ris (adj., 
p. 147, 3). 

decide (determine), I, stat-uo, 
-ilere, -in, -utum ; con-stlttio, -stitttSre, 
-stlttii, -stitutum (with inf. or ut with 
subj., p. 17, note). 

declaration, use declare. 
declare, dico ; declare (r. 1). 
decline, detrecto (r. 1). 
declining, 48, 3, note, 
decree, I, de-cerno, -cerngre, -crevl, 
-cretum, (p. 17, note.) 
decree, a, decret-um, -I, N. 
deed, fact-um, -I, N. 

deep, alt-us, -a, um; deep grief, 
dolor gravis. 



214 



VOCABULARY. 



defeat, clad-es, -is, F. ; the defeat 

at Cannae, clades Cannerisis, or clades 
apud Cannas ; (vb), vinco. ^^ 

defend, I, de-fendo, -fendere, -fend!, 

-fensum. 

defender, defens-or, -oris, M. 

defer, differo. 

defile, angusti-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). 

delay, I, m6ror, -art, -atus ; cunct-or. 
delay, Without, confestim (adv.). 

deliberately, consulto. 

deliberation, there is need of, 
opus est consulto (p. 81, 4).. 

delight, delecto (r. 1) (trans). 

delightful, iucund-us, -a, -um. 

deliver a speech, I, orationem 
habeo (-ere, -ui, -Ituin). 

deliver (entrust), I, mand-o, -are, 
avl, -fitum. 

demand, I, postftl-o, -.are, -avi, -atum ; 
flagito, -are, -avl, -atum (p. 39, note) ; I 
demand this from you, hoc tibi 
impero (p. 72, 9). 

deny, I, neg-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

depart, I, ab-eo, -Ire, -ivi (li), 'itum ; 
dis-codo ; pronciscor. 

departure, prof ecti-o, -onis, F. ; or use 
proficiscor. 

descend, descendo. 
desert, I, desero, -ere, -serai, -sertum ; 
destlt-ao, -acre, -ui, -utum. 

deserter, transfug--a, -ae, M. 
desertion, p. 50, 14. 
deserts, merlt-um, -i, N. ; in ac- 
cordance with my deserts, jyo. 



deserve, I, mereor, mer6rl, meritus 
sum i mereo, -ere, -uL 

design. See plan. 
desire, cupido, -mis, F. 

desire, I (=1 am desirous to), 
ctiplo.. cOpSre, cftplvl (cupii), cupitum ; 
etuaeo, -ere, lu (with inf., p. 55, 3). 



desirous, see above. 
dosist, I, de-sisto, -sistere, -stiti, -sti- 
tum (p. 74, 3). 

despair, I, desper-o, -are, etc. (de). 
despair, desperatio, -onis, F. 
despise, I, con-temno, -temnere, 
-tempsi, -temptum. 

destination, say where we are going. 

destiny, fat-um, -i, N. 

destitute Of, exper-s, -tis (p. 64); 
egen-us, -a, -um (with gen.; p. 64); nudus, 
a, -um (with abl.; p. 81, 6). 

destroy, I, del-Co, -ere, -evl, -etum ; I 
destroy a bridge, see bridge. 

destruction, pernici-es, -ei, F.; exlti- 
urn, -I, N. (p. 69, 8). 

detain, I, rg-tmeo, -tinere, -tintti, 
-tentuin. 

detect, sentio, -ire, sensi, sensum. 

deter, I, deterreo ; pro-hib6o, -hibere, 
-hibui, -hibitum ; nothing deters me 
from going, nihil me prohibet quoin- 
inus earn (p. 22, 2). 

determine, I. See decide. 

detest, odi. 

detestable, atrox. 

detestation, loudly-expressed, 
say hate (pi.) amd shouts ; p. 165, b. 

devastate, I, vast-o, -are, -avT, -atum; 
pdpul-or, -ari, atus sum. 

development, late, say springs up 
late among vien. 

devotedly, say very much. 

die, I, mOrlor, morl, mortuus sum ; 
mortem obeo, -Ire, -Ivi (-11), -itum ; vitti 
excedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum. 

differ, differo. 

difference to us, it makes no, 
nihil nostra interest (p. 66, 4). 

dimcult, difflcll-is, -e. 

difficulty, use adj.; without dim- 
culty, facile. 

dignity, dignitas -atis ; or use gravis. 



VOCABULARY. 



215 



direct, I, iubeo ; administr-o, -are, 
Svi, -atum. 

direction, often translated by a dep. 
question : I know the direction the 
enemy have taken, scio quo hoetes 
iverint (p. 32). 

disadvantage, incommtfd-um, -I, N. 

disagreeable, ingrat-us,-a, -um ; mo- 
lestus. 

disagreement, dissensi-o, -onis, F. 
disappoint, eliido, -6re, elusi, elfisum. 

disaster, clad-es, -is, F. ; the dis- 
aster at Cannae, clades Cannensis, 
or clades apud Cannas. 

disband, I, di-mitto, -mittere, -mTsi, 
-missum. 

discontented, non contentus, -a, 
-um (with abl.). 

discord, use dissSnus, -a, -um. 

discover, I (find out), cognosco; 
(with effort), rgper-io, -Ire, -I, -turn; 
(without effort), in-venlo, -venire, 
-venl, -ventum. 

discretion, prudentia ; or use adj. 

disease, morb-us, -i. M. 

disgrace, dedec-us, -Sris, N. ; turpf- 
tud-o, mis, F. ; it is a disgrace to 
you, tibi dedecori est (p, 69, 8). 

disgusted, I am. me pudet 1. 1 am 
disgusted with you, me tui pudet 
(p. 66, 3). 

dismiss, I, di-mitto, -mittCre, -mlsi, 
-missum. 

displease, I, dis-pliceo, -pllcere, 
-pllcul (p. 71, 6). 

displeasure, use vb. ; offensi-o, -onis 

dissatisfied with, I am, me taedet; 
I am dissatisfied with you, me tui 
taedet (p. 66, 3). 

dissent, dissentio (yb.). 

distinguished, clar-us, -a, -um; 
insign-is, -e ; his distinguished 
father, pater suus, vir clarissimus. 



distress, dolor, orls M.; or use me 
piget. 

distribute, I, dlvldo, -ere, dlvlsl, 
dlvisum. 

district, ager, agri M. 

distrust, diffldo (dat.) 

disturb, I, perturb-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

ditch, fossa, ae, F. 

divide, I, dl-vido, -vM6re, -vlsl, -visum. 

divine, divln-us, -a, -um. 

do, I, facto, fticere, feel, factum ; ago, 
aggre, 6gl, aotum (pursue a course of 
action). 

doctor, medlc-us, I, M. 

doctrine, use neut. pron. 

dog, can-is, -is, M. 

door, osti-um, -i, N. 

doubt, I (= I am in doubt), dubit-o, 
-are, -avi, -atum ; there is no doubt 
that, non dubium est quin (with subj., 
p. 22, 1). 

draw (=drag), I, traho, -ere, traxi, 
tractum ; elicio ; I draw up a law, 
legem scribo ; I draw up soldiers, 
milites instruo. 

dream, somni-um, -I, N. 

dream, I, somnio (r. i); I dream 
a dream, somnium somnio (p. 38, 4). 

dress, vest-is, -is, F. 

drink, I, bib-o, -fire, -I, -Itum. 

drive, I, ex-Igo, -Ige're, -egl, -actum; 
pello, pellgre, pepftll, pulsum. 

drops, it, rorat (-are). 

dro-wned, was, say could not be 
heard for (prae, with abl.). 

dry (vb.), aresco. 

during, expressed either by ace. of 
time how long or by inter or intra with 
ace. (p. 85, 1). 

duty, a, munus ; it is my duty, 
p. 60, 2, note ; deb6o, -ere, -ul, debltum ; 
me oportet, -ere, -uit (p. 33, 3). 

duty of, it is, use genitive (p. 59, 2). 



216 



VOCABULARY. 



dwell, I, Mblt-o, -are, -avl, -atum ; 
naneu, -ere, mansi, mansum. 

dwelling 1 , domlclll-um, -I, N. 



E. 



each, quisque, quaeque, quidque or 
quodque (p. 93, c). 

each (=each and every), unus- 
quisque. 

each other, they love, inter se 
ainant ; alms alium ainat, or (of two) 
alter alterum amat. 

eager for, cupld-us, -a, -urn (with 
gen, p. 64). 

eager to, I am, cQpio, -ere, cupivi, 
cupltum (with inf.) ; gestlo, -ire, -Ivl. 

early, matur-us, -a, -urn ; in early 
spring, prhno vere. 

early, matur-e, -ius, -rime or -isslme. 

ear, aur-is, -is, F. 

earn, mur-Co, -ere, -ui, -itum. 

earth, tell-us, -uris, F. ; terra. 

ease, with, facile. 

easily, facil-e, -lus, -lime (adv.) 

easy, facll-is, -lor, -Hums. 

eat, I, ed-o, -ere, edl, e"sum ; vescor. 

effect, perficio. 

either -or, aut aut ; vel vel (p. 

202, 6). 

elect, I, cr6-o, -are, -avl, -atum ; faclo, 
fac6re, feel, factum ; I am elected 
consul, consul fio. 

eloquent, el6quen-s, -tis; the elo- 
quent Demosthenes, Demosthenes, 
vir eloquentissimus. 

else, alius 

elude, frustror (r. 1). 
empire, impe'rl-iim, -1, N. 
employ thought, in guessing, 
cogito (r. 1). 
encamp, I, consido, -sldere, -sedi, 



-sessum; castra Idco (-are, -avl, -atum); 
castra pono (-fire, pflsul, pOsitum.) 

encounter, I (meet), oc-curro, -cur- 
rere, -curri, -curs um (with dat.); obviam 
ire (dat.). 

encourage, I, ad-hortor, -hortari, 
-hortatus sum. 

encroach on, &c., say take away 
from each Itis own. 

end, fm-is, -is, M. ; at the end of 
winter, extremfi hifcine ; (vb.), finio. 

endeavor, I, con-or, -url, -atus sum. 

endeavor, an, coniit-us, -us, M. 

endowed, praedltus. 

endure, I, tdlero, -are, -avl, -atum; 
sustmeo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum ; per- 
petior, -pgti, -pessus sum. 

enemy (public), host-is, -is, M. ; 
(private), inlmicus, i, M. 

engagement, an, proelium, -I, N. ; 
ptiyii-a, -ae, F. 

EngUsh, the, Angl-i, -orum, M. (pi.)- 

enjoy, I, fru-or, -I, -ctus sum (with 
abl.,p. 80, 1). 

enough, satis (adv.); enough 
money, satis pecuniae. 

enquiry, use quaero (p. 48, 6). 

enter, I, in-gredTor, -gredl, -gressus 
sum ; I enter the house, domum 
ingredior. 

entrust, mando (r. 1) ; trado. 

enumerate, I, enumer-o, -are, -a vi, 
-atum. 

envied, I am, mihi invidetur (p. 72, 
10). 

envoy, legat-us, I, M. ; nuntl-us, -I, M. 
envy, I, in- video, -videre, -vldi, -vlsum. 
envy, invidl-a, -ae, F. 
Ephesus, Ephesus, -I, F. 
err, I, err-o, -are, avl, atum. 
error, err-or, -oris, M. ; or use vb. 
escape, I, ef-fuglo, -fugere, -fQgl, 
fugitum; (noun),rfaga; effugium. 



VOCABULARY. 



217 



estate, fund-us ; praedium. 

esteem, I, magni aestimo (r. 1). 

estimate, I, aestim-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum ; see value. 

estrang-ed, alien-us, -a, -um. 

eternal, sempltern-us, -a, -um. 

even, etiam; before an adj., vel; not 

even, ne quidem (with the emphatic 

word between); not even one, ne unus 
quidem ; p. 3, 8. 

even (level), aequ-us, -a, -um. 

even (number), par, paris; odd or 
even, par vel impar. 

evening", vesper ; gen. vesperis or 
vespfirl; ace., vesperum ; abl., vespere, 
M. ; in the evening 1 , vesperi. 

events, at all, certe (adv.). 

ever (always), semper ; (at any time), 
unquam (adv.). 

every (= all; pi.), omnes; every- 
thing, omnia : every day; see daily; 
every one, omnes (pi.). 

everybody, omnes. 

evident, it is, manifestum est; 
apparet, -ere, -uit. 

evil, mal-um, -I, N. 

exactly, ipse (p. 90, 13); exactly 
ten days ago, abhinc decem ipsis 
diebus. 

examine (ground), I, explor-o, 
-are, -avi, -atum. 

exasperate, I, in-cendo, -cendere, 
-cendl, -censum. 

exasperation, use saevio ; say in 
proportion as (p. 118, 5) they proceed (ago) 
now gently (leniter), will they be cruel. 

excel, I, prae-sto, -stare, -stfti, 
-stitum and -statum (with dat.); ante- 
cello, -cellere (with dat., p. 71, 4). 

excellent, optlm-us, -a, -um ; your 
excellent father, pater tuus, vir 
pptimus. 



exchange, I, nuito, -are, -avi, -atum; 
commute, -are, -avi, -atum (p. 79, 12). 

exclaim, I, ex-clam-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

excogitate, I, comment-or, -arl, -atus 
sum. 

exempt from taxes, immun-is, -e 
(adj.); exempt from care, secur-us. 

exempt, solvo, -ere, solvi, solutum 
(abl.). 

exhort, I, hort-or, -ari, -atus sum. 

exhortation, adhortati-o, -onis, F. ; 
or use vb. 

exile, an, exul, -is, M. 

exile, state of, exlll-um, -I, N. ; I 
am driven into exile, in exilium 
pellor ; I am in exile, exul-o (r. 1). 

exist, I, sum, fill, esse. 

existence of God, I believe in 
the, deum esse credo. 

expect, I, exspect-o (r. 1) ; credo. 

expedient, it is, exped-it, -ire, -ivit 
or say useful. 

expedition, expeditio ; bellum. 

expel, I, ex-igo, -igSre, -cgl, -actum ; 
after the expulsion of the kings, 
post reges exactos. 

experience, experientia rerum or 
usus rerum ; a man of experience, 
homo perltus rerum, (p. 64) ; experience 
of life, rerum perltia. 

experienced, (rerum) peritus. 

experiment, experimentum. 

exploit, res. 

expulsion. See expel. 

extent, often translated by dependent 
question (p 32., l): I don't know the 
extent of the damage, nescio quan- 
tum sit detrimentum. 

extortion, res repetundae (see p. 
65, 1). 

eye, oculus ; -with my own eyes, 
ipse. 



218 



VOCABULARY. 



F. 

face (countenance), vult-us, -us, 
M. ; os, oris, N. 
facility, facilitas. 
fact, a, res, r6I. 
faction, faoti-o, -onis, F. 

faith, fid-es, -ei, F. ; I put faith in 
you, tibi Mem habeo. 

faithful, fidel-is, -e (adj.). 

fall, I, cad-o, -6re, cCcIdi, casum ; I 
fall in battle, pur-Co, -Ire, -Ivl 00. 
-Itum; I fall into, in-cido, -cidCre, -cidi, 
-casum ; I fall headlong, praecipii-o, 
-are, -avl, -a turn ; I fall into ruin, 
cor-ruo -rugre, -rui. 

false, falsus. 

falsehood, mendac-Ium, -li; tell a 
falsehood, mentior, -In, -Itus sum ; 
falsehood is base, turpe est mentiri. 

family (household), famili-a, -ae, 
F. ; born of a noble family, loco 
honesto ortus (p. 74, 4). 

famous, praeclar-us ; insignis. 

fancy, I, puto (r. 1) ; cre-do, -dcre, 
-didi, -dltum. 

far or far away, procul (adv.). 

far (by), multo ; far better, multo 
melior. 

far, so far from, tantum abest ut 
(p. 15, 5.) 

fatal, funestus. 
father, pat-er, -ris, M. 
farewell, bid f.to, salut-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum (ace.). 

fault, a, culp-a, ae, F. 

fault, I commit, pecc-o, -are, -avl, 
-atum. 

favor (kindness), bunefici-um, -i, x. 

favor, I, faveo, -ere, favl, fautum 
(with dat., p. 71, 6); I am favored, 
mihi favetur (p. 72, 10). 

favorable (suitable), 



fear, timor, oris ; for fear that, ne 
( P . 12, 2). 

fear, I, tlm-eo, -ere, -fli; metti-o, 
-ere, -tu ; vfireor, -erl, veritus sum ; I 
fear that, vereor ne ; I fear that., . 
not, vereor ut (p. 17, 1). 

fearful, timidus. 

fee, merc-es, -cdis; I teach at a 
small fee, parvi doceo (p. 63, 4). 

feed on, I, vescor, vesci (with abl., 
p. 80, 1). 

feel, sent-io, -Ire, sensl, sensum ; 
I feel sorrow, dOleo, -ere; me poen! 
I feel pity, me miseret (p. 66, 3); 
I feel shame, me pudet. 

feelings, animus. 

fever, febr-is, -is, F. 

few, pauc-l, -ae, -a (pi.) ; very few, 
perpaucl, -ae, -a ; how few there are, p. 
110, 6. 

fickleness, levis animus ; or use levis. 

fiction, use fingo ; res ficta, F. 

fidelity, fid-es, -ei, F. 

field, a, ag-er, -ri, M. 

field of battle, aci-es, ei, F.; on the 
field of battle, in acie. 

fifteen, quindecim. 

fight, I, pugn-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; 
fight a battle, proelium com-mitto 
(-mittere, -misi, -missum). 

flgxire (shape), form-a, -ae, F. ; he 
sells at a high figure, magni vendit 
(p. 63, 4). 

fill with, I, com-pleo, -plere, -plevl, 
-pletum. 

find, I (by search), reper-io, -ire, -i, 
-turn; (by chance), in-v6mo, -venire, 
-venl,-ventum ; find out, cognosce. 

fine, multa, ae. 

finish, I, con-ficio, -flcere, -feci, 
-fectum. 

fire, ignis ; set on fire, incendo. 
firmness, use constans. 



VOCABULARY. 



219 



first, prlm-us, -a, -um ; I was the 
first to do it, primus hoc feci ; at 
first, primo ; in the first place, pri- 
mum; the first of January, 
Kalendae lanuariae (p. 147, 2). 

fit, apt-us, -a, -um ; idone-us, -a, -um 
(with dat. or with ad and ace., p. 69, 9). 

fitted, apt-us, -a, -um ; idoneus, -a, 
-um ; fitted for, aptus ad ; idoneus ad. 
five, quinque. 

five hundred, quingent-i, -ae, -a. 
flag, sign-um, -T, N. 
flank, lat-us, -eris, M. 
flat, plan-us, -a, -um. 
flatter, assentor (r. 1). 
flee, I, fttg-io, -Cre, fugl, fugltum; I 
flee from him, eum fugio. 
fleet, a, class-is, -is, F. 
flesh, caro, carnis. 
flight, fug-a, -ae, F. 
fling, iacio, -Cre, iecl, iactum ; impingo 
(dat.). 

flock together, conv61-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum. 

flourish, I, flor-eo, -6re, -ui. 
flow, I, flu-o, -ere, fluxl, fluxum. 
flower, flos, floris, M. 
fly> I> v61-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 
foe (public), hostis, -is, M.; (pri- 
vate), immlcus, -I, M. 

follow, I, sequor, sequl, secutus sum ; 
following, p. 89, 8. 
folly, stultiti-a, ae, F. ; or use adj. 
fond, be, amo. 
food, vict-us, -us, M. 
fool, stult-us, -a, -um ; it is the 
characteristic of a fool, stulti est 
(P. 59, 2). 

foolish, stult-us, -a, um. 
foot, pes, pedis, -M. ; foot of a 
mountain, mons imus (p. 61, e). 
foot, set, pedem ponere (in). 



foot-soldier, ped-es, -itis, M. 

footstep, vestigium, -I, N. 

for (of time), ace.; (enough) for, 
(satis) ad. 

for (on behalf of), pro (prep, with 
abl.); I fight for my country, pro 
patria pugno. 

for my OWH part, ego, equidem. 

for some time, iamdudum (p. 34, 
2) ; iampridem. 

forbid, I, vet-o, -are, -ui, -Ttum ; I 
forbid him to go, veto eum ire (p. 
16, note). 

force, vis (ace., vim ; abl., vi ; pi., 
vires), F. 

forces (troops), cCpi-ae, -arum, F. 

forefathers, maiores, -um, M. 

foreign, ad exteras nationes. 

foremost, primus, -a, -um. 

foresee, I, pro-splcio, -splcere, -spexi, 
-spectum ; pro-video, -vidSre, -vldl, -vlsum 
(p. 72, 7). 

forest, silv-a, ae, F. 

foretell, I, prae-dico, -dlcere, -dixi, 
-dictum. 

forget, I, obllviscor, -I, oblltus sum 
(p. 64, 2, note). 

forgive, I, ig-nosco, -6re, -novi, -notum 
(with dat., p. 71, 6); I am forgiven, 
mihi ignoscitur ; I forgive you this 
deed, tibi huius facti veniam do or 
hoc factum tibi condono (-are, -avi, 
-atum). 

form (shape), form-a, -ae, F. 
form a line of battle, I, aciem 
instru-o, -6re, -xi, -ctum. 

form a plan, I, consilium caplo, -ere, 
cepl, captum ; consilium in-eo, -Ire, -Ivi, 
(-H), -itum. 

form a partnership with him, I, 
societatem cum eo ineo. 

former (of time), pristmus, -a, -um ; 
the former the latter ; ille hie (p. 

88, 6). 



220 



VOCABULARY. 



fort, castellum. 

fortify, I, mun-io, -Ire, -Ivi, -Itum. 

fortress, ar-x, ar, -cis, F. ; castell-um. 

fortunate, felix, fclicis (adj.); it 
was very fortunate that, perop- 
portune accidit ut (p. 15, 5). 

fortune, fortun-a, ae, F. 

fortune (good), felicit-as, -atis, F. 

found, condo, -ere, -idi, -Itum. 

foundation, use vb. 

four, quattuor. 

France, use Gallia or Galli. 

free, l!b-er, -6ra, -erum ; (from), vacuus, 
a, -um (with abl., p. 74, 4); free from 
care, secur-us, -a, -um. 

free (give freedom to), I, Hber-o, 
-are, -avl, -atum (p. 74, 3). 

freed from, I am, liberor, -an, -atus 
sum (p. 74, 3). 

freedom, llbert-as, atis, F.; or use adj. 

fresh, re"cen-s, -tis (adj.). 

friend, amic-us, -i; a very inti- 
mate friend, homo amicissimus. 

friendly, amic-us, -a, -um. 

friendship, amicltla, ae, F. 

frivolous character, use levis. 

from, a (before consonants), ab (before 
vowejb and consonants) ; e, ex (with abl.). 

front, in, a fronte. 

full, plen-us, -a, -um (with gen. or abl. ; 
p. 64) ; see utmost. 

future, the, futur-a, -orum, N. (pi.); 
in future, in futurum, in posterum. 



G. 



gain, lucr-um, -I, N. ; em61iiment-um, 
-i, N. ; utmt-as, -atis, F.; for a source 
Of gain, quaestiil (p. 69, 8). 

gain, consequor; gain glory, I, 
gloriam pario(-ere,peper!,partum) ; gain 
victory, vmco or victoriam consequi. 

gallant Crassus, the, Crassus, vir 
ortissimu';. 



games, lud-j, -orum, M. (pi.). 

garden, hort-us, -i, M. 

gate, port-a, -ae, F. 

gather together, I, convtfc-o, -are, 
-avl, -atum ; cogo, -6re, cSegi, coactum ; 
(intr.), con-venio, -vSnire, -venl, -ventum. 

Gaul, Galli-a, -ae, F. 

Gauls, Galli, -orum, M. (pi.). 

general, imperat-or, -oris, M. ; dux. 

general, as a g. thing, vulgo. 

generation, aet-as, -atis, F. 
generous, bgnign-us, -a, -um ; mu- 
mflc-us, -a, -um. 

genius, ingenium; or use ingeniosus. 
gentle, mlt-is, -e (adj.). 

gentlemen of the jury, iudlc-es, 
-um, M. (pi.). 

gift, don-um, -I, M. 
give, I, don-o, -are, -avl, -atum; do, 
dare, dedi, datum. 

give (back or up), I, red-do, -d6re, 
-dldi, -ditum ; dedo, -ere, dedidi, deditum. 

glad, I am, gaud-eo, -ere, gavlsus 
sum. 

gladly, libenter (adv.); often rendered 
by the adj. : he came gladly, laetus 
venit (p. 165, 2, a). 

glorious, clar-us, -a, -um ; insignis, 
-e ; egreglus, -a, -um, ; he won a 
glorious victory, egregie vicit. 

glory, glori-a, ae, F. ; lau-s, -dis, F. 

glow, exardesco. 

go, I, 60, Ire, Ivl (-ii), Itum. 

go away, I, ab-eo, -Ire, -ivl(ii), -Itum; 
I go forward or forth, pro-gredior, 
-gredi, -gressus sum; I go down to 
meet, obviam (with dat.) descend-o, 
-6re, -I, descensum ; I go on, pergo, -ere, 
perrexi, perrectum ; I go out, ex-c5do, 
-cedgre, -cessi, -cessum ; ex-eo, -ire, -Ivl, 
-Itum. 

goad, stimulo (r. 1). 

goal, have a g. in view, use aliquid 



VOCABULARY. 



2-21 



agere 6r spectare (be driving at or looking 
at something). 

God, de-us, del, M. 

goddess, dea. 

gold, aur-um, -I, N. 

gold, of, -golden. 

golden, aureus ; or use tantus. 

good, bon-us, -a, -um. 

good-bye, say to, salut-o (r. 1). 

goodness, probit-as, atis. 

goodness of character, say good- 
ness and character. 

good- will, feeling of, benevolenfcia. 

govern, I, rego, -ere, rexi, rectum ; 
I govern the State; rempublicam 
guberno ; govern one's feelings, 
animo mOddr-or, -arl, -atus sura (with dat., 
p. 72, 7) or tempSro, -are, -avl, -Stum. 

government, the, qui reipublicae 
praesunt ; respublica. 

gradually, (step by step), gradatim*; 
(little by little), paulatim (adv.). 

grant, I, do, dare, dedl, datum ; 
concedo. 

grateful, grat-us, -a, -um. 

gratitude, gratia, -ae; I show 
gratitude, gratiam refero ; I feel 
gratitude, gratiam habeo ; express 
gratitude, gratias agere. 

great, magn-us, -a, -um; comp., maior; 
aup., maximus, -a, -um. 

greatly, magnSpere (adv.); comp., 
magis; sup., maxime. 

Greece, Graeci-a, ae. 

Greek, know, Graece scire. 

Greeks, Graec-I, -orum, M. (pi.). 

green, virldis, -e. 

grieve, am grieved, doieo, -ere, 
-tii ; me piget. 

groan, I, in-ggmo, -gemere, -gemul, 
-gemitum. 

ground, (soil), s61um, -I, N. ; (plea- 
sure grounds), hort-I, -orum, M. (pi.). 



guard, I, custod-io, -Ire, -ivl, -Itum ; I 
am on my guard against you, 
te caveo (p. 72, 7) ; stand guard, in 
vigilia maneo. 

guard, cust-os, -odis, M. ; vb., cus- 
todio (r. 4). 

guest, a, hosp-es, -Itis, M. 

guide, dux, ducis, M. 

guile, dol-us, -i, M. 

H. 

hair, capill-us, -I, M. 

half, dimidium, -i, N. 

hand, a, man-us, -us, F. 

hand, I am at, ad-sum, -esse, -ful. 
(with dat.) 

hand, hand over, I, tra-do, -dfire, 
-didi, -ditum; man-do, -dare, -davl, -datum. 

handful, pauci. 

handiwork, say by hand and work 
(p. 165, 6). 

Hannibal, Hannib-al, -alis. 

happen, use forte. 

happens that, it, accidit (-6re, 
accidit) ut ; evgnit (-Ire, -venit) ut ; con- 
tingit (-6re, contigit) ut ; (p. 15, 5) ; it 
happened so fin this way), ita accidit. 

happily, beate. 

happiness, beata vita. 

happy, beat-us, -a, -um ; (lucky), 
felix. 

harbor, port-us, -us, M. 

hard, difficll-is, -e; hard to say, 
difficile dictu (p. 42, 4) ; durus, a, um. 

hardly, vix. 

hardship, labor, oris, M. ; res ad versae. 

harm, do harm, noceo, -ere, ndcul, 
n6"cI1jum. 

harmless, innflcuus. 

harry, I, vex-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

harvest, messis, -is, F. 

haste, there is need of, opus esc 
properato (p. 81, 4). 



222 



VOCABULARY. 



hasten, I, prop6r-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; 
contendo, -Ore, contendi, contentum. 

hate, I, odi, odisse ; I am hated, 
ego odio (dat.) sum (p. 69, 8). 

hated, invlsus, -a, -um ; see above. 

hatred, odium, -i, N. 

have (possess), I, habeo, -ere, -ui, 
-Itum ; often rendered by esse with dat. : 
as, I have a book, est mihi liber (see 
p. 46, 6). 

he, is, ille, hie (p. 88, 3, 5, 6). 

heal, mCdeor, -eri (dat.) 

health, be in good, valeo. 

heap, vis, F. ; vb., infero, inferre, 
intuli, illatum. 

hear, I, aud-io, -Ire, -IvI, -Itum. 

hearing-, by, audlendo (p. 43) ; 
without hearing-, use inauditus. 

heart (literal), cor, cordis, N. ; (spirit), 
animus, I, M. ; I take it to heart, id 
graviter (or aegre) fero. 

hearth, f6c-us, -1, M. 

heaven (sky), coelum, -i, N. ; often 
rendered by, di immortales. 

height, altitud-o, -mis, F. ; oruse altus. 

height of folly, to such a, 
eo stultitiae (p. 60, 3). 

heir, her-es, -edis, M. 

help, I, ittvo, -are, iflvl, iutum (ace.); 
eub-venio, -venire, -venl, -ventum (with 
dat.) ; I help you, tibi auxilio sum (p. 
69, 8); tibi opem fero ; I can not 
help sending 1 , fieri non possum quin 
mittam (p. 23). 

hence, inde (adv.). 
herb, herba, -ae, F. 
here, hie (adv.). 

hero (mythical), hero-s, -is, M.; 

wually expressed by ille or vir fortissimus. 

hesitate, I, dublt-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 



hide, I, cel-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; ab-dr>, 
-dere, -didi, -ditum. 

high, alt-us, -a, -urn ; the highest 
offices, honores amplissimi. 

high -spirited, animosus, ferox. 
hill, coil-is, -is, M. 

himself, (reflexive), sui ; (em- 
phatic), ipse. 

hinder, I, prohlb-go, -Cre, -ui, -Itum ; 
imped-io, -Ire, -IvI (-ii), -Itum. 

hindrance, impediment-urn, N. ; it 
is a great hindrance to me, mihi 
impedimento (dat.) magno est (p. 69, 8). 

hire, I, con-duco, -du6re, -duxi, -due- 
turn. 

his, su-us, -a, -um ; eius, illlus (p. 7, 1, 
note) ; his own book, suus ipsius liber 
(p. 90, 13). 

historian, rerum scriptor. 

history, matter of, say it is handed 
down to memory. 

hitherto, adhuc (adv.). 

hold (possess) I, hab-eo, -ere, -ui, 
-Hum ; ob-tmCo, -tinere, -tinfu, -tentum. 

hold (think), I, duco, -ere, duxi, due 
turn ; habeo, -ere, -ui, -Itum ; I hold 
him an enemy, eum pro hoste habeo. 

homage, etc., say I promised that I 
would help him with my authority (p. 1 
73, 3). 

home, at, dSmi ; from home 
domo; home, after words expressing 
motion, domum (p. 83, 5). 

Homer, Homerus. 
homicide, guilty of, use hominem 
interficio. 
honest, prob-us, -a, -um. 

honesty, pr5bit-as, -atis, F. ; with 
honesty, probe or summii probitate. 

honor (good faith), fides, -el; (dis- 
tinction), htfn-or, -oris, M. 
honorable, honest-us, -a, -um. 



VOCABULARY. 



223 



hope, I, spor-o, -are, -avi, -atum (p. 
7, 3) ; (noun), spes. 

horse, gqji>sr* M. 

horseman, 6qu-es, -Itis, M. 

horrible to say, nefas est dictu (p. 
42, 4). 

hostage, ob-ses, -sidis, M. 

hostile, hostllis, -e. 

hot, I am, cal-eo, -5re. 

hour (of time), hor-a, -ae, F. 

house, dCmus, -us, F. ; at my house, 
domi meae (p. 83, 5), apud me ; House, 
senatus. 

how, quT, quemadmodum, quomodo, 
ut (p. 32, 1). 

how great, quant-us, -a, -um ; how 
long, quam diu ; how many, quot ; 
how much, quantum ; how often, 
quo ties. 

human, human-us, -a, -um (adj.). 

hundred, centum. 

hunger, fames, -is, F. 

hurry, I, prop8r-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

hurt, I, n6c6o, -Cre, -til, -Itum (dat.) ; 
laedo, -fire, laesi, laesum (ace.). 
hustings, rostr-a, -orum, N. (pi.). 



It ego. 

ice, glacies, -el, F. 

idea, Spinl-o, -onis, F. 

identical, Idem, Sadem, idem. 

Ides, Id-us, -aum, F. (p. 147). 

idle, van-us, -a, -um ; ignavus. 

idleness, ignavi-a, ae, F. 

if, si (p. 120). 

if not, nisi, si non (p. 125, 5). 

ignominious, turpis. 

ignorance, use ignoro (r. 1). 

ignorant, ignarus ; or use verb. 

ill, aeger, -ra, -rum. 

illustrate, I, illustr-o (r. 1). 



illustrious, praeclar-us, -a, -um ; 
praestantissimus, -a, -um. 

image, hnag-o, -mis, F. 
imagine, puto(r. 1). 

immediately, statim; immedi- 
ately after the battle, confestim a 
proelio. 

immortal, immortalis, -e. 
impediment, use aliquid. 
impel, im-pello, -ere, -pull, -pulsum. 
impiety, impI6t-as, -atis, F. 
impious, impi-us, -a, -um. 
implore. See beg. 

importance to me, it is of, mea 
interest or refert (p. 66, 4). 

in, in (with abl.) 

inasmuch as, quum, quippe, utpote 
(p. 106, 2 ; 113, 3 ; 113, 4, note). 

incendiarism, political, incen- 
dium. 

inconsistent with, etc., say such a, 
man can not be fearful or anxious. 

increase, (trans.), augeo, -Cre, auxi, 
auctum ; (intr.), cresco, -ere, crSvi, cretum. 

indeed, vero, profecto. 

induce, I, persuad-eo, -ere, -suSsi, 
-suasum ; adduco, -ere, -duxi, -ductum. 

infant, infan-s, -tis. 

infantry, pCdita-tus, -us ; pedltes, 
-um, M. (pi.) 

influence, auctorit-as, -atis, F. 

influence, to, moveo, movere, movi, 
mo turn. 

influential with me, he is very, 
apud me multum valet. 

inform, certiorem facere. 
information, use vb. 
ingratitude, use immemor beneficii. 
injure. See hurt, 
innocent, innticen-s, -tis (adj.); I am 
innocent, extra culpam sum. 
inquire, I, quaero, -ere, quaeslvl. 



224 



VOCABULARY. 



quaesltum ; rogo, -are, -avi, -atum ; in- 
terrogo, -are, -avi, -atum. 

inquiry, quaesti-o, -onis ; or use vb. 

instead of, pro; instead of doing 
this he did that, quum hoc facere 
deberet, illud fecit (p. 108, note). 

instigation, at my, me auctore. 

instrumentality, through, the 
instrumentality of, per (ace.). 

insult, contumelia, -ae, F. 

insuperable, insuperabilis, -e. 
* 

intelligently, use prudentia. 

intend, I, in animo mihi est ; often 
expressed by fut. part. (p. 53, 1). 

intensity, of such, tantus. 

intercept, I, inter-cipio, -cipgre, 
-eepl, -ceptum. 

interest. How expressed, p. 153. 

interest of the state.it^jSjnji- 
publicae interest (pc~37) ',' Tconsult 
your interests, tibi consulo (p. 72, 7). 

interfere, ob-sto, -stare, -stiti, 
-statum. v 

interference, use vb. 

intervene, I, inter-venlo, -venire, 
-veni, -ventum. 

interview with one, I have, 
aliquem con-vemo (-venire, -vem, -ven- 
tum). 

into, in (with ace.) 

introduction, use introduce. 

invading host, use hostes. 

invent, invenio; (fabricate) I, fingo, 
-6re, finxi, fictum. 

inventor, invent-or, oris, M. 
invest (money), I, coll6c-o, -are, 
-avi, -atum. 

investigation, use quaero cur. 
iota, add, say make you more, etc. 
island, insul-a, -ae, F. 
issue, event-us, -us, F.; or use happen 



it. See he. 
Italy, Italia, -ae, F. 
itself, ipse, -a, -um. 

J. 

January, lanuari-us, -a, -um (adj.). 

javelin, pll-um, -I, N. ; iacul-um, -i, N. 

join, I, iungo, -ere, iunxVitmctum ; I 
join you, me tibi adiungo. 

join batttle, proelium committere. 

journey, iter, itlneris, N. 

joy, laetiti-a, -ae, F.; shouts of joy, 
clamores laetantium (p. 48, 6). 

joyful, laet-us, -a, -um. 

joyfully, laete (adv.); of ten rendered 
by the adj. (p. 165, 2, a). 

judge, iud-ex, -icis. 

judgment, indicium ; consilium ; use 
iudico; in my judgment, me iudice 
(p. 51, 1) ; pronounce j., iudico (r. 1). 

Julian, lulian-us, -a, um ; the Julian 
law, lex Juliana. 

jump, I, salio, -ire, -ui, saltum. 
June, lunt-us, -a, -um. 
Jupiter, lupiter, I6vis, M. 
jury, iudic-es, -um, M. (pi.), 
just, aequ-us, -a, -um ; iust-us, -a, -um. 
just as if, velut si, with subj. (p. 117, 3). 
justice, iustitia, -ae, F. 
justify, I, prob-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 
justly, iure (abl. of ius, right). 

K. 

Kalends, Kalend-ae, -arum, F. (pi.), 
(see p. 147). 

Karthage. See Carthage. 

keep, servo (r. 1). 

keep my promises, I, fidem prae- 
sto, promissis (abl.) sto ; I keep the 
soldiers in the camp, milites in cas- 
tris contineo; I keep my word, 
fidem praesto ; I keep off, dcpello (-ere 



VOCABULARY. 



225 



-puli, -pulsum); keep out, exclude; 
in keeping- with, p. 59, 2. 

key, clav-is, -is, F. 

kill, I, inter-ficio, -f Icere, -fed, -fectum; 
oc-cldo, -ere, -cldl, -cisum ; I kill (cruel- 
ly), n6co, -are, -avi, -atum ; trucldo, -are, 
-avi, -atum. 

s, -a, -um. 

he is, I don't know 
the, nescio quails sit homo (p. 32, 1). 

kind, of this, huiusm6di; of that 
kind, eius modi ; what kind, qualis. 

kindness, benevolentia, bonit-as, 
atis, F. ; act of kindness, beneficlum- 

king, rex, regis, M. 

know, (by the senses), sent-to, 
-Ire, sensl, sensum ; (a thing), scio ; (a per- 
son), novT, novisse ; (find out), cognosce, 
-ere, cognovi, cogmtum. 

knowledge (learning), doctrin-a; 
scientia, ae, F. 



labor, lab-or, -oris, M. 

Lacedaemon,Lac6daem-on, -6nis,M. 

Lacedaemonians, Lacedaemonii. 

lack money, I, pecunia mihi deesfc 
(p. 70, 1). 

lamb, agn-us, -I, M. 

lamp, lucern-a, -ae, F. 

lame, claud-us, -a, -um ; lame in 
one foot, altero pede claudus. 

land, ag-er, -rl, M. 

larger. Say great. 

last (in order), ultlm-us (p. 11, 2) ; 
(of time or position), proximus, -a, 
-um ; within the last few days, his paucis 
diebus (p 88, 3). 

last, at, tandem, demum. 

lasting, diuturn-us, -a, -um. 

late, too late, sero (adv.). 

lately, nuper; superl., nuperrime. 

Latin (adv.), Latine. 



Latin, I speatc, Latine (adv.) loquor. 

laugh, I, ride"o, rldere, risl, risum. 

law, lex, legis F. ; ius, iuris, N. 

lay, lay aside, pono. 

lead, I, duco, -6re, duxl, ductum ; I 
lead across, transduco; I lead back, 
reduco ; I lead out, educo. 

leader, imperator ; dux, ducis, M. 

leap, I, exsult-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

learn, I, disco, -6re, didici ; cognosco. 

learned, doct-us, -a, -um. 

learning, doctrm-a, -ae, F. 

leave, I (abandon), relinquo, -6re, 
rellqul, relictum ; I leave the camp, 
ex castris excedo (or exeo) ; I leave the 
work undone, opus praetermitto. 

legacy, use legare (leave by law). 

legate, legat-us, -i, M. 

legion, legi-o, -onis, F. 

leisure, otium. 

less, minor, -us, comp. of parvus ; at 
a less price, minoris (p. 63, 4). 

lest, ne (p. 12, 2 ; 13, 6 ; 17, 1). 

let, p. 26, 2. 

letter, epist61-a, -ae, F. : Iitt6r-ae, 
-arum, F. (pi.). 

levy, delect-us, -us, M. ; I hold a 
levy, delectum habeo. 

liar, mendax, -acis. 

liberty, libert-as, -atis, F. 

lie (tell a falsehood), I, ment-ior, 
-Irl, -Itus sum. 

lie down, I, iaceo, -ere, lactti, -Itum. 

life, vlt-a, -ae, F. 

lifetime of my father, In the, 
patre meo vivo (p. 51, 1). 

light, lev-is, -e. 
light, lum-en, -inis, N 
light, it is, lucet, -ere, luxit. 
like, slmil-is, -e (p 64, note V) ; 
volo. 



226 



VOCABULARY. 



likely, use fut. part. (p. 54, 2). 

line, acies : lie drew a line, etc., 
say he thought that the honorable 
(honestum) ivas one thing and the use- 
ful another. 

linger, cunct-or, -an, -atus sum. 

listen to, I, audio, -Ire, -IvI, -Itum 
ace). 

literature, littur-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). 

litter, lectlc-a, -ae, F. 

little, parvus, -a, -um ; comp., minor ; 
eup., minimus. 

live, I, vlv-o, -ere, vixi, victum ; 
(dwell in), hablt-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

lively recollection, say memory 
and recollection (p. 165, b). 

living", use vivo. 
London, Londini-um, -I, N. 
long 1 standing, of, use vestustas. 
long, long-us, -a, -um (adj.). 
longing, cupid-us, -a, um. 

long time, for a, diu ; long ago, 
Jam pridem or iam diu. 

look for, I, exspecto (r. 1) ; quaero ; 
peto. 

lose, I, a-mitto, -mittere, -misl, -mis- 
sum. 

loss, damn-um, -I, N. ; detrlment-um ; 
without the loss, use vb. (p. 139, l). 

lot, sor-s, -tis, F. ; f ortun-a ; or use p. 59, 
2; fall to lot, contingo. 

loud, magnus ; loudly-expressed, 

use shout (p. 165, &). 

love, am-or, oris, M. 

love, I, Sm-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

lovely (applied to a place), 
amoeri-us, -a, -um: the lovety city of 
Athens ; Athenae, urbs amoenissima ; 
(applied to a person), pulch-er, -ra, 
-rum ; formos-us, -a, -um. 

lover, use amo. 

lowest (office), imus (honor). 

low price, at a, parvi (p. 63, 4). 



loyal, fid-us, -a, -um ; fidel-is, -e ; 
bonus. 

lucky, felix ; or use opportune. 
M. 

mad, I am, fur-o, -ere. 

madman, use furo. 

made, I am, fio, fieri, fagtus sum. 

madness, furor ; dg^^^^feie, F. 

magistrate, magistnBIPas, M. 

magnitude, magnitud-o, -Inis ; 
often expressed by an indirect question : 
I know the magnitude of the 
danger, scio quantum periculum sit (p. 
32, 1). 

maiden, virg-o, -mis, F. 

maintain, I, sus-tln6o, -tmere, -tinui, 
-tentum ; dico. 

majority, use plerique. 

make, I, facio, fac6re, feel, factum; I 
make war, bellum gero, gerere, gessi 
gestum or bellum inf ero, -f erre, -ttili, ilia- 
turn ; I make a march, iter facio ; he 
makes it shine, efficit ut splendeat 
( P . 12). 

man, hom-o, -mis, M. ; vir, vlri, M. ; 
a young man, adolescen-s, -tis; an 
old man, sdnex, scnis, M. 

manage, rem gerere. 

manner of life, use quemadmo- 
dum and vivo. 

manumit, manumitto. 

many, multi, -ae, -a (pi.); very many, 
permulti, -ae, -a ; how many? quot ? 
as many as, tot quot. 

Marcellus, Marcellus, -1, M. 

march, iter; I march, make a 
march, iter facio ; (trans.), duco. 

Marcus, Marcus, -I, M. 

mariner, naut-a, -ae, M. 

mark of a wise man, it is the 
eapientis est (p. 59, 2). 

market-place, forum, I, N. 

marsh, pal-us, -udis, F. 



VOCABULARY. 



22? 



marvellous, it is, mirum est. 
mass (of the people), vulgus, -i, N.; 
(huge size), moles, -is, F. 

master (of slaves), domlnus, hfirus; 
(a teacher), magist-er, -ri, M. 

matter, res, rei, F.; it matters 
little, parvi interest ; it matters not 
to me, nihilmea interest. 

; 33 ; ( = can), possum . 




mean, sordld-us, -a, -um ; abiect-us. 

mean-minded, say ofinean mind. 

meanness, use adj. ; turpltiid-o, 
-mis, F.; it is the height of mean- 
ness, summae turpitudinis est. 

means, use quemadmodum ; by this 
means, p. 74, 5 ; (approach), aditus, us. 

measure, I, meti-or, -Irl, mensus sum. 



measure, p. 153 ; res. 

Medea, Medea, ae, F. ; the famous 
Medea, ilia Medea. 

meet, I, oc-curro, -currere, -curri, 
-cursum(with a dat. ; p. 71, 6); obviam(with 
dat.)fio. 

meeting, concio. 

memory, m6mori a, -ae, F. 

merchant, mercator. 

merchant-vessel, navia dnerarla. 

merciful, clemen-s, -tis (adj.). 

message, nunti-us, -i, M. ; a mes- 
sage came, mmtiattim est. 

messenger, nunti-us, -i, M. 

midday, merid!-es, ei, M. 

middle, medi-us, -a, -um; in the 
middle of the road, media via. 

midnight, at, media nocte. 

mile, mille passuum. 

million, p. 151, c. 

mind, (emotional faculty), anim- 
us, -i, M ; (intellectual faculty), 
men-s, -tis, F. 

miracle, miraculum ; or say great 
thing. 



miser, homo avarus. 
miserable, miser, -a, -um. 
miserly, avarus, -a, -um. 
misery, dolor; miseria. 
misfortune, malum. 
miss, I (feel loss Of), desidero 
(r. 1). 

missile, tel-um, -i, N. 

mistake, err-or, -oris, M ; I make 
this mistake, hoc erro. 

mistress, be, praeesse(dat.). 

mix, misceo. 

mob, plebs. 

money, pgcuni-a, -ae, F. 

month, mens-is, -is, M. 

moon, lun-a, -ae, F. 

more, plus; magis; p. 78, 7, note. 

morning, in the, mane. 

mother, mat-er, -ris, F. 

motion, motus, -us. 

motive, use cur ; indicate a 
motive, say show why he committed 
(p. 32) ; from a motive, use ob (with 
ace.), or causa (with gen.). 

mount (a horse), I, equum con- 
scendo (-ere, -scendi, -scensum). 

mountain, mon-s, -tis, M. 

move, I, mov-6o, -ere, movl, motum. 

much, mult-us, -a, -um. 

multitude, multitud-o, -Tm's, F. 

murder, caed-es, -is, F. Often ex- 
pressed by perf. part. pass. : after Cae- 
sar's murder, post Caesarern inter- 
fectum. 

murmur, (vb.), queror, queri, questus 
sum. 

music, music-a, -ae, F. 
musical, say musicorum, from neut. 
pi. musica. 

must, p. 33 

my, me-us, -a, -um (voc. sing.-masc., 
meus or mi). 

myself, use ego or ego ipse (p. 90, 13). 



228 



VOCABULARY. 




N. 



name, nom-en, -inis, N.; of the 
name of, omit. 

namely, omit. 

narrate, I, narr-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

nation, populus ; (foreign), nati-o, 
onis F.; gen-s, -tis, F. 

native city, one's native land, 
patria, ae, F. 

natural shame, say j&ature and 
shame (p. 165, 6). 

naturally, 

nature, na^^^^^^^H ^^m ex- 
pressed by a dependent ques ^intro- 
duced by qualis^H ) : I don't know 
the nature of the man, m-srio 
qualis sit homo;^PSlis nature, talis. 

near, pr6pe, (adv. and prep, with ace.); 
propior, proximus (p. 69, 9) ; propinquus 
(with dat.; p. 69, 9). 

nearly, prope, paene, fere; see about. 

necessaries, say what is necessary. 

necessary, necessarius. 

necessity, necessitas ; p. 84, 1. 

need, there is need, p. 81, 4; 
p. 81, 3, note. 

neglect, I, neglego, neglegere, 
neglexi, neglectum. 

neither-nor, neque-neque ; nec-nec ; 
neve-neve (p. 15). 

neither of the two, neut-er, -ra, 
-rum (gen.,'neutr!us). 
nest, nld-us, !. 

never, nunquam ; and never, neo 
unquam. 

new, n6v-as, -a, -um. 
news is brought, nuntiatur. 
next, proximus, -a, -um ; on the 
next day, die proximo, o/- die postero. 
night, no-x, no-ctis, F. 
nine, nOvem. 
no, I answer no, p, 28, 2, note. 



no, adj., null-us, -a, -um (gen. , nuillus). 

no one, nemo (gen., nulllus). 

noble, praeclarus, -a, -um ; insign-is, 
-e ; egrggi-us, -a, -um ; Ais noblef 
father, pater suus, vir praeclarissimus. 

none, nemo (not used in gen. and 
abl.) ; null-us, -a, -um (gen. nulllus). 

Nones, Non-ae, -arm 

noon, mfindl-es, -el, 

nor, nee or neque ; in final clauses, 
neve (neu, p. 16, 4). 

not, non. 

not yet, nondum. 

nothing, nihil. 

notice, give notice, certiorem 
facere. 

novelty, use novus. 

now, iam (by this time); mine 
(at present) ; hodie (to-day). 

number, ntimer-us, -I, M. Often ex- 
pressed by a dependent question intro- 
duced by quot: I don't know the 
number of the enemy, nescio quot 
hostes sint (p. 32, 1). 

numerous, multl, -ae, -a ; permult-i. 
nurse, nutr-ix, -icis, F. 

O. 

O that, utinam (p. 25). 

obedience, yield. Use obey. 

obey, I, par-eo, -ere, -ui, -itum (with 
dat., p. 71, 6) ; I am obeyed, mini 
paretur. 

object, I, r6cus-o, -are, -avi, -atum (p. 
22). 

object, this is my, id ago ; ac- 
complish an object, say finish the 
work. 

obscure, obscur-us, -a, -um. 

Observe, I, cognosce; servo, -are, 
-avl, -atum. 

obstinacy, pert!nacl-a,-ae, F.; or use 
adj. pertinax. 



VOCABULARY. 



229 



Obtain, I, adlpiscor, adlpisci, adeptus 
sum ; consequor. 

occasion, on that, turn. 

^ O'clock Je it, What? quota hora 
est?seep. 1U, 5. 

occupy, (hold), I, teneo, -ere, tenui ; 
occupo (r. 1). 

occ\ji4t, accidit (-ere, -cldit) ; e-v6nit 
(- Ire '^ftliBr contingit (-ere, -tlgit); p. 
15, 5 ; (to the mind), occurro. 

odd or even, par vel impar. 

off (at a distance), I am, ab-sum, 
-esse, -f iii ; disto, -stare ; the town is 
ten miles off, oppidum decem millia 
passuum distat or abest. 

Offend (annoy) I, of-fendo, -fendere, 
-fendi, -fensum (ace.); I offend against the 
law, legem viol-o (-are, -avl, -atum). 

Office, magistrat-us, -us, M. ; I hold 
Office, magistratum obtlneo, -tinere, 
-tinui, -tentum; (task), munus. 

officer, tribunus ; legatus ; officers 
(military), tribuni centurionesque. 

often, saepe ; so often, to ties. 

Old, (in olden times), antlquus, -a,.=um ; 
(of persons), s6nex, sfinis ; comp., 
senior; sup., maxlmus natu ; "when 
Old, senex. 

omit, I, o-mitto, -mittere, -mlsl, -mis- 
sum. 

once (for), semel ; ( = formerly), 
once upon a time, quondam; at 
Once, statim. 

one (numeral), un-us, -a, -um (gen., 
unms); one of the soldiers, unus ex 
militibus. 

one, no, nemo ; (emphatic), ne 
unus quidem. 

one, the, . . . .the other, hie. . . .ille 
(p. 89, 6). 

one and all, cunct-i, -ae, -a; omnes, 
omnia. 

one by one, singul-l, -ae, -a. 

one day (in the future), aliquando. 

pnly, solus, solum, m6do, tantum 




(placed after the word modified); not 
only but' also, non modo (or non 

solum) sed etiam (or verum etiam); 

only ones, see p. 11, 2. 

open (throw open), I, (trans.), 
patg-facio, -facere, -fed, -factum ; to be 
open, pateo, -ere -ui. 

opinion, use sentio (have an opinion): 
his political opinion, quid de rep. 
sentit; sententi-a, -ae F., ; existimati-o, 
-onis, F. 

^ , 

occaslo, -onis, F. 

-are, -avi, -atum. 
us (quain). 

Bte of your, te 
repugnlflfte (p. 5: 

or, aut^ve^^[H|(p. 202, 6); neve 
(after ne). 

orator, 6rat-or, -oris, M. 
oratory, say orator. 
orchard, pomarium. 
ordain, I, decern-o, -ere, decrevl, de- 
cretum. 

order, give an order, I, impur-o, 
-are, -avl, -atum (with dat., p. 71, 6); 
iftbeo, -ere, iussi, iussum (with ace.); in 
order that (or to), p. 12, 1. 

origin, often expressed by unde, intro- 
ducing a dependent question: as, I don't 
know the origin of evil, nescio 
unde malum oriatur (p. 32, 1). 

otherwise than, aliter ac or (before 
vowels) atque (p. 116, 1). 
ought, p. 33. 
our, nos ter, -tra, -trum. 
out-do, supero (r. 1). 
outside of, e or ex (abl.). 
over, it is, actum est de. 

overpowering, say could not be 
borne, or, even, very great. 

overthrow, I, e-verto, -vertere, -verti, 
-versum. 

overwhelm, I, ob-ruo, -ruSre, -rui, 
-rutum, 



230 



VOCABULARY. 



owe, I, debeo, -Cre, -ui, -itum ; it was 
owing to, p. 22, 2. 

own, my own fault, mea ipsius 
culga (p. 90, 13). 

OX, bos, bovis. 

P. 

pain, I am in, doieo, -ere, dtflfli. 
pain, d61-or, -oris, M. 
painter, use pingo. 
panic, pav-or, -oris, M. 
pardon, 1, ig-nosco, -noscere, -novi, 
-notum (with dat., p. 71, 6) ; venia, ae. 
parent, paren-s, -tis, M. or F. 
parliament, senat-us, -us, M. 
part, par-s, -tis, F. ; it is the part 
of a wise man to do this, sapientls 
est hoc facere (p. 59, 2) ; I for my part, 
ego or equidem ; take part, intersum. 
party, partes. 

party policy, say party and policy. 
pass, let, omitto, -ere, oniisi, 
omissum ; pass a decree, say decree. 
pass (a law), f ero. 
passion (anger), Ira, -ae, F. 
passionate (angry), irat-us, -a, -um 
(of one act) ; (of a habit), Iracund-us. 
past, is, use praetereo. 
patriot, vir bonus ; homo patriae 
amantissimus (p. 64, note 1). 
patriotism, amor patriae. 
pay, I, pendo, -ere, pC-pendi, pensum ; 
solvo, -ere, solvi, solutum. 
payment, solutio (onis), F. ; or use vb. 
peace, pa-x, -cis, F. 
peace, I hold my, taceo, -ere, tacul. 
peculiar, prSprius, -a, -um (with gen., 
p. 64, note 2). 

pell-mell, temere. 

pen, calam-us, -T, M. 
penalty, poen-a, -ae, F.; (punish- 
ment), suppllci-um, -I, N. 
penny, use as, assis, M. 



people (=men), hfrnln-es, -un-, :i. 
pi.) ; (a nation), p6pul-us, -i, M. 

perceive, I, (by senses), sent-io, 
Ire, sensi, sensum ; (by the mind), in- 
tellego, -Sre, intellexi, intellectum. 

pei-fect, summus. 

perfectly, use superl. 

perform, I, con-flc!o i 

v% _ 

perhaps, fortasse; p. 31, 47 notel; 
p. 33, 2. 

perish, I, per-6o, -ire, -IvI (-ii), -itum. 

permission, with your, tua venia; 
tua bona pace. 

person, h6m-o, -inis, M. ; is (qui). 

persuade, I, per-suadSo, -suadCre, 
-suasi, -suasum (with dat., p. 71, 6); I am 
persuaded, mihi persuasum est (p. 
72, 10). 

persist, I, persever-o, -are, -avl, 
-atum. 

pestilence, pestis ; pestilentl-a. 

phenomenon, use neut. pron. 

philosopher, philosSph-us, -i, ^i. 

philosophical, use gen. of philos- 
ophy. 

philosophizing, philosopha ri (inf.) 

philosophy, philOsdphia, -ae, F. 

Phocion, Phoci-on, -onis, M. 

pick out, eligo. 

pig, sus, sftis, M. 

pirate, praed-o, -onis, M. 

pitch a camp, I, castra I6co (-are, 
-a vi, -catum); castra pono (-6re, pOsui, 
positum). 

pitch of insolence, to such, eo 
insolentiae (p. CO, 3). 

pity, I, misereor, -eri, miserltus sum ; 
miseresco, -6re (p. 66, note 2) ; me 
miseret (p. 66, 3). 

pity, misericordla, -ae, F. 

place, I6c-us, -I, ; pi. loc-i, -drum or, 
more commonly, lOc-a, -orum. 

place, I, pon-o, -ere, pOsui, pfisitum. 

plain, planities; campus. 



VOCABULARY. 



231 



plain, it is, manifestum est ; apparet 
(-6re, -flit ; p. 4). 

plan, consilium. 

pleasant, iucundus; or use iucun- 
ditas. 

please, I, plac-eo, -ere, -Ha, -Itum 
(withadat.,p. 71, 6). 

pleasing 1 , grat-us, -a, -um. 
pleasure, v51upt-as, -atis, F. 
plebeian, plebci-us, -a, -um. 
plough, aratr-um ; (vb.), aro (r. 1). 
pluck, carpo ; vello, ere, velli or vulsi, 
vulsum. 

poet, p<56t-a, -ae, M. 
point, use neut. pron. 
pointed (sharp), acut-us, -a, -um. 
point out, ostendo. 
policy, consilium, -I, N. 

politics, res publica, F. (never pi. in 
this sense). 

Pompey, Pompelus, I, M. 

poor, pauper, -is, adj.; sup. pauperri- 
mus, -a, -um. 

populace, vulg-us, -r, N. ; pleb-s. 
popular, gratiosus. 

populous, frequen-s, -tis (adj.) ; often 
in superlative : as, a populous city, 
urbs frequentissima. 

position, locus, -I, M.; pi. loci, -orum 
(M.), Idea, -orum, N.; (of a City), sit-as, 
-us. Often expressed by a dependent, 
question introduced by ubi: I don't 
know the position of the enemy, 
nescio ubi hostes sint or castra posuerint 
(p. 32, 1) ; maintain position, se 
sustento (r. 1). 

positively, p. 177, note. 

possession, res, r6i, F.; g-et pos- 
session of, potior (abl. or gen.)- 
possessor, use habeo. 

possibility, range of possi- 
bility, use fieri potest. 



possible, it is, potest (only with an 
inf. pass.) ; it is possible to do this, 
hoc fieri potest. 

possible, as many as, quam plur- 
imi. 

possible speed, with all, quam 

celerrime. 

post, desert, praesidium desero. 
pour round, circumfundere (se). 
poverty, paupert-as, -atis, F. 

power, (civil), potest-as, -atis, F. ; 
(military), imperi-um, -i; such is 
the power, tantum potest. 

powerful, poten-s, -tis (adj.). 
practicable, use facio. 
practise, I, exerceo, -ere, -ui, -itum. 
praise, lau-s, -dis, F. 
praise, I, laud-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 
pray, oro (r. 1) ; tandem (with inter- 
rog. words). 

precaution, take, provideo, p. 38, 5. 
predecessor, say who reigned before 
him. 

prefer, I, malo, malle, malul (modal 
verb, p. 18, 3). 

prefer him to you, I, eum tibi 
ante-pono (-ere, -p<5sui, -positum), or ei 
te posthabeo (-hiibere, -habui, -habltum). 

prepare (make preparation), I, 
piir-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

presence, use adsum ; in my pre- 
sence, me praesente (p. 52, 5), or coram 
me (abl.); presence of mind, animus. 

present, I am, ad-sum, -esse, -fui 
(with a dat., p. 71, 5) ; I am present at the 
battle, pugnae intersum (p. 71, 5) ; at 
present, nunc. 

present, donum, -i, N. 

presently, mox, brevL 

preservation, use vb. 

preserve, I, conserv-o (r. 1.) 

pretend, I, slmnl-o, -are, -ai$, -atum; 
(claim), dictito (r. 1). 



232 



VOCABULARY. 



prevent, I, prohlb-eo, -ere, -tti, -Itum; 
I prevent him from doing- this, 
eum prohibeo quoininus hoc faciat (p. 
22, 2). 

prevent, to (=in order that 

not), ne (p. VI, 2, note). 

price, pretium, -I, N. ; at a high 
price, ma-ni ; at a low price, parvi 
(p. 63, 4) ; at What price, use quantus. 

prince, rex, regis, M. 

principal, say best; princep-s, prin- 

cipis, M.; primus, -a, -um. 

prison, career, -is, M. ; vincula, -drum, 
N. (pi.) ; I throw into prison, in 
vincula con-icio (-ere, -ieci, -iectum). 

prisoner, captiv-us, -i, M. 
private person, privat-us. 
prize, praeml-um, -i, N. 
proceeding, res, rei, F. 
procrastination, use cunctor <r. 1). 
procure, I, ad-Ipiscor, -ipisci, -eptus 
profess, profiteor. 
proficiency, make, proficio. 

profit, quaest-us, -us, M.; em&lument- 
uni, -I, II. 

profound, use superl. of adj. 
prolong, perfero (ad.). 

promise, I, promitt-o, -ere, -mlsi, 
-inissum ; pol-liceor, -llceri, -licitus sum 
(p. 7, 3). 

promise, promissum, -1, N. 

proof, indicium, -i, N.; it is a proof 
Of wisdom to do this, sapientis est 
hoc facere (p. 59, 2). 

proper, idoneus, p. Ill, 6. 

property, res. 

proportion to (as), in, p. 118, 5. 

proposal, use propono. 

prosecution, use accuse. 

prosperity, res prosperae, res secun- 
dae. 



protection, praesidium (p. 69, 8);; 
or use tueor. 
protracted, diutmus. 
proud, stiperb-us, -a, -um (adj.). 

provide, I, pro-video, -videre, -vldT,. 
visum ; I provide for your inter- 
est; tibi prospicio ; I provida 
against you, te caveo (p. 72, 7). 

provided, p. 104. 6. 
providentially, divinitus. 
province, prOvincia, -ae, F. 
provision, I make, provideo. See- 
provide. 

provisions, commeat-us, -us, M. 
frument-um, -1, N. 

public, publicus. 

public meeting, conci-o, -onis. 

punish, I.^pun-io, -Ire, -ivl(-ii), -itum- 
I am punished, poenas do (dare, 
d&di, datum). 

punishment, poen-a, -ae, F.; supphV 
ci-um, -I, N. 

purpose, use cur; or p. 44. 
purpose, il, stat-uo, fiere, -ui, -uoum;; 
de-cerno, -cerngre, -crevi, -cretum. 

pursue, I, sequor, sfiqui, sficutus 
sum; some pursue one thing, 
others another, alius aliud sequitur. 

pursuit, &tudium. 

pursuit, in, etc,, say that they may: 
accomplish what they desire very much. 

put (=place), I, pono, -6re, posttl, 
pSsitum ; put at head of, praeficio 
(dat.); put up with, patior; put to, 
death, say kill. 

Q. 

quantity, vis (ace. vim ; abl. vl); often 
expressed by a dependent question in- 
troduced by quantus ; I do not know 
the quantity of corn there, nescip 
quantum frumenti ibi sit (p. 32, 1). 



VOCABULARY. 



233 



quarter, from one, etc., periculum 
ad aiium aliunde venit. 

quarter was given, no, nulli 
parcitum est (p. 72, 10). 

queen, regm-a, -ae, F. 

question, I, interrogo, -are, -avi, 
-atum ; it is a question (or ques- 
tioned), dubitatur ; to my question 
he gave no reply, mihi quaereitti 
nihil respondit (p. 48, 5) ; ask a ques- 
tion, rogo. 

quick, celer, -is, -e. 

quickly, cgieriter, prdpgre (adv.) ; as 
quickly as possible, quam celerrime. 

R. 

rain, pltivi-a, -ae, F. 
rains, it, pi tut. 
ramparts, moenia, -ium. 
rapid, say quick. 
rare, rar-us, -a, -urn. 
rashness, temerit-as, -atis, F. 
rather, pStius. 

rather, I had, malo, malle, malul. 
reach, pervenio ad. 
reach the city, I, ad urbem per- 
venio (-ire, -vcni, -ventum). * 

read, lego ; reading, by, legendo ; 
reading delights me, legere me 

iuvat. 

ready, parat-us, -a, -urn ; I am 
ready to go, ire volo. 

rear, terg-um, -i, N. ; in the rear, 
a tergo. 

reason, ratio, men-s, -tis, F. ; (cause), 
caus-a, ae, F. ; for this reason, 
quas ob causas; by reason of, ob 
(ace.); often expressed by an indirect 
question introduced by cur, quare: as, 
I don't know the reason for his 
action, nescio cur hoc fecerit. 

recall, (call back), I, rev6c-o, -are, 
-ilvl, -atum ; (remember), rScord-or, -arl, 
atus sum ; reminiscor, I. 



receipt of the letter, on the, 
epistola accepta (p. 52, 5.) 

receive, I, ac-c!pio, -clpgre, -cepi, 
-ceptum. 

reckless, temerarius ; or usetemeritas. 

recollect, I, record-or, -an, -atus 
sum. 

recollection, recordatio. 

recommend, I, suadeo, -ere, suasi, 

suasum. 

recover, I, convalesco; remlpgr-o, 
are, -avi, -atum ; re-cipio. -clp<5re, -cepi, 
-ceptum. 

redress, remedium, -i, N. 

reduce, I, sub-igo, -Igere, -egl, 
-actum; reduce to submission, 
redigo. 

refill, I, rC-pleo, -plere, plevl, -plgtum.. 
refit, reficio. 
reform, corrigo. 
refusal, use nolo. 

refuse, I, nol-o, -le, -ui (p. 18, 3); 
recuso (r. 1). 

regard, I, specto (r. 1) ; hab-eo, -ere, 
-ui, Itum ; duco, -6re, duxi, ductum ; 
(value highly), magni aestimo ; with 
regard to, de. 

regret, I, me poenitet (-ere, -uit ; p. 
66, 3) ; feel regret, use poenitet 

reign, I, regn-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; in 
the reign of Romulus, Romulo 
regnante. 

reject, reicio, -ic6re, -ieci, -iectum. 

rejoice, I, gaudeo, -ere, gavlsus sum. 

rejoicing, laetitia ; or use vb. 

reliance on you, I place, fidem 
tibi habeo. 

relieve, levo (r. 1). 

rely, I, con-fldo, -fldgre, -flsus sum 
(with dat. of person and abl. of thing ; p. 
81, 5, note 2). 

relying on, frctus -a, -urn (with 
abl.; p. 81,6). 



234 



VOCABULARY. 



remain, I, maneo, -ere, mansi, man- 
sum ; I remain behind, remaneo ; I 
remain firm, permaneo; it re- 
mains, restat (ut). 

remarks, use neut. pron. and dico. 

remember, I, mSminl, meminisse 
(P- 65, 2). 

remind, I, com-m8n6o, -mSnere, 
mdnul, -mCnitum ; commone-facio, -facfire, 
-feel, -factum (with ace. of pers. and gen. 
of thing ; p. 65, 2). 

remorse, use poenitet (p. 66, 3). 

remote, remotus. 

removal, use vb. 

remove, I, depello, -ere, depttli, de- 
pulsum ; tollo. 

repel, I, propuls-o, -are, -avi, -Stum. 

repent, I, me poenitet (-ere, -uit); I 
repent of my folly, stultitiae meae me 
poenitet. 

repetition, use say often. 

reply, I, respondeo, -ere, respondi, 
responsum. 

report, nuntio (r. 1). 

reputation, aestimatio; (good), 
f am-a, -ae ; (bad), infamia, -ae. 

request,' obtain, impetro(r. i). 

requested, without being, say 
not asked. 

require, I, opus est mihi ; egeo, -ere. 
-ui. 

requite, repen-do, -dere, -di, -sum. 

resignation, with, aequo ammo. 

resist, resisto, -ere, -stiti, -stitum (d). 

resistance, use resisto ; the resist- 
ance ceased, resist! desitum est. 

resistance, meet no, say no one 
opposing (obsto). 

resolve, I, statuo, -ere, -ui, -utum ; 
constTtuo, -ere, -ui, -utum ; decerno, -ere, 
-crgvl, -cretum. 

respect, observo (r. 1). 

Test, quies, quietis, F. 



rest, I, quiesco, -6re, quievl. 

rest of, the, cetur-I, -ae, -a; the 
rest of the citizens, ceteri cives; 
the rest of his life, reliqua aetas. 

restore, I, reddo; (strength), re- 
paro (r. 1) ; redintegr-o, -are, -avi, -atum. 

result, res, r6I, F.; event-us, -us, M. ; 
tfee result was that he went 
away, evenit ut abiret ; he came 
back without any result, re in- 
fecta rediit. 

retire, I, ccdo, -6re, cessi, cessum. 

retreat, I, me recipio (-clpere, -c6pl, 
-ceptum) ; pgdem refuro (-ferre, -tuli, 
-latum.) 

return, I (intr.), redeo, -Ire, redlvi 
(redlT), reditum ; (trans.), reddo, -6re, red- 
kll, redditum. 

^return, r6dit-us, -us, M. 

revile, I, vituper-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; 
male-dico, -dlcere, -dixi, -dictum (with 
dat., p. 71, 3). 

reviler, use rel. clause. 

revolt, defectl-o, -onis, F. 

revolution, res novae. 

revolve, moveor circa (ace.). 

reward, praemlum, -i, N, 

Rhodes, Rhod-us, -i, F. 

rich, dives, dlvitis ; 6pulent-us, -a, -um. 

riches, dlvitiae, -arum, F. (pi.). 

ride, I, gquito, -are, -avi, -atum; I 
ride past, praetervghor, -I, -vectus sum. 

ridge, iiigum, -i. 

ridicule, I, ir-rldeo, -ere, -rlsi, -rlsum. 

right, iiis, iuris, N. 

right, rectus, -a, -um. 

right hand, dextra, F. (properly an 
adj. with manus omitted). 

ring, orbis, M. ; (vb.), persSno (r. 1). 

rise (of persons), con-surgo, -6re 
-surrexi, -surrectum; (of things), orio^ 
-Iri, ortus sxim. 
river, flum-cn, -mis, N.; fluvius, -I, M, 



VOCABULARY. 



235 



road, via, -ae, F. 

roam, vagor (r. 1). 

rock, sax-um, -I, N. ; rup-es^-is, F. 

role, partes (dare=assign ; sustinere 
= sustain). 

roll, I, volvo, -8re, volvi, volutum. 

Roman, Romanus. 

Rome, Roma, -ae, F.; or say people of 
Rome (Romani). 

Romulus, Romttl-us, -I, M. 

room, left no room for doubt, 
haud dubium fecit. 

root, say cause. 

rose, r5s-a, -ae, F. 

rout, use vinco or fugo(r. 1); strag-es, 
-is, F. ; clad-es, -is, F. 

royal, regius. 

rude, rudis, -e (adj.). 

ruin, pernTcies, -ci, F. ; exltlum, -I, N. ; 
(vb.), deleo, perdo, everto. 

rule, regfila, -ae, F. 

rule, I, rego, regere, rgxi, rectum. 

rumor, rumor, oris. 

rush, ruo, -6re, rttl, rutum. 



sack, diripio, -Sre,-ripui, -reptum. 

sacrifice, posthabere (p. 72, 9). 

sacrileg-e, sacrilegi-um, -i, N. 

sad, maestus, -a, -um. 

safe, tutus, -a, -um ; incolum-is, -e. 

safety, sal-us, -utis, F. 

Sail, vel-um, -I, N. 

Gail, I, navlg-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

sailor, naut-a, -ae; M. 

sake of, for the, causa (with genitive), 
Usually placed after the word or words 
governed (p. 43, 9); for its own sake, 
propter se. 

sally, eruptl-o, -on is, F. ; I make a 
sally, eruptionem facio ; I sally out 
erumpo, -ere, erupl, eruptum. 



salute, I, saluto, -are, avl, -atum. 
salvation, salus, -utis, F. 
same, Idem, gadem, Idem ; the same 
as, idem qui (p. 10, 1). 

satisfied With, contentus (with abl., 
p. 81, 6). 

satisfy, I, satisfacio, -facere, -fed (with 
dative, p. 71, 3). 

save, I, servo (or conserve), -are, -avl, 
-atum. 

say, I, dlco, -6re, dixi, dictum. 

saying, p. 89, 8. 

scarcely, vix. 

scare, terreo. 

sceptre, regnum. 

scientific inquiry, say science and 
inquiry (cognitio ; p. 165, 6). 

scourge, virgis caedere. 

scout, explorat-or, -oris, M. 

scruple, scrupulus. 

Scylla, Scylla, -ae, F. 

sea, mare, marls, N. 

season, temp-us, -6ris, N. 

second, sccund-us, -a, -um; alter, -a 
-um. 

secret, the secret of, use idcirco 
quod (on this account because). 

secure, tutus ; safety is secured, 
use adj. safe. 

see, video, -ere, vldi, vlsum; specto(r. 1). 

seed, semen, mis, N. 

seek, I, peto, -Sre, pgtivi, pgtltum. 

seem, I, videor, -eri, vlsus sum ; it 
seems that he is good, ille bonus esse vide- 
tur (p. 38, 1) 

seize, I, occup-o, -are, -avl, -atum ; 
comprehendo, -ure, -prehendi, -prehen- 
sum ; ar-rlpio, -ripere, -rlpui, -reptu'n. 

seldom, rarQ 

self-interest, use utilis. 

sell, I, vendo, -6re, vendldi, vendltum ; 
I am sold, vengo, -Ire, -Ivi (-Ii), -Itum. 

senate, sfinat-us, -us, M. 



236 



VOCABULARY. 



send, I, mitt-o, -6re, mlsl, missum ; 
send away, dimitto ; relego (r. 1) ; 
send for, areesso. 

sense, good sense, prudentia. 

sense of shame, pudor. 

sentry, cust-os, -odis, M. 

serpent, serpen-s, -tis, M. 

serve, use utor. 

service, meritum (in), -i, N. 

sesterce, p. 150. 

set out, I, proficiscor, -i, profectus 
sum ; I set at liberty, liber-o, -are, 
-avi, -atum ; set at head, see put. 

several, complures. 

severity, use severus, -a, -um. 

Shadow, umbra, -ae, F. 

shake, I, quass-o, -are, -avl, -at am ; 
con-ciitio, -cfttere, -cussl, -cussum ; 
shake off, excutio. 

shame, pudor ; p, 66, 3. 

shameful, turpis. 

Sharer, partic-eps, ipis, M. or F. (gen.). 

she. See he. 

Shield, scutum, -i, N.; clipeus, -i, M. 

ship, navis, -is, F. ; a war ship, 
navis longa; a merchantman, navis 
oneraria. 

Short, brgvis, -e, adj. ; shortly (in a 
short time), brevi. 

should, p. 33, 3. 

Shout, clam-or, -oris, M. 

Show, I, monstr-o, -are, -avl, -atum. 

Shut, claudo, -ere, clausi, clausum. 

Sicily, Sicill-a, ae, F. 

Sick, aeg-er, -ra, -rum (adj.). 

Sidon, Sidon, onis. 

signal, signum, -I, N. 

silence, keep, use taceo. 

silent, taclt-us, -a, -um; I am 
Silent, taceo, -ere, -ui. 
, argentum. 



sin, peccat-um; I sin, pecco (r. 1). 

since, abhinc; ten years since, 
abhinc decem annis or annos (p 86, 3). 

since,- p. 112; 113; 114. 

Sing, cano. 

Single, not a, ne unus quidem. 

Sister, sor-or, -oris, F. 

Sit, I, con-sldo, -sldere, -sedi, -sessum. 

situation, sit-us, -us, M. ; often ex- 
pressed by a dependent question intro- 
duced by ubi or quo in loco : I don't know 
the situation of the town, nescio quo in 
loco (ubi) oppidum sit (p. 32, 1). 

Size, magnitude, -mis, F.; often ex- 
pressed by a dependent question intro- 
duced by quantus : I don't know the 
size of the island, nescio quanta 
insula sit (p. 32, 1). 

skilful, peritus (with gen.). 

Skill, peritia ; scienti-a, -ae, F. 

slaughter, clades, is, F. 

slave, servus, -i, M. 

slave to, I am, servlo, -ire, -ivi, 
-Ttum (with a dat., p. 71, 6). 

Slay, I, inter-f icio, -flcere, -fed, -feet- 
urn; occldo, -ere, occldi, occlsum . 

sleep, I, dorm-Io, -ire, -Ivi, -Itum. 

sleep, somn-us, -i, M. 

sleet, say rain mixed with snow. 

slight, say small. 

slow, tard-us, -a, -um. 

small, parvus; brev-is (adj.). 

Snake, serpens, -tis, M. 

snatch, (to one's self), ar-rlpTo, 
-ripere, -ripui, -reptum; (snatch away 
from), erlpio, -rip6re, -ripui, -reptum. 

snow, nix, mvis, F. 

SO (= thus), ita; with verbs, adeo; 
with adjectives and adverbs, tarn ; see p. 
3, 8, note ; so far from, tantum abest 
ut (p. 15). 

society, societas, -atis, F. 



VOCABULARY. 



237 



soldier, mil-es, -itis, M. 

solemnly, p. 166, c. 

Solon, Sol-on, -onis. 

some, aliquis (p. 96, 6); nescio qtiis 
(p. 96, note 2 [b]) ; nonnulli, ae, a. 

some day, aliquando. 

somehow, nescio quo modo (p. 96, 
6, b). 

sometimes, nonnunquam; interdum. 

somewhat, use comparative. 

son, films, I, M. 

song, carm-en, -Inis, N. ; cant-us, 
-us, M. 

soon, mox, bravi ; 102, 4 ; he came 
sooner than he expected, celerius 
sua spe venit ; sooner (rather), potius. 

soothsayer, harusp-ex, -icis. 

sorrow, p. 66, 3 ; dolor. 

sorry, I am, nolo, nolle, nolQi ; 
(grieve), dSleo, -ere, -ui ; me piget (p. 
66, 3) ; me poenitet. 

soul, anlm-us, -I, M. ; not a soul, 
ne unus quidem. 

source, use orior (rise). 

SOW, sero, ere, sevi, satum. 

spare, I, parco, -fire, peperci, parsum 
(or parcitum) (with dative, p. 71, 6). 

Spark, scintilla, -ae, F. 

Spartan, Lacedaemonius. 

speak, I, ISquor, Idqui, l&cutus sum ; 
dico, -ere, dixi, dictum. 

spear, hasta. 

speech (language), lingua ; (dis- 
course), serm-o, -onis; (oration), 
oratl-o, -onis, F. 

speed, ceierit-as, -atis, F. ; or use 
celeriter. 

spirit, animus; ferocia. 

spirited, anlmos-us ; ferox. 

spite, in spite of, p. 115, 11. 

spoil, praed-a, -ae, F. 

spring, ver, veris, N. ; in the be- 
ginning" Of spring, primo vere. 



spring from, I, orior, -iri, ortus 
sum ; sprung from a noble father, patre 
praeclaro ortus (p. 74, 4). 

stab, percutio. See strike. 

stage, theatrum. 

Stand, I, sto, stare, steti, slatum ; I 
stand by or near, adsto ; I stand 
around, circumsto ; stand for, peto ; 
stand ground, consisto. 

standard, sign-um, -I, N. ; (standard 
of the legion), aquil-a, -ae, F. 

Star, stell-a, -ae, F. 

stare, in face, impendeo (dat.). 

start (set out), I, prdflciscor, -I, 
profectus sum. 

state (condition), stat-us, -us, M. ; 
(commonwealth), civitas, -atis, F.; 
res publica, rei publicae, F. ; keep 
great state, splendide se gerere. 

station, loco (r. 1.) 

stationed, use sto. 

statue, statua. 

stay, I, com-m6ror, -mflrari, -mSratus 
sum ; maneo, -ere, mansi, mansum. 
Steel, ferrum. 

Step, use do and a neuter pronoun. 
Stick, baculum. 

still, adhuc ; etiam nunc (of pre- 
sent); etiam turn (of past). 

stone, lapis, Idis, M. ; I throw a stone, 
lapidem im-pingo (-ere, -pegl, -pactum) ; 
I throw a stone at you, tibi lapi- 
dem impingo (vb.) ; expugno (r. 1). 

stop, I, desino, -ere, -slvi, -situm ; 
Stop talking, desine loqui (p. 18, 3). 
Storm, tempestas. 

story (narrative), res ; fabtila, -ae, 
F. ; he told many stories to me, 
ihi multa uargajgfc- 
str anger, peregrinua 

stream, flum-en, -Inis, N.; riv-us, -I, 
M. ; fluvlu*, -I, M. 



VOCABULARY. 



Strength, vlr-es, -lum, F. (pi.) ; rob- 
ur, -dris, N. ; or sa}' how many. 

strengthen, roboro (r. 1.) 

Strike, I, per-otttlo, -cutgre, -cussi, 
-cussum. 

^strip, exuo (abl.). 

Strive, I, nitor, nlti, nlsus sum ; Conor, 
-ari, -atus sum ; strive" to C'onqiler, 
nitSre ut vincas (p. 16, 5). 

Strong, fort-is, -e ; magnus. 

Struggle, contentl-o, -onis, F. 

study of literature, cognitio 
litterarum. 

Study, I, operam do (dare, dCdl, 
datum) ; I study Latin literature, 
litteris Latinis operam do ; I study my 
interest, mihi provideo, or consulo. 

Subject, ( = thing), res. 

subjects, say those she presides (prae- 
sum), over. 

succeed (of plans), pro-ccdo, 
ced&re, cessi, cessum ; my plans SUC- 
Ceed, consilia mea procedunt. 

succeed (come after in suc- 
cession), I, ex-clpio, cipe>e,jgjip j i x ce.p- 
tum ; he succeeded'hfs" father on 
the throne, regnum ex patre excepit. 

success, meet poor, male succedo. 

succor. See aid. 

Such, tantus ; talis, -e (p. 10, 1). 

Sudden, subit-us, -a, -urn; repentln- 
us, -a, -um. 

Suddenly, stibito, repente (adv.). 

suddenness. Use sudden. 

sufficient, satis (adv.) 

suggest,, suggestion, use auctor, 
p. 5-2, 5. 

suicide, commit, sibi mortem con- 
sciscere. 

suitable, aptus, -a, -um ; idoneus. 

sum, summa, ae. 

Summer, aest-as, -atis, F. ; at the 



beginning of summer, prima aest- 
ate ; at the end of summer, extrema 
aestate. 

summit, of the hill, collis summus 
(P- 61, e). 

sun, sol, solis, M. 

sunrise, solis ortus. 

superior to, I am, prae-sto, -stare, 
stltl (with dat., p. 71, 4); I am s. to all 
in courage, omnibus virtute praesto. 

superstition, superstitio, -onis, F. 
supper, coena, -ae, F. 
Supplies, commCat-us, -us, M. 
supply, With, suppedito (r. 1). 
support, sequor, s6qui, secutus sum. 
suppose, credo, -6re, credidi, credi- 
tum. 

sure, be, certo scio. 

surely, p. 121, 7. 

surprise (as a foe), I, op-primo, 
-primere, -pressi, -prcssum. 

surrender, I, trad-o, -ere, -Idi, -itum; 
dcdo. 

Surround, I, cingo, -ere, cinxi, cinc- 
tum ; circuvn-venio, -venire, -veni, -ven- 
tum. 

survive, I, super-sum, -esse, -fiii. 

suspect, I, suspicor, -ari, -atus sum ; 
I am suspected, in suspicionern venio. 

suspicion, susplclo, -onis, F. 

sustain (an onset), I, sus-tmeo, 
-tlnere, -tlnul, -tentum ; (defeat), accipio 

S'WallOW, hirund-o, -mis 

swear, I, iuro, -are, -avl, -atum (p 
7,3). 

sweet, dulc-is, -e; (to the smell), 
snav-is, -e(adj.). 

swim, no (r. 1.) 

sword, gladlus, -I, M. ; or -'se bellum ; 
with fire and sword, igni ferroque ; put 
to sword, say kill. 

Syracuse, Syracus-ae, -arum,F. (pi.). 



VOCABULAft\. 



Syracuse, of, Syracusan-us, -a, -urn. 
system, ratio. 

systematic study, say system and 
'study. 

T. 

take, I capTo, -Sre, -cepi, -captum; 
(take a town), expugno, -arfr^avC 
-atum; take away, eripio; take' from, 
abstraho. 

take care that, cura ut, fac ut; 
take deeply to heart, graviter ferre. 
take place, flo, fI6ri, factus sum. 
take up arms, I, arma caplo 
(capere, cCpi, captum) or arma sumo 
(siimere, sumpsi, sumptum). 

talent, (ability), ingenlum, -i, N. ; 
(money), talentum, -i, N. 

talk, I, ISquor, l&qul, locutus sum. 
talkative, 16qua-x, -cis (adj.). 
Tarentum, Tarentum, -i, N. 
Tarquin, Tarquimus, -i, M. 
task, take to, reprehendo. 
taste for, studium, i, N. ; a taste 
for literature, studium litterarum. 

taxation, exemption from, im- 
munlt-as, -atis, F. ; exempt from 
taxation, immun-is, -e. 

teach, I, dSc6o, -Cre, docui, doctum 
(p. 39, 6). 

teaching, by, docendo ; by teach- 
ing" we learn, docendo discimus. 
teacher, magist-er, -ri, M. 
teaching of philosophers, prae- 
cepta (-orum, N. pi.) philosophorum. 

tear, lacrima, -ae, F. 

tedious, long-us, -a, -um (adj.). 

tell, (bid), I, iflbeo, -ere, iussi, iussum 
(with ace.) ; (narrate), narr-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum ; dico. 

temper, animus, i, M. 

temple, templ-um, I, N. ; aed-es, -i. 

ten, dtcem. 



term, condicI-6, -onis, F.; on what 
terms, quanti. 

terrible threats, say terrors and 
threats (p. 165, 6). 

terrify, terreo, -ere -tii, -Itum. 

territory, fln-es, -Ium,M. (pi.); ager. 

terror, terror, -oris M. 

than, quam ; abl. (p. 76, 1). 

thanks, I return, gratias ago (-re, 
-egi, actum); receive (th.), use ago 
(pass.) 

thanksgiving, supplicatl-o, -onis, F. 
that (pronoun), ille (p. 87); p. 4 ; 12. 

the, usually not expressed ; the city 

Which ea urbs quae ; the 

the, p. 78, 6. 

Thebes, ThCb-ae, -arum, F. (pi.) 

theft, furtum, -I, N. 

their, p. 7", note ; omitted, when poss- 
essor is evident. 

themselves (reflexive), se ; (em- 
phatic) se ipsos (p. 90, 13). 

then, turn, tune ; then and 
there, illico. 

thence, inde. 

theory, say thing. 

there, ibi, illic; (after verbs of 
motion), illuc. 

therefore, igitur, ergo ; itaque (in 
narrative). 
thereupon, turn, 
thief, fur, furis, M. 
thing, res, rSi, F. 

think, arbitror ; (reflect on), 
coglt-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; (fancy), puto, 
-are, -avi, -atum ; (believe), credo ; I 
almost th., p. 31, 4, note 1. 

third, tertius, -a, -um. 

thirst, sltis, -is, F. 

thirteen, tredecim. 

thirty, triginta. 

this, these, those, hie, ille (p. 88,6), 



240 



VOCABULARY, 



thorough knowledge of, use per- 
spectum habere. 

though, quamquam, quamvis, etsi 
(p. 114, 7 ; 47, 3). 

thousand, mille ; pi., millia. 

threaten, I, immineo, ere ; mln-or, 
-an, -atus sum ; I threaten him with 
punishment, supplicium ei minor. 

threats, mln-ae, -arum, F. (pi.); or 
use minor. 

three, tres, tria. 

thrice, ter. 

throne, regnum, i. 

throng, multltud-o, -mis, F. 

throughout, per (prep., with ace.); 
throughout the whole city, tota 
urbe. 

throw, I, con-Icio, -Iccre, -i6cl, 
-iectum; impingo, -ere, impegi, impactum. 

Tiber, Tiber-is, -is, M. 

Tibur, Tibur, -is, N. 

till, donee (p. 103, 6). 

till, I, cdlo, -6re, colui, cultum. 

time, temp-us, -6ris, N. ; at that 
time, turn ; eo tempore. 

timid, timld-us, -a, -um. 

timidity, use adj. 

tired be, use taedet (p. 66, 3). 

to, ad (prep, with ace.); in (with ace.; 
after verbs of motion). 

to-day, hddie (adv.) ; hie dies. 

together, simul. 

toil, labor, -is, M. ; vb., laboro (r. 1). 

tomb, sepulchr-um, -i, N. 

to-morrow, _cras(adv. ). 

too, (also), qudque ; with adjectives 
or adverbs, often translated by the com- 
parative : too harsh, severior ; too 
much, nimis. 

top of the mountain, summus 
mons. 

torture, tormentum (rack), 
towards, ad, erga (prep, with ace.) ; 



expressed simply by ace. with names 
of towns and small islands (p. 83, 4). 

tower, turr-is, -is, F. 

town, oppid-um, -1, N. 

townsman, oppidan-us, -i, M. 

tradition, I hand down by, 
tra-do, -dere, -didi, -ditum (p. 38, 1). 

train, exerc-6o, -ere, -m', -itum: 
training, disciplln-a, ae, F. 
traitor, prodit-or, -oris, M. 
transformation, use mutare. 

travel, I, iter facio (fac6re, feel, fac- 
tum.) 

treachery, peo(dla,-ae, F. 
treat cruelly, saevio (in). 
treaty, foed-us, eris, N. 
tree, arbor, -6ris, F. 
tremble, tremisco, -6re, tremui. 

tribe, (political), tribus, -us, F. ; 
(nation), gens, gentis, F. ; natl-o, 
-onis, F. 

trifles, nugae, -arum, 
triumph, use exsulto (r. 1). 
troops, copiae, -arum, F. (pi.), 
trouble, labor; mdlestlae, -arum, F. 
troublesome, m<5lest-us, -a, -um. 
truce, indutlae, -arum, F. (pi.), 
true, vSr-us, -a, -um. 

.trust, I, fido, -ere, fisus sum ; confido, 
-ere, confisus sum (with dat. ; p. 81, 6, 
note 2) ; mando (r. 1). 

truth, vera, -drum, N. (pi.); verit-as, 
-atis, F. 

try, I, con-or, -an, -atus sum. 
tumult, tumultus, -us. 
turn, I (trans), verto, -ere, verti, ver- 
sum ; (intr.), vertor, verti, versus sum. 
Tuscan, Tuscus, -a, -Aim. 
owenty, viginti. 
two, duo. 



VOCABULARY. 



241 



tyranny, dtfminatio, -onis, F. ; d6min- 
at-us, -us, M. 

tyrant, tyrannus ; rex. 
Tyre, Tyrus, -i, F. 

U. 

unable to, I am, non possum, 
unavenged, inult-us, -a, -um. 

unbearable, intolerabilis ; or use 
fero. 

unbroken, success, use res ei 
semper succedit. 
uncertain, incertus. 

understand, I, intellego, -ere, intel- 
lexi, intellectum. 

undertake, I, sus-cipio, -clpSre, -cepi, 
-ceptum. 

undone, I leave, praetermitto. 

undoubtedly, procul dubio ; or use 
superl. 

unendurable, see unbearable. 
unexpected, stibit-us, inopmatus. 

unfortunately, say it happened 
unluckily. 

unfriendly, Tnimlc-us, -a, -um. 
unheard, inauditus. 

universal, universally, use om- 
nes, omnia (pi.). 

universe, mundus ; natura rerum. 
Unjust, Inlqu-us, -a, -um, 
unless, nisi (p. 120, 3). 

unlike, disslmllis, -e (with dat. , p. 64, 
note 2). 

unluckily, inopportune, infeliciter. 
Unlucky, infeli-x, -cis (adj.). 
Unnatural, nefarl-us, -a, -um (adj.). 
Unnecessary, non necessarius. 
Unpopularity, invldia, -ae, F. 
unreasonableness, use vanus. 
until. See till. 



unwilling 1 , invit-us, -a, -um ; be un- 
willing, nolo. 

unworthy, indign-us, -a, -um (with 
abl. ; p. 81, 6). 

use (make a u se of), I,utor, uti, usus 
sum (with abl. ; p. 80, 1). 

Use, I am Of, prosum, prodesse, 
profui (with dat. ; p. 70, 1) ; what is 
the use ? quid refert ? 

used, useimpf., orsoleo. 

useful, utllis, -e (adj. with dat. or acd. 
with ad ; useful for ruling, utilis re- 
gendo or ad regendum. 

usefulness, utmt-as, -atis, F. ; or use 
adj. 

useless, inutilis. 
Utica, Utica, -ae, F. 
utility, have, use adj. 
Utmost, plurimum (p. 66, 4). 

utmost speed, to the, quam celer- 
rime (p. 78, 9, note). 

V. 

vain, vanus ; in vain, frustra (of 
the person) ; nequidquam (of the 
attempt). 

valley, valles (or is), -is, F. 

value, I, aestim-o, -are, -avl, -atum ; 
I value (i.e., highly), magni aestimo. 
(p. 79, 12). 

vanquish, I, sflpCr-o, -are, -avi, 
-atum ; virico, -6re, vlci, victum. 
variety, varietas. 
various, multus ; varius. 
Varius, Varius. 

vast, maxim-us, -a, -um (superl. of 
magnus); vastus. 

vehemence, use vehemens. 
Veii, Veii, -drum, M. (pi.), 
venture, I, audfo, -ere, ausus sum. 
very, often expressed by superlative 
of adj. or adv. 

very glad, I am, vehementer lae- 

tor. 



VOCABULARY. 



versed in, pentus, -a, -inn ; he was 
versed in law, iuris peritus (or per- 
itissimus) erat (p. 64). 

Veteran, voter-anus (adj. and noun). 

victorious, vict-or, -oris, M. 

Victory, victoria, ae, F. 

view, he had this object in, id 
egit (from <ago, -ere, egi, actum) ; hold a 
view, sentio. 

Vigor, vigor,' -oris, M. 
Villa, villa, ae, F. 
village, vicus, -i, M. 
Violence, vis (ace., vim; abl., vi), F. 
violent, violentus. 
Virtual, omit. 
Virtue, virt-us, -utis, F. 
virtuously, honeste. 
Visit, I, vis-o, -6re, visi, vlsum. 
vogue, in, use sum. 
voice, vox. 
vote, suffragi-um, -I, N. 
vote, I, sententiam fero. 
Voyage, cursus, us ; navlgatl-o, -onis, 
F. ; make a voyage, navigo (r. i.). 

W. 

wage war, I, bellum ggro, -ere, 
gessl, gestum ; bellum infero, -ferre, -tuli, 
ilLatum (p. 71, 4). 

wait, or wait for, I, exspect-o, -are 
-avl, -attim. 

walk (take a walk), I, ambttl-o, 
-are, -avi, -atum. 

wall, (generally), mtir-us, -T, M. ; 
(for defensive purposes), moem-a, 
-ium, N. (pi.); (garden wall), ma- 
ceria, -ae, F. ; (wall of house), paries, 
-ietis, M. 

want, say wish; be wanting, 
deesse. 

war, bell-um, -i, N. ; I wage war, 
see wage. 



ward Oft, defendo, ere, -fendi, -fen- 
sum. 

warm, calid-us, -a, -um (adj.). 

warn, 1, m6n6o, -5re, mfinul, monl- 
tum. ~ 

waste, tero ; I lay waste, pOptilor, 
-art, -atus sum ; vasto (r. 1). 

water, aqu-a, -ae, F. 

wave, fluct-us, -us, M. ; unda, -ae, F. 

way, via, -ae, F. ; Iter, Itlneris, N. ; 
(a by-path), semita, -ae, F. 

weaken, debilito (r. 1). 

wealth, dlvltl-ae, -arum, F. (pi.) ; 
fortun-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). 

wealthy, dlv-es, -itis (of persons) ; 
(of things ,) opjUfififols. ^-a, -um (adj.). 

weapon, tel-um, i, N. 

weariness, taedl-um, -i, N. 

weary, I am, me taedet (ere, -flit) ; 
I am weary with the journey, 
me itineris taedet (p. 66, 3). 

weather, tempestas, -atis, F. 

wedding, nuptl-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). 

weight, pond-us, -Cris, N. 

well, a, puteus, i, M. 

well, bene ; comp., rnelrus; superl., 
optime ; be well, valeo. 

well-born, parentibus claria ortus 
(p. 74, 4). 

what ? quis, quae, quid ; p. 10, 10. 

Whatever, quicumque, quaecumque, 
quodcumque ; see p. 115, 11. 

when (rel adv.), quum ; (interrog.), 
quando ; p. 2, 6. 

whence, unde. 

whenever, quum (p. 107, 5) ; quando- 
cumque. 

where, ubi (interrog. and rel.) ; 
where in the w^orld are we ? ubi 
terrarum (or gentium) sumus? where 
from, unde. 

whether . . . or, utrum ... an (p. 29, 6). 



VOCABULARY. 



243 



Which, (rel), qui, quae, quod ; (inter- 
ro(j.), quis, quae, quid or quod (adj.). 

while, dura ; for a little while, 
paulisper. 

white, albus. 

whither, quo. 

who (rel.), qui, quae, quod; (inter- 
rog.), quis, quae, quid or quod (adj.) 

Whoever, quicumque, quaecumque, 
quodcumque. 

whole, (entire), totus, -a, -um (gen. , 
totlus) ; (safe), salvus, a, -um. 

wholly, I am wholly devoted 
to literature, totus litteris incumbo. 

why, cur, quare. 

Wicked, malus, imprdbus, pravus. 

wickedness, nefas (neut. indec. 
noun); scel-us,- 6ris, N. 

Will, v51unt-as, -atis, F. ; against 
my will, me invito (abl. abg.) 

Willing, volen-s, -tis. 

Win, (obtain) I, cqnsequor, -s6qul, 
-secutus sum ; (gain the day), vinco, 
-Sre, -vlcl, victum ; supero, -are, -avl, 
-atum. 

Wine, vln-um, -I, N. 

wing, of an army, cornu, us, N. 

Winter, hiems, hlfimis, F. 

Winter (wintry), hibern-us, -a, -um; 
winter quarters, hiberna, -orum. 

Wisdom, saplentla, -ae, F. 

Wise, saplen-*, -tis (adj.). 

Wise, I am, saplo, 5re, saplvl, 
sapltum, 

wish earnest, say wished very 
much. 

wish, I, vSlo, velle, vOlQi ; (desire), 

cupio, ere, -ivl, -Itum. 
with, cum (prep, with abl.) 
Withdraw, abeo ; abduco, -6re, -duxi, 

-ductum. 

Within, inter or intra (with ace.), or 



simply the abl. ; within ten days, in- 
ter (or intra) dies decem ; or decem diebus ; 
be within a little, minimum abesse 
quin (p. 22, 4). 

Without, sine (prep, with abl.); or see 
p. 139. 

Withstand, I, ob-sto, -stare, -stlti 
(with dat., 71, 4) ; sustineo. 

witness,,^|ifi ; or use see. 

woman, mtlller, -tens, F. ; fcmlna. 

wonder, I, mlr-or, -arl, -atus sum. 

wonderful, mirus; or use superl. 

wood, silv-a, -ae, F. ; nem-us, -6ris, N. 

word, verb-um, -I, N. ; word is 
brought, nuntiatur. 

work, 6p-us, -eris, N. 

world, terra ; orbis terrarum ; omnes 
gentes ; homines; (universe), mundus ; 
all the world believes this, nemo 
est quin hoc credat ; the older world, 
ilia prisca gens hominum. 

Worse, pei-or, -oris (comp. of malus). 

worth. See worthy. 

worthy, dign-us, -a, -um (with abl., 
p. 81, 6). 

would that, titinam (p. 25, 2). 
wound, vuln-us, -6ris, N. 
wound, I, vulnero, -are, -avl, -atum. 
wrest, I, ex-torqueo, -torquere, -torsi, 
-tortum. 

wretch, use scglfiratus or miser, 
wretched, miser, -a, -um (adj.). 
/write, scribo. 
writer, scriptor. 

writing, in writing letters, in 
epistolis scribendis. 

wrong, iniurla, -ae, F. ; I do wrong, 
pecco, -are, -avl, -atum ; am wrong, 
erro (r. 1). 

Y. 

year, annua, -I, M. 

yes, p. 28, 2, note. 

yesterday, heji. of yesterday, 
hesternus, -a, -uni. 



244 



VOCABULARY. 



yet ( = nevertheless), tamen; vero, 
emphatic). 

yet, not, nondum. 

yield to, I, ccdo, -6re, cessi, cessum. 

yoke, iugum, -i, N. 

you, tu (sing) ; vos (pi.). 

young 1 , (young man,) iuvenis' 
(iunior, minimus natu); adolescens. 

yours, tuus, -a, -um (sing.); vest-er, -ra, 
rum pi.). 



youth, iuvent-us, -utis, F. (collective 
noun) ; (time of), ad61escenti-a, -ae, F. 



Z. 



zeal, studium, -1, N. 
zealous, studiosus, -a, -um (with 
gen.). 

zealously, use noun. 
Zeno, Zen-o, -onis, M. 



TNDEX. 

The numbers refer to pages and sections. 



A. 

abeo, construction of, 74, 3. 
abhinc, constr. and position of, 86, 3. 

ablative, derivation of the term, 73, 1 ; 
syntax of, 73-86 ; abl. of agent, 38, 2 ; 74, 
5, note 1 ; of quality, 62, 1 ; price, 63, 
4, note ; 79, 12 ; absolute, 48, 7 ; 
relations expressed by abl. absolute, 
51, 2 ; position of the abl. absolute, 52, 
note ; examples of abl. abs., 52, 4 ; 52, 5 ; 
equivalents of abl. abs. in English, 52, 6 ; 
ubstitutes for abl. abs., 49, foot-note; 
motion from, 73, 2 ; 74, top of page ; 
caute, manner, instrument, 74, 5 ; 75, 
note 2 ; after comparatives, 76, 2 ; re- 
spect, 79, 11 ; with adjectives, 74, 4; 81, 
6 ; with verbs, 74, 3 ; 80, 1-3 and 81, 4-5 ; 
place (of towns), 82, 1, 2 ; (not name of 
town), 83, 3 ; of distance, 84, 8, 9 ; with 
abhinc, 86, 3 ; of time, 85, 1 ; of 
difference, 77, 6. 

abound in, verbs meaning to, with abl., 
80, 2. 

abstineo, constr. of, 74, 3. 

abstract nouns, expressed by pres. 
part, act, 48, 6; 157, 4,(a>(c); 158, 159, 
160-163; abstract adjs. and adverbs, 
164, 165, 166. 

accusative, with infinitive, 4-7 ; 56, 
C, 7 ; 127, 1, 2, note ; with verbs hope, 
promise, undertake, swear, 7, 3 ; cog- 
nate, 38, 4; vbs. with two ace., 39, 6; 
40, 9 ; 40, 8 ; of exclamation, 58, note ; 
114, 5 ; ace. and gen. with' verbs of 
accusiny, condemning, acquitting, 65, 
1 ; motion towards, 83, 4 ; extent of 
space, 84, 9 ; duration of time, 86, 2 ; 



with verbs compounded with prep., 71, 
4; ace. and dat., 71, 4 ; 72, 7-9. 

active periphrastic conjugation, 
p. 53, 1. 

ad Romam, meaning of, 83, 4, note, 
adjectival clauses, 98, 3 ; 100, 9. 

adjectives, not common with proper 
nouns, 3, 8; used adverbially, 11, 2; 
joined to esse after licet, 33, 6 ; with 
necesse est in dat. or ace., 33, 6 ; with 
genitive, 63, 6 ; 64 ; dat., 69, 9; abl., 
74, 4 ; 81, 6. . 

admoneo, constr. of, 65, 2. 

adverbial clauses, 98, 3; 100, 10; 
local, 102, 1. 

aeque ac, 116, l. 
affirmative answer, 28, 2, note, 
age, how expressed, 86, 4. 
agent, case of, 38, 2; 50, 12; 74, 5, 
note 1 ; secondary agent, 75, note 1. 

ago, how expressed, 86, 3. 
agreement, 1-3 ; 9, note, 
aliquis, 90, 5 ; 60, 3. 
aliter ac, lie, 1. 

amount. See Indirect question, 32. 
amplius, plus, minus, with numerals, 
77,4. 

an, construction of, 29, 6 ; 29, 7 ; 31, 4. 

and no one, nee quisquam, 95, 3, 
note. 

antepono, constr. of, 72, 9. 
antequam, constr. of, 104, 7. 
any, how translated, 94, 1 ; 95, 2 ; 06, 5. 
apposition, 2, 5 ; 9, 8. 



245 



24G 



LA.TIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



as, divisions of, p. 153. 

as, idiomatic uses of, 118, 6. 

asyndeton, p. 170, 10 ; 188, 3, b. 

at dbut), at enim, p. 203. 

at a place (name of a town), 82, 1,2; 

(not the name of a town), 83, 3. 
at tamen, joined to single words, 125, 

5, note. 
attendaat circumstance, in abl. 

aba., 51, 2. 

aut, p. 202, 6. 

B. 

beginning of spring, how expressed, 

61, (e). 
bene, verbs compounded with bene, 

satis, male, gov. dat., 71, 3. 
bottom, how translated, 61, (e). 
but, after neg. verbs of doubting, see 

quin. 
but if, see sin. 

C. 

Calendar, Roman, 147. 

can, 33, 2. 

cardinals, declined, 143, 1. 

careo, constr. of, 81 (top). 

causal clause, 100, 10, 6 ; 113. 

cause, ablative of, 74, 5. 

cedo, constr. of, 74, 3. 

certe, certo, 89, 7, note 2. 

characteristic of, it is the, 59, 2. 

chiasmus, p. 179, g. 

circumdo, constr. of, 72, 8, 

classification of clauses, 98, 3, 

classification of sentences, 98, 1. 

classification of tenses, 19, 1. 

Clauses, subordinate, 98, 3; consecu- 
tive, 14 ; causal, 113 ; concessive, 114, 
7 ; comparative, 101, 7 ; 116, 117 ; con- 
ditional, 101, 8; 119-125; final, 12; 
109 ; local, 102, 1, 2 ; temporal, 102, 
3,4. 



coepi, 142, 6. 

cognate accusative, 38, 4. 

coins, Roman, 150. 

collective noun, \\ ith plural verb, 2, 3. 

command, constr. of verbs signifying, 

24, 1, (b). 

comparative degree, 76, l. 
complex sentences, 98, 2. 
compound sentences, 98, 1. 
compound numbers, how express- 
ed, 144, 3. 
concession, clauses of, ice, 10, 6; 

114, 115. 

concord, of subject and verb, 1. 
condemn, constr. of verbs signifying 

to, 65, 1. 
conditional sentences, 101, 8; 119- 

124. 

confido, constr. of, 81, 5. 
connection, p. 181. 
consecutive clauses, 14 ; loo, 10, 4. 
constituo, when followed by an ut- 

clause, 17, 5, note, 
consulo, 72, 7. 
contentus, constr. of, 81, 6. 
contra quam, 117, 1. 
correlatives, 10, 1. 
cum, when used with abl. of manner, 

75, note 3. 
currency, Roman, 150. 

D. 

danger, there is, constr. of, 18, 2. 

dative, why so called, 68, 1 ; translated 
by to and for, 68, 2 ; dative of possession 
with sum, 68, 3; used for English from, 
68, 4*, of person Interested (ethic dative), 
68, 5; used for gen.> 68, 6 ; for abl. with 
prep, a or ab, 69, 7 ; of purpose, 69, 8 ; 
with adjectives, 69, 9, note 1-3; with 
verbs, 70, 1, 2 ; 71, 3-6 ; 72, 7-JO; 
dative and ace. , 72, 7-9 , dative after 
compound verbs, 71, 3, 71, 4, note; 
71, 5 



INDEX. 



day, before, 86, 4 ; after, 86, 4 ; for the 
following day, 86, 4. 

decerno, followed by an ut-clause, 17, 5. 

definition, genitive of, 63, 5. 

demonstrative pronouns, 88 ; fol- 
lowed by correlatives, 10, 1 ; cannot be 
joined with a part., 49,11; agree with 
pred., 89, 10. 

denarius, 150, l. 

deponent verbs, perf. part, with an 

act. meaning, 49, 8. 

desisto, construction of, 74, 3. 
destination, how expressed, 32, 1. 
detached style, when used, p. 188, 3. 
dicor, use of, 38, 1 ; 55, note, 
dictionaries, use of, p. 156. 
dignor, 80, 1. 
dignus, 81, 6. 

dissimilis, with gen. or dat., 64, note 2. 
distributive numerals, 144, 6. 
divisions of the as, 153, 1; pound, 

153, 2; month, 147; iugerum, 153, 2. 
domum, 85, 5 ; domi, 82, 1 ; domo, 83, 5. 
donee, 103, 5, 6; 104. 
dono, constr. of, 72, 8. 
doubting, verbs of, 22, 1. 
dum, 103, 5, 6 ; 104. 
dummodo, 104, 6, note, 
duration of time, 86, 2. 
duty, how expressed, 33, 3 ; 45, 2 ; 59, 2. 

E. 

ecquis, 97, d. 
efficio ut, 16, 5. 
egeo, constr. of, 81, 3, note, 
emphasis, p. 176. 

end of the book, how expressed, 
61, (e). 

English inf., often expresses a pur- 
pose, 110, 3. 



English noun.ofteh expressed bypron. 
and verb, 38, 5. 

equivalent phrases, p. 166, 3. 
ethic dative, 68, 5. 
etiamsi, constr. of, 114, 9. 
etsi, constr. of, 114, 9. 
exclamation, accusative of, 58, note, 
exclamation, inf. of, 58, 15. 
extent, of time and space, 84, ~9&~ 

F. 

fac ut, 27, 7. 

factitive verbs, 40, 9. 

fldo, constr. of, 81, 5. 

fill, verbs signifying to, 80, 2. 

final clauses, 12 ; is : 109. 

first, second, third, 144, 4. 

first of the month, 147, 2. 

foot of the oak, 61, (e). 

fore ut, 36, 9. 

forget, verbs signifying to, p. 65, 2. 

former, latter, 88, 6. 

fractions, how expressed, 145, 8, 9. 

freedom, from, 74, 4. 

fretus, constr. of, 81, 6. 

from, with the name of a town, 73, 2 ; 

with verbs, 74, 3. 
fruor, constr. of, 80, 1. 
fungor, constr. of, 80, 1. 
future, in Latin for Eng. present, 106, 

1, note, 
future, 36, 8. 
future, in Eng., after verbs of fearing, 

how expressed in Latin, 18, 1, note, 
fut. imper., 27, 8. 
fut. part, pass., 142, 9. 
future inf. pass., how formed, 41, 3. 

future perf., 36, 8; for Eng. pres., 106 
1, note, and 104, 7, note. 

I fut. SUbj., act. and pass., 36, 10. 

j futurum fuisse ut, p. 141, 4. 



LATIX PROSE COMPOSITION. 



gaudeo, constr. of, 81, 5. 

gender, rules for, p. 198. 

genitive, of possession, 59, 1 ; for Eng. 
adj., 59, note 2; partitive, 60, 3; used 
with sum, 59, 2 ; often translated 
by mark, characteristic, 59, 2 and 158, 
(7t) ; of quality, 02, 1 ; subjective, 6:2, 3 ; 
objective, 62, 3 ; of price, 63, 4 ; of 
definition, 63, 5; with adj., 63, 6; 
with similis, dissimilis, 64, note 2 ; 
with verbs, 65 ; 66. 

genitive and ace., after verbs of ac- 
cusing, condemning, acquitting, 65, 1. 

gerund, 42, 5, 6; often passive, 43, 
note, 1 ; nom. of gerund, 43, note 2 ; 
purpose expressed by, 43, 9; when 
used, 45, 1. 

gerundive, 43, 7 ; how to change ge- 
rund to gerundive, 43, 8 ; purpose ex- 
pressed by, 43, 9; when not used, 45, 1. 

governing word, often omitted in 
Indirect Narration, 129, 8. 



habeo, with perf. part., 50, 13. 

he, She, it, expressed by is, ille, hie, 87, 2, 

he came from his home in Italy 
how expressed, 83, 6. 

hendiadys, p. 165, &. 
hie, dem. pro., 88, 3, 6. 
hie, of ten used for pers. pron. of 3rdpers., 
87,2. 

hindering, constr. of verbs of, 22, 2. 
historical inf., . r -5, 4; pres. indie., 34. 
historical tenses, 19, i. 
hunai, 82, 1. 



iamdudum, with pres., 34, 3. 
iampridem, 34, 3. 
Idem, use of, 90, 12. 
idiomatic, translation, 156, 3; uses of 
ut, as, 118, 6. 



idioms, in the use of words, 156 ; in 
Latin syntax, 139 ; in uses of si, 141, 5. 

Idus (Ides), derivation of, 147, 2. 
if, introducing an indirect question, 30,2. 
ille, uses of, 87, 2 ; 88, 5, 6 ; 89, 7. 
imperative future, 27, 8. 
imperfect indie., uses of, 35, 4, note. 

impersonal verbs, 38, 2, 3; 66, 3; 
70, 2 ; 72, 10. 

in, prep., appendix (p. 196); in my house, 

84, 7 ; in the city of Rome, 83, 6. 
indigeo, construction of, 81, 3, note, 
indignus, construction of, 81, 6. 

indirect narration, 127, 1 ; 131 ; 
main verb in inf., 127, 2; pronouns, 
128, 3, note and 131, 1, (3); adj. 
and adv. clauses, 128, 4; 131, 1, (2); 
tenses of dep. clauses, 128, 4, note 
1; imperative of direct = subj. of in- 
direct, 128, 5 ; 131, 1, (5) ; rhetorical 
questions in direct in indie, are in inf. 
in indirect, 128, 6; 131, 1 ? (6); other 
questions are in subj. in indirect, 128, 6. 

indirect question, 30; 32. 

infinitive, 55, 1 ; 55, 2 ; historical, 55, 
4 ; subject of inf., 55, 5 ; tenses of, 56 ; 
of exclamation, 58, 15 ; in Lat. does 
not express a purpose, 110, 3; fut, 
inf. pass., how formed, 41, 3. 

inquit, 7, 4. 
in spite of, 115, 11. 
instead of, 108, note, 
instrument, ablative of, 74, 5. 

in susplcionem venio, used as the 
passive of suspicor, 114, 8. 

interest, computation of, 154, 5. 

interest and refert, constr. of, 66, 4. 

interrogative sentences, intro- 
duced by -ne, nonne, num, 28 ; interrog. 
pronouns and adverbs, 28, 5. 

intransitive verbs, how used in pas-. 
sive, 38, 2 ; 46, 5 ; 72, 10, 



INDEX. 



249 



intransitive verbs, compounded 
with certain preps., become transitive, 
39, 7, 8. 

ipse, 90, 13 ; 92, 6. 

is, 87, 2. 

iste, 88, 4. 

it, expressed by is, ea, id, 87, 2. 

It is said that I, dicor, 38, i. 

It is thought that 1 , putor, 38, 1. 

itur, impersonal, 38, 2. 

iubeo, constr. of, 16, 1, note. 

iuxta, adverbial in comparative clause, 
constr. of, 116, 1. 

K. 

kalendae, 147, 2. 



latter, how expressed, 88, 6. 

law of sequence of tenses, 19 ; 20. 

leap year, 148, 8. 

less than ten years old, how ex- 
pressed, 86, 4. 

levo, constr. of, 74, 3. 

libero, constr. of, 74, 3. 

licet (conjunction), constr. of, 114, 9. 

licet (verb), construction of, 33 ; 70, 2. 

literal translation, a test of Latin, p. 
190, .4. 

local clauses, 100, 10, 1 ; 102, 1. 

locative case, 82, 1. 

M. 

means, abl. of, 74, 5. 
measures and weights, 153. 
memini, with pres. inf., 58, 12; with 

gen., 65, 2. 
metaphor, p. 173. 
middle, how transl. in Latin, 60, (e), 
mihi in mentem venit, constr. of, 

65, 2, note 1. 



mille, often used for an indef. number, 
145, 7. 

minor, constr. of, 72, 9. 

minus, indecl. with numerals, 77, 4. 

misereor, constr. of, 66, 2, note 2. 

miseret, constr. of, 66, 3. 

miseror, constr. of, 65, 2. 

modal verbs, 18, 3 ; 18, 4. 

months, names of, 147, 3. 

more than ten years old, how ex- 
pressed, 86, 4. 

motion along 1 , 84, 8. 

motion from, 83, 4. 

motion to, 83, 4. 

must, how expressed, 33, 4, note 1 
and note 2 ; 45, 4. 

N. 

names of months, 147, 3. 
nature, how expressed, 32, 1. 
-ne, use of, 28, 2. 
ne, 12, 2 and note. 
nedum, p. 203, g. 
neither . . .' . nor ; nee nee, or neque 

. . . neque ; but in an ut-clause, neve . . . 

neve (neu neu), 16, 4. 

nescio quis, 96, 6, (ft). 

neu, or neve, 13, 6 ; 16, 4. 

nihil, with gen., 60, 3. 

nimis, with gen., 60, 3. 

nisi forte, 121, 7. 

Nones, 147, 2. 

non modo sed ne quidem, p. 

202, d. 

nonne, 28, 3. 
non quo, 114, 6. 
non quod, 114, 6. 
nostrum and nostri, difference, GO, 3, 

note, 
not, in a final clause, how expressed, in, 

2; 16, 3 ; in a clause of consequence, 1 i, 1. 
notes on tenses, 34. 



250 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



notwithstanding, 115, 11. 

noun or adj., with modal inf., 18, 4. 

noun-clauses, 98, 3 ; 99, 4-7 ; 100, 8. 

num, use of, 28, 4. 

number, how expressed, 32, 1. 

O. 

Ob (on account of), prep, with ace., 193, 4. 

objective gen., 62, 3. 

oblique narration, 4, note 3 ; virtual, 

137. See Indirect Narration. 
Odio esse, passive of odi, 115, 9, note. 
of, not sign of gen. , 60, 4. 
Old, how expressed, 86, 4. 
one, the, . . . .the other, 89, 6, (b). 
opus est, constr. of, 81, 4 and note. 
or, 29, 6 ; 16, 4. 
oratio obliqua, 4, note 3. 
order, rules of, p. 176. 
ordinals, 144, 5. 
Ought, how expressed, 33, 3 ; 45, 4. 
own, 90, 13. 

P. 

participle, defined and derived, 47,1, 2. 
participle, expresses various relations, 
47, 3 ; 48, note. 

participle, often stands for a co-ordi- 
nate verb, 48, 4. 

participle, present active, 47, 2 ; 
gov. gen., 64, note 1 ; gov. ace., 64, 
note 1 ; pres. pass., trans, by rel. 
clause, 142, 8. 

participle, future pass., 142, 9; fut. 
act., 53. 

partitive gen., 60, 3. 
parum, with gen., 60, 3. 
past part, act., 49, 9. 
pello, constr. of, 74, 3. 
per, with expression of time, 86, 2, note, 
perfect indie., constr. of, 20, note ; 35, 
5,6. 



perf. inf., after might, could, ought, 

33,5. 
perf. part, act., substitutes for, 49, 

9 ; 107, 4. 

perfect part, pass., 47, 2, c- 50, 14. 
perf. part, pass., with habeo, 50, 13. 
perinde, lie, l. 
period, the Latin, p. 186. 

periphrastic conjugation, 45, 2; 

53, 1. 

personification, p. 169, 2. 
personal pronouns, 87, l, 2 , when 

expressed, 87, 1. 
peto, constr. of, 39, 7, note, 
phrases, followed by quin, 22, 4. 
piget, constr. of, 66, 3. 
pity, constr. of verbs of, 65, 2. 
plenus, constr. of, 81, 6. 
pluperfect indie., 35, 7. 
plus, with words of number, 77, 4 ; dis- 
tinguished from magis and amplius, 78, 

7, note. 

poenitet, constr. of, 66, 3. 
posthabeo, constr. of, 72, 9. 
postquam, constr. of, 102, 4 ; supplies 

place of perf. part, act;, 103, 4, note ; 

usually takes perf. indie., 102, 4. 
postulo, constr. of, 39, 7, note, 
potential subjunctive, 24, 1, e. 
potior, constr. of, 80, 1. 
praeditus, constr. of, 81. 6. 
prepositions, p. 193 ; with words of 

time, 85, 1 ; with noun in-ing, p. 193. 

pres. part, act., 47, 2; meaning of, 

48, 5 ; equivalent to an abstract noun, 

48,6. 
present in Eng. = fut. in Latin, 103, 5, 

note 2 ; pres. in Latin = past, in Eng. , 

103, 5, note 1. 
prevent, verbs signifying to, constr. of, 

22,2. 
price, how expressed, 63, 4 ; 63, 4, note ; 

79, 12. 



251 




primary tenses, 

priusquam, 104, 7, S^^^^parated, 

105, note. 
probare, constr. of, 72, 9. 
pronouns, personal, 87, 1 ; of third 

pers., 87, 2. 
pronouns, demonstrative, 88, 3; 

89 ; reflexive, 91, 1. 
proper names, how rendered, p. 188, 2. 
provided that, 125, 4. 
provideo, constr. of, 72, 7. 
pudet, constr. of, 66, 3. 
purpose, with gerund, 43, 9. 
purpose, various ways of expressing, 

41, 2 ; 43, 9 ; 44 ; 110, 3. 
putor, 38, 1. 

Q. 

qua, difference in qua, quo, ubi, 102, 1. 

quaero, constr. of, 39, 7, note. 

quality, gen. of, 62, 1 ; abl. of, 62, 1. 

quam, 76, 1 ; 78, 9. 

quam pro, 78, 8. 

quamquam, 114, 9 ; 115, 12. 

quamvis, 114, 9. 

quantity (or amount), gen. of, 60, 3. 

quantum, with gen., 60, 3. 

quasi, 118, 4. 

question, direct, 28 ; indirect, 30 ; 32, 
1; in oblique narration, .128, 6. 

qui, rel. pronoun, 8, 1 ; correlative, 10,1 ; 
restrictive, 112, 8; causal, 113, 4, 5; 
final, 109, 2 ; consecutive, 110, 5 ; con- 
cessive, 115, 10. 

quia, 113, 2. 

quidam, 96, 6, note 1. 

quidem, 96, 6, note 2. 

quilibet, 95, 2. 

qmppe^qui, 113, 4, note. 
quiS (any), 94, 1 ; 28, 5 (interrog.). 
quisnam, 97, (e). 

quisquam, 95, 3 ; disting. from ullus, 
95,3. 



quisque, 96, 6, c ; 93, 7, note. 

quivis, 95, 2. 

quo, for ut, 12, 3. 

quo eo, 118, 5. 

quoad, 103, 5, 6. 

quod, 99, 6 ; 113, 2. 

quominus, 22, 2. 

quoniam, 113, 2. 

quum, concessive, 108, 6 ; causal, 106, 
1 ; 113, 3 ; temporal, 106, 1 ; = instead 
of, 108, note; =although, 108, 6; 
=quoties, 107, 5 ;= whenever, 35, 7, and 
107,5. 

quum primum, 102, 4. 
R. 

rather, how transl., 78, 9. 

reason, how expressed, 32, 1. 

reciprocal pronoun, 93, 9. 

refert, constr. of, 66, 4. 

reflexive pronoun, 91, 1. 

relation, of place, 82 ; of time, 85. 

relative pronoun, use of, 8, l ; not 
omitted in Lat., 8, 2 ; agreement with 
pred. , 8, 3 ; referring to nouns of diff . 
gender, 8, 4 ; with verbs of saying, 11, 
3 ; in final clauses, 109, 2 ; in causal 
clauses, 113, 4, 5 ; in concessive clauses, 
115, 10. 

remember, verbs signifying to, with 
gen., 65, 2. 

remind, verbs signifying to, with gen., 
65, 2. 

respect, abl. of, 79, 11. 

rest, of the troops, how expressed, 

61, e. 

re-translation, p. 156, 3. 
rhetorical character, of Latin, p. 

190, 4, c. 

rhythm, p. 184, 9. 
Roman Calendar, 147 ; money, 

150 ; weights and measures, 153. 
rure, 73, 2. 
ruri, 82, 1. 
rus, 83, 5. 



252 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



satis, with gen., 60, 3. 

se, 92, 2; subject of inf., 92, 3; may 

refer to obj., 92, 4. 
second, first, third, 144, 4. 

secondary, tenses, 19, l; sequence, 
20, 2. 

sentences, classes of, 98. 
sescenti, often indef., 145, 7,8. 
sestertia, 150, 3. 
sestertius, 150, 1. 
she, 87, 2. 

Should, 45, 4 ; 33, 3. 
si clause, 119 ; 122 ; idiomatic uses of 
141, 5. 

sicut, 117, 3. 

similis, with gen. or dat., 64, note 2. 

simple sentences, 98, 1. 

Simul, simul ac, , 102, 4. 

sin, p. 121, 6. 

si non, 120, 3. 

sive. . . . sive (seu. . . .seu), 121, 5 ; 202, b. 

SO, used with verb, adeo ; with an adj. or 

adv., tarn, 15, note. 
SOlvo, constr. of, 74, 3, 
space, expressed by ace., 84, 9 ; abl., 84, 

9, note. 

special idioms of Latin syntax, 
139. 

spring from, const., 74, 4. 

Statuo, when followed by an ut-clause, 
16, 5. 

Strive, verbs signifying to, constr. of, 
16,5. 

subject of verb, agreement of, 1. 

subjective gen., 62, 3. 

subjunctive, in simple sentences, 24, 
1 ; of wish, 24, 1 (a) ; command, 24, 1 (b) ; 
to soften an assertion, 24, 1 (c) ; de- 
liberation, 24, 1, (rf); expressing duty or 
possibility, 24, 1, (e) ; in final clauses, 
12, 1-4; 13, 5, 6 ; consecutive clauses, 




ut-clause after 
> 16 ; after verbs of 
verbs of doubting 
and hindering, 22; with utinam, 25; 
indirect question, 30 ; temporal clauses, 
102, 3; causal and concessive, 113; 
comparative, 117, b ; conditional, 120 ; 
in oblique narration, 128, 4 128, 5; 
128, 6; 129, 7; of virtual oblique narra- 
tion and assimilation, 137. 

substitute, for perf. part, act., 49,9; 
107. 

superlative, in relative clauses, 9, 7. 
Supine, in -turn, 41, 1 ; expressing a 

purpose, 41, 2 ; with -iri, forms fut. inf. 

pass. ; in -tu, 42, 4. 

suus, uses of, 93, 7. 

T. 

taedet, constr. of, 66, 3. 

tametsi, 114, 9. 

tanquam, tanquam si, 118, 4. 

tantum abest ut, 15, 5. 

tantum, with gen., 60, 3. 

temporal clauses, 102, 6. 

ten years before, 86, 4. 

tenses, classified, 19, 1; notes on, 34; 

of infinitive, 56; of inf. in indirect 

narration, 127, 3. 

that too, 90, 11. 

the the, 78, 6, note ; 118, 5. 

time, expressed by abl. abs., 51, 2; 

when, 85, 1 ; within, 85, 1 ; duration 

of, 86, 2. 

to his father at Rhodes, 83, 6. 
top of the hill, summus collis, 61 , (e). 
towns, constr. of the names of, 82, 2 ; 

83, 84. 

tu quidem, 89, 7. 

two accusatives in act., 39, 6; 

40, 9. 

two nominatives in pass., 40, 9, 



INDEX. 



253 




1. 

clauses, 



u. 

ubi, quo, qua, differ 

Ubi, constr. of, 102, 2; 
109, 2, note. 

ullus, after negative, 95, 3, 4 ; diff. be- 
tween quisquam and ullus, 95, 3. 

unde, final, 109, 14, note. 

unless, nisi, 120, 3. 

until, 103, 5, 6. 

USUS est, constr. of, 81, 4. 

Ut, in noun-clauses, y9,"~*7 in temporal, 
102, 4 ; final, 12 ; consecutive, 14 ; con- 
cessive, 114, 9; with verbs of asking, 
16, 1 ; idiomatic uses of, 118, 6. 

utinam, 25. 

utpote qui, 113, 4, note. 

ut primum, 102, 4. 

ut quisque, 118, 5, &. 

utor, constr. of, 80, 1. 

utut, 114, 9. 

utrum. . . .an, 121, 5, note ; 29, 6 ; 30 ; 
121, 5. 

V. 

vel, p. 202, 6. 

velut, velutsi, 118, 4. 

ventum est, 38, 2. 

verbal nouns, 157, 4. 



verbs, gov. gen., 65; dat., 70 and 71; 
abl., 74, 3; 80, 1-3; 81, 4-5; ace. 
and gen., 65, 1, 2 ; ace. and dat., 71, 4 ; 
two datives, 69, 8. 

very, 78, 9. 

vescor, constr. of, 80, 1. 

vestrum and vestri, distinguished, 

see 60, 3, note. 
veto, with inf., 16, 1, note, 
videor, 55, 5, note, 
virtual oblique narration, 137. 

W. 

want, adjs. of, 74, 4 ; verbs of, 80, 3. 
weights and measures (Roman), 

153. 
what, 10, 10 ; relating to a whole 

sentence, quae res, id quod, 9, 9. 
whatever, 115, 11. 
Whether, in indirect question, 30, 2. 
whether. . . .or, 29, 6 ; 121, 5. 
while, 103, 5. 

without, how translated, 139. 
who .... not = but, 11, 4. 

Y. 

Yes, how expressed, 28, 2. - 



PAET II. 

EXERCISES ON CAESAR, LIVY, AND CICERO. 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

PART II. 

EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 

EXERCISE I. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. I and 2). 

This nation (hi) surpasses all its neighbors in courage and love 
of fighting; and, considering their population and military strength 
(copiae) they carry on very many wars. They are brave because 
they have never imported those luxuries 1 which tend to effeminate 
(170, 6) ; and hence they are able not only to repel an enemy 2 but 
as aggressors 8 to invade others. They are of the opinion (vb.) 
that^ considering their courage and military reputation, their terri- 
tory is too confined (78, 9) ; and this is an abundant source of 
dissatisfaction to them. 

l eae res; p. 161, i. ^hostes suis finibus (p. 74, $) prohibere. z bellum 
prius finibus (dat. ; p. 71, 4) aliorum injerre. 

EXERCISE II. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell Gall., B. /., cc. j and 4). 

Urged by these considerations (161, 2), he resolved to seize 
upon the supreme power. He had already held the highest political 
office for many years in his own country ; he was extremely popular 
(superl.} with the lower orders; and there is no doubt that 1 he had 
very considerable influence among neignboring states. If he had 
been able to win the army to his support (use se), he would have 
accomplished his object 2 ; but notice of his design was laid before 
the magistrates, and the guilty wretch 3 was condemned 4 to be 
burned to death. 

J p. 22, i. p. 120, 2 ; 32, i. 3 use pron. ; p. 187, i, end. 4 say 
u to condemn a person to the punishment that," aliquem in 
poenas condemnare ut.... 

255 



256 LATIN PROSH COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE III. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 1-4; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

These people are very far removed from the culture and civiliza- 
tion of other lands ; but they are little resorted to by merchants, 
who would have imported among them many luxuries 1 which might 
make them effeminate. As it is (nunc), they are pre-eminent for 
courage and are incessantly engaged in wars, either offensive or 
defensive. Their territory, as judged by their population, * is small, 
and they have resolved 3 to abandon it with all their forces and to 
attempt to get possession of the coujitry which lies to the north- 
west. This design (they declare) will be easily accomplished, 
because they are superior to their neighbors in courage and military 
strength. 4 

l res (161, 2). ^pronumero hominum. 3 p. 17, 5, note. 4 p. 7, 4. 

EXERCISE IV. 
(Base don Caes., De Bell Gall, B. /., cc. 5 and 6). 

They had formed the resolve 1 of quitting their country, and they 
now proceeded to prosecute their design. The neighboring towns 
were induced 2 to co-operate in the plan and join them. 3 These 
were persuaded to set fire to their private buildings, in order that 
all hope of returning might be banished for ever and their minds 
steeled (173,3) to face 4 every danger that might confront 5 them. 
A general 6 rendezvous was appointed on the banks of the Rhone, 
and there, on March 2oth, 7 the gathering took place. 

J p. 157, (c) and 17, 5, note. 2 p. 38,3. 3 p. 16, i. *ad. 5 i7o, 8. 
6 say all were ordered to come together to, &c. 7 p. 148, 5. 

EXERCISE V. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 7 and 8). 

His answer to the embassy was as follows (use hie): "You 
ask 1 me for permission 2 to pass through our province, and you 
assure 3 me that, while upon your march, you will abstain from acts 



ON CAEsAft. 257 

of hostility against our people. 4 That permission I cannot grant 
in accordance with the established practice of this country (say 
Rome*) ; nor can I think that people as ill-affected towards us as 
you are (p. 3, 8, note), will abstain from outrages upon us when 
opportunity offers. 6 You will never attempt a passage with my 
consent ; and if you do, I will prevent you, if I can. Desist, 
therefore, from your undertaking, 7 and return to your own people.'' 

V 1 6, i. 2 use licet (p. 33, i ; 70, 2). 3 p. 6, i. 4 p. 62, 3. 5 p. 162, 
4. 6 abl. abs. 7 p. 74, 3- 

EXERCISE VI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. L, cc. 5-8; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

This resolution once taken, 1 there were two routes by which 2 
they could leave their country. The first (170, 8) lay across the 
river ; the second, between the river and the mountain. The first 
was the easier, because 3 the river is fordable ; the second rather 
difficult, 4 because the mountain overhangs the river so lose that 
a mere handful of men (perpauci) could hold the pass against 
them. But the first led them through our province and they were 
obliged to obtain permission from us before they attempted to 
march through our territory (104, 7). Accordingly they sent an 
embassy to us to represent (use say) that they intended to quit 
(53, i) their home and country, and that, with our leave, they 
would cross the river and march through our province. We must 
now decide (they said 5 ) whether this permission could be granted 
or not. 

1 p. 157, c and 48, 7. 2 p. 74, 5. s p. 113, 2. 4 p. 78, 9. 6 p. 138,4. 

EXERCISE VII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bel/. Gall., B. /., cc. 9-12). 
Thanks (173, 3) to the lavish expenditure 1 of money, he had great 
influence among many of the neighboring states, and he had 
.bound them to his interest by many favors. In this he was led 
on by lust of supreme power, and was aiming at effecting a poli- 
tical revolution among them. But word of his intention (32, i) 
was brought to us by the natives (use barbari or a proper noun) 
who represented that it would be attended with no small peril to 



258 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

our province if we allowed (131, i, 2) their towns to be sacked and 
their children to be enslaved before our eyes. Moved by these 
remonstrances (161, 2), we saw and decided that action should 
not be deferred 2 until (104, 6) so signal a calamity should be in- 
flicted upon us ; but that we ought to lead out 2 our army and 
avenge the wrongs done to allies 3 who had always deserved well 
at our hands (173, 3). 

'P- 157, c\ 74, 5- 2 P- 45, 2. 3 p. 62, 3. 

EXERCISE VIII. 

{Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. Q-i2 j review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

Urged by these considerations, they sent ambassadors to us with 
a request 1 for aid. 2 Their towns had been taken by storm ; their 
lands had been ravaged with the sword ; and there was no possi- 
bility 3 of their escaping death themselves, unless we came to their 
assistance. 4 They had always (they said 5 ) been well-affected towards 
us, and had rendered us important service ; and they should not on 
that account, before the eyes of our army, suffer punishment at the" 
hands of our enemies. They begged us to undertake 2 the business, 
lead forth our army, and avenge their wrongs. 

J p. 157, c and 109, 2. 2 p. 1 6, i. 3 say nee fieri poterat ut. *6g, & 
6 p. 138, 4- 

EXERCISE IX. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 13-16). 

Heaven (173, 3) occasionally concedes impunity and prosperity to 
men, even when it is meditating vengeance. 1 When the vengeance 
falls, the suffering inflicted is all the greater. 2 This, people often 
forget and they boast that they can inflict injury 2 with impunity. 
Such is the case now. Our enemies wonder that Heaven is not 
more indignant at the wrongs they have committed, and they 
promise themselves that they have no cause for fear (45, 4). They 
are annoying us and oppressing our allies, who are unable to pre- 
vent them from plundering and wasting their territories (22, 2). 
But do not forget that Heaven will exact vengeance 2 proportionate 
to their crimes, and that they will learn, by a sad 3 reversal of their 
fortunes, that God is not to be mocked (decipio). 

l p. 54, 2 and 157, c. 2 i57, c. 3 omit, as being implied; 187, i. 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 259 

EXERCISE X. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. I., cc. 13-16; review exercise 
to be done without the book). 

He saw that we would have to come up 1 with the enemy at once 
(statim). So, throwing (p. 49, 10) a bridge across the river a work 2 
of the greatest difficulty 3 he led all the forces over. Next day he 
sent out a body of cavalry to discover 4 the direction 5 the enemy had 
taken ; and it was soon ascertained that, in dismay at our sudden 
approach, they had suddenly, upon (use qmini) our crossing the 
river, decamped. After a pursuit 6 of about fifteen days, we came 
up with them at last (demuni), and delivered an attack upon their 
rear. But the ground was unfavorable, and boldly facing us, they 
repulsed our attack without difficulty. 7 

!p. 45, 2. 2 p. 9, 9. 3 p. 62, i. 4 p. 109, 2. 5 p. 32, i ; 157, 4,(a). 
6 p. 102, 4, note. 7 say easily. 

EXERCISE XI. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. L, cc. 16-18). 

There is no doubt that, 1 if Rome 2 triumphs, she will rob us also of 
our liberty. We shall not be able to restrain her. Our commons, 
therefore, hate those who favor her and favor those who hate her. 
They complain bitterly that their own chiefs have played them 
false in this matter (173, 3) ; they complain that they should be col- 
lecting corn and maintaining cavalry for men who will soon have 
power of life and death over them. Many among us have a revo- 
lutionary tendency, and these have more influence with the lower 
orders than the magistrates themselves. With a view to maintain- 
ing this influence, they have amassed a large amount of property 
to spend in bribery ; and, owing to their generosity, they enjoy 
great popularity with the people. 

x p. 22, r. 2 p. 162, 4. 

EXERCISE XII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 16-18 ; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

Now that the council is dismissed 1 for I did not wish to have 
this matter canvassed in the presence of so many witnesses (abl. 



260 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

abs.} I will declare boldly in your ear alone what I have so long 
buried in silence. All that 2 goes on (173, 3; in this camp is be- 
trayed to the enemy ; the common people accuse their magistrates 
of diminishing 3 the power of the state and of favoring Rome ; and 
none of our chiefs dare to supply you with the corn which they 
promised. They are putting us off day after day, pretending 4 that 
the corn is being collected, nay (clique j 201, a], that it is just 5 
at hand. Meanwhile, the day when you engaged to distribute 
provisions to the troops is drawing on . apace, and what to do 
(24, <r; 30, i) we know not. But if you make inquiiy, you will find 
that this story (res] is literally 5 true. 

1 use quum j 106, 2. 2 p. 30, i ; 32, I ; 3 p. 99, 6. 4 use dictitoj 
I73> 3- 5 P- 177, 4, note. 

EXERCISE XIII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 19-22}. 

If any misfortune happens 1 my brother, 2 every one will feel that 
I have been a consenting party, and we shall estrange all his friends 
in consequence. His influence is very great indeed, while mine is 
very small. Avoid, therefore, I beseech you 3 , taking severe measures 
against him ; pardon him 4 what is past, out of consideration for me ; 
warn him that you disapprove of his conduct, and set a watch upon 
him to ascertain 5 what measures he takes. 6 To this advice I am 
determined not only by (propter) my friendship for you but also 
by my regard for public opinion. 7 Do not 8 shock men's minds by 
ordering a brother to punish a brother ; do not order a friend, 
whose zeal and honor you have long tried, to put less confidence in 
you than he has been in the habit of doing. 

'p. 120,2. 2 p. 70,2. 3 p. 138,4; 1 6, i. 4 p. 71, 6. 5p. I2) j 
6 p. 30, i, and 32, i. 7 p. 62, 3. 8 p. 24, i (), note, and p. 26, 3. 

EXERCISE XIV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 19-22; review exercise, 

to be done without the book). 

Learning these facts, 1 we sent forward the horse to reconnoitre 2 
the mountain, and word was brought that the enemy had taken up 
their position right under it. From inquiries made from some pri- 
soners, 3 too, this report (161,2) was found to be correct. The general, 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 261 

therefore, summoned into his presence a member of staff (legatus) 
in whom 4 he reposed perfect confidence and who was reputed to 
have an extensive acquaintance (adj.} with the art of war. To him he 
explained that it was his intention to seize 4 the top of the hill with 
two legions and with these legions and his own army to make a 
simultaneous attack (157, c] from all sides upon the enemy. At 
daybreak, however, word was brought that the enemy had been 
seized with a panic and had decamped. 

p. 48, 7. 2 P- 109, 2, 3. 3 p. 157, c. *dat. 5 p. 53, I. 

EXERCISE XV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 23-26), 
After collecting the baggage into a single place and fortifying it 
(53) 6), he drew up his forces in three lines and then delivered his 
attack. The battle raged (157, b) from noon until far into the 
night, and no one 1 saw the back of an enemy. The horse, which 
had been thrown forward to bear 2 the brunt of the attack, after 
suffering severely, were driven in. But the infantry at once ad- 
vanced, and, after hurling their pikes from above, 3 drew their 
swords and cut their way through the enemy's line. The enemy 
in their turn now began to give ground and retreated, some of 
them to their baggage, others to the nearest hill. At each of these 
points the battle was renewed, but, after a long struggle, the 
enemy's camp was carried and they changed their line of march 
and withdrew from the scene. 4 

J P- 95, 3, note. 2 p. 1 10, 3. 3 p. 48, 7. 4 say place; 173, 3- 

EXERCISE XVI. 

(Based on Caes.) De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 13-26; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

Observing 1 that we had changed our line of march, the enemy 
ascribed our action to fear and started in pursuit. When they 
came up, they began to harass our rear, flattering themselves (say 
because they thought) that they could cut off' 2 our supplies. We 
faced about and received their attack and they immediately began 
to give ground, and at last (postremo) withdrew to a neighboring 



202 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

hill, taking up a position 3 upon the top of a ridge. There we 
surrounded and attacked them. 4 A long and fierce engagement 
took place ; 5 but, in spite of 6 the shower of pikes which they 
poured upon us from the higher ground, we carried the hill and 
captured their camp. 

J p. 49, 10. 2 p. 74, 3. 3 use finite vb. 4 p. 48, 4. 5 p. 157 (top). 
6 P 52, 5; "5 " 

EXERCISE XVII. . 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 27-30). 

To these, at our request, 1 they gave lands and equal liberty and 
equal rights with the natives; but all the rest were ordered 2 to 
give hostages and return to their homes. The burnt towns and 
villages they soon after restored ; the corn which, under the pres- 
sure of extreme necessity, they had begged from us in such 
suppliant terms, was sent them. So the war ended ; the aggressors 3 
were severely punished ; those who were aiming at sovereignty had 
to give 5 up their arms ; those who thought to make other states 
tributary, had themselves to give hostages ; and satisfaction was 
obtained for wrongs of long standing which had been heaped upon 
this nation. The submission of those was accepted who complied 
with the order to surrender their arms ; all the rest were treated as 5 
belligerents. 

J p. 48,7. 2 p. 1 68, i. 3 p. 159, (k). 4 p. 45>4- 5 use prep. pro. 

EXERCISE XVI 1 1. 

(Based o?i Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 27-30; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

Having ascertained these facts, 1 our leader sent ambassadors to 
them to treat 2 for peace. These represented to the enemy that he 
had taken this step because 3 he saw that it was for the good 4 of the 
country to end the war. That he would retire, if they would give 
hostages and return to the homes and lands they had left (135, 
2, 2). That he wished to congratulate them upon the conspicuous 
valor they had shown in the war, and to say f hat he had no desire 
to punish their states. Such were the representations mide by 
the ambassadors, who then immediately quitted the enemy's camp. 



EXERCISES ON CAESAE. 263 

A day was afterwards fixed for a general meeting. The submission 
of the enemy was accepted ; they returned to their burnt towns 
and villages and we immediately withdrew from the country 
which they had invaded. 

ip. 48, 7. 2 P- 44, note. 8 p. 113, 2. *p. 69, 8. 

EXERCISE XIX. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 31 and 32). 

The reign of this monarch was stained 1 by the grossest cruelty. 
He took the children of all the noblest in the land as 2 hostages. 
Tears could not protect them from outrage ; in his presence (52, 4) 
they sat silent, in the deepest melancholy, with bowed heads and eyes 
fixed upon the ground. At times (interdum) he actually went so 
far as to put them to the torture, and his tyranny seemed to be 
almost intolerable. Everything must be done 3 at his nod and beck. 
Many sought aid in flight and emigrated to other lands ; but from 
this relief he attempted to deter them by the severest punishments ; 
and, if their intention (53,1) to quit the country was betrayed to him, 
their condition was more terrible than before. They would have 
gone and asked assistance from our parliament ; but he had bound 
all the nobles by oath not to ask 4 assistance from any one ; and his 
own influence with us at that time was very considerable. 

1 P- 173, 3- 2 P- 2, 6. 3 p. 45, 2. *p. 12, 2. 

EXERCISE XX. 

(Based on Caes.^De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 31 and 32; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

At this assembly he made the following remarks (157, c): "We 
have lost by our defeat all our nobility ; we have given hostages ; 
we have bound ourselves by oath to supply the victors with lands 
for settlement. They can not possibly be induced 1 not to ask more. 
Those who have settled here will become enamored of our mode of 
living and of the resources of our country and these 2 are not to be 
mentioned in comparison with their own and they will summon 
pthers to cross the river and settle by their side. Shall 3 we, who 



264 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

have already been vanquished two or three times in the field, whose 
spirits are broken by misfortune, be able to deter them from cross- 
ing 4 or refuse perpetual submission to their dominion ? We must 
do I doubt not 5 what others have done ; we must leave the 
country, while the opportunity offers (abl. abs.)" 

*say nor can it be persuaded to them. 2 use relative. 3 p. 24, I 
(d). *p. 22, 2. 5 p. 138, 4, and 22, i. 

EXERCISE XXI. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell Gall, B. /., cc. 33-37). 

It would have been a menace to the safety 1 of the Roman Empire 
if large bands of Germans had crossed the Rhine and settled in 
Gaul. They were almost invincible in the field, highly trained in 
the exercise of arms, and so uncivilized that they had not slept 
under a roof for fourteen years together ; they would soon have 
taken possession of the whole country and made it tributary. 
An invasion (use vb.) of the Roman province would soon have 
followed and a hasty march into Italy itself. The Roman Senate 
had previously passed a decree 2 ordering the Governor of Gaul, for 
the time being, to defend the allies of Rome in Gaul from outrage. 
It was felt to be a dishonor to the empire, and not very advan- 
tageous either, to wink at their wrongs. It was the universal 3 
opmion that the Germans would reach an intolerable pitch of 
presumption. 

'say// would have been dangerous to. 2 p. 16, 5. 3 use omnes, 
and a verb. 

EXERCISE XXII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 33-37 J review exercise, to 
be done without the book}. 

The answer given to this request 1 was as follows : " If I had 
wanted you, I would have come to you (120,2) ; if you want me, you 
must come to me (24, 2, 3). I would not venture to come to you with- 
out an army ; and I can not collect an army without great difficulty." 
To this we sent the following answer : " You have received consid- 
erable kindness at the hands of the Roman people ; is this the 
requital you make? We invite you to a conference to discuss 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 265 

matters of the highest moment to the country ; you decline and 
think that you have nothing to learn, These, then, are the par- 
ticulars (p. 161, i) we require of you (p. 8, 2} : In the first place, not 2 
to harass our allies with your bands ; in the second place, not to 
occupy any more land ; in the third place (/;#), to restore all 
your hostages ; and in the last place (postremo\ not to hamper us 
in the exercise of our just rights. If you refuse these demands, 
you must try the fortune of war. 

*p. 48, 6. 2 p. 16, i. 

EXERCISE XXIII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall^ B. /., cc. 38-41). 

Here a sudden panic completely demoralized the army. It 
originated * in the following manner : Certain parties who had fol- 
lowed us from the capital out of friendship for some of the officers, 
and with no great experience of campaigning, begged permission 
to leave 2 the camp. Different reasons were alleged. They were 
afraid, they said (i 38, 4), of the enemy whom we were soon to engage ; 
we had never made trial of them in battle before. They had ascer- 
tained from our merchants that they were men of giant stature, 
and of inconceivable eagerness for war. Their scowling faces and 
fierce glances were enough to daunt 3 any foe. They confined them- 
selves to their camp in the swamps for a long time without giving 
any one a chance at them (139, i) ; and then, making a sudden on- 
slaught (49, 10), they routed their adversaries not more by courage 
than by admirably-devised strategy.* Between us and them inter- 
vened narrow defiles and far-stretching forests through which 
provisions could not conveniently be carried ; and the men would 
mutiny and refuse to advance. 

*use orior. 2 p. 16, i. 3 omit the adjs., as implied (187, i). *by 
reason and policy (165, b}. 

EXERCISE XXIV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 38-41 ; review exercise ', to 
be done without the book). 

On receiving this intelligence, 1 our veteran 2 commander was a 
good deal disturbed. He saw that immediate action must be taken 



266 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

and at once summoned a council of his officers, admitting to it 
both captains of foot and captains of horse. When all had entered 
his tent, he rebuked them sharply in these words : " I am. afraid 
that some of you have wandered from the line of your duty 3 and 
are guilty of gross presumption (use arroganter facere) when you 
dictate to your general. I will take charge of those concerns 
which cause you so much doubt. Every preparation has been 
made. A supply of corn has been obtained. To-morrow night I 
will break up camp and begin the march. I wish to see, as 
quickly as possible, if 4 cowardice or a sense of duty will weigh with 
you most." The delivery of this speech was followed by a remark- 
able change in the hearers. They thanked the general for the 
confidence he reposed 5 in them ; they declared that they had never 
felt any doubt as to his doing his duty ; and they begged him 
to accept their apologies for the cowardice they had shown. 

l p. 48, 7. 2 p. 169, 4. 3 omit line. 4 p. 30, 2. 5 use quod. 

EXERCISE XXV. 
(Based on Cacs., De Bell. Gall, B. /., cc. 42-47}. 

At about equal distances from the two 1 camps there was a level 
plain of considerable length, in the midst of which stood a rising 
knoll of ground. This was the scene of the meeting between the 
Roman and German leaders. A body often 2 picked horsemen was 
in attendance upon each general and two larger bodies of horse 
were stationed at a distance of two hundred yards. The interview 
was held on horseback and the matters in debate 3 between the two 
nations were discussed at length. But while the conference was in 
progress, word was brought that the German horse were approach- 
ing the knoll and using their lances upon the Romans. The 
Roman leader had perfect confidence in his men, because, in fear of 
treachery, he had mounted certain private soldiers of the tenth 
legion on horseback and knew that an engagement might be 
hazarded without risk. Still, he gave the order to retreat, for fear 
that in case of the enemy's defeat he might be charged with 
having betrayed them. So the conference ended. 

ip. 145, (c). 2 p. 144, 6, (a). 3 p. 169, 3. 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 267 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 42-47 ; review exercise, to 
be done without the book}. 

Learning of our arrival, he sent envoys to make 1 the following 
representations on his behalf : " I have crossed the river (he said) 2 
not of my own motion but at the request of this nation. They 
have assigned me a settlement and given hostages of their own 
free will. If I have demanded tribute, it is only what the victor 
usually demands of the vanquished. 3 Your friendship should be an 
honor and protection to me instead of* an injury. If I bring over 
a large following, it is in self-defence (157, c) and not with the inten- 
tion of acting on the offensive. I am not invading ; I am defending. 
I was the first-comer ; why, then, are you encroaching on my terri- 
tory? I shall not desist from this enterprise. I have defeated 
these men ; and, if you wish to bring the matter to an issue, I can 
defeat you." 

J p. 109, 2. 2 p. 7, 4, note. s p. 166, d. 4 use non. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. L, cc. 47-54). 

At a given signal (52, 6), therefore, our whole front line advanced at 
a run to attack the enemy's left ; this was the point at which 1 he 
showed the least strength. But such was the suddenness and 
rapidity of his advance (vb.} that there was no possibility of our 
using our pikes. It was simply (177, 4, note) a hand to hand 
engagement and contested with the utmost desperation on both 
sides. The enemy's left was beaten and completely routed ; but his 
right owing to 2 their numerical superiority pressed us hard, and 
it was not till the third, line was advanced to our relief 3 that he 
gave way. 'I he rout then became general and the flight was un- 
interrupted until the river was reached. Over this a small number 
swam ; a few more crossed in boats ; the remainder were cut 
down by the swords of our cavalry. 

*use ubi. 2 use quod; 113, 2. 3 p. 105, 8, note ; 69, 8. 



68 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XXVIII. 
(Based oil Caes. , De BclL GalL , B. I., cc. 

On the same day at sunset some of our cavalry, in pursuit (vb.~] of 
the German horse, fell in accidentally 1 with the general's friend, who 
had been taken prisoner by the enemy a rescue (161, 2) which 
caused us as much satisfaction as did the victory itself. In the 
presence of all (52, 4), he told the story of his escape from death 
(32, i). When the party in charge of him observed that their army 
was in full flight, they dragged him away ironed as he was from 
the field ; and they did not pause in their flight until intercepted by 
our cavalry (105, 8, note). His life had been spared 2 in the first 
instance by the kindness of fortune. Three times had his captors 
(159, k) cast lots to determine whether 3 he should be burned at 
the stake or granted a reprieve ; and three times had he found 
deliverance (157, c] by the favor of the lot. 

1 say it happened that; p. 166, d. 2 p. 72, 10. 3 p. 30, 2. 

EXERCISE XXIX. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. GalL, B. I., cc. 47-54). 

For five successive days (86, 2, note) the German leader kept his 
army in the camp under the hill, and refused to fight. The reason 
was this : 7 he Germans, in accordance with their custom, had 
consulted their women as to whether 1 it was to their advantage to 
engage the enemy or not. The answer came (157, <:) that it was 
not the divine will that their army should win, if it engaged before 
the new moon (135, 2, note i). On the sixth day, however, our 
general drew up his troops in three lines in the face of the enemy, 
and then, and not till then when there was no escape the re- 
luctant chief' 2 moved out his army from the camp. 

J p. 30, 2. *p. 187, i, end. 

EXERCISE XXX. 
(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. /., cc. 47-54; review exercise, to 

be done without the book}. 

He commissioned the envoy to take the following message to the 
King : " You have received from our government the most munifi- 
cent gifts and the style and title of king ; but your coming here 



EXERCISES ON CAESAlt. 

with such a large following must lead us 1 to suspect that your pur- 
pose is to invade (54, 2) our territory and crush us. Retire, therefore, 
from this country. Withdraw your army and do not allow it here- 
after to cross the river. Restore these people their hostages and, 
in return for our many good offices to you, treat them as 2 friends 
and not as enemies. What do you mean ? It is not our way to 
abandon our allies, and I do not think that we shall allow them to 
pay tribute to you. They have lent assistance to us in times gone 
by and they may now avail themselves of our assistance, if they 
will." 

l use quod ( \ 58,/). 2 use/ra 

EXERCISE XXXI. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II., cc. 1-5). 

After an earnest exhortation, 1 he dismissed the envoys. He had 
learned the following 2 particulars from them : That their neighbors, 
who possessed 3 great influence and great military strength, were 
forming a confederacy (157, c] against Rome, 4 partly because they 
were 3 of a fickle and changeable disposition, partly because they 
were indignant 3 at the sight of a Roman army wintering within 
their borders ; that they were hiring troops, mustering their bands 
and drawing their forces to a general rendezvous ; and that even 
their own kinsmen had joined the league. He saw therefore that it 
was no time for hesitation ; and that, unless he could divide the 
enemies' forces, 1 he would nave to engage them in overwhelming 
numbers (173, 3). 5 The necessary supplies were soon collected, 
the camp was struck, and in fifteen days he was in their territory. 
Summer had just commenced and there was an abundant supply 
of forage in the fields a fact of the utmost importance to the 
general safety. 6 

J usevb. ; p. 49, 8. 2 p. 88, 3. 3 p.i28,4. *p. 16^,4. 5 p.5,2;i24, 
b ; 131, 2. 6 p. 66, 4. 

EXERCISE XXXII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell., GalL, B. IL , cc. 1-5 ; review exercise, to 

be done without the book). 

They conferred upon the King himself the supreme command 
and promised 1 to raise him a levy of one hundred thousand men. 
This could easily be effected if a.ll the states supplied the quota each 



270 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

had engaged to send (8, 2). Scarcely was 2 the muster complete, when 
the King made all haste to lead his army over the river ; and he 
pitched his camp upon the extreme confines of his kingdom. He 
said that it was of the utmost consequence 3 to all that the forces of 
the enemy should be kept apart 4 and that he himself should not be 
reduced to the necessity (vb.} of engaging at one time such a 
powerful force. He therefore ordered one of his kinsmen a man 
who by reason of his courage enjoyed great influence with him 
to lay 5 waste the enemies' land, drive out the inhabitants and 
prevent them from fortifying a camp a thing 6 which the uniform 
tenor 7 of the rumors showed they intended to do (53, i). 

1 P- 7j 3- 2 P- J02, 4. 3 66, 4. *inf. ; p. 4 (examples). 5 p. 16, i. 
6 p. 9,9. 7 say tf/// 173, 3. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IL , cc. 6-10). 

Upon this town they immediately began 1 a furious assault, 2 with 
the intention of carrying it 3 by storm if they possibly could and 
putting all the inhabitants to the sword. 3 They had already 
devastated the surrounding country ; supplies had begun to fail 
the defenders, 4 and the enemy had some hope, 5 by a short delay, 
of winning 6 the place. Their numbers were very great and, when 
they had surrounded the town, their encampment as indicated by 
the smoke of their camp-fires, was eight miles 7 broad. They began 
the assault (157, c} with a shower of stones and spears 8 directed 
against the wall, which was soon stripped of defenders ; then, 
locking their bucklers, they advanced to the rampart and endea- 
vored to undermine it. Night at last put an end to the assault, 
but it was with the greatest difficulty that the town held out 
against it. Next day the enemy departed and hastened with all 
their forces to the river. 

J p. 142, 6. 2 p. 157, 4 (4 3 p. 53, i. *7o, i. 5 68, 3. 6 p. 7, 3, 
note. 7 p. 84,9. 8 p. 50, 14; 173, 3. 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. II. , cc. 6-10 ; review exercise, 

to be done without the book}. 

Our lines were drawn up on a hill where there was just room 
enough for the army to take up its position (157, 4 






EXERCISES ON CAESAR, 272 

the hill was a ditch, and a fort was built at the end of each ditch. The 
intention of these last was to guard 1 against our being surrounded. 
Between our camp and the enemy lay a marsh of inconsiderable 
extent and we waited under arms to see if 2 they would attempt to 
pass it, intending, if they did so, to attack 3 them on ground so 
unfavorable for forming 4 an order of battle. Meanwhile the king 
resolved to test at once the military efficiency of the enemy and the 
confidence of his own troops. Accordingly, he led all his horse 
across the marsh and drew them up before the enemy's camp. 
Seeing this, 5 the enemy also drew out his forces and a sharp engage- 
ment ensued. 6 But they soon found that they were inferior to us 
and led their forces back to camp. 

1 p. 12, 2, note. 2 p. 141, 5- 3 P- 53, i- *P- 69, 9, note 2. 



EXERCISE XXXV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. 77., cc. 11-15). 

Word of their departure was brought 1 the King by 2 scouts, but 
he refused to stir that day from his trenches. Next day, at the first 
streak of dawn, he sery; out the cavalry to ascertain 3 the motive 4 of 
the enemy's departure and to harass 3 the rear of the fugitives. This 
was done and a considerable slaughter was made as long as daylight 
lasted. At sunset, in accordance with their instructions, they 
returned to the camp. Meantime siege-engines were being 
collected and we were determined to take some of their towns by 
storm. But these, thoroughly alarmed by the speed of our move- 
ments, next night sent envoys to us to state 3 that they were willing 
to surrender their arms and give hostages. They inveighed bitterly 
against the ring-leaders of the conspiracy who, seeing (49, 10) 
what utter ruin they had brought upon themselves and their 
friends, 4 had fled the country. They begged the King to show 5 his 
usual (use soleo) humanity and not reduce them to servitude. 

1 p. 157, ^. 2 p. 74, 5, note i. 3 109, 2. 4 p. 32, i. 5 p. 16, i. 



272 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II. , cc. 11-15; review exercise, 

to be done without tJie book}. 

Next night, in order to prevent 1 them from recovering their 
presence of mind, we followed them up' 2 and fell upon them as they 
were pitching 3 their camp. They stood their ground and bravely 
* received our attack. Thereupon it was resolved to carry 4 their 
camp by storm. So a mound was raised, towers planted, and all 
the engines useful for a siege were prepared. When all was ready, 5 
the enemy, now in the greatest alarm, sent forth from the camp all 
their old men and all their women and children, to beg that they 
might be spared 6 and their submission accepted. Issuing from the 
camp (49, 10), they spread out their hands and begged for peace. 
One of their number acted as spokesman, speaking as follows : 
" We cannot contend with the armies of Rome ; 7 our hearts are 
weak before them and our courage is unstrung. We have heard 
of your honor and humanity; do not put to the edge of the sword 
those who plead for quarter." 

J p. i?, 2, note. 2 p. 48,4. 3 47, 3. 4 p. 17, 5, note. 5 p. 107,3. 
6 p. 72, 10. 7 p. 162, 4. 

EXERCISE XXXVII? 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II., cc. 16-20). 

The order of march on this occasion and the usual one when 
the enemy was known to be approaching was as follows : T The 
cavalry were in advance ; 2 then followed the infantry who had 
knowledge and experience of the art 3 of war ; then came all the 
baggage ; while the recent levies closed the column. We had 
ascertained from our prisoners that the enemy had taken up their 
position on the other side of the river, at a distance of not more 4 than 
ten miles ; and there a few pickets of their cavalry could be seen. 
Whatever 5 military strength 6 these people have, is in their infantry. 
Their policy 7 is to rush with all possible speed 8 upon an enemy and 
charge him before he is aware of their approach ; and they can 
advance with almost incredible rapidity, so that they seem, at the 
same moment nearly, to be a mile away and upon an enemy's hands. 
They are easily repelled, however, and easily thrown into confusion ; 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 273 

and, when they have once retired, they do not advance again with 
the same speed. 

Hise hie. 2 use praemitto. *res (p. 161, 2). 4 p. 77, 4 ; 84, 9. 

5 use qtiidquid. 6 p. 60, 3. 7 use consilium. 8 p. 78, 9, note ; use adv. 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II., cc. 16-20; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

Our cavalry had been sent ahead and had already crossed the 
river. The enemy kept to the woods, but a few pickets of their 
horse had been stationed along the bank. 1 These at once withdrew, 
the moment 2 our signal for advancing 3 was given. Scouts were then 
thrown forward to pitch 4 upon a suitable place for a camp, and these 
were followed by the main body in order of battle. As soon as 2 we 
had reached the hill which had been chosen for our encampment* 
the enemy delivered his attack, advancing (co-ord. vb.~) up-hill to the 
charge with inconceivable rapidity. 5 In -this emergency, the 
knowledge and experience of our army stood them in good stead. 6 
They had had an excellent training in the battles of the past and 
they knew their duty as well as 7 their commanders. These latter, 
again, had owing to the proximity of the enemy to give direc- 
tions on their own responsibility. 

*use in with abl. 2 p. 102, 4. 3 p. 42, 6. 4 p. no, 3. 5 p. 74, 5. 

6 use subsidium; p. 69, 8. r use aeque ac (p. 116, i). 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II., cc. 21-25}. 

Our camp was exposed in front 1 and on the left 1 and, through this 
gap, the enemy did not hesitate to advance and renew the fight. 
The camp-servants, to whose charge the camp had been committed, 
were surrounded and scattered (48, 4). The cavalry, which as 
already related (138, 4) had pursued the enemy's horse to the 
river, on looking behind them (use quum}, saw the enemy swarm- 
ing 7 in our camp, which was now all but in their possession. They 
at once began a retreat to the camp, where they found matters 
reduced to the last straits, and almost despaired of the day. 2 The 



274 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

standard was lost, the standard-bearer had been cut down, most of 
the officers were either killed or wounded, and the troops were so 
huddled together that they prevented each other from using 3 their 
swords. By the arrival of the horse, new hope was infused into 
our troops and, facing about, they advanced upon th enemy from 
the lower ground. These in their turn now began to give way and 
were driven back to the bank of the river where our attack was 
checked. 

1 P- *95 (under a or ab\ 2 p. 173, 3. 3 p. 22, 2. 

EXERCISE XL. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II. , cc. 21-25; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

After making the necessary dispositions, 1 our leader proceeded to 
(omit) encourage his troops, speaking 2 as follows : " The proximity 
( I 59ij)f tne enemy, soldiers, will prevent me from 3 using many 
words. Show 4 the courage you have shown in the past and you will 
soon be pursuing them across the river. Their battle is drawn up 
on disadvantageous ground ; hold out against their first attack and 
they will be unable to withstand you ; keep cool ; all exigencies 
have been provided against ; remember that each man will fight 
under his general's eye." After this exhortation, he gave the signal 
to engage. Seeing (49, 10) us in motion, the enemy advanced upon 
us at full speed and in such close order that they could not use their 
swords. When they came to close quarters, they were out of breath 
and did not long maintain their ground, but began to retire upon 
their camp. To this we followed them only (use ita ut; 142, 7, a), 
upon our arrival, to see them fly from it with the utmost precipi- 
tation. 5 

1 p. 157, c ; 48, 7. 2 use co-ord. vb. ; the pres. part, is often used 
in Eng., where a co-ord. vb. is required in Lat. ; p. 48, 5. 3 p. 22, 2. 
*p. 2$ (b\ note. 5 use adv. ; p. 78, 9, note. 

EXERCISE XLI. 
(Basea on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B: III., cc. i-j). 

On receipt (52, 5) of this news, he determined to winter 1 in the 
village which he began 2 now to fortify. The village was situated in 
a small valley, surrounded by hills, and was divided into two parts 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. > 

by the river. The higher levels of the hills, 3 which overhung the 
valley, were still held by the natives. Several reasons had induced 
them to renew the war. 4 In the first place, they were of the opinion 
that the village could not hold out against their attack ; in the second 
place, they had been informed that no sufficient provision 5 had been 
made by us with regard to supplies ; and there was the additional 
reason 6 that we wished to deprive them of the taxes which the mer- 
chants paid (pendo) who were in the habit 7 of travelling through 
their valley. They had therefore formed the design of crushing us. 
1 p. 17, 5, note. 2 p. 142,6. 3 use superiora loca. 4 say several 
reasons were to them of renewing the war. 5 p. 38, 2, note ; 157, 
4, (&}. 6 p. 100, 7. 7 use consuesco. 

EXERCISE XLII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. III., cc. 4-6). 

The battle had now raged (38, 2) for six hours without intermission. 
More than one-third 1 of our number had fallen ; several of the 
officers were disabled by their wounds; and ammunition 2 was begin- 
ning to run short. Our only hope of safety depended on a sudden 
sally from the camp. During a brief space, we stood upon the 
defensive to allow us time to recover from our exertions ; then, at a 
given signal (51, 2), we sallied forth, surrounded the enemy, and cut 
them down on every side. 3 The rout was complete ; fortune had 
suddenly changed ; and now there was nothing for us to do but to 
strip the dead and to return to our camp. Soon after, we fired our 
camp 3 and marched without interference 4 into our province. 

1 p. 77, 4. 2 use tela. 3 p. 48, 4. 4 p. 52, 5. 

EXERCISE XLIII. 
(Based on Caes.,De Bell. Gall., B. III., cc. 1-6 j review exercise, to 

be done without the book). 

We were firmly convinced that the enemy had occupied the 
heights in the hope of getting possession 1 of our camp. We knew 
that, owing to the weakness of our force, they regarded us with 
contempt, 8 and that they were of the opinion that, as far as fighting 
went, they had 3 no reason for 4 apprehension. Still, they were un- 
willing to tempt the caprice of Fortune, as, after frequent engage- 
ments, they had always come off the losers. Accordingly, we called 



276 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

a council of war, in which the majority decided 5 to abandon the 
camp and the baggage, and, making (49, 10) a sally, to attempt to 
march to our winter quarters. The soldiers were quickly informed 
of the resolution of the council and they carried out their instruc- 
tions with the utmost dispatch. 6 

^ise potior ; p. 45, I, (a) ; 80, i. 2 p. 69, 8. 3 p. ill, a. *p. 32, 1. 
5 use placet; p. 70, 2. 6 adv. ; p. 78, 9, note. 

EXERCISE XLIV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. III., cc. 7-10). 

Mankind are naturally anxious for liberty and detest slavery, 
preferring 1 to endure any wrong whatever 2 rather than submit to the 
yoke of servitude. These people also felt that they had 3 consider- 
able naval strength, naval science and naval experience, and that 
we would be unable to march against them with our army by reason 
of the difficulties of the land route on the one hand 4 and of our 
ignorance of navigation and our lack of ships on the other. 4 It was 
well known also tha we had neither sailors nor pilots, and they did 
not know that we, who were accustomed to sailing only in a land- 
locked sea, would be able 5 to sail in the vast and open sweep of the 
ocean. Accordingly they suddenly formed the design (their resolu- 
tions are always precipitate) of stirring up the other states along 
the coast to build 6 ships and prepare for war against Rpme. 7 

J p. 106,2; 113,3. 2 use gut-vis. 3 p. 68, 3. *et~et. 5 pres. inf.; 
the pres. inf. of possum does duty also for the fut. 6 p. 1 10, 3. 
7 p. 162,4. 

EXERCISE XLV. 

(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. III., cc. 7-10; review exercise, 

to be done without the book}. 

To prevent 1 the maritime states from joining 2 the league, we sent 
an army with all speed to the sea-coast. The sea-faring people of 
these parts have a revolutionary tendency, and are easily stirred up 
to conspiracy or defection. They knew what a serious crime they 
had committed in flinging 4 our envoys into prison the name of en- 
voy has always been respected and they were prepared to face any 
issue of fortune. They accordingly summoned auxiliary forces from 
Britain, admitted their neighbors into alliance, mustered every 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 277 

available ship, built others, collected rowers and pilots, conveyed all 
their corn from the fields and fortified their towns. They held 
many states in subjection by reason of their command of the sea, 
and they easily managed to stir them all up to a renewal 5 of 
hostilities against Rome. 6 

!p. 12, 2, note. 2 p. 22, i. 3 p. 78, 9, note. *p. 99, 6. 5 p. 16, i. 

6 p. 162,4. 

EXERCISE XLVI. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. III., a. 11-14). 

There was great difficulty in 1 capturing their towns. They were 
situated, as a general thing, upon head-lands, inaccessible by land at 
high-water a phenomenon which (9, 9) occurs twice in every twenty- 
four hours and inaccessible by ships at ebb tide. The tides there are 
very high, and, when they ebb, a ship is often left high and dry. Our 
ships were almost constantly being dashed upon the rocks or 
stranded upon a shoal. Harbors there are practically (paene) none, 
and when the wind blows fiercely, 2 it has a tremendous sweep from 
the open sea ; there is no safety in running before it or in coming to 
anchor in shallow water. The ships of the natives have 3 flatter." 
keels than ours and are not hurt so much if they strike a rock. 
They are better adapted too for standing wind and sea, being built 
of oak 4 throughout 5 and high at the bow and stern. Moreover, their 
anchors are secured by iron chains instead of ropes. Owing (prep.}, 
therefore, to the favorable position of their towns, they defended 
themselves without difficulty, and, owing to the number of their 
ships, our admiral despaired 6 of being able 7 to sustain their attack. 

!p. 43, 7. 248, 7 ; 51, 2. 3 p. 68, 3. *exrobore. 5 use totus. 
6 p. 6, i. 7 pres. inf. 

EXERCISE XLVII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. III., cc. 11-14; review exercise^ 
to be done without the book}. 

At this point, 1 therefore, all the troops received orders to assemble. 2 
Reinforcements were summoned from the Rhine and ordered to 
start 2 with all possible dispatch. 3 The land force reached its 



278 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

destination without difficulty ; but the fleet found great difficulty in 
sailing through the open sea, owing to 4 the roughness of the water. 
There are no harbors, the tides are high, and the sweep of the wind 
is irresistible. Our ships are not well adapted to cope with 5 the 
violence of either sea or wind. The natives manage better. They 
build their ships throughout 6 of oak ; and the timbers are a foot 
thick and put together with iron spikes an inch broad ; but, owing 
to their ignorance of linen, they have to use skins for sails. Their 
ships are large and of great bulk, easily steered, and, when running 
before the wind, outstrip ours in point of speed. We were detained 
also by stress of weather, but at last reached the point at which we 
had been ordered 2 to muster. 

1 use eo. 2 p. 16, i, note ; 99,4. 3 p. 78, 9, note. 4 p. 113, 2. 
5 p. 69, 9, note 2. 6 usetotus. 

EXERCISE XLVIII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell Gall., B. III., cc. 15-18}. 

The battle had now raged 1 from six in the morning, 2 and the enemy 
had already lost several ships and perceived that they would soon 
lose all they had. So they turned their ships down the wind and 
sought safety in flight. Very few ever reached land. This battle 
closed the war ; every available ship had been mustered in the fight, 
and all their young men were on board the fleet ; and, when the 
battle was lost, they had no longer any refuge or means of defence 
left. In such straits and urged by these considerations, many 
exclaimed that such an excellent 3 opportunity of closing the campaign 
should not be thrown away ; that they had never recommended the 
war ; that they had only revolted in the hope of defending them- 
selves ; and that they ought 4 to march to the camp of the com- 
mander-in-chief and offer their submission. Lack of supplies 
(very inadequate provision in this respect had been made) induced 5 
their senate to adopt 6 this resolution and they marched accordingly 
to our camp and submitted. 

J p. 38, 2, note; 157, 4, (b\ 2 144, 5. 3 use tantus. 4 p. 33, 3, 
note; 45, 2. 5 change to passive. 6 p. 16, I. 



EXERCISES ON CAESAE. 279 

EXERCISE XLIX. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. III.,cc. 15-18; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

The legate now marched with all his forces into the enemy's 
territory and encamped at the distance of two miles from the 
hostile army. For several days, he confined his men to the lines 1 
and refused to fight, though the enemy led out his forces every day 
and offered him battle. The reason for this proceeding (161,2) was 
as follows : 2 As 3 the enemy's numbers were so cons-iderable, he was 
of the opinion that an engagement should not be risked (157, ^) 
unless when a favorable chance offered. Men are always ready to 
believe what they wish to believe and the enemy accordingly be- 
lieved that our general had closed the gates of his camp through 
cowardice. Every day they had the audacity (vb.) to approach 
the rampart and to call out to us that we should not let slip so ex- 
cellent a chance of finishing the campaign. <; Take up your arms," 
they exclaimed/ " and meet us in the field." Our general, accord- 
ingly, was not only despised by the enemy, but he was carped at 
by the tongues of his own troops. 

] use castris (abl.). 2 p. 88, 3. 3 p. 106, i ; 113, 2, 3. 4 p. 7, 4 ; 
use hortor. 

EXERCISE L. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. III., cc. /p-^j). 

The governor saw that he would have to exercise great care. 1 He 
had introduced his army into a country which had a large population ; 
the people of which if somewhat effeminate were always ready 
to go to war. A few years before, 2 they had defeated one of our 
armies, and killed the general at its head. They had already 
attacked a Roman column on the march, and put it to flight with 
the loss of its baggage ; 3 and he saw that their resistance now would 
be long and fierce. When the natives heard of our arrival, they were 
somewhat disturbed ; but they at once began to muster their forces. 
They sent ambassadors in every direction to summon reinforcements 
to their side, and all their cavalry, in which they have great strength, 
they placed in ambush, intending to attack us on the march. News 



280 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

of these preparations was brought us, and we pushed forward with 
all dispatch to the point at which the cavalry were posted. Here a 
spirited engagement took place, 4 and the enemy were driven back 
into the town. 

1 p. 45, 2 - 2 P-86, 4 . 3 p.48, 7 ; 51,2. 4 p. 38, 2 ; 157, 4 (b). 

EXERCISE LI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. GalL, B. ///., cc. 19-33; review exercise^ 
to be done without the book}. 

The matter was then referred to a council of war, and it was the 
general 1 opinion that there should be no delay 2 in engaging the 
enemy. The enemy's numbers were increasing every day 3 ; they 
were mustering their troops and summoning reinforcements to their 
aid ; they were sending ambassadors to neighboring states with 
requests for men and leaders ; they had appointed as commander- 
in-chief one who was generally supposed to possess a thorough 
acquaintance with the art of war, one who knew how to fortify a 
camp, run a mine, or storm a town. It was felt also that the enemy 
would soon be in a position to beset the roads and intercept our 
supplies. We had ascertained that their cavalry had already been 
ambushed in a valley through which we had intended 4 to march. 
It was decided, therefore, that, on the following day, the matter must 
be brought to an issue. 

^omnium. 2 p. 46, 5. 3 use in dies with words of increase and 
diminution, quotidie, with words of repetition. 4 p. 53, i. 

EXERCISE LI I. 
(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. III., cc. 24-29). 

These people make war very differently 1 from other states. They 
have in their territory long stretches of swamp and forest and when 
an enemy advances against them they retreat and confine them- 
selves to these. 2 Notwithstanding the fact that 3 powerful nations 
had proved inferior in their conflict with us, these were of the opinion 
that they could engage us with safety. They fancied that, owing to 
a short supply of provisions, we would soon have to withdraw 4 from 
the country and that they would be able to attack us upon the 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 281 

march with our knapsacks on our backs. 5 They accordingly laid 
waste their land in every direction, fired all their villages (this in 
the hope of cutting off our supplies) and then led their forces into 
the thickest part of the forest and waited to see what course we 
would pursue. 6 For many days in succession 7 our army was led out 
of camp and drawn up in front of the wood ; but, in accordance 
with the instructions they had received from their leader, they 
made no attack. 

1 use longe alia ratione 116, I. 2 use adv. eo. 3 use quamquam. 

4 p. 46, 5. 5 sub sarcinis. 6 p. 32, i ; 31, 3, note i. 7 use deinceps. 

EXERCISE LIII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. ///., cc. 24-29; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

Summer was now almost past and winter was approaching ; so 
the enemy confined his troops to his lines, 1 trusting that we would 
soon have to retreat. Every day 2 at dawn our forces were led out 
in front of his rampart, but no enemy could be seen. His intention 3 
was not to attack until 4 we began to retire, and then to beset the 
roads, cut off our supplies, and try to win the victory without loss. 
Perceiving 5 this intention, our leader proceeded 6 to attack the enemy's 
camp. The horse, after making a long detour, 7 were stationed on 
the flanks ; and then all the cohorts advanced upon the works, some 
to fill up 8 the trench, others to dislodge the defenders from the walls 
with their darts. The rampart was soon levelled, and the enemy, 
completely surrounded, sought safety in flight. It is well known 
that scarcely one-fourth 9 of their number escaped. 

1 use castris. 2 quotidie. 3 ei in animo erat. -p. 105, 8, note. 

5 p. 102, 4; 103, 4, note; 51, 2; 52, 2, note. 6 p. 142-, 6. 7 use 
circuitus, p. 48, 7 ; 51, 2. 8 p. no, 3. 9 H5, 8 ; 2, 3. 



EXERCISE LIV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. IV., cc. 1-4"). 

These people are of gigantic stature 1 and more warlike than 2 any 
of the others who live on either 3 bank of the river. Daily exercise 
keeps 4 up their strength and makes them capable of great exertion. 



282 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

They have no pleasure in wine and do not import into the country 
any luxuries which they think tend to effeminacy (157, cj 170, 6). 
Many large and flourishing states on the other side of the river they 
have reduced and made tributary, and they often sell the spoils of 
battle to the French traders who resort to them. They prefer a milk 
or flesh diet and are greatly addicted to hunting. Private property 
is unknown among them. No one ever remains at home to till the 
soil more than one year ; 5 next year he is drafted off to serve in the 
army. Those that are at home support those that are in the field. 

1 p. 62, i. 2 p. 95, 3, 4. 3 use uterque. 4 say they keep up and 

make themselves. 5 plus uno anno. 

EXERCISE LV. 

(Base a on Cacs., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 1-4; review exercise, to 
be done without the book). 

These people, in spite of 1 their warlike character, had been driven 
from their own country, and, after roaming about for three years, had 
at last reached the Rhine. But, after trying every expedient, 2 they 
failed to effect the passage of the river, because they had no 3 ships. 
So, 4 seizing all the dwellings ad supplies of those who lived on the 
other side, they maintained themselves there the rest of the winter. 
They use horses in battle, though they often dismount and fight on 
foot. 5 They take the greatest pride in their horses which they buy 
up at a high figure from the merchants who visit them. In order 
to make trial of their strength in war, we ventured to cross the river 
and attack them with all our cavalry. Many of them were killed 
and, in thorough alarm, they returned with all speed to their own 
homes where a year afterwards 6 they were made tributary by the 
Germans whose attacks proved irresistible. 

1 p. 115, i L *onmia. p. 68, 3. 4 p. 48, 7 ; 51, 2. *p. 74, 5. 
6 use anno postero. 

EXERCISE LVI. 
(Based on Cacs., De Bell. Gall., B., IV., cc. j-io). 

These envoys made the following 1 representations : " We have not 
come here to pillage ; 2 we have come ori invitation. If you march 
into the districts 8 we have taken possession of, you will be the 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 283 

aggressors 4 and there can be no friendship between us and you. 5 If 
you allow us to retain our lands, we can be very useful to you ; 
but, if you attack us, we will resist you ; and most countries regret 
when they resolve to make war upon us. " To this we answered 
that we had heard that they were unable to defend their own 
country, but had been evicted from their homes by others ; that we 
would not allow them to approach our lands or remain in them. 
Let them ask the barbarians, who lived beyond the river, for lands 
to settle in ; that we would give orders that such a demand should 
be granted. When they received this answer, they carried it back 
to their camp, promising to return the next day but one. 6 

1 say said these things. 2 p. 44, 6, note. 3 use regiones. 4 to be 
an aggressor =to attack first. 5 say to us with you. 6 say on the 
third day; 147, 2. 

EXERCISE LVII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 5-10 : review exercise, 
to be done without the booK). 

The river here makes several large islands which are inhabited 
by barbarous tribes whose diet consists 1 offish. They are, however, 
very fierce and consider themselves equal in battle even to the gods, 
claiming (co-ord. vb.) that no one on earth can vanquish them. It 
is said 2 that they are a match for the picked cavalry of Germany, 
all the states of which are anxious to have them as friends. Many, 
accordingly, seek their aid in making war and they have no objec- 
tion to having recourse to arms. For they not only protect their 
own territory but, if invited, will invade others. They extend 
their incursions all over the country. They are, however, rather 
fickle 3 and unreliable and, when concerting important measures, 
they are often the mere slaves of rumor. 

J use vescor. 2 p. 38, i ; 55, 5, note. 3 p. 78, 9. 

EXERCISE LVII I. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., IV., cc. 11-15). 

All the cavalry had pushed ahead. Their orders were 1 not 2 to act 
on the offensive, but, if attacked, to hold their ground until our 
column arrived. As soon as 3 they came in sight, the enemy led out 



284 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

his forces against them. Their cavalry charged at full gallop and 
caused some confusion in our ranks ; then they dismounted and, 
stabbing our horses in the belly, spread such terror among the 
rest that they began to fly in every direction. The enemy followed 
slowly and did not desist from the pursuit 4 until 5 they came in sight 
of our camp. Then they retired again to their own camp. The 
following morning, they sent an embassy to apologise 6 for taking the 
offensive, contrary to the arrangement made the day before. They 
would accept peace, they said (138, 4) and the terms we had 
offered ; they earnestly begged us not to advance further into 
their territory or lay waste their lands. We had nothing to fear ; 
the prestige we had gained in the country would prevent any one 
from making war upon us again. Such were the representations 
they made in apology for their attack. 

l p. 72, 10. 2 p. 12, 2, note; 16, I, note. 3 p. 102,4. *say nor 
did they make an end of pursuing. 5 p. 104,8. 6 p. 109,2. 

EXERCISE LIX. 

{Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. IV., cc. 11-15; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

Thinking that it would be the height of madness 1 to wait till 2 the 
cavalry, which had gone across the river to forage, should return, 
and delighted that at last he had the enemy in his power, he 
gave the order to engage. For a short time they offered a stout 
resistance (157,0) ; but, owing to the absence 3 of their cavalry, they 
were quickly surrounded and thrown into confusion and soon retired 
in panic 4 from the field. Our horse were sent in pursuit, but it would 
have been better if they had not been. For, the enemy, facing 
about once more, charged our cavalry which, coming on without any 
apprehension, was quickly thrown into confusion 5 and driven back 
to the main body with considerable loss. 6 This was a lucky accident 
for them ; for by the interposition of this delay, the enemy were 
enabled to cross the river in safety. 

!p. 59, 2. 2 subjunctive ; p. 104, 6, note. 3 p. 48, 7 ; 51, 2. 4 p. 
50,14. 5 p. 48,4- 6 49, 9- 



EXE&C1SES ON CAESAR. 

EXERCISE LX. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 26-19). 

And so the war was over 1 and the enemy had withdrawn from 
their territory and hidden themselves in the depths of their forests. 
All their villages had been burned and all their corn cut down. 
After this battle, the Rhine became the boundary of the Roman 
Empire. Most of the neighboring states now submitted, seeing 
that 2 they could not carry on the struggle against us. Those which 
sought an alliance, received a generous 3 response. 4 A council of wai 
was then called 5 at which it was resolved that a bridge would have 
to be built and the army led over the river in order that all Germany 
might understand that we had both the courage and ability to cross 
their river when 6 we wished. Many urged that the army could be 
ferried across by means of boats ; but it was decided that it was 
more in keeping with the dignity 7 of Rome 8 to lead it over by means 
of a bridge. The work was completed within ten days. 

*p. 48, 7 ; 48. 4. 2 1 06, i ; 113, 3. 3 use liberalizer respondere. 
4 p. 72, 10. $ p. 48, 7 ; 51, 2 ; 48, 4. 6 p. 107. 5. 7 p. 59, 2 ; 158, 
(*). 8 p. 162; 4. 

EXERCISE LXI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. 7K, cc. i6-igj review exercise^ 
to be done without the book). 

So great, after the rout of the Germans, was the reputation of our 
army that the remotest nations sent envoys to us with an earnest 
prayer 1 for aid. They said that many tribes who had retired into 
the wilderness were now gathering 2 to a general rendezvous 3 and had 
decided to fight it out 4 with Rome 5 to the end ; that these declared 
they would never surrender or give hostages, and that unless we 
crossed the river and chastised them, they would spread universal 6 
terror among those who had entered into alliance with us. Many 
(they said) had already migrated from their towns and deposited 
their wives and children in the woods. They begged us to deliver 7 
them from this dread, to carry over an army, and leave several strong 
garrisons on their side of the river. They averred that we had no 



286 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

reason 8 to fear for our own safety and that we had both the strength 
and daring needed to render them all the aid they asked. 

l p. 1 66, 2 (c). 2 p. 131, i (i). 3 say at a place where all were 
assembling; p. 131, i (2). ^ depugnare. 5 p. 162,4. 6 say passim 
or inter omnes. 7 p. 16, i. 8 use<rry 32, i. 

EXERCISE LXII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 20-23). 

This island lies in a northern latitude, but if 1 you had visited it 
you would have found there, upon the sea coast, a nation of traders 
who own 2 both men-of-war and fleets of merchant-men. They are 
not barbarians or unacquainted with the art of war and navigation. 
They use their ships for sailing 3 to ports that lie opposite the island 
and for making war upon neighboring states. They have harbors, 
also, adapted for the largest ships. If any one had a thorough 
knowledge of the institutions under which they live,* it would stand 
him in good stead. I have heard that both their courage and their 
good judgment are held in the very highest esteem 5 by their 
neighbors. It would be a lucky accident 1 if such a nation would 
submit to our rule. 

1 p. 123, in., (b\ 2 p. 68, 3. 3 p. 42, 6 ; 43, 9. 4 say quibus utuntur 
5 p. 63, 4. 6 use contingit. 

EXERCISE LXIII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gait., B. IV., cc. 20-23 ; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

On the fifth day the member of staff 1 who had been sent 
ahead in a galley to ascertain the size 2 of the island and the character 2 
of the tribes that inhabited it, returned to us. He had not dared 
to leave his ship or to entrust himself to men who 3 were strangers 
to him and unacquainted with our ways ; but he had found a suit- 
able place for disembarkation. We waited, accordingly, till 4 the 
rest of the ships assembled at the rendezvous and then at a given 
signal 5 all the regiments embarked. Wind and tide were both 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 287 

favorable, so we weighed anchor at once and set sail. The first 
ships of the fleet touched the shore of the island about ten o'clock 
and were brought to upon a smooth shore where the hills come 
down to the sea. 

a say unus ex legatis. 2 p. 32, i. 3 p. 113, 4, and note, ''subjunc- 
tive ; p. 104, 6, (top). 5 p. 48, 7 ; 51, I, 2. 

EXERCISE LXIV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. IV., cc. 24-27). 

When 1 the natives saw our ships approaching, they showed some 
excitement ; 2 but when our troops began to disembark, they were 
thoroughly alarmed. The sight, indeed, was an unusual one ; 3 ships 
of war of great size coming to anchor on an unknown coast ; soldiers 
in heavy armor leaping into the waves from the ships with alacrity 
and advancing towards the enemy. They would have retreated at 
once without* attacking us, but their chiefs, flinging themselves among 
them, exhorted them not 5 to incur such a disgrace, saying : " Stand 
your ground, boldly comrades ; do your duty to us and your 
country." With this exhortation, they encouraged them to stand 6 
their ground and they began to discharge their spears upon our men, 
advancing through the waves and endeavoring to prevent the 
disembarkation. As soon, however, as 7 we reached the land, they 
were put to flight and moved up the country. 

1 p. 107, 3. 2 p. 60, 3. 3 use compar. of inusitatus. 4 p. 139, I. 
6 p. 16, 3, note. 6 p. 16, i. 7 p. 102, 4. 

EXERCISE LXV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. 7K, cc. 24-2?; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

The engagement was well contested 1 by both the contending 
parties, 2 the enemy's cavalry coming 3 up to the attack at full gallop 4 
and standing their ground boldly. This was the one disadvantage 
we had : 5 Our cavalry had not been able 6 to reach the island. Our 
artillery, however, stood us in good stead. 7 This arm the natives 
were quite unfamiliar with, and its strange appearance filled them with 
dismay. When orders were given 8 to dislodge the enemy by 3, 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

discharge from the engines, they at once began to give ground ; 
and, when a general charge followed, they were put to flight. 
They laid the responsibility for this misfortune upon their lack of 
foresight. They begged that we would condone their attack upon 
us and grant them peace. 

l p. 38, 2; 157, 4, (b}. 2 say ab utrisque. 3 use co-ord. vb. 
4 use admissis equis, p. 48, 7. 5 say this one thing was to us for 
a disadvantage ; p. 69, 8. 6 change to a //#/ clause ; p. 100, 8 7 say 
"for a great assistance to us" ; 69, 8. 8 p. 72, 10. 

EXERCISE LXVI. 

(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. IV., cc. 24-27; review exercise, 

to be done without the book}. 

After this battle, the enemy sent an embassy to us to say 1 that 
they would give hostages and commit themselves and their states to 
our mercy. They acknowledged that they had arrested and thrown 
into prison the envoy whom we had sent ahead in a ship, charging 2 
them not 3 to go to war with us or attack us without good reason. 
They begged pardon for this act, the responsibility for which they 
laid at the door of the mob who are always inspired by over-zeal 
against those whom they fancy are the public enemies. They 
asked us to grant them* peace, promising that they w r ould never 
make war 5 upon us again. Our general ordered them to give 6 
hostages, to summon all their chiefs from the remoter parts of 
the island, and to assemble within six days in our camp. He said 
that he would grant them peace, and he added a prayer to Heaven 7 
that the arrangement might redound (173, 3) to the prosperity of all. 

J p. 109, 2. 2 co-ord. vb. 3 p. 16, 3. 4 p. 16, i. 5 p. 6, i. 6 p. 16, 
i, and note. 7 use deos immortales contestari. 

EXERCISE LXVI I. 

(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall, B. IV., cc. 28-32}. 
Up to this time there was no suspicion. Many of the native 
population were still in the fields and many were passing to and fro 
every day to the camp. It is well known that these people are 
always concerting new measures, but no one as yet suspected that 
they had actually formed a conspiracy to renew hostilities 1 and 



EXERCISES Otf CAESAR. 28'9 

prevent us from 2 returning again to the island. They were confident 
that, if they could intercept our supplies and prolong the struggle^ 
to the winter, not a single 3 man of us would ever leave the camp. 
We ascertained that there had been a conference between their 
chiefs, as soon as they had heard of the wreck of our ships ; and we 
saw that the best thing to do 4 was to prepare to meet 5 any contin- 
gency. Men were sent every day into the fields to collect 5 corn ; 
the ships that had been knocked about by the high tides were refitted, 
the timber and iron of those that were of no use being applied to the 
purpose ; and all our men were gradually withdrawn from the fields 
into the camp. 

1 p. 12, i ; 44, 9, note (a\ (c\ (d}. 2 p. 22, 2. z ne unus quidem. 
4 p. 42, 4. 5 use ad. 

EXERCISE LXVIII. 

(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. IV., cc. 28-32; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

And now it was full moon and the eighteen ships, which were 
carrying the cavalry, weighed anchor and put to sea. When they left 
the harbor, the wind was light ; but they no sooner approached 
Britain than 1 a storm arose which carried some of them back to the 
continent and the rest to the lower end of the island to the westward. 
These latter 2 came to anchor, but could not hold their ground. 
They would have been swamped, if they had not put out again to 
sea and made for the continent (123, iii, ). The same night, owing 
to the height of the tide it is always highest at full moon the 
galleys, which had been drawn up on the shore, and the merchant- 
men, which were riding at anchor, were so damaged by the waves 
that 3 they were quite unseaworthy. 

*say "as soon as they approached;" use quum primum (p. 
102, 4). 2 use hie. 3 p. 14, i. 

EXERCISE LXIX. 

(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. 7K, cc. 28-32; review exercise^ 
to be done without the book}. 

The consternation 1 of the army the inevitable result 2 was 
universal. When we came to the island, we had no intention of 



290 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

wintering there. No provision of corn had been made and no 
.baggage had been brought across by us. All the soldiers knew 
that several of the ships, which had carried over the army, were 
wrecked and that the rest were disabled, having lost their cables, 
anchors, and rigging. The native chiefs observed our alarm. They 
had heard of the wreck of our ships. They fancied that, if they 
could prevent us from returning 3 to the continent, no one would 
ever invade them again. Accordingly, they began to collect cavalry 
and chariots to use 4 in war against us. There was one field in 
which the corn had not yet been cut ; and, thinking that we would 
come there soon to collect it, they hid themselves in a wood, which 
was near the field, intending to attack us, as soon as 5 we began to 
reap. 

*p. 38, 2 ; 157, 4, (<). 2 say " which thing, or a thing which, inevi- 
tably happened," p. 9, 9. 3 p. 22, 2. 4 p. 109, 2. 5 p. 102, 4. 



EXERCISE LXX. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 33-38}. 

Meanwhile their envoys rode in every direction, proclaiming our 
numerical inferiority 1 and showing what a glorious opportunity of 
deliverance was now presented. They stated that our army would 
be easily overpowered by the multitude of the enemy ; that we had 
in camp only two legions and about thirty horse ; that we could not 
any longer sustain their attack in the field, and that if we were 
once defeated, 2 we had no place of refuge to which to retreat. 3 By 
these representations, they quickly collected a large number of horse 
and foot and chariots, and these took up their position before our 
camp. At first they sent a messenger to say that if we wished to 
escape with our lives, we must lay down our arms ; but, when we 
disregarded this order, they formed a circle round our camp 4 and 
discharged a shower of spears upon us. 

*say "the fewness of our soldiers"; co-ord. vb. 2 p. 135* 2, 
note i. 3 p. 109, 2, note. *p. 48, 4 ; 51, 2. 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 291 

EXERCISE LXXI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 33-38 j review 
exercise, to be done without the book}. 

The Romans had formed a circle 1 and were defending 2 themselves 
to the best of their ability. The unusual nature of the enemy's plan 
of attack caused us some confusion. 3 Their infantry had com- 
pletely surrounded us, 4 and were pouring their darts upon us. Their 
cavalry were dashing about in every direction, causing alarm by 
the mere speed of their movements. But what caused most 
apprehension was their chariots. 5 With these, on a field of battle, 
they perform wonders, possessing, as they do, 6 the activity of horse 
and the stability of foot. Our men for more than six hours offered 
a brave resistance ; 7 but they would not have escaped the danger, if 
our cavalry had not most opportunely come up to their assistance. 8 
As soon as they came in sight, the enemy began slowly to retreat ; 
our men left the field with all speed 9 and were led back to camp. 
Their loss had been considerable (157, c). 

J p. 48, 4 ; 51, 2. V8, 9, note. 3 p. 60, 3. 4 p. 48, 4- 5 emphatic 
position; p. 177, 4, note. 6 p. 106, 2 ; 177, 4, note. Y p. 38, 2 ; 
157, 4, (b) ; 72, 10. 8 p. 69, 8. 9 p. 78, 9, note. 

EXERCISE LXXXI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 33-38 j review 
erercise, to be done without the book). 

The equinox was now near and our ships (as has been stated) 
were rather unseaworthy and unfit to be exposed to wintry weather. 
We were all therefore of the opinion that we ought to set sail 1 at 
once, if we wished 2 to reach the continent again in safety. 3 On the 
following day, therefore, at midnight we set out, after burning our 
camp. The same misfortune overtook us as before. Some of our 
ships were unable to make the same port as the rest, but were 
carried down the coast. The troops on these ships landed safely ; 
but they would have fallen into the enemy's power, if we had not 
marched to their aid 4 with all speed. A public thanksgiving in 
honor of our achievements was voted by parliament. But of all 
the states which had been required to send hostages, only two in 



292 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

all complied with the demand. The rest were of the opinion that: 
our withdrawal was final. 

p. 45, 2. 2 p. 135, 2, (i). 3 p. 165, 2, (a). 4 p. 69, 8. 

EXERCISE LXXIII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 1-3). 

That winter we had 1 a large number of new ships built. They 
were all broader than the kind we use (8, 2) on our own seas, and 
lower in the gunwale, because the waves in those parts are not so 
high as in other seas. The material needed 2 for rigging them was 
brought from Spain. All the states, which had been ordered 3 to 
furnish ships showed great zeal ; and, by the day appointed, they all 
reached the rendezvous. 4 Those who were in charge of their con- 
struction, 5 received high praise 5 from our chief. He said that as soon 
as the ships were loaded (128, 4) we would start from the continent, 
and that in a few days all preparations would be made. 

J p. 46, 6. 2 p. 161, i. 3 p. 1 6, i and note ; 72, 10. 4 use adv. eo 
(to that place) quo. . . ; 32. i. 5 157, c. 

EXERCISE LXXIV. 
(Based on Caes ., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. f-Jj review exercise, 

to be done 'without the book}. 

Some of the chiefs were filled with alarm (157, c) at our arrival 
and hid themselves in 1 a neighboring wood, from which they wasted 
the province by their forays. When word of this was brought us, 2 we 
sent an envoy to them to ascertain 3 the motive* (use cur) of their 
revolt and to tell them that unless 5 they continued in their allegiance, 
we would harass them with war. They declared that they were 
ready to make amends in every possible (use possum) way ; that 
their error (use vb.~) had been due to lack of foresight, and that 
they would entrust themselves if we wished 5 to our honor and 
come into camp. 

'/ with ace. 2 p. 48, 7; 51,2. 3 p. 109, 2. 4 p. 32, i. 5 p. 131, i,(2) ; 
135, 2, note i. 

EXERCISE LXXV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 4-7). 
These chiefs are very fond of power and always eager for political 
change. We decided therefore to take 1 them with us. Many of 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 293 

th'j.n were indignant ; but none of them ventured to utter a protest 
(157, c) though some of them had no friendly disposition towards us. 
Some said that they were unused 2 to sailing and afraid 2 of the sea ; 
others that they were citizens of a free country and ought 3 , not to be 
compelled to go on board ships unless they wished. 4 Entreaties, 5 
however, were of no avail ; we decided that 6 all must embark, and 
embark they did. We were afraid to leave 7 them behind, thinking 
that, 8 in our absence (abl. abs.), their infatuation could not be 
kept within bounds. 

1 p. 17, 5, note. 2 p. 48, 4- 3 P- 33, 3, note. 4 p. 131, I, (2). 
^preces 6 p. 17, 5. 7 p. 18, 3, note 2. 8 p. 49, 10 ; 113, 2, 3. 

EXERCISE LXXVI. 

(Based on Goes., De Bell. Gall., B. K, cc. 4-7 j review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

And now our preparations 1 were complete and the ships were all 
ready for sailing. Our chief, though he saw the good-will of the 
soldiers towards himself, thinking (49, 10) that they ought to receive 
some exhortation, 2 called both horse and foot together and addressed 
them as follows (use haec) : " You will find, soldiers, that I have 
taken precautions to prevent, 3 any harm coming to you. You are 
embarking in summer and in most favorable weather. All the 
states have sent us the ships 4 they were ordered to send us ; all the 
chiefs of an unfriendly turn 5 I have decided to take along with me. 
So I have no fear of any disturbance 1 during our absence. 6 Let 
no one fear 7 the sea ; I will take care that all your ships reach the 
harbor and that you are taken across in safety (use adj)." 

^.157,4(4 2 p. 33, 3, note. 3 p. 12, 2, note; 13, 5. 4 p. 8, 2. 6 p. 
62, i. 6 p. 52, 4. 7 p. 26, 3. 

EXERCISE LXXVII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. V., cc. 8-n). 

The enemy then fled from the place and hid themselves in 1 a wood 
which they at once proceeded (say began)* to fortify that night,, 
cutting down (co-ord. vb.} a number of trees 3 and with them closing 
all avenues of approach to the wood. These preparations (161, i)our 



294 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

general heard of from the prisoners of war and ascertaining 4 the 
enemy's position, 5 he made all haste (vb.) to dislodge them from 
their works. He landed his army in front of their fortifications 
(48, 4) and raised a mound against it. This they endeavored to 
prevent 6 and they defended themselves with admirable courage, 
righting from their works and seeking to repulse the legions. We 
spent a great part of the day in fighting, but at sunset we carried 
the position and the enemy once more fled and dispersed to their 
homes. 7 

^se in with ace. 2 p. 142,6. 3 p. 48, 7; 51,2. 4 p. 49, 10. 5 p. 
32, i. p. Ig> 3 . 7 p . 83, 5. 

EXERCISE LXXVIII. 

(Based on Caes. , De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc 8-nj review exercise, 
to be done without tJie book). 

There he learned to his alarm 1 that about forty ships had been 
stranded by a violent storm during the previous night (815, i)and he 
saw that he must desist from his advance (45, 4) and return to the 
shore. On his return (vb.)^ he ascertained that many of the ships 
could be repaired, but that, though it would be an undertaking 2 of 
enormous labor, many new ones would have to be built. 3 He made 
his preparations (157, c) at once. All the ships that were lying at 
their moorings he ordered 1 'to be beached and strongly fortified, 
and all the forces, foot and horse, to be recalled to camp. Bands 
of mechanics were summoned from the maritime states to cut down 5 
trees and to begin operations. A member of staff was put in charge 
of the whole work. 

1 use perterritus. 2 p. 59, 2 ; 158, (h\ 3 p. 45, 4. 4 p. 16, i and 
note. 5 p. 1 10, 3. 

EXERCISE LXXIX. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. K, cc. 12-15}. 
Most of the people in this island are dressed in skins and stain 
their bodies with woad which gives them a more terrific appearance 
in battle. They sow corn, but their diet is 1 mainly flesh and milk. 
There is fine timber on the island ; and tin and iron occur in small 
quantities. They export large numbers of cattle. The climate is 
milder and the cold less intense than in Gaul. Several smaller 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 295 

islands lie near, both towards the south and towards the north. In 
these latter, as some writers assert (138, 4), it is dark in midwinter 
for thirty days at a time ; 2 but whether this is true or not (30, i), I 
have not been able to ascertain. Of all the people in the island 
and the population is very large those that inhabit Kent are said 
to be the most civilised. The ships of all nations touch here. 
1 p. 157, 4, (<:). 2 use conti?iuus. 

EXERCISE LXXX. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall. , B. V., cc. 12-13; review exercise, 
to be done 'without the book). 

In battle they show great spirit and daring (i 57, c) and often broke 
through the middle of our line. They used to station themselves 
on hills or in the wood and then, suddenly dashing out 1 and charging 
us, they often inflicted considerable loss upon our men who were a 
good deal intimidated by the novelty of their attack. When we 
retired, they followed us with great eagerness, and though we always 
repulsed them, in the end we were not superior in every particular. 2 
Those that inhabit the inland parts show more boldness in action 
than those who live upon the sea coast. 

*p. 4.9, 10. 2 say in omnibus partibus. 

EXERCISE LXXXI. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B V., cc. 16-21). 

Not far from this was a spot which had already been fortified by 
them with a rampart and ditch and lay (use sum ; 170, 8) in the 
middle of a wood. This was their rendezvous 1 and to it they drove a 
large number of cattle. Such a place is what they call a " town " in 
those parts. Here, after a short delay (157, c), we slowly followed 
them, plundering 2 and devastating the country as much as possible 
on our march and inflicting great injury upon the people, many of 
whom were put to the sword. They did not venture to engage us, 
for they would not have been able to sustain the attack of the 
legions (120, 2). They betook themselves to flight and with so 
much alarm that they did not halt till 3 they reached the river. 
This theyat once crossed. 

1 say all assembled to that place (eo). 2 co-ord. verb. 3 105, 8, note. 



296 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE LXXXII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 16-21 ; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

(a) To them we sent an envoy who made the following represen- 
tations (use dico and pron'.) ; " Unless you surrender, nothing will 
prevent us from laying (22, 2) your country waste. You will not be 
able to sustain our attack and you : will not escape death by flight. 
If you lay aside all hope of carrying on the struggle, if you surren- 
der and give hostages, we will not storm your towns or injure 
your lands ; and, as far as possible, we engage to protect you from 
the violence of the soldiery. If you refuse (nolo), we can ford 
your streams and march through your most impassable woods and 
nothing shall prevent you all from being put to the sword." 

(b) Put in oblique narration from ''Unless" ; p. 127-134. 

EXERCISE LXXXIII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 22-26). 

Word was brought to the King, who had now been three years 
upon the throne, 1 that his enemies had resolved to take his life. He 
had been compelled to pay tribute and give hostages to Rome 2 ; he 
had seen his territory devastated, ships sailing from the continent 
and landing troops before his towns, and an enemy wintering on 
his borders. And now he was informed that the states considered 
him the author 3 of all these evils and they had resolved to heal them 
by taking his life. Fearing (49, 10), therefore, that the insurrection 
was wide-spread, and that the troops he commanded (8, 2) would 
revolt, he despaired of success ; and ordering a galley to be 
launched, he sailed the same night for the continent. The ship 
was cast away in a storm and never came to land. 

A say who was now reigning the third year. 2 p. 162,4. 3 use 
causa. 

EXERCISE LXXXIV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 22-26; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}, 

That year, owing to the drought 1 of the summer, the coi*h crop was 
short, and how to find a remedy against the scarcity of supplies 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 297 

(45, 4 ; 30, i) was not very easy to see. He sent out envoys with 
orders 2 to the states to collect as much corn for him as they possibly 
could ; and, at the same time, he made ready to transport some of 
the legions back to the continent. The equinox was approaching 
and very little of the summer remained. But it so happened that 
some of the ships had been lost in a storm and he had to wait until 
twenty-five new ones were built (45, 4 ; 104, 6). When they saw 
that we intended to go into winter quarters, the enemy made a 
sudden attack upon our camp ; but we made a sally upon them, 
and, after 3 the loss of their King, they withdrew their forces. 

J use pi. siccitatesj 163, 6. 2 p. 109, 2. 3 p. 52, 6. 

EXERCISE LXXXV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. V., cc. 27-30). 

The matter was laid before a council of war at which he made 
the following address : " I am under the deepest obligation 1 to 
Rome 2 and I wish to show my gratitude. She has freed me from 
the tribute I was in the practice of paying my neighbors. I am 
not so destitute of experience as 3 to trust that I can overthrow her 
armies. That is scarcely credible. She has made war upon all 
Gaul and upon all Germany and no one is able to resist her or 
sustain the attack of her legions. I satisfied my love for my country 
when I attacked your camp ; I now wish to consult for the safety of 
your soldiers. I promise that they shall have a safe conduct 
through my territory. The time for consultation is brief. What 
can be more frivolous than, by neglecting this danger, 4 to perish in 
the end either by the sword or by hunger?" 

x use plurimum debere. 2 p. 162, 4. 3 p. 14, i ; 15. 4 p. 48, 7 ; 51,2. 

EXERCISE LXXXVI. 

(Based on Caes., De BelL Gall., B. V., cc. 27-30 ; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

Turn into oblique narration the address given in Exercise 
LXXXV. 



298 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE LXXXVII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell Gall., J3. F., cc. 31-35). 

At midnight the council of war broke up and orders were sent 
through the whole camp 1 to march at dawn. No precautions were 
taken, but rather every device employed to increase the danger- 
The natives 2 showed no such lack of judgment. When, from the 
din borne upon the night air, they observed that we were on the 
point of evacuating our camp, they placed an ambush in a suitable 
position and awaited our arrival. No sooner 3 had our column 
disappeared in the valley through which the route lay, than 3 the 
enemy showed themselves on every side and attacked us both in 
front and rear. The order was given to abandon the baggage an 
order 4 which was attended with unfortunate results. 5 It made the 
enemy more eager for the fray and caused our men to leave their 
standards that they might secure their valuables. 

*P- 83, 3. 2 use barbari. *quum primum; p. 102,4. ^id quod ox 
quae res; p. 9, 9. 5 say happened unluckily 

EXERCISE LXXXVII I. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.^B. V.,cc. 31-35; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

" 
When the enemy appeared, our 1 general showed a good deal of 

perturbation, 1 hurrying 1 hither and thither and making 1 what seemed 
to be the necessary dispositions. He gave orders that no one 
should leave his post ; he said that we were a match for the enemy 
whether 2 in courage or 2 numerical strength ; Fortune (he averred) 3 
had not deserted us ; that there was still a field left for valor to 
display itself. He exhorted the men merely to hurl their spears 
and not come to close quarters with the enemy and to attend to all 
orders with care. The battle raged 4 from early dawn till night. 
Every soldier did his duty ; but we were compelled at last to 
abandon our camp and baggage 

1 use historical infinitive ; p. 55,4. *et....et. 3 p. 138, 4, 4 p. 
157, & 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 299 

V 

EXERCISE LXXXIX. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. V., cc. 36-40). 

After gaining this victory, the insurgents (use hostes) were 
confident that they would be able to effect their own freedom and 
take vengeance upon Rome for all the wrongs they had received at her 
hands. 1 Envoys were sent to all their bands who had taken refuge 
in the forest, with the announcement 2 that the Roman army which was 
wintering among them could be surprised and cut off without 
difficulty, and to exhort all to collect 3 and take vengeance upon 
Rome. The bands were easily persuaded 4 and a great force was 
assembled in front of our camp. They made an instant attack 
upon us, calling out, as they approached, that, if we laid down our 
arms, quarter (157, c) would be given to all. 4 Some, in despair, 
rushed from the camp and were cut down by the enemy. The rest 
offered a brave resistance and maintained their position till night- 
fall. 

a say "done by the Romans": subjective genitive, p. 62, 3. 
2 p. 109, 2. 3 p. 16, i. 4 p. 72, 10. 

EXERCISE XC. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 41-44). 

One of these chiefs addressed our general in the following words : 
" You have made a brave fight and it is impossible to decide (Hi, 
b, note) which of our armies is to be preferred to the other as far as 
courage goes (abl.\ 177, 4 note). But many of your men have 
fallen ; nearly all are wounded ; you are surrounded and no one 
can possibly 1 bring you aid. Why wait (pres. ind.) till all have 
fallen? We will allow you to leave your camp unharmed and to 
march where you will." To this our general made the following 
brief reply (157, c] : "It is not our custom 2 to accept terms of peace 
from an enemy with arms in his hands ; if you will desist from 
hostilities and depart to your homes, I promise that all your 
demands shall be complied with. But you must give up (reddo) all 
your prisoners of war, as a guarantee of good faith." 

a use nee fieri potest ut quisquam. 2 p. 59, 2 ; 158, (h). 



300 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XCI. 

(Based on Caes.,De Bell. Gall.^B. K, cc. 41-44; review exercise, 
to be done -without the book}. 

Turn into indirect narration the speeches of Exercise XC. ; see 
p. 131 and 134. 

EXERCISE XCII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 45-49}. 

Matters had now reached such a pitch that there were not men 
enough to man the walls. The enemy's attack was becoming more 
and more dangerous every day, and we began to be afraid that we 
should not be able to get a letter to the general in his winter quar- 
ters (83, 6) to inform him of our danger. There was in the camp a 
Gallic slave who had often before proved his fidelity to us and was 
known to be possessed of great courage. This slave was induced 
by the promise of freedom, to carry a letter through the hostile 
lines, although the envoys, who had already been sent out, had 
without exception, 1 been taken and tortured to death. The letter 
was written in Greek characters, with the idea of preventing 2 the 
enemy from learning our plans in case he intercepted the envoy. 
The messenger passed through the besiegers' 3 camp without 
exciting suspicion ; and, within five days, we saw from our camp by 
the smoke of the conflagrations they spread, 4 that our army was 
marching towards us. 

Conines ad unum. 2 p. 12, 2, and note. *rel.j 159, k. 4 omit ; 
p. 187, i, end. 

EXERCISE XCIII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. K, cc. 45-49 j review exercise ', 
to be done without the book). 

About five o'clock in the afternoon, word was brought him 
of the massacre of our army (157, c). On the following 
day at dawn, he set out from his camp and advanced 
by forced marches into the enemy's territory, marching at 
the rate of twenty miles every day. 1 He sent an envoy to 
the besieged with the news that he was on his way and would 
soon come up to their aid. 2 When the enemy ascertained infor- 
mation of his advance, they at once raised the siege and turned 



EXERCISES ON CAESAfi. 

all their forces upon him, thinking that they ought not to delay till' 
all the legions should collect. They were descried m the morning 
from our camp. They were not less than sixty thousand strong and 
had taken up their position on the other side of a va ley, wher, 
it would have been a somewhat hazardous proceedmg for us con- 
sidering the unfavorable character of the ground, to make an attack 
upon them. Our men, when they saw them at once withdrew 
behind the rampart with great affectation of alarm. Inside 1 
camp aU might be seen hurrying to and fro. Some -- advancmg 
(55, 4) to fortify the rampart, others hastening to deliberate what 
pan" of defence (use defendo) they should adopt The enemy 
accordingly were filled with contempt for us, and allured by these 
artifices, they crossed the stream at dawn and drew up the* 
forces before the gates of our camp. But, before they hurle 
a spear, they sent a crier round the camp to proclaim t 
if any one wished to come over to them, he was free to come 
till nine o'clock. When this hour had passed, they began their 
attack We held out till midnight and then they beat a retreat. 
But the courage with which they managed the affair may be m- 
ferred from the fact that every' tenth man was left dead upoi 

^say "a journey of twenty miles every day being completed" 
(conficio\ 'p. 69, 8. 'p. 104, (top). V 3', ' . "P- * 6 ' 
EXERCISE XCIV. 

(Based on Cats., DC Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 4 549>' iei exercise, 

to be done without the book}. 

When he reached the camp, he was filled with admiration and 
praised all -both commander and soldiers -as their gallant 
conduct had deserved. Thereupon, he called a meetmg of _ fl 
whole army at which he told them that their valor had bee 
most conspicuous and that, through the kindness of Heaven, both 
their own sorrow and the rejoicing of the enemy had not been oi 
long duration. All the Roman forces (he said)' would at once be 1, 
back into winter quarters; the uprising had been so senous that 
he himself would have to winter with them without' returning as 
usual that year to Italy. No day passed without some message 
of an uprising being brought to him. On the following day (he 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

rsue 
r that 
'p. 138, 4- 2 p. 140, i. 



. 

said) he would pursue the enemy, as he had just learned from 
the pnsoners of war that they were now twenty miles away. 
' 



EXERCISE XCV. 

(Based on Cues., De Bell. Gall., B. K, cc. 54-58). 
After the completion of this business, they sent ambassadors to 

we had To'Th^ ,?'"% TheSC Pr Claimed everywhere that 
had lost the fnendsh.p of all their states ; that a great part of 

e U n r tTh d adb r CUt , tOPieCeS; thSt the '-"f-e-nts we had 
^ent for had not arnved and that without them we would not tempt 
Fortune again in the field. At the same time, they promised ^ 
rewards of money to all who should cross the river and join them 

has IT 8 tate ; ielded to tlieir persuasi ns <*' <> * ae a- 

ba sadors returned to their states. These states, though baulked 

Rome^rT 1 ' T' Ved nevertheless to P-Pare for war with 
Rome (,62; 4). They had been the first to make war' upon her 
before, and they enjoyed great influence with their countrymen in 
consequence,' being considered superior in courage to all the rest 
of the states that lie beyond the Rhine. 

'p. n, 2. 2 use itaque or quamobrem. 

EXERCISE XCVI. 

(Based on Goes., De Bell. Gall, B. VI., cc. 1 6). 
That winter a levy of troops was held in the city and four new 
leg-ons were organized.' It was of the utmost impor.ance to the 
country (64, 4) that the loss we had sustained should be repaired , and 
we felt that, m order to teach the barbarians what wonders (169 2 ) 
the resources of Rome could achieve, the number of cohorts should 

destttolr 1 ' inCr?aSed ' ^ kneW that "^ W u)d "<* 
sist nom their preparat.ons and we were determined to march 

against them before- they could muster their forces. We hoped in 
th,s way to be able to fire their villages and, getting possession of 
the,r cattle to force them to surrender, or at any rate,' despairing of 
safety, to take refuge in their swamps and woods. Accordingly, our 
army entered their territory by forced marches in three divisions and 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 



303 



before they could send word to their troops to assemble at the 
rendezvous (use eo quo), we began to lay waste their lands, firing 
(co-ord. vb.) their houses and slaughtering their cattle. The enemy 
sent an embassy to pray 4 for pardon 5 and were ordered to furnish 
hostages. The soldiers made an enormous amount of booty. 

!use active : p. 168, i. 2 p. 104, 8. *certe. 4 p. 109, 2. 5 p. 72, lo. 

EXERCISE XCVII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell, Gall., B. VI., cc. 1-6; review exercise, 
to be done without the book). 

Word was brought us that all these states were making 
preparations for war and plotting with their neighbors. It was 
ascertained that they intended (53, i) to meet us in battle and that 
they had promised money and booty to all who would join them. 
But, before 1 their arrangements were completed, we suddenly 
marched into their territory. Some of their forces took refuge 
(157, c) in the towns ; others sought the protection of the forest. 
The rest asked for and obtained peace. No state ventured to 
meet us in the field. The whole business was pushed through with 
such speed that our army was led back into winter quarters before 
some of the insurgent 2 states had received word that we had 
reached the point at which they had been ordered to assemble. 

*p. 104, 8 ; 157, c. 2 say "the states which had renewed the war," 

EXERCISE XCVIII. 
(Based on Goes., De Bell Gall., B. VI., cc. 7-10). 

The enemy's strength was such that our general did not wish 
to fight, unless he could catch them on disadvantageous ground. 
But he hoped that their rashness would soon give him an 
opportunity of engaging them in such a position. Between the 
two armies lay a river with steep banks j 1 here he pitched his camp 
and waited, in the hope that the enemy would cross. At the same 
time, in order to inspire them with the suspicion that we were 
afraid, he resorted to the following stratagem : He announced in 
camp that he would not expose himself to risk by attacking such a 
large force with such a small one. Woro^ of this was at once 



304 LATIN" PROSE COMPOSITION. 

carried to the enemy's chieftains and, next morning at dawn, raising 2 
a loud shout, they drew up their line in front of our camp, intend- 
ing to attack us with all their forces. 3 

*use abl.\ p. 62, i. 2 p. 51, 2. 3 p. 53, i. 

EXERCISE XCIX. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI. , cc. 7-10; review exercise, 
to hi, done 'without the book). 

Our general had suspected that such would be the result, 1 and, 
after a brief exhortation 1 to the army, he led all his forces out of the 
encampment. Two squadrons of horse were detached to guard the 
baggage 2 ; the rest of the cavalry was posted on the wings. 
Though the ground was so unfavorable to the enemy, they did not 
hesitate to engage us ; but calling out (clamo) to each other that 
we were on the point of retreating and that all preparations had 
been already made for decamping, they attacked us, foot and horse. 
We calmly advanced, hurling our spears. 3 They were at once put 
to flight, and, retreating, sought the shelter of the adjacent* forest. 
The innocent and guilty alike were punished. We gave no quarter. 
Their loss was enormous. 

J use verb. 2 p. 69, 8. 3 p. 51, 2. 4 p. 169, 4. 

EXERCISE C. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. VI., cc. 11-14). 

Held in high honor by all, these clergy 1 see large numbers of 
young men flocking to them from all parts for education some 
voluntarily, others sent by their parents or guardians and they often 
remain under instruction for twenty 2 years. The young men obey 
the decrees of the priest while they remain under his instruction. 
He teaches a good deal about the world and the stars, and the 
universe, thinking that from this subject the young men will learn 
much of the power of God. They are persuaded, 3 too, to give some 
attention to literature and to learn by heart verses of poetry in their 
youth. They must learn the verses by heart on the ground that if 
you trust too much to the written letter, you will weaken your 
memory. It is supposed that their system of education was invented 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 305 

in Britain and transplanted to the continent. Those who seek a 
tnorough acquaintance with it, resort to the former country. 

1 use druides. 2 use distributive numeral. 3 p. 72, 10. 

EXERCISE CI. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI. , cc. 11-14; review exercise ^ 
to be done without the book). 

The rights of the commons in this country are not highly regarded. 
The common people are found in the army and are not excused 1 
from military service ; but they are not admitted to the council of 
the nation. They pay taxes and are almost crushed by them ; but 
if they venture on any enterprise on their own responsibility, they 
are considered to have committed 2 a crime. A noble has nearly 
the same power over them that a master has over his slaves. They 
have therefore been in the habit, from time immemorial, of joining 
themselves to some of the greatest of the nobles that they may not be 
altogether without assistance. When they are loaded with debt, 
they are often made over to him like slaves. When a dispute arises 
between the commons and the nobility, it is decided by the nobility ; 
and, if the commons do not submit, they are excluded 3 from the 
religious functions of the nation. 

1 say, "nor do they have exemption." 2 use admitto. 3 use in- 
terdico. 

EXERCISE CII. 
(Base don Caes.> De Bell. GalL, B. VI., cc. 15-26). 

Every knight, in proportion to his rank, surrounds himself with 
a large number of retainers. 1 These all take part as is well known 
in war, which is an event of almost yearly occurrence. But they 
have instituted the monstrous practice of human sacrifices and the 
knights often offer up their retainers 1 alive as victims to the gods. 
When a man is very ill 2 or when he is about to be exposed to serious 
danger, 3 he vows to offer life for life, it being thought that such a gift 
is pleasing to Heaven though how they can imagine such a thing, 
I do not know. The victims are placed in images of wicker-work 
and burned to death. At the decease of any personage of dis- 



206 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

tinguished rank, they usually pile upon the flames not only other 
living things which the dead man loved in life, but also certain of 
his slaves and retainers. 

^clientes. 2 use morbo affecttas (afficio, put in a state^. 3 z';z gravi- 
oribus peri cults versaturus ; 78, 9. 

EXERCISE CIII. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 15-20; review exercise, 
to be done without the book}. 

One good custom that they have established by law, is this : No 
one is allowed to speak on politics unless in the national assembly. 
The reason they give is, that (as they say) 1 men are often driven to 
crime when they hear others discussing political subjects ; and they 
consider it a scandal (adj.) that this should be a matter of constant 
occurrence. If any one lays 2 before a magistrate any information he 
has received from hearsay, that magistrate may either conceal it, if 
it seems good to him, or bring it before the assembly. These people 
do not neglect commerce ; they believe that it brings in large 
returns to a nation, and tends (est with gen. ; 59, 2) to the acquisition 
of wealth, 3 making 4 it possible to bear the burdens of war. Accord- 
ingly they hold that Mercury, the god cf trade, is supreme among 
the gods. 

'p. 138, 4. z referre. 3 157, c ; 43, 7- 4 co-ord. vb. 

EXERCISE CIV. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 21-29). 

These people differ considerably from others. They have no 
clergy to preside at religious functions ; and they do not believe in 
any gods they cannot see. War is the only thing they give any 
attention to. They do not care for agriculture. No man has land 
of his own ; every year the chiefs assign a definite allotment to 
each individual ; but, a year after, he must go elsewhere. The rich 
have no thought of acquiring large estates or of evicting the humble 
from their holdings ; and the humble are kept in contentment 1 
because they cannot see wealth greater than their own. These 
men do not build cities, though they use small houses as a 
protection 2 against cold. They train their young men for war from 



EXERCISES ON CAESAR. SO'/' 

childhood 3 by the hunt and the foray, excellence (157, c) in wh.cn 
iii a great source of credit. 

l ammi aequitas. 2 use causa with gerundive. s a pueris. 

EXERCISE CV. 

(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 21-29; review exercise, 
to be done without the book\ 

This fertile track (he said) extends 1 a nine days' journey parallel 
with the stream ; then it runs for the same distance to the left. Jn 
it dwells a nation well known to fame and enjoying a high reputation 
for justice and rugged endurance. These men think that it is the 
chief part of virtue to live in poverty and contentment ; they have 
no wealth and no desire for it. They have no knowledge of the 
luxuries 2 that come from over sea, and are the occasion of so much 
dissension among other nations. They are never the aggres- 
sors in war, though they can defend themselves when war is 
made upon them. But from the fact that a vast wilderness 
surrounds (say is round} their territory, they enjoy considerable 
immunity from war. 

*resj 161, 2. 



EXERCISE CVI. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 2i-2g). 

From childhood 1 they are inured to toil, it being thought (say think- 
ing) that toil increases the strength and stature and steels the sinews. 
They dress in skins and live mostly on flesh and milk. Once th^y 
used to send out colonies beyond the Rhine, but now they see the 
colonies of other races settling among them. Their chief delight 
is hunting and they have a wood there which surpasses in size all 
woods we know. It is the haunt of many species of wild beasts, 
many of which differ in form and habits from those known to us. 
The stag seen in this wood has taller antlers than our stag. It can 
not lie down ; if it is knocked 2 down by any accident, it cannot rise. 
There, too, dwells the wild ox, which is as large as an elephant and 
has the strength of the bull and the speed of the stag. 

1 a pueris, 2 use affligo, 



308 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE CVII. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall, B. VI., cc. 29-34). 

And now the enemy were dispersed in every direction and were 
unable to defend themselves. Most of them had sought refuge (157,0) 
in the forest, retreated into impassable morasses, or concealed them- 
selves in islands formed by the tide. They no longer had any 
thought 1 of settling the issue in the field ; 2 all their hopes of inflict- 
ing injury on us were now centred in laying secret ambuscades and 
in preventing us from entering their woods in a solid body and 
surrounding their scattered bands. This was the only plan they 
could form for escaping death and extirpation. The minds of all our 
soldiers (especially the recent levies) were burning for revenge, and 
precaution had to be exercised to prevent 3 their eagerness for 
slaughter from luring them too far into the woods. The hope of 
booty called out many of the natives themselves from the adjacent 
states. These surrounded the woods in large numbers and 
plundered all of their countrymen who were killed. 

1 use cogitare. 2 say to fight it out in battle. 3 p. 12, 2, note. 

EXERCISE CVII I. 
(Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 35-44). 

Fortune has a wonderful influence 1 in war. 'I he enemy as 
already shown had dispersed in every direction, and our legions 
were marching through the land, laying waste their fields. Word of 
this was carried to the Germans beyond the Rhine, and, lured by the 
hope of booty, one of their band crossed the river, some thirty miles 
below the bridge. There they secured a large number of cattle which 
they hid in a wood. 2 Thence they at once advanced upon the 
Roman camp before which they suddenly appeared at a time when 
most of the men were three miles away collecting corn. The camp 
was defended with the greatest difficulty, and it was not till after 
many of them haid fallen that they abandoned the attack. Thus 
these Germans, who had crossed the river to invade Gaul, really 
conferred a kindness upon the Gauls by almost destroying a Roman 
camp. 

imultum valere. 2 use in with ace. 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 309 

EXERCISES ON LIVY. 

EXERCISE I. 
(Based on Livy, B. XXI, cc. I and 2). 

When the African war was over, 1 Carthage (p. 162, 4) transferred 
her army to Spain, where, under the generalship of the high- 
spirited 2 Hamilcar, she extended her dominions, not by arms, but 
by policy.^ She did not attack the Spanish nations but won them 
over through the friendship of their chiefs. Thus new tribes joined 
her empire and increased her power and resources. It was clear, 
however, that all those years she was meditating war with Rome. 
The loss 3 of Sicily and the cession of Sardinia galled her rulers 
who knew (scio) that she had been subjected to rapacious and 
tyrannical exactions (use imperito, order; p. 38, 3) by Rome. (Jjhe 
imposition of the tribute and the seizure ot Sardinia -were especially 
galling to Hamilcar who would have, 4 at the earliest opportunity, 
invaded Italy himself, if his death had not postponed the wariW 

*p.52,6. 2 p. 3, 8; 62, i. p. 50, 14. *p. 123, III. 

EXERCISE II. 
(Based on Livy, B. XXI, cc. j-j). 



The senate appointed Hannibal to the command of the army in 
Spain after the assassination 1 of Hasdrubal. The aristocratic party 
had however exerted themselves to prevent (ne) the command from 
being conferred upon him ; they were afraid that 2 he would 
succeed to all his father's influence. Numbers, however, as usual 
carried the day (173, 3). Hannibal was manifestly destined to 
be a great leader. He won the veterans at once ; they saw his 
father in him : he had the same animated expression and the same 
piercing eye. 3 They felt the utmost confidence in him. He was the 
best foot-soldier and the best horse-soldier in the army ; and when 
he gave an order, 4 it was obeyed. 

x p. 50, 14. 2 I7, i. s omit the adjs., as implied; p. 187, I, end. 
*p. 161, i. 



310 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE III. 

(Based on Livy, B. 27, cc. 1-5 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

There is a story that the father bound the son by an oath to 
invade Italy at the earliest opportunity and that, on the same occa- 
sion, the son declared that he would be the eternal (use semper) 
enemy of Rome. When sent to Spain after his father's death not 
indeed (89, 7) with the consent of the rulers it could not be 
without difficulty (use facile} decided 1 whether general or common 
soldier put more confidence in him. He had wonderful 2 skill in 
winning men's hearts, a wonderful genius for command, and a 
wonderful power of enduring hardship. Historians state that it was 
only the time that remained after doing his work 3 which he gave 
to sleep. 

a p. 170,7. 2 say very much \ Latin constantly uses colorless 
words like this, instead of the more picturesque or specific English 
phrase. 3 p. 43, 7. 

EXERCISE IV 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. j-/ 7 ). 

Between him and the enemy lay a river and this he believed the 
latter would soon cross. Accordingly, he posted his cavalry on the 
bank with instructions (vb.) not to attack until the enemy were in the 
stream. They had not long to wait (45, 4) ; the enemy were naturally 
high-spirited ; and thinking 1 that they were already victors and 
that the Carthaginians would retreat before them, they raised a 
shout and rushed pell-mell into the river. The fight was not an 
equal one or very successful for them. Some were trampled down 
by the cavalry ; others were carried away by the current and 
drowned ; few found a safe retreat to their own bank. 

'49, 10. 

EXERCISE V. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. j-/y review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

The envoys were introduced to the senate by the consuls, who 
then moved that the House consider the political situation. It was 
clear to all that Hannibal had determined to make war upon Rome. 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 311 

He was sowing seeds of strife by attacking 1 her allies, laying waste 
their lands, and storming and plundering their towns. Everybody 
saw that, without doubt, war was impending. The opinion was 
expressed by some that he ought to be attacked at once both by 
sea and land. Others thought that action should not be taken 
rashly in so important a matter. So it was resolved 2 that an 
embassy be sent to warn 3 Hannibal to abstain from attacking the 
allies of Rome. 

!p. 43, 7. 2 p. 1 6, 5. 3 p. 16, i. 

EXERCISE VI. 

{Based on Livy, B. 21, c. 7 ; review exercise, to be done 'without 

the book}. 

In the midst of these preparations and deliberations 1 at the capi- 
tal (say city), the enemy began his operations, attacking (use co-ord. 
vb.) the place in three divisions and planting his batteries opposite 
an angle of the wall where the ground sloped down into the open 
valley. His first attempts met with poor success. The point 
attacked was defended by a large fort, a great height of wall, and 
a picked body of troops. The besieged 2 were even encouraged to 
make a sally upon the enemy's pickets and siege-works ; and in 
the skirmish that ensued, their loss (vb.) was not numerically greater 
(use plures) than that of the enemy. The general, himself, in- 
cautiously approaching (use dum) too near the wall, received a 
spear wound in the thigh 3 a disaster which (161, 2) almost led to 
a general 4 abandonment 5 of the works. 

1 p. 161, i. 2 p. 142, 8. 3 acc.; this is a poetical construction 
used by Livy with adjs., but not by Caes. or Cic. It is called the 
ace. of specification. 4 say all. 5 p. 50, 14. 

EXERCISE VII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 2i,*cc. 8-10; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

From Spain the embassy went straight to Carthage, to plead 1 the 
Roman cause in the Carthaginian senate They represented 2 that 
Hannibal had already broken the treaty .by capturing the towns of 



312 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

the allies of Rome, and tampering with peaceful states. They warned 
the senate that it was the walls of Carthage that he was battering 
with his engines. It was clear that, if the senate wished to please 
R j-ne, 3 they must* surrender Hannibal. Some were of the opinion 
that an embassy should be sent to apologise to the Roman senate ; 
but it was thought by the majority that such an embassy would be 
unsuccessful. 

!p. 44, note. 2 use say. 3 p. 135 ; p. 162, 4. *p. 45, 4. 

EXERCISE VIII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21 , cc. 8-10 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

Meantime the people of the town had offered a brave and unex- 
pected resistance, 1 and their spirits rose accordingly. But there was 
no cessation 1 of hostilities (arma). One side (hi) was fired with 
hope ; the other with despair. The one party believed that if they 
put forth some effort, they would take the town ; the other would 
not give ground, because it was seen 2 that, if they allowed them to 
enter the place, 3 the Carthaginians would take vengeance upon the 
town for its brave resistance (use quia ; 113, 2). The defenders, 4 
however, were unable to defend their whole wall because of the 
superiority of the enemy in numbers (use plures) ; and it was soon 
battered down at many points by the ram. 

l p. 157, c. *use appareo for pass, of "video. 8 p. 135, 2, 2, (a) ; 
get the direct narration first. 4 use townsmen ; p. 187, 2. 

EXERCISE IX. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 11-15). 

The ramparts resounded with confused cries, but no one knew 
in what direction to cariy assistance. 1 The engines stripped the 
walls of their defenders, and, on the side where they had not been 
cemented with mortar, the pick-axe was slowly undermining them 
from below. Seizing 2 an elevated position inside the city, the 
enemy had surrounded it with a wall ; and thus they had a fort in 
the heart of the town. Scarcity of supplies was growing greater 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 313 

every day, and the prospect of help from abroad 3 was growing every 
day less. Their only hope was far away. Thinking that there 
should be no longer delay, Hannibal gave the signal for a general 
attack, and in a moment carried the city. No quarter* was given. 
All the booty fell to the soldiers. 

1 p. 24, d ; p. 30, 3. The subjunctive here must do double duty : 
it expresses (a) the indir. ques., (b) the delib. ques. 2 p. 49, 10. 3 adj. ; 
Eng. phrases of place and time are often expressed by adjs. 4 use 
parco j 72, 10. 

EXERCISE X. 

(Based on Livy, B. ^7, cc. 11-15 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

There was one man among Hannibal's soldiers who thought that 
he ought (45, 4) to try and realise (tempto, make trial of) this hope 
of peace. He knew that tears would have no influence 1 with the 
cruel Carthaginian ; but he hoped that the Saguntines, seeing 2 
their town almost in the hands of the enemy, would accept even 
the severe conditions of peace offered them.. He accordingly 
approached the town before the eyes of all, gave up his sword to 
the sentry, and crossed the lines. He told the senate, before 
which he was conducted, that resistance 1 was no longer possible 
(i 1 1, 6, c, note), and he stated the demands 1 the enemy made. "He 
asks you," he said, " to make restitution to the Turdetani ; to give 
up all your gold and silver, and to leave your city and build another 
where he shall bid you " \fut. perf.) 

!p. 157, c. 2 p. 49, 10. 

EXERCISE XI. 
(Based on Livy, B. ^/, cc. 16-20). 

When word was brought to Rome of the sack of Saguntum, there 
was universal (use omnes) excitement and confusion. 1 Rome had 
never met a more warlike enemy than the Carthaginians. They had 
been trained by military service of more than twenty years duration ; 
they had an active leader of the most spirited temper ; and all the 
nations of Spain were paying them tiibute. The Romans were 
filled with shame, 2 too, at the destruction of their allies. The 
ruins of Saguntum were a mournful object-lesson to Spain not to 



314 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

put any further faith in Rome (use nc). When she had once taken 
that city under her protection, 3 she should have assisted it and not 
betrayed it to the enemy. All the allies were tired 2 of such friend- 
ship. 

'p. 157, <:. 2 p. 66, 3. 3 p. 107, 3. 

EXERCISE XII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 16-20 ; review exercise, to be done ivitJiout 

the book\ 

Receiving these instructions, 1 the venerable ambassadors departed 
for Carthage. 2 No sooner 3 had they reached that city than a hearing 
was given them by the senate, from which they inquired whether 4 or 
not Hannibal's attack upon Saguntum had been made with the 
authority of the state. " If it was made upon your authority," they 
said, " we must demand satisfaction." To this the following answer 
was given : "It is our business to punish our own citizens ; the 
question for you to settle is, whether, in accordance with the treaties 
between us, the attack was justifiable." The ambassadors returned 
to Rome, where they found that all preparations 5 had been 
completed for making war with both land and naval forces. 

*p. 49, 10 ; 157, c. 2 p. 83,4 3 p. 102, 4. 4 p. 30, 2. 5 p. 157, c. 

EXERCISE XIII. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 21-25}. 

At the beginning of spring, therefore, the forces assembled. The 
rest had been very grateful ; almost all the soldiers had gone to see 
(44) their friends. It was generally known that the army was likely 1 
to invade Italy ; but precautions had also to be taken for keeping 
the enemy from . frica and Spain. A fleet was given to Hannibal's 
brother for the protection of the sea-coast, under the conviction 2 
that the war would be carried on by both sea and land. Envoys 
were sent to the Gallic chiefs to ask them to allow 3 the army to 
march through their territories, and to say that the Carthaginian 
was not coming as an enemy, but as a friend ; that he did not wish 
to draw the sword until 4 he reached Italy. 

p. 54, 2. 2 p. 157, c. 3 p. 1 6, i. 4 p. 105, note. 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 

EXERCISE XIV. 



315 



(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 21-25; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

One of these ambassadors spoke as follows :-" You have asked 
me chieftain, why we wish to lead this large army through your 
lands (30, i). I will tell you. We are going to invade 1 Italy. We are 
not your enemies ; we are the enemies of Rome. 2 Our resentment 
is of long standing. Rome has tampered with our allies, conquere 
our towns, placed garrisons and planted colonies in our midst, and 
distributed our lands among her citizens. We are more afraid , 
slavery than of war ; and, therefore, we have crossed the mountains 
to attack our enemy and besiege her cities. We have come to 
you to treat of peace, and to ask a passage through your territory. 
We do not wish to begin the war until, with Heaven's good help, we 
arrive in Italy." 

!p. 54, 2. 2 p. 162, 4- 

EXERCISE XV. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21, c. 22; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

It is here, according to the tradition, 1 that he saw in his sleep a 
youth of angelic beauty (62, i ), who announced that he had been sent 
by Heaven to guide him to Italy. " Fix your eyes on me," said the 
youth, " and follow." At first (so the story says) he was afraid, and 
followed, looking neither behind nor aiound. But, after a while 
(deinde), when he began to wonder what the marvel could be, 2 he 
looked back and saw a huge serpent moving along amid the crash 
of trees A storm-cloud and thunder followed. He asked the 
youth what it meant (so, i), and he said, " It is the devastation of 
Italy." He was much cheered, the story says, by the vision. 

*use vb.; p. 138, 4- 2 see Ex. IX., i. 

EXERCISE XVI. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 26-30). 

On this occasion his words were as follows : " The senate of 
Rome has heard, soldiers, that you have crossed the Pyrenees, and 



316 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

that you are now about to cross the Alps (53, i). They are filled with 
wonder and fear, and all is excitement (use trepido) in that city. 
But, for my part, 1 I wonder that the same fear should have assailed 
you. You have conquered all the tribes of Spain ; you have crossed 
mountains ; you have subdued the might of rivers ; and you have 
marched here to deliver (44) the world from slavery, and to blot out 
the name of Rome. Why do you halt before her very gates ? No 
obstacle 2 is insurmountable to the human race. Men have crossed 
these mountains before; why cannot we cross them now? We 
must not yield in valor to the tribes 3 we have so often conquered. 
We have come here to attack the capital of the world ; let not fear 
delay our enterprise (26, 3)." 

l ego; p. 87, i. 2 p. 161, 2. 3 p. 8, 2. 

EXERCISE XVII. 

Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise XVI. -. 
N.B. Turn the vocative into the accusative before inf. " ' 

EXERCISE XVIII. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 31-34). 

Their march often lay through deep valleys or under ridges upon 
which the brave mountaineers had taken up their position. 1 These 
attacked the column in front and rear, both hand to hand and 
with missiles ; they even rolled down rocks upon it from the hills. 
Again it often lay 2 along defiles with precipices on both sides, 
from which men and horses and beasts of burden continually fell. 
The woods, echoing with the discordant shouts of the natives, 3 
increased the confusion and alarm. They had some experience, 
too, of treachery. Cne day at dawn some venerable chieftains met 
them and offered them guides. These were accepted at once. 
But a number of armed men had been posted on a height that over- 
hung the road, and there is no doubt that, if the army had not ad- 
vanced in fighting order, it would have been brought to destruction. 4 

1 p. 157, c. 2 p. 170, 8. 3 use barbari. 4 p. 22, i ; 140, 3. 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 31 1 

EXERCISE XIX. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21 , cc. 31-34; review exercise^ to be done without 

the book}. 

Next day at dawn, they decamped and retired further from the 
.sea, advancing in a straight line (recta regione) along the river 
bank. Though it carries a large volume of water, this river is not 
navigable; nor does it offer any safety for crossing. 1 After a three 
days' advance, 2 they arrived at the mountains. The mountaineers 
are uncivilized but kind, and they assisted the army with clothes 
and food. They also offered hostages, and stated that they would 
guide* the column through the defiles. Blind credence' 2 was not 
put in their word, but the general availed himself of the services 3 
of the guides. Rumor usually exaggerates ; but the ice and snow 
of the mountains were frightful to see. The army was ordered 
to haft j^rand .the camp was pitched in a deep- valley. 

1 p. .4<3V>. s ]*5^ c. *utor. 4 p. 16, i. 



EXERCISE XX. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21 ', cc. 

And now the time for the setting 1 of the Pleiades was near and 
snow was beginning to fall. Soon the whole route was blocked with 
it and the advance of the column was extremely slow. Despair 
appeared on every face. But just 2 here Hannibal showed what an 
admirable general he was. 3 The whole army was exhausted with 
fighting and the toil of road making (use munio), but they had at 
last reached the summit', and now Italy was almost in sight. A 
rest of two days was allowed to recruit, and the camp was pitched 
upon the top of the ridge. During these two days, he drew up the 
lines on a height, which commanded a distant view, and pointed 
out the level plains of Italy, stretching beneath the mountains. 
"These mountains," he said, "are the ramparts of Italy; when they 
are once* scaled, the Roman citadel will soon be in our power." In 
this way he encouraged the soldiers before they left their camp. 

**>., their setting at sunrise ; Oct. 26. 2 p. 177, 4, note. 3 p. 30, I. 
*p. 1 06, i, note. 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XXI. 

{Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. JJ-J^y review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

It is generally agreed that he lost many men in crossing the 
mountains. There is no doubt 1 that some were carried off by 
starvation, some by cold, and many by the sword of the mountaineer. 
Some writers state that, after he crossed the Rhone and before he 
arrived in Italy, he lost thirty-six thousand men. There is no 
agreement, however, among the authorities (157, c) as to what his 
numerical strength was (use quotj 32), when he descended from 
the Alps. Some say he had one hundred thousand foot and thirty 
thousand horse ; and the statement of these writers is more' prob- 
able than that of those who say that he had only twenty thousand 
foot and six thousand horse. The route, also, by which he crossed 
the mountains is uncertain. Authorities, who usually have much 
weight with me, are not worthy to be believed 2 with regard to th^ 
matter. * 

'p. 22, I. 2 p. in, b; 38, 3. 

EXERCISE XXII. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 40-43). 

When Rome (162, 4) saw the Carthaginians taking up arms once 
more against her, she well knew that they were not to be despised. 
They had conquered Spain and Gaul ; they had made the high- 
spirited tribes of these lands tributary ; they had crossed lofty 
mountains and rapid streams ; they had an army which had been 
hunting cattle and campaigning for twenty years among the hills of 
Lusitania ; and they had an illustrious general who was the foster- 
child, as it were, 1 of the camp, to whom not a single soldier in the 
army was unknown. This dreaded erferny had to be met with an 
army of recruits, which had been beaten in the field the previous 
summer. The Roman general was unknown to the army, and the 
army was unknown to its general. He was, however, a man of high 
spirit, 2 and he advanced with all possible speed 3 to meet the enemy, 
encouraging his men to fight (16, i) as if they were fighting against 
their own slaves. 4 

1 P- J 73, 5- 2 P- 62, i ; p. 190, 4, c. 3 /8, 9, note. 4 ii7, 3> & 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. lO 

EXERCISE XXIII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 40-43 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

When the army was in this state of mind, he addressed them as 
follows : " You are going to engage (53, i ) an enemy, soldiers, whom 
you have frequently conquered both by sea and land. They are in- 
deed (quidem) our slaves, and have paid us tribute for twenty years. 
Fight, therefore, with the feeling that l you are fighting against your 
slaves. You will say 2 that we might, 3 had we wished, 4 have destroyed 
them by starvation ; by merely taking our fleet to Africa, we might 
have blotted out both their city and their name. We might, indeed. 
And would to Heaven 5 that we had taken this course, instead of 6 
making peace with them and granting them pardon ! Let each of 
you remember that he is fighting not merely for himself, his wife and 
his children, but also for his country. You are going to fight before 
the ramparts of Rome ; and, remember that the eyes of the country 
will be upon you." 

V 1 17, 3,0. 2 p. 203,/ 3 p. 33, 5- 4 P- 123, III. b. p. 25. 2. 
J use quum. 

EXERCISE XXIV. 
Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise XXIV. 

EXERCISE XXV. 
(Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 44-48). 

With a view to 1 encouraging the soldiers, he spoke on this occasion 
as follows : " '1 he day of battle, soldiers, is approaching, and I see 
that the enemy will give us an opportunity of meeting them in 
the field. We shall soon be in sight of their camp. Their allies 
have been stirred up to revolt, and will fly to arms and desert to us, 
that their lands may escape devastation. 2 Spare them in the fight ; 
we will show no cruelty 3 towards those of them 4 we take prisoners. 
All the needed (142, 8) supplies have been secured ; we have 
captured the granary where the Roman general had stored his corn. 
The general himself has taken up his position beside the stream, 
where we will soon attack and vanquish him. I now wish to pro- 



320 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

claim the rewards in expectation of which you will fight. I will 
give land, exempt from taxation, to any who wish land ; money, to 
those who prefer money. To those of our allies who wish to be- 
come citizens, I will afford the opportunity of becoming citizens." 

J p. 12, i. 2 p. 12, 2, note. 3 p. 157, c. 4 p. 8, 2. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 
Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise XXV. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 

{Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. 44-48; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

At first neither army saw the other ; but, after a little, a dust arose 
from the advance of such a large number of men and it was clear to 
us that the enemy were approaching. Orders were at once given to 
halt and prepare for battle. Great eagerness for the fray was shown 
in our army. The infantry raised a shout, 1 as they advanced in close 
order upon the enemy. The cavalry had been ordered to make a 
short detour and show themselves on the enemy's rear ; and no 
sooner 2 had they appeared than the enemy were thrown into con- 
fusion 3 and began to fly. The reserves had fled almost before our 
shout was- raised. These latter retired, in broken order, to their 
camp, where they told the story 3 that the whole army had been cut off. 
There were some, however, who showed more courage than the 
reserves 4 ; and these preferred to find death on the field rather than 
in flight. Many retired without disorder, and, advancing to the 
river, loosed the raft with which they had spanned the stream, and 
crossed in safety. 

!p. 38, 2. 2 p. 102, 4. 3 p. 157, c. 4 p. 1 10, 6. 

EXERCISE XXVIII. 

{Based on Livy, B. 21 ', cc. 49-53}. 

No sooner 1 was word of Hannibal's arrival 2 carried to Rome (use 
nuntio) than despatches were sent to the other consul in Sicily 
ordering him to reinforce his colleague at his earliest opportunity. 



EXERCISES Otf LIVY. 2 

Successful operations had been carried on in that island even 
before the consul's arrival. The Carthaginians had sent a fleet to 
ravage the coast of Sicily and the adjacent islands and to stir up 
their old allies. But the fleet was scattered by a storm, and some 
of the vessels were captured, without opposition, 3 by King Hiero 
and towed into port. A second fleet had been put to flight, with 
the loss of seven ships, by the praetor Aemilius, the Roman governor 
of the province. As the consul sailed into the strait, King Hiero 
met him and promised him his support 2 He said that the maritime 
states were in great danger ; that there were certain parties in them 
who hoped that there would be a political change. A few days after, 
they received word of the rout 2 of the Carthaginian fleet. There- 
upon the consul took his departure 2 and joined his colleague. 

V 102, 4. 2 p. 157, c. 3 p. 52, 5. 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

(Based on Livy, B. 21. cc. 49-53; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

The admiral (imperator) had intentionally delayed the advance 
of the fleet so as to approach the town before daylight. But the 
moon shone all through the night and the fleet, as it approached, was 
at once seen from the watch-towers. A call to arms was raised 1 and 
seamen and marines embarked without delay. The enemy, seeing 2 
that we were not unprepared, did not hold on his course, but began 
to clear his ships for action. No sooner 3 had day dawned, than we 
put out against him. The battle did not last long. Seven of his 
ships were surrounded and taken ; and, perceiving this, the rest 
turned to flight. Our fleet returned in safety to the harbor. All the 
marines and seamen taken in the battle were sold as slaves. 

l p. 38, 2. 2 p. 49, 10. 3 p. 102, 4. 

EXERCISE XXX. 
(Based on Ltvy, B. 21, cc. 49-53). 

In this battle they had been successful with the very arm (use 
pars) with which they had been beaten before. The general was 
elated accordingly and thought that there should be no further post- 



322 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

ponement or delay. 1 The day of the elections was approaching and 
he was afraid that, 2 by postponing the engagement (abl. abs.\ the 
glory of victory might be turned over to others. "Why are we wasting 
time?" he said ; "why must we delay longer? The empire must 
either be defended with the troops we have 3 or there is no hope of 
defending it at all. We have come here to liberate our country. 
Why, then, are we standing in inactivity within our lines ? The 4 
longer the battle is postponed, the more inactive we shall become. 
The enemy's camp is pitched on our native soil ; the time for action 
has come ; let us drive him before us, as our fathers were wont to 
do." By such short-sighted importunity (use ago), 5 he compelled his 
colleague to order the army to prepare for battle. 
^.45, 4J P. 157,* 'P. '7,1- 3 P-8,2. 4 P . 118,5- 5 i57,* 

EXERCISE XXXI. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. I and 2). 

That spring, he moved his army earlier than usual 1 from its winter 
quarters The Gauls began to assail him with secret plots, 8 and he 
had constantly to protect himself against them. They saw that 
their country had become the seat of the war, and it was not pleasing 
to them. However, after forming a conspiracy against him, 3 they 
usually betrayed it ; they are characterized by great fickleness. 4 
These attacks (insidiae), at any rate (certe), were one reason for 
his moving early. A second reason was the rumor of the arrival 
(use vb. ; 157, c.} of the consul at Arretium. 5 

V 77, 5- 2 P-74, 5- 3 P- 49,95 157, c. *p.62,i. 5 p. 83, 4. 

EXERCISE XXXII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. i and 2; review exercise Jo be done without 

the book}. 

The march lay (use sum ; 1 70, 8) across a swamp, which the water 
had completely covered. The guides went first ; then followed the 
veterans ; then, in the centre, came the Gauls ; the Numidians 
marched last and closed the column. No hardship was wanting. 
They could not halt, because the mud was so deep. There was no 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 323 

dry land on which (no, 6) they could stretch their weary bodies when 
seeking a little repose ; they had to pile (45, 4) the baggage in the" 
water and lie on that ; or else 1 they had to find a bed on a heap of 
cattle, many of which had fallen all along the route. Lack of sleep 
killed many ; this they had to endure for four days and three nights. 2 
The chief himself could hardly stand the inclemency of the weather 
and even lost the use of one of his eyes. 

1 omit. 2 p. 86, T.. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 
{Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. j and 4). 

No sooner 1 had he cleared the swamp and pitched his camp than 
he ascertained, through the instrumentality of 2 his scouts, all that it 
was for his advantage to ascertain. It was quite clear that the 
enemy would not remain inactive, and that they felt it a personal 
(use suus) dishonor that 3 the Carthaginians should be roving through 
Italy, besieging their towns, and wasting their land with fire and sword 
and all the horrors of war. The enemy's general, he ascertained* 
was a man of the most spirited temper, and rather prone to precipi- 
tate action ; and good fortune had fed his natural recklessness 
with success in war. All this showed quite clearly that he would not 
wait for his colleague, but would order the army to attack 5 
immediately. 

l p. 102, 4. 2 p. 75, 5, note i. 3 inf. ; p. 4 and 55, I. 4 p. 138, 
4. 5 p. 1 6, i, note. 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc.j and 4; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

Reaching 1 the lake at sundown, they pitched their camp at the 
very mouth of the pass, and next day entered the defile. They saw 
some of the enemy in front of them, but they did not know that 
others had taken up their position in the rear and over-head ; and 
that, in fact (use atque ; 201, a) they were completely surrounded. 
A thick mist from the lake now settled down upon the pass, 
Between the hills and the lake is a narrow plain, and on this th' j 
line was drawn up ; but before a shout 2 arose or a sword v/as drawn, 



324 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

the enemy began to advance in even order upon them. At the 
same time, fighting began 2 on both flanks, where the enemy's 
horse had taken up their position. 

>p. 49, 10. 2 p. 38, 2. 

EXERCISE XXXV. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. j* and 6). 

The general, in view of the alarm, 1 showed considerable resolu- 
tion, 2 and encouraged the troops to stand their ground ; but the word 
of command was drowned by the shouts of panic (173, 3 ; 48, 6) ; 
and so thick was the mist that the eye could not see which way 
they ought to turn (Ex. IX., note i). Some writers state that an 
earthquake occurred at the same time as the battle ; but, if it did 
(use flo), none of the combatants observed it ; such was the din and 
confusion that the use of both eye and ear were snatched from them. 
And now the battle had raged fiercely 3 for three hours, and it was 
clear that there was no hope of safety. Then their courage failed 
them, and all turned to flight. Some rushed into the lake and 
were drowned ; others, swimming back to land, were cut down by 
the cavalry ; a few made a sally, and cut a path through the enemy 
with the sword. 

J p. 1 1 8, 6,/ 2 use adv. 3 p. 38, 2, note. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc, j and 6 ; review exercise, to be done 

luiiJiout ike book). 

His words on this occasion were as follows (use hie) : " You are 
shut in, soldiers, on all sides ; on your flank are the lake and the 
mountain ; in front and rear are the enemy's lines. But the less 
fear you have, the less danger there will be (11*, 5) ; you must win 
your way out, not by prayers to J 1 eaven, but by strength and courage." 
After this exhortation, he put spurs to his horse, and dashed into the 
thick of the enemy, wherever 2 he saw his men hard pressed. But 
it was soon clear that there was no hope of escape. The tide of 
battle 3 turned against him ; and when the sun had dispelled the 
mist and cleared the sky, it revealed to mountain and lake utter 
ruin and a Roman army cut to pieces upon the plain. 

1 p. i$7,c; p. 49, 8. 2 p. 107, 5- 3 P- J 73, 3 ; use inclino, 



t . 
EXERCISES ON LIVY. 325 



EXERCISE XXXVII. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 7-9). 

Such was the celebrated defeat of Rome 1 beside Lake Trasumen- 
nus. The loss on both sides was enormous, and many died of their 
wounds after the battle. The Roman prisoners of war were thrown 
into chains. The Carthaginian dead were buried ; the body of the 
consul, who had fallen on the field, was carefully sought for by the 
victors, but it could not be found. Although successful in point of 
issue, the battle had not been an easy one to win for the enemy. 
A rest of several days had to be given the soldiers to recruit. They 
were still exhausted from their march across the swamp. After 
their rest, they marched straight into Umbria ; and, after laying 
waste the land, attacked some of its towns. A successful resist- 
ance 2 was offered by them to the victorious Carthaginian, who was 
thus able to form a guess as to what he had to hope for 3 from 
attacking the towns of Italy. 

*p. 162, 4. 2 p. 157, c ; p. 38, 3. 3 see Livy, Exercise IX., i. 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

(Based on Livy, B, 22, cc. 7-9; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

When word of the disaster reached Rome, a multitude of men 
and women rushed tumultuously into the market-place, inquiring of 
all they met the meaning 1 of the rumors which had been brought to 
the city. At first they could get no definite information 2 ; but at 
last, when they had waited all day long for the news, it was 
announced that the consul had been killed ; that few of the army 
survived and that these were either scattered in flight or prisoners 
of war. The terror was overwhelming ; 3 no one knew what to hope 
for or what to fear (24, d). The senate-house was thronged ; and the 
senate sat for several days from daylight to sunset, considering 
what was to be done. 4 After the loss of such an army, there were 
no forces with which resistance 5 could be offered to the victors. 

1 say what were; p. 30, T. 2 p. 161, i. 3 say very great; Livy, 
Ex. 3, 2. * p. 30, i ; p. 45, 4. 5 p. 157, c ; p. 38, 3, 



326 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 
{Based on Livy^ B. 22, cc. 10-12}. 

Then, and not till then (turn demuni) Rome was taught a lesson 
by her misfortunes, and she sought out a leader of courage 1 , firm- 
ness, and discretion. This was Fabius who was called (appello), 
because of his sober counsels, "Cunctator." Having brought 2 the 
political condition of the country before the House, they voted that 
Fabius was to take such action as seemed to him to be for the 
advantage of the nation. He said that he would enrol two new 
legions and that he would appoint a day for a general rendezvous. 
On the day appointed, the -new legions assembled at Tibur. 3 Some 
of these soldiers he sent to act as a garrison 4 for the city ; with the 
others he advanced against the enemy. Hannibal at once began 
to sound his temper and to test his firmness. He wasted the land 
of the allies 5 and burned their dwellings ; then he would suddenly 
decamp 6 and retire from sight or send an envoy to announce 7 that he 
would meet the Romans in the field. 

l p. 62, i and 2. 2 p. 49,9; use respublica. 3 p. 82, 2. 4 p. 69,8, 
5 p. 48, 4. *impf. ind. 7 p. 109, 2. 

EXERCISE XL. 

{Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 10-12 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book\ 

Meantime a despatch was brought to Rome stating that certain 
merchantmen carrying corn to the army in Spain had been 
captured by the enemy. Without delay, orders were sent to 1 the 
consul to man all the ships in Ostia with seamen and marines and 
to go at once in pursuit. The order was obeyed ; and a large num- 
ber of men were put on board the ships, which at once set out in 
pursuit of the enemy's fleet. They had also orders to protect the 
coast of Italy. The fleet afforded a fine spectacle as it sailed (navig-o) 
from harbor ; it showed that the state had not yet forgotten 
to protect 2 her armies and to afford complete safety to both citizen 
and ally. 

*p. 157, c. 2 p. 1 8, 3. 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 327 

EXERCISE XLI. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 13-15}. 

He made the following representations (use died) to the officers : 
" The enemy has long 1 been laying waste our lovely fields, storming 
our cities and colonies, and burning our villas. He is now by gifts 
and promises winning over our allies, sending men to announce 2 that 
they will be under a juster rule 3 than ours. We can see him, before 
our eyes, shut in by hills and streams on every side, and his cavalry 
are far off on a foray. Why do we hesitate ? Let us engage him 
before the horse can return (104,8) ; let us cut his army to pieces be- 
fore they can retreat. He must return 4 by the same pass by which 
he came ; he has therefore no hope of escape ; we can crush him 
as he leads the army back over the heights. Let us shake off this 
yoke from our necks. The war must be brought to an end by 
courage and action and not by timid prayers and cowardly 
counsels." 

V 34, 3- 2 P- 109, 2. 3 p. 157, c. 4 p. 45, 4- 

EXERCISE XLII. 
Turn into indirect narration, after dixir, the speech of Ex. XLI. 

EXERCISE XLIII. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 16-20). 

Next day at dawn, word was brought that the enemy's fleet was 
stationed off the mouth of the river, but that the seamen and marines 
were strolling upon the shore, without any expectation 1 either of an 
enemy or of a battle. Orders were at once given to our fleet to 
weigh anchor and cruise along the shore towards the river-mouth. 
No sooner 2 did the men in the look-outs (169, 3) these are towers 
that they are said to use against pirates see us approaching, than 
they despatched a horseman with orders that all their men should 
embark without delay and put to sea. But, whem word came that 
our fleet was close at hand, great confusion arose, 3 and the marines 
could hardly seize their arms, go on board and put to sea, before 
our ships were drawn up in line off the mouth of the river. At the 



328 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

first onset, two of the enemy's ships were captured and four were sunk. 
The rest immediately turned to flight, and were beached by their 
crews. Of these latter we dragged several out to sea. By this 
battle we got command of the whole coast and secured much booty, 

l p. 157, c; p. J40, i. 2 p. 102, 4. 3 p. 38, 2. 

EXERCISE XLIV. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 16-20; review exercise, to be done without 

the book}. 

And now the road was blocked, and (48, 4 and 7) he saw that he 
would have to cross the mountains. Before setting out, however, he 
'devised the following ruse. He had in camp a number of oxen, 
which he had taken from the country people ; these he decided to 
drive ahead of the column, after tying torches to their horns. 1 In 
the dusk of the evening, he decamped ; and when 2 he reached the 
foot of the hill, the torches fastened to the horns of the oxen were 
lighted, and the animals diiven up the hills. The whole forest 
seemed to be in a blaze. When the enemy, who had taken up their 
position on the top of the hill, saw what seemed to be fire-breathing 
animals rushing in every direction, at first they were rooted to the 
spot with astonishment ; then, leaving 3 their post, they turned and 4 
fled. And so the whole column was led across the ridge. 

1 p. 52, 6. 2 p. 107, 3- 3 P- 49, 10. 4 p. 48, 4. 

EXERCISE XLV. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 21-24}. 

In the absence of the dictator, 1 a battle had been fought, in which, 
though the loss had been nearly equal on both sides, the Romans 
had the credit of victory. Hannibal had sent out two-thirds of his 
forces to forage, under the idea that 2 the enemy would not venture 
to meet him in the field. But the dictator had gone to Rome, and the 
Roman army was at once marched down by its general from the 
heights and their camp pitched in the plain. Hannibal threw 
forward a body of horse to take possession of 3 a piece of rising 
ground that commanded the Roman camp, at the same time 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 329 

moving 4 his own camp two miles nearer the enemy. But next day 
the Romans dislodged the Carthaginian horse, and moved their 
own camp to the knoll. So Hannibal had to retire 5 to his former 
position, and carry on the war, for a time, in accordance with 
the tactics of Fabius, with more caution than spirit. 6 

J p. 52, 5. 2 p. 157, c. 3 p 109, 2. 4 makea co-ord. vb.; 48, 5. 5 p. 
45, 4. 6 p. 78, 7- 

EXERCISE XL VI. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 21-24', review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

Two circumstances seemed to enhance the dictator's unpopularity. 
The first had its origin (use oriorj 32, i) in the cunning -of 
Hannibal and in the following manner. Word was brought to that 
illustrious general (187, i, end), when he was spreading devasta- 
tion in the neighborhood of the city with fire and sword, that 
the dictator had a farm there. The cunning chief ordered his 
soldiery to abstain from violence while on this estate. All other 
dwellings in the vicinity were either burned or levelled to the ground ; 
but the dictator's barns and other buildings were unharmed. It 
seemed as if some agreement 1 had been arrived at between the 
two chiefs, fhe second circumstance was as follows : Money had 
long been owing by Fabius to Hannibal, for the ransom of some 
Roman captives. The business had been frequently canvassed in 
the senate, but the money had not been voted. Fabius had not 
consulted the House in the matter before the agreement as to the 
ransom had been made with the enemy ; the senate wanted to show 
him, accordingly, that he ought to wait for their sanction before 
taking action in so important an affair. 

V 157,* 

EXERCISE XL VII. 
{Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 25-29). 

All this Hannibal saw with delight. He saw that the bill was 
carried ; that the command of the dictator had been divided ; and 
that the command of the master of horse was now equal to that of 
the dictator's. He knew that, up to this point, reason had ruled in 



330 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

the enemy's camp ; and he saw that now recklessness had been set 
free from prison. At first he could hardly put credence in the 
report ; but when he saw that the rumor was true, and that there 
was no obstacle 1 now to bar his way, 2 he decided at once what steps 
had to be taken to entrap the rash Roman into an ambuscade. 
Nothing escaped him. The information 1 which he did not get from 
deserters, he got from his own scouts. Between the two hostile 
camps lay a valley, which, at first sight, seemed useless for laying 
an ambush : but it really contained rocks and recesses in which five 
thousand men could lie hid. This valley he selected to carry out 
(exsequor) the object he had in view. 

l p. 157, c. 2 p. 173, 3- 

EXERCISE XL VIII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 25-29 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

And now the day was drawing near for submitting the bill to the 
assembly of the people. The proposal was (it seemed) agreeable to 
the commons ; but it lacked the support of the better classes, none 
of whom had sufficient courage to come forward and recommend 
the measure. 1 Of those who had attained to offices of state, one man 
alone was found who ventured to take such a step. This was a 
man, Terentius Varro by name, who had been born not merely in a 
humble station, but positively in a mean one. He had come into 
notice by declaiming in the forum, and by attacking the reputation 
of better men than himself. And he fancied that he would now gain 
favor with the people by advocating such a bold proposal as this. 
In this he showed no inconsiderable cunning. 2 

l p. 187, i, end. 2 use adj. 

EXERCISE XLIX. 
(Based on Livy, B 22, cc. 29-33). 

Meanwhile the enemy had wrested a victory from the other 
consul. The latter had been cruising about the coast of Sardinia 
artd Corsica with a fleet of one hundred and twenty sail, when he 



EXERCISES ON LIVY. 331 

Suddenly formed the resolution (use videor) of making a descent 
upon Africa. He accordingly crossed over and, disembarking his 
troops on that continent, began to burn and plunder, just as if there 
were no people in the place. 1 No enemy closed with us ; but, 
when we had scattered and were straggling in every direction, we 
suddenly fell into an ambuscade and were surrounded. H earing the 
shouts of panic and seeing confusion reigning 2 everywhere, the 
admiral (consul) advanced with a few seamen to our relief. 3 The 
enemy at first sounded a retreat; then, facing about, 4 they drove us 
back to our ships. The slaughter was considerable, and we lost 
about a thousand men. 

V 117, 3> b. 2 p. 173, 3 ; 157, c. 3 p. 69, 8. 4 p. 49, 10. 



EXERCISE L. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 29-33 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the froo/c). 

His language 1 on that occasion was to the following effect (itd] : 
"We have come here to thank you, comrades, for the help you 
brought us yesterday; we should like you to know (24,^) that, if we 
have nothing else, we have grateful hearts. You appeared to us in 
our bewilderment, as if 2 you had dropped from the sky. Consider us 
worthy to fight once more (rursus) by your side. Let us learn obedi- 
ence ; the man who cannot command, should yield obedience to 
good advice. 3 This is what we must school 4 our hearts to do. Let 
us join our camp to yours and fight once more under the auspices, 
of your leader. I see that, though our commands are equal, he 
is my superior, both in courage and good fortune. The whole 
army wishes to thank him for his care and assistance. We will 
carry on the war hereafter on his tactics." 

'p. 157, c. 2 p. 117, 3, b. 3 p. 48, 6. 4 p. 173, 3. 



EXERCISE LI. 
Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise L. 



332 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE LII. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 34-38). 

Then came the elections for the appointing of consuls ; but only one 
was chosen, a man of plebeian origin, named Terentius Varro. He 
had never held the office before, and it was thought by many that 
such an important magistracy should not be conferred upon a new 
man. 1 The commons, however, had carried the day and he was ap- 
pointed consul, at a crisis when a man of courage and vigor seemed 
to be called for. The senate induced Aemilius Paulus, after a long 
and vigorous opposition on his part, to become a candidate for the 
remaining consulate. All the other candidates retired, and he 
was elected. Being (use quum ; 106, 2) antagonistic to the com- 
mons, it seemed likely 2 that he would offer no small opposition 3 to 
Varro. 

1 p. 45, 4. 3 p. 53, i ; 55, 5, note. 3 p. 157, c. 

EXERCISE LIII. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 34-38 ; review exercise, to be done without 

the 



It was on this occasion that the king received a vote of thanks 
from the senate. He had felt bitterly the defeat of his allies, and 
wished to assist them by any means in his power. Accordingly, he 
sent his fleet to Ostia to carry wheat and barley to Rome. With it 
was an envoy who was to say to the senate that the king was still 
their firm and faithful ally, and to beg that they would accept his 
gifts. He said that, while his kingdom had anything t at all, his 
allies should never want supplies. He added that he felt more 
admiration for them in adversity than in prosperity ; that, though 
an armed enemy had his home in the very vitals' of the country, 
Rome had carried on the war with the greatest courage, and had 
fought, if not always with success, at leastjyith spirit. The answer 
of the senate was as follows : " Ymir conduct h\s afforded us the 
greatest pleasure. 1 Your offer of support (use quod and polliceor), 
if in the public interest, we will accept ; we thank you in the name 
of both the senate and commons of this country." 

J use adj. 



EXERCISES Off LIVY. 333 

EXERCISE LIV. 
(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 39-Jfi). 

When Hannibal saw what had happened, 1 he was filled (use 
afficio) with joy. He saw that one of the consuls was mad. He 
knew that the plan used by Fabius was the only one for carrying 
on the war ; that, by sitting still, the Romans would conquer him, 
because he had no money and no supplies. But now he knew that 
Fortune would soon give the mad consul into his hands. In the 
first engagement between them, the Carthaginian loss was greater 
than that of the Romans. The latter were victorious and would 
have followed 2 the Carthaginians to their camp, if Paulus had not 
offered opposition 3 to such a course. 4 Varro was indignant, 
exclaiming : u Why are you letting them slip from your hands ? 
The war can be brought to a close if you do not hang back." 

l p. 30, i. 2 p. 123, III., b. 3 p. 157, c. 4 omit, as implied; words 
not strictly necessary to the sense are omitted in Latin ; 187, i,end. 

EXERCISE LV. 

(Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 39-42 ; review exercise^ to be done without 

the book). 

At break of day, word was brought 1 to the Roman host that the 
enemy had abandoned his camp,(leaving (co-ord. vb.} all the tents 
standing^) The soldiery at once ordered an advance. 1 " Let us go 
in pursuit," they said ; " let us see what plunder there is to be 
got in this camp." Paulus kept exclaiming that they ought 2 to 
exercise caution and foresight ; and he threw forward a squadron 
of horse to reconnoitre. They saw the tents standing open, and 
gold and silver thrown carelessly along the streets of the camp. 
But they were certain that it was the enemy's intention to surprise 
and attack the Roman army while engaged in plundering the camp. 
They brought back word to this effect 3 to the army. 

*p. 152, c. 2 p. 45, 4. 3 adv.; notice the frequent use of such 
nouns in Eng. : Cf. in spite of (tamen\ in consequence of (pb\ in 
return for (pro\ in accordance with (ex, secunduni), &c. 



334 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISES ON CICERO. 

EXERCISE I. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, 1-6). 

Gentlemen of the jury. 2 Before I begin the defence 1 of my client, 2 1 
will say a few words in my own. The prosecution have found fault 
with me for undertaking this case. They charge that it is inconsist- 
ent with 3 strict morality, that it is inconsistent in one who was him- 
self the author of a measure dealing with bribery and corruption at 
elections (ambitus), to undertake the defence of any man charged 
with that very crime. This criticism I do not deny it 4 affects me 
deeply; and, at the request of my friends, I will try to justify to you 
the reasonableness 5 of my course and show that it is quite consistent 
with the claims of duty. In the first place, who ought most 
naturally to undertake the defence of the first magistrate of the 
country but the man who has just been first magistrate himself? 
In the second place, as to my having passed a law dealing with 
bribery, why should that prevent me from undertaking this defence : 
If I defended bribery and corruption, 6 I should be guilty of wrong- 
doing ; but I deny that any offence has been committed in 
contravention of the law, and Ipray that your judgment, gentlemen, 
may coincide with mine. 

*p. 157,*. ? p. 88, 4. ,^p. 59, 2. 4 p. 138,4. 32, i. 6 p. 123, III. 

EXERCISE II. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, r-6; review exercise, to be done 
without the book). 

Insight into events transpiring in the state and foresight with 
regard to the future, are two necessary qualifications 1 of the highest 
statesmanship. 2 And I certainly do not think that any man without 
such qualifications 3 should be invested with the highest office in the 
gift of the people. A statesman ought also to possess practised 
ability in public speaking, not only that he may defend himself 
against the attacks of his enemies, but also that he may recommend 
his policy to the country. Again it is of the utmost consequence to* 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 335 

Che peace, tranquillity, and safety of the state that he should guide 
his course in accordance with the precedents established by our 
fathers. On the other hand, he would be guilty of misconduct, 5 if he 
did not weigh carefully even the smallest claims of duty, and dis- 
charge the functions of his office in accordance with the strictest 
morality and the strongest religious sanctions. 

V 59, 2. 2 p. 162, 3. s p . ,6^ 2> 4p . 66j 4> 5 p> 157) c 

EXERCISE III. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, 7-7-?). 

This is the reason, gentlemen, why I am engaged in the defence 
of my client (use idcirco quod). In the first place, he is my 
friend ; and it would argue 1 the greatest lack of principle 
to be unfaithful to a friend. But I would defend him, even 
if he were a perfect stranger to me. I am not a free man 
in this matter. As a reward for my activity as an advocate, 
I have received the highest office in the state. I cannot 
therefore refuse to bestow my labor freely in defending anyone 
whose life is in peril. To refuse to do so would be the height of in- 
gratitude. 1 The members of the prosecution are also my friends, 
and I shall not forget it; I will pay in full the debt due to their 
friendship for me. But I understand they feel annoyance 2 because 
I have undertaken this defence and they charge me with having for- 
gotten my relation to them. With regard to that matter, this is the 
view I hold : 3 No one is bound to refuse, at the request of one friend, 
to^defend the life of an other. I cannot think that they could be so 
unjust as to demand it. But if they do, they ought not to ob- 
tain their request. 4 

ip. 59, 2. 2 p. 66, 3. 3 p . I5?) Cm 4 p- 45? 4> 

EXERCISE IV. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, 7-12; review exercise, to be done 
without the booK). 

It is always a principle with the prosecution, if their case is weak, 
to abuse the opposite party. A nd this is what- they are doing now. 
They accuse my client of having visited the East for the purpose of 



336 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

gratifying a love of luxurious pleasure. If this charge were true, 1 it 
would be a most serious one ; as it is false, to make it at all ( 1 77, note), 
argues 2 great heartlessness on the part of the prosecution. No 
young man with any sense of duty could have avoided visiting the 
East when my client did. He went there to serve a campaign under 
the command of his own father. If he had not gone, he would have 
incurred the suspicion of cowardice and of lack of enterprise. His 
willingness 3 to serve under his father was in keeping with his 
character for filial affection. His living to share in that father's 
triumph was consistent with his usual good fortune. May 4 he be no 
less fortunate now, gentlemen, in his struggle to maintain his civil 
rights ! Certainly nothing could be more frivolous than this 
criticism of his private life. 

l p. 123, III. 2 p. 59, 2. s p. 157, c. 4 p. 25, 2. 



EXERCISE V. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murcna, ij-iS}. 

The following are the qualifications in reliance upon which a 
candidate may sue for the highest office in the gift of the people : 
Good birth, integrity, and energy. When he has these qualifications, 
he may consider a firm foundation laid for his canvass. It is "well for 
him if he has all three ; if not, 1 he^must not assume that the doors 2 of 
office are closed to him, or that he will be left in obscurity. Many 
a man, who has received from his ancestors no distinction either of 
birth or name, has broken through the barriers raised by the 
nobility against him and defeated opponents of the highest merit 
and the greatest influence. If only he is loyal and honest, if no 
extravagance can be laid at his door, 2 no love of pleasure, no riotous 
living, he will be counted worthy by the people of obtaining the 
highest honors. In this country, both in ancient and in modern 
times, there has always been a fair field open to men of true merit, in 
which they could come to the front and receive recognition. 

*p. 121, 6. 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 337 

EXERCISE VI. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, 13-18; review exercise, to be 
done without the book}. 

I did not expect, gentlemen, that my client 1 would be reproached 
with being a political upstart. Such a charge savors 2 both of 
vehement accusation and malevolent abuse. 3 If you claim that 
no one but the members of the old nobility is entitled to be regarded 
as noble, you will bring on another secession. In any comparison 
of rank, my client's family will not fall behind the noblest families 
in the country. It is a family known to the student of literature 
and to the antiquarian; but its praises are constantly sounded by 
men of our own day. My client's father held a high office of state 
and, after filling that office, won distinguished military successes in 
the field, and handed down an illustrious name to his son. But, apart 
from all this, would not an avenue of distinction have stood open, 
as our ancestors wished, to merit as well as to nobility ? My own 
father was a member of the middle class ; yet I managed by my 
unaided efforts to be elected to the highf st office in the gift of the 
people, without anyone ever daring to apply the title of political 
upstart to me. 4 

J p. 88, 4. 2 p. 59, 2. 3 p. 162, 3. 4 p. 139, i. 

EXERCISE VII. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, 19-23). 

Of all professions, the military profession is the best calculated 
for winning popular favor. The soldier's life is a hard one. He 
watches late, but is wakened by the bugle before daybreak. He 
inarches off at the head of his army to reach the rendezvous (say 
the point he is marching for] in time. He engages the enemy and 
often fights hand to hand. He repels hostile attacks and prevents 
(caveo ne) the capture 1 of our cities. It is he who extends our 
frontiers, compels universal obedience to our rule, 1 and wins imper- 
ishable glory for the empire. All other arts nestle in safety under 
the aegis of the art of war ; can anyone doubt then that this art 
will confer dignity and honor upon a commander who is engaged in 
carrying on an important war? Are you not laboring under a 



338 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

mistake when you assert that military distinction will harm rather 
than assist a political candidate? This nation, at all events, has 
always considered its great soldiers as every way worthy of the 
highest offices in its gift. 

l p. 157, c. 

EXERCISE VIIL 

{Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, 19-23 ; review exercise, to be done 
without the book}. 

The lawyer's life, gentlemen, is a hard one. He sits up late; but 
he is wakened at cock-crow. His whole day is full of incessant 
labor. He gives advice to those who come to consult him ; he gives 
written opinions to others ; he is eternally laying actions, or in some 
other way serving the interest of his client. In short, he is at the 
beck and call of everybody, has to put up with their folly and in- 
solence, and pocket their ill-humor. If the professions and pur- 
suits that are calculated to gain popular favor are to be compared, 
then the law will be found to be superior to many others. A man, who 
is always ready to serve others, keeps his merits before the public eye. 
Surely that is a great advantage. 1 If the lawyer were long away from 
the courts, 2 you have no idea how it would injure him ; he must, there- 
fore, make his home in them ; this is the only way that he can 
become known. 

l p. 157,*. 2 p. 123, II. 

EXERCISE IX. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 11-13). 

This is the reason, gentlemen, why the orator's faculty takes 
precedence 1 of that of the lawyer, as regards the attainment of (ad) 
office. This is the reason why the orator is so much admired. 
Many in consequence wish to become orators ; but, failing in their 
endeavors, come down to the legal profession. Many, after long 
practice, make but little proficiency in public speaking ; very few 
have reached eminence in it so difficult is eloquence of attain- 
ment. What dignity and influence it carries with it -I It is directed to 
swaying the minds of juries, to confirming or overturning the decrees 
of senates and nations, to quelling the incendiarism (furor) of 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 339 

demagogues, to guiding angry mobs, to stemming the tide 2 of cor- 
ruption, and to instituting salutary regulations by law. Is it to be 
wondered at that so many men of genius should consider the culti- 
vation of oratory a great achievement ? 
!p. 157, c. 2 p. 173, 3- 

EXERCISE X. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 11-13 ; review exercise, to be done 
'without the book}. 

Law is a paltry science chiefly concerned with trifles like single 
letters and punctuation marks. It was admired in the past on this 
account, namely, because the days on which actions could be 
brought were a secret 1 known to very few. When that mystery was 
divulged, the science sank at once into contempt. It is full of 
prolix formulas and absurd forms of words, altogether devoid of 
common sense and put together with this object by the lawyers, 
namely, that the science might not be accessible to all, but that 
they themselves might have a finger 2 in every lawsuit. It has 
abandoned the spirit of equity and clings to the letter, and it is 
based on fictions invented by the mind of man. 3 

J p. 32, i. 2 P- 173, 3- 3 P- 165, i, b. 

EXERCISE XI. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 14-16). 

Is my client to be condemned, gentlemen, because he is a 
soldier? You and I hold a very different opinion. 1 We maintain 
that the profession of arms is a most honorable and a most useful 
one, and not in any respect deserving of ridicule. To it, to say 
nothing else, this country owes its pre-eminence among the nations 
(use on account of which and a vb.), and our cities their 
freedom from the dangers of storm and siege. In time of war 
all other professions and pursuits sink into insignificance in 
comparison (use prae). We send out our greatest men to conduct 
wars against other nations and the records of ancient history assure 
us that our generals have often been elected to the first offices in 
the state so high is the estimate which the country sets upon its 
soldiers. But my client is not only a soldier, he is a good soldier } 



340 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

and on many a hard-fought field his courage, his activity, and his 
discretion have been a shining mark. He has defeated hostile 
fleets, crushed armies, defended your provinces and allies, and 
extended the resources and military strength of the country. Con- 
sider the distinction and achievements of your great commanders, 
and do not forget that it is our present object to defend a man of 
the same character as they. 



EXERCISE XII. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 17-20). 

But what considerations, 1 gentlemen, do weigh with the people at 
an election? What qualifications are of advantage to a seeker after 
office in his candidature? Men of rank and men of ability have 
often been beaten in the competition when there was no possibility 
(use possum; ill, c., note) of discovering the reason for such 
a result. But, in the first place, a candidate who is to head the 
poll must have people's good word and good will, and these 
he must secure by good nature, justice, and honesty. Let 
him, therefore, be at the service of his friends; let him con- 
ciliate kindness, and avoid shocking the feelings of anyone. 
In the second place, he must have influence. Many men prefer a 
candidate who has influence to one who has none ; and for one who 
affects (dico) to despise this, the enthusiasm of friends is xery apt to 
be impaired. In the next place, generosity is a great aid towards 
gaining office. The populace take great delight' 2 in the display of 
munificence, and nothing is more pleasing to them and more in- 
fluential than credit for this. kind of thing. 

ip. 161, 2. 2 p. 157, c. 

EXERCISE XIII. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 17-20; review exercise, to be done 
without the book}. 

What a difference there is in the destinies of men ! One man 
Fortune permits (sino) to live in the midst of pleasure ; on another 
she imposes the severest labors. One man owes to chance 
ability, wisdom, rank, good fortune; his country gives him a^ 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 341 

opportunity of showing his integrity, good nature, and generosity ; 
and he is raised by the enthusiasm of admiring friends to the high- 
est positions in the country. Another man owes nothing to chance, 
and Fortune always seems to be opposed to him. He has no luck, 
no ability, no rank, no influence, nothing, in short, in which people 
take delight and by which they are specially attracted. Can anyone 
wonder then that their countrymen should refuse to give such men 
a place of honor at an election ? 

EXERCISE XIV. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 21-24). 

To this is added the fact that my able friend does not know how 
to run an election ; this I have frequently remarked in his own 
hearing. 1 It often indeed (enimvero) happens that a candidate shows ' 
both courage and magnanimity and yet shocks the kindly feelings 
of friends and supporters and gives an advantage 2 to his op- 
ponent. If men see a candidate down-hearted and dejected, if 
they see that he has lost hope of his own success, their ardor is 
damped 3 and they vote for some one else. And this was the mistake 
that my friend here made ; 4 he simply met dissatisfaction and defeat 
half-way. Turning aside 5 from his canvass, he began to collect evi- 
dence against his opponent, threatening (Caes. Ex. 40, 2) to prosecute 
him for bribery. He showed in this way that he had lost confidence 
in himself and in his friends. The consequence was that (quare) some 
of the latter transferred their aid and influence to his opponent, and 
others reserved themselves for the trial. I know myself by experience 
the difficulty of contesting an election and 6 I have learned that 
to damp the enthusiasm of friends is simply to block the path of 
success. 

*p. 52, 5. 2 p. 157, c. 8 p. 173, 3- 4 P- 161, i. 5 P- 49, io- 6 P- 
48,4- 

EXERCISE XV. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 21-24; re-view exercise, to be 
done without the book}. 

What we ought to ask for is a law against bribery ; and there is 
jio possibility 1 of the House refusing our demand, unless 2 they wish 



342 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

to put a weapon against themselves into the hands of their 
enemies. All loyal men 3 should feel indignant to think that this 
evil is a standing (use semper) menace to the country, and should 
lend us their zealous offices in driving it forth from amongst us. 
I have shown that no one man is equal to the work of carrying any 
law ; let all then unite in repelling this common danger, and give us 
a (z's) law which 4 will check arrogance and crime. Let its provisions 
be of the strictest and the penalty nothing less than banishment.^! 
You say that it will cause commotion 5 among the poor. No matter^ 
(use at}. My conclusion is 5 that bribery is paving the way to 
calamity and that, unless we apply the axe to the root of (omit} the 
evil, madness and discord and secret hatred will soon be stalking 
(versor) in our midst. 

1 P- I 5) 5- 2 P- I2 ) 3- *optimus quisque. 4 p. no, 5. 5 p. 157, c. 



EXERCISE XVI. 

* 

on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 25-2?}. 

Who can ever tell the anxiety, misery, and hardship involved in 
a life of ambition ? (say how much is). In their greed of honor 
and wealth, to what depths 1 will men not descend ? Candidates, 
who have never before been guilty of any delinquency, 2 have in the 
bitter struggle for office been led to wrong even a friend, and to 
engage in political feuds with men possessed of every virtue. 
We all remember a noble youth, who should have been a tower 1 
of protection to all, accusing an honorable friend of corruption in 
the courts, simply because this man had been a competitor of his 
own. In lust of office, and to secure his own election, many a 
man has made himself the standard-bearer of conspirators and 
political outlaws and thus become a menace to the safety of the 
country. Is it to be wondered at, then, that anyone should turn 
aside from personal animosities, hatreds, and ambitious pursuits, 
and betake himself joyfully to a life of peaceful tranquility ? 

1 P- 173, 3- 2 P- l6l > '- 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 343 

EXERCISE XVII. 

{Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 25-27 ; reinew exercise, to be done 
without tJie book}. 

You remember, gentlemen, that, on hearing these facts, the House 
on the 2 ist of March resolved, on my motion, that the election 
should not be held upon the day they had originally wished to hold 
it. All the loyal party (boni) voted for the motion ; they were 
thoroughly roused and feared that the country had been brought to 
a dangerous pass. Next day I demanded in a crowded House what 
action was to be taken in the premises. You recollect that I entered 
a brief protest and complained that so many honorable members 1 
had refused to accept my story. 2 I declared that these had inspired 
us all with terror and with despair of the public safety. I said that 
I had long known there was conspiracy (162,3) in our midst and 
had often stated that there was not the remotest possibility 3 of 
discovering who the nefarious parties were 4 unless members believed 
the evidence laid before them. And yet that many in the House 
and those, too, men who had never been opposed in spirit to the 
loyal party had, for some reason or other, refused to lend credence 
to the disclosures I had made. 

J p. 3, 8. 2 use vb. 3 p 15, 5. 4 p. 30, i and 3. 

EXERCISE XVIII. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Mureita, cc. 28-30). 

But if Nature herself had given him distinguished virtues, if she 
had fashioned him a great man in all noble qualities, education had 
done no less. A man naturally of the highest ability and integrity, 
he also possessed eloquence and culture ; and everyone admits 
that these high gifts and attainments carried wonderful weight 1 in a 
court of justice. History indeed tells us 2 that he delivered a speech 
in behalf of an innocent man who was accused of crime, and 
rescued him from his accusers who were bent on his destruction. 
It is said that he even induced the prosecution to abandon their 
resolution and yield to entreaty. He said that it was the part 3 of 
good men to pity and pardon ; that these were the attributes of 
Cod himself; if they destroyed the prisoner at the bar, they would 



344 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

be filled with remorse 4 ; let them, therefore, look forward to the 
future and not establish such an unjust principle to their own 
destruction (say against themselves}. 

*p. 173, 3. 2 say /'/ is handed down to memory. 3 p. 59, 2. 4 p. 66, 3. 

EXERCISE XIX. 

{Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 28-30; review exercise, to be done 
without tJie book). 

The Stoic system is rather too harsh and severe to have much 
weight with the unlettered multitude. In fact its principles and 
precepts are of too 1 exalted a kind to serve as a rule of conduct for 
any but the greatest minds. 2 Its able and learned teachers do not 
attempt to reform and influence men ; they wish to change them. 
" Do not be angry," they say ; "do not yield to entreaty ; do not 
feel compassion ; do not grant pardon or indulgence." A man 
professes the Stoic philosophy : if he was a fool, he becomes wise ; 
if he was a beggar, he becomes rich ; if a slave, he becomes a king. 
But such doctrines neither nature nor truth will admit. If 
compassion 3 and leniency are crimes, the good and bad cannot be 
distinguished ; if all offences are equal, then to kill unnecessarily 
a barn-yard fowl is as atrocious an act as to throttle a man. 

*p. in, c. 2 say 'that any but (nisi) the greatest should live by 
them.' 5 p. 157, c 

EXERCISE XX. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 31-34). 

Within the memory of our fathers, nay within our own 
remembrance, bribery at elections was not deemed a very re- 
prehensible act. Candidates felt no self-reproach 1 in buying 
supporters ; the poor man felt none in selling his support ; the 
public at large expressed no surprise, indignation, or complaint ; 2 
and statutes and acts of parliament, intended to punish the offence, 
were ekher opposed by the official class (nobiles), or, if passed, had 
a mild construction put upon them by the courts. It is not, therefore, 
very wonderful, if the offence was once a common one. But time 
has changed all that. Bribery is now seen and declared to be not 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 345 

only unnecessary, unjust, and illegal, but a grave offence, to be 
punished by fine and incarceration. And there can be little doubt 
that the new law is a salutary one and likely to prove a blessing 3 to 
the country. . 

'p. 66, 3. 2 p. 157, 3 p. 69, 8. 

EXERCISE XXI. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 35-37}. 

Gentlemen of the jury, It is of the utmost consequence 1 to the 
country that public offices should be awarded upon the ground of 
merit alone. I loudly protest 2 that it is not right, that it is most 
immoral, that men's minds should be influenced or cajoled in this 
matter by money, pleasure, or any other consideration. Why, in 
short, should a candidate canvass anyone for his support? Should 
he not rather wait until he receives an invitation from the people to 
take the helm of state and to place himself in authority over them ? 
It is no slight task that he is undertaking. He is engaging to do 
work and encounter peril for the public good ; his thoughts will 
have to be on the administration of the government night and day ; 
and he will have to face strong opposition, countermine the plots of 
the disloyal, and keep the country safe from danger. 

*p. 66, 4. 2 p. 1 66, c. 

EXERCISE XXII. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 38-4.1). 

Exalted political station 1 is exposed to almost universal envy, 1 
though why it should be so I fail to see ; it ought rather to excite 
universal 2 commiseration. 3 Dangers threaten it\>n every side It 
is at the mercy of the cabals of treason, the secret machinations 
of conspiracy, and the fire and sword of the public enemy. The 
madness of the demagogue stalks in the senate-house and the 
market-place, seeking to shake the government to its foundations. 
Those, therefore, who hold the helm of state, though seemingly 4 the 
favorites of Fortune, have no light task to perform. In the interests 
of peace and domestic tranquility, they must make war upon the 
public enemy abroad and upon the enemy of order at home ; they 
must defend the country from the evils that are continually breaking 



346 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

forth, and they must safeguard the lives and property of the 
citizens. God grant that 5 our worthy magistrates may be no less 
fortunate both i arms and in a civil capacity ! 

l p. 162, 3. 2 use all. 3 p. 66, 3. 4 p. 166, d. 5 2$, 2. 

EXERCISE XXIII. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. I and 2). 

And I am surprised, that his subsequent conduct should have 
shown such strange 1 inconsistency with so noble a beginning. 
From that day to this, he has admitted to his councils none but 
blackguards and traitors. Not a single act of public administration 
(use respublica) has been submitted to this House and that, too, 
though he published a notice demanding our attendance. 2 After 
giving the country, by the abolition 2 of despotism, a solemn pledge 
that he desired its freedom, 2 he has, by means of the popular 
assembly, usurped absolute power for himself. He is now offering 
incentives 2 to runaway slaves to menace the safety of this city and 
declaring that he will bring to nothing the authority of this House. 
it adj. as implied ; 187, i, end. 2 p. 157, c. 



EXERCISE XXIV. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic I, cc. i and 2j review exercise, to be 
done 'without the book\ 

To the other chief of the executive I intend to move a vote of 
thanks in the most complimentary terms at my command, and I 
ask the House to support the motion and pass it without discussion. 
I will explain briefly the secret of my enthusiasm (use cur and an 
adj.). He has always consulted the good of the country and the 
interests of this House. Like a sentry at his post ( 1 73, 5) he has stood 
with his eye fixed upon the public administration. How noble has 
been his language, how elevated his sentiments ! (use voluntas) 
Thanks to him (say through /izm) we have been delivered from the 
dangers that menaced us. The disloyal have been punished ; civil 
strife has been appeased an evil which was beginning to creep in 
among us and was spreading further and further every day ; the 
foundations of future peace, in short, have been well laid, and the 
yoke of slavery has been dashed from our necks. 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 347 

EXERCISE XXV. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 3 and 4). 

Those gentlemen, sir, 1 added certain inventions 2 of their own to 
lend an agreeable flavor 3 to their news ; but it was from them that t 
first learned the tenor of the magistrate's public address, the read- 
ing of which 4 gave me great satisfaction, as it showed every indication 
of moderation. There were many dangers threatening, he explained 
(dico; 1 38, 4) ; but he was not much alarmed. An understanding 
would be arrived at ; he would guarantee that. He was buoyed up 
by a consciousness of his own devotion to the country and hoped to 
gain credit for himself and to recommend his course of action 5 to all. 
With regard to the political situation, he said little. There would be 
a meeting of the House on the tst and he hoped that there would be 
a full attendance. His intention was to repudiate all his evil coun- 
sellors and submit himself once more to your authority. He hoped 
to receive a general 6 support. 

l uszpatres conscripti. 2 p. 161, I. 3 p. 173, 3. 4 p. 50, 14. 5 use 
re I. 6 use all. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 3 and 4; review exercise, to 
be done without the book). 

On the ist of August he arrived at Brundisium and from there 
crossed over to Syracuse in Sicily, to which city he made a very 
rapid passage. 1 Will it be matter for surprise if his stay there 
lasted longer than one night? What possible motive 2 could he have 
had for immediate (use statiiri) departure ? The city was bound to 
him by the closest possible ties, and the townsmen would have 
protested had he dreamt 2 of leaving ; he was staying at the house of 
an intimate friend who esteemed him highly on public grounds ; he 
was waiting for a fair wind and, in any case, had he set out, he 
would have been driven back to the point of embarkation. 1 Was he 
afraid that his remaining there might have given rise to suspicion ? 
Or that he would not be able to return to Rome in time to offer his 
congratulations 1 to the country ? 

*p. 1 57, ^ 2 p. 173,3- 



348 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 
{Based on Cicero, Philippic I, cc. j and 6\. 

If I had been in this House when the question of peace was 
under consideration, I should have endeavored (conor) to maintain 
the dignity of the country and to show myself worthy of the many 
honorable distinctions I have received at the hands of the people. 
" Do you wish, gentlemen" (I should have said), 2 " to be suspected of 
cowardice and to be untrue to your high position ? What possible 
motive can the magistrate have for bringing this matter before so 
thin a House? This peace is not necessary; it simply means 
voluntary servitude. Would to Heaven 1 we had men here like the 
famous Appius who history tells us 2 in spite of 3 blindness and old 
age was carried down to the debate on the peace with Pyrrhus 
(use quum ; 108, 6). He could not have been induced to support 
a motion which would have brought upon the country not only 
war but pestilence and famine as well. Such a motion I, for my 
part (use ego\ will never support, not even if it were introduced by 
the man who first delivered this country from the despotism of 
kings." 

J p. 25, 2. 2 p. 138,4. 8 p. 115, ii. 

EXERCISE XXVIII. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. j and 6 ; review exercise, to be 
done without the book]. 

I knew, sir, that the question of appointing a solemn thanks- 
giving would be brought before you ; but, as I was tired after my 
journey and in ill-humor besides, I did not attend the meeting of 
senate. Attendance, indeed, on such occasions is almost optional, 
as the House is usually full. Further, I had no intention of speak- 
ing on the subject ; I would, not unwillingly, have supported the 
mover of so excellent a motion. In any case (certe}, I was not the 
only member absent. Why, then, was I summoned in such in- 
temperate language by the first magistrate to attend yesterday's 
meeting ? Why had he the audacity 1 to say in your hearing 2 that 
he would send public employees to tear down my residence, a 
residence erected at the expense of the state? No misdemeanor 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 



349 



can possibly merit treatment like this, and I regret very much 
that such severity could have received the sanction of your approval 
(use probo\ It was not to enable him to trample upon 3 the con- 
stitution that the people raised this man to the summit of 
greatness. May Heaven forgive him ! 
J p. 157, 6-. 2 p. 52, 4. 3 p. 173, 3- 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 7 and 8). 

At a mistake, sir, of this kind I can connive ; but I will not 
submit to the abrogation of the most salutary law of the ablest 
statesman we ever had. The law limiting our colonial governor- 
ships to two years, was an excellent one ; his judicature act is even 
more useful and necessary, and must not be interfered with or 
changed. It was submitted to the people in the popular assembly 
and as the expression of the people's will was engraved on brass. 
A property qualification was required, you say (use at enim\ No 
doubt (at ; 203,7). But k met with universa11 approbation, 2 not- 
withstanding. And, surely, in such an important matter, account 
should be taken not only of a man's position, but also of his property. 
To whom by the new law is the* bench thrown open? To common 
soldiers. And why ? I wish the first magistrate were here himself 
to inform us. Is he not calling such persons to the bench in the 
hope that they will not dare to give an impartial verdict? 2 What 
an insulting distinction ! But I think he will find that he has 
made a mistake, and that, in proportion to a man's apparent 
meanness, will be his strict impartiality in pronouncing judgment. 3 
2 1 57, c. 3 1 18,5. 



EXERCISE XXX. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 7 and 8; review exercise, to be 

done 'without the book). 

He made many promises 1 in his life-time and conferred 
even more favors than he made promises. However 2 un- 
just or useless a promise seemed, he always kept it, entering 
it in his note-book in order to remember it (Caes., ex. 40, 2). 



350 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

The more importunate a suppliant was, the more kindly 
and gladly he listened to him. Money he never made account 
of ; and would to Heaven all he spent were still in the 
treasury ! It was no doubt 3 the price of blood ; but, now that he is 
dead, it might be restored to its rightful owners, 4 or, in a crisis like 
this, it would have been useful to the country. In a civil capacity, 
he enacted many useful measures, and proposed many salutary laws, 
the abrogation 5 of which now would endanger the constitution. The 
express wishes of the people, he never treated with contempt, and 
he always endeavored to obtain for his measures the general 6 
sanction. For my own part, I think, and am free to affirm, that 
even in the palmy days of the country's history, none of our states- 
men ever earned greater distinction (use adj.) 

1 p. i6r, i. 2 p. 115, ir. 3 p. 89, 7. *rel. 5 p. 50, 14. 6 use all. 

EXERCISE XXXI. 
\ (Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 9 and 10). 

It is the duty, 1 sir, of every true friend of his country to point 
out rocks ahead 2 that may be avoided. We are not as yet committed 
in the matter ; but the passing of this law will be tantamount to 
the rescinding of all laws, for it abrogates the laws on which the 
very constitution is built 2 laws which are the glory of this country. 
In whose interest, 3 therefore, is it that such a law should remain 
upon the statute-book ? The interest of the factionist and the dis- 
loyal. Under it, prosecution for high treason will be simply an 
impossibility. 4 Allowing, as it does, 5 an appeal to the people, it 
renders nugatory the statute which makes banishment the penalty 
of conviction for treason. Allowing an appeal to the people, it 
holds out to persons already convicted in a court of law of using 
violence, an inducement to have recourse to the same violence 
which they have already been found guilty of using. No jury 
will ever venture, by finding a verdict of guilty, to expose itself to 
fury of a hired mob. This law then is intended as a machine for 
making 6 our young men bad and factious citizens. 

V 59, 2. 2 p. 173, 3. 3 p. 66, 4. 4 p. 15, 5. V 177, 4, note. 
6 173, 3 ; use id agitur ut. 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 351 

EXERCISE XXXII. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic 7, cc. 9 and 10; review exercise, to be 
done without the book). 

There is perfect unanimity 1 in the public mind as to what the publid 
safety requires. No one approves of these measures; still, the 
opinion 1 is universal that in the interest of peace and concord they 
ought to be maintained. We have, however,- at least the right to 
remonstrate, and I do seriously deprecate such abuses. Good laws 
have been abrogated or invalidated ; the privilege of citizenship 
has been conferred without the authority of the senate ; state 
revenue has been lost by the granting of endless exemptions ; the 
veto has been disregarded ; the religious safeguards of the 
constitution set aside. N ou will say that these institutions are 
the follies of a by-gone age. Not so (at). The very existence of 
the country is bound up with them. If our magistrates are honest ; 
if they will shield the country by the veto and the religious safe- 
guards that we have received from our ancestors, we may rest in- 
tranquility. 



XXHI. 



EXERCISE XX 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 11-13^) 

Would to Heaven 1 that you had taken for your model 2 in this 
matter your worthy grandfather ! Do you think that he would have 
used arms within the city limits, even in self-defence ? A man of 
the loftiest aims, 3 his chief desire was not unlawful authority, not 
lucre, not influence achieved by violent means it was the respect 
and affection of his countrymen. No day dawned that did not find 
him conferring some gift upon his country ; and he reaped the 
reward of right action when all classes high and low, rich and 
poor crowded to congratulate and thank him for his distinguished 
public services. Uo you think that he would have resigned such an 
honorable position for money or unlawful authority? Therefore I 
can not pass unnoticed the mistake you are making. You know by 
experience what the love and respect of your fellow-citizens means, 
but you seem to be tired of* this distinction. No one can say, how- 
ever, that he has ever seen any meanness or baseness 5 in your 



352 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

character, and the country declares itself ready to forget the acts 
which have given offence and to lay aside all feeling of indignation 
(dolor.) She asks you to cease from hostilities against her , and, 
using such language, 2 ought she not to obtain her request ? 

'p. 25, 2. 2 p. 157, r. 3 p. 161, i. *p. 66, 3. 5 p. 1 60, i. 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic I, cc. 11-13 ' review exercise, to be done 
without the book}. 

You know by experience 1 how great the satisfaction of right action 
is. You have received the thanks of parliament for distinguished 
public service. Are you already tired of such distinction? Can 
you lay it down with equanimity? Would to Heaven you would 
recall that day on which, by giving your son as a hostage for peace, 
you cleared your country from an overwhelming dread (use great*) \ 
Can you have forgotten it ? Can you prefer all these latter months to 
that one day ? If anyone were to fancy that you were now happy, 
his opinion would differ very much from mine. No one can be happy 
without the affection of his countrymen. Some say that you have an 
eye for money, which great men have always despised in proportion 
to their greatness. But I know that this is an error. Show, then, 
that, though you have not been able to avoid the suspicion of this 
crime, you can at all events keep clear of the guilt of it. 



EXERCISE XXXV. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 14 and 75). 

What I am afraid of, is this. I am afraid that you may fancy abso- 
lute power to be a great and glorious thing, even if combined 1 with 
universal detestation (use ita...ut\\%2, J, a). But what an odious 
thing to be the object of universal hatred ! Would to Heaven, then, 
you would change your course and administer the government in 
sucn a way as to commend yourself to your countrymen ! They 
would not, then, grieve to think that you had ever been born. You 
can not be happy. No one can be happy who does not advance his 
country's interests. You have had a unanimous verdict from the 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 353 

people. Can you not divine its meaning ? But if you believe that 
this is of small weight though it is of the greatest, lend an atten- 
tive ear to my testimony : 1 would not accept immortality itself on 
condition of being an object of apprehension 2 to my country. If you 
think that the solicitude of the loyal with regard to your course of 
life has some significance, listen to my words. If not, then no 
words can accomplish anything or weigh with you one jot. 

1 say on this condition to be hated by all, that you alone may have 
power. 2 p. 157, c. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. 14 and 15 ; review exercise, to be 
done without the book). 

Though he despised the applause so often bestowed upon dema- 
gogues, he was not ignorant of the path that leads to true distinc- 
tion. True glory and happiness, in his opinion, while implying 
precedence in point of honour, implied also equality in point of 
liberty. His life consisted of disinterested public service, and he 
reaped his reward in the respect and affection of his country. On 
this point the testimony of his countrymen is unanimous. Other 
statesmen have been esteemed, other statesmen have been honored, 
but he is enshrined in the nation's heart. Statues and popular 
ballads will long keep his memory green, 1 but we shall not easily find 
consolation 2 for our grief at the death of our great liberator, 

1 173, 3 ; use memini '157, c. 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. 1-3). 

With public issues 1 to discuss, sir, it required no great self-con.rol 
on that occasion to refrain from personality and abuse. Had I in- 
deed chosen to take the opposite course, 2 what theme could have 
been more fruitful ? My controversy was with a traitor who had 
won credit among fapud^ men of his own rank for overturning the 
constitution ; who had passed laws for his own advantage ; who in 
his private life had declared war upon modesty and good name ; 



354 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

who, in short (denique), had treated with contempt 2 the exalted 
station in which he had been placed by his country and this honor- 
able House. I preferred, however, to take a different course. I 
preferred to recollect and acknowledge that he had once been under 
my instruction ; that he had once called himself my friend, and 
that I had once accepted kindness at his hands. 

1 USQ respublica. 2 p. 157, c. 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

(Based onicero, Philippic II, cc. 1-4; review exercise, to be done 
without the book). 

Has distinguished public service 1 ever received anything but abuse 
from treason and disloyalty (use ecquis). What is the end and 
object (idcirco) of all these attacks of our enemies but to make in- 
terest with men of their own stamp and obtain a passport' 2 to the 
hearts of the mob ? Nothing else, certainly. During the last score 
of years it has been my fortune to encounter many of the enemies of 
the country. Such a result 3 in view of the high position in which I 
have been placed by this House was inevitable. Could I refrain 
from attacking those whom I saw attempting the subversion 4 of the 
constitution ? If I had, I should never have reaped such an abun- 
dant harvest of glory as I have. Whenever 5 I saw a traitor, I 
attacked him without hesitation (idtro\ 

*p. 162, 3. 2 p. 173, 3. 3 p. 161, i. * p. 157,*-; use pres. to ex- 
press an attempt. 5 p. 107, 5. 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. 4-6). 

As first magistrate of this country, sir, he commended himself by 
moral earnestness (gramtas) and consistency, not only to the House, 
but to the nation at large. And why? Clearly because every measure 
of his public administration was taken in accordance with the wishes 
of the people on the one hand (cum ; 108, 9) and the suggestions of the 
senate on the other ; because he never even formed a resolution on 
a public matter till he had referred it to the many men of ability 
and insight who at that time constituted this House (105, 8, note). 
He received, in consequence of his loyalty, the thanks of parlia- 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 355 

ment, which credited him with the preservation of the country. 
Such a distinction, from time immemorial, had never been con- 
ferred upon any member of the House, acting in a civil capacity. 

EXERCISE XL. 

(Based on Cicero >, Philippic II, cc. 4-6 j review exercise, to be done 

without the book). 

This country, sir, has lately been deprived of many men of genius. 
Of those who have most recently passed away, these two in particu- 
lar were men of high culture and moral worth. Gifted (use 
praeditus) with eloquence and insight, no statesmen ever exercised 
greater influence in this House ; from it, indeed, they both received 
the title of (appello) " father," an honor conferred upon no one 
before them since the beginning of our history. Of great amiabilityj 
no statesman ever referred any matter of state to them without 
receiving advice ; and many credited them with the salvation -of the 
country and, indeed, of their lives and fortunes. Their influence will 
not soon die, and our countrymen will never allow us to forget them. 
I must now refer briefly to the rest, and I beg that you will listen to 
me with attention and indulgence (adv.). 

EXERCISE XLI. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic 77, cc. 7-9}. 

A man would show very little sense, sir, who would attempt to 
intimidate this House. It js_notj_rideed_what it once was, when, in 
its palmy days, it governed the whole world ; but it has not so com- 
pletely lost alt self-respect as to yield to the intimidation 1 of the 
disloyal. Could there- be greater folly than to recommend such a 
course ? We still know what is for the advantage of the country ; 
we still know what is likely to bring credit to the nation's name ; we 
still know what a wide gulf there is (use intersum) between treason- 
able decrees and those that make for common liberty and safety. 
Does it not, therefore, argue consummate audacity 2 to assert that 
we have entered into a conspiracy 1 to subvert the constitution? 
What punishment does such a shameless attack (vb.) upon honor 
able (tails) men merit at our hands ? 

1 P- IS?,*- 2 P- 59, 2. 



356 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

EXERCISE XLII. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic 77, cc. 10-12). 

Sir, The daily view of his ancestral portrait-gallery should have 
stirred him up to great achievements. Among his ancestors, some 
famous, some no doubt (sane) obscure, there was not one who was 
not distinguished for his devotion to his country's interests. Born 
in such a glorious fellowship, it was to be expected that he would 
emulate their noble acts ; that he would understand what a wide 
gulf there is between fomenting war and fostering peace ; that he 
should leave no stone unturned (as far as any act or endeavor on 
his part could go) to effect a compromise. The honorable gentle- 
man has preferred to take a different course. He has preferred to 
sever his connection with the loyal party, and hand himself over to 
men who are waging an impious war upon the constitution. I pray 
that he may yet see that it is the part of common sense 1 to prefer 
liberty to tyranny ; that he may yet incite the country to the 
recovery 2 of its freedom. 



p. 59,2. 2 p. 43, 7. 



EXERCISE XLIII. 



(Based on Cicero >, Philippic 77, cc. 10-12; review exercise, to be done 
without the book}. 

This, sir, is a probable story, 1 but it is not new to this House. 
Nor are we under any obligation to those gentlemen for starting it 
now. With the exception of those two men who feel pleasure to 
think that the country should have fallen into such a miserarjle 
condition as it has, was there any one of us who was not opposed 
to this proceeding in the first instance, and who has not followed it 
indeed with his reprobation ever since ? It is likely, therefore 
both being disaffected 2 that where the one rejoiced, the other also 
rejoiced. That is the necessary inference ; and there is no differ- 
ence between recommending an act and approving of it. All that 
was wanting to its performance, was courage and opportunity. 

1 p. 161^] [* 2 p. io6y 21 use mail, disloyal- 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 357 

EXERCISE XLIV. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic //, cc. 13-15)- 

My opinion, sir, of that distinguished patriot is well known to 
this House. I confess that I was his friend and that he often took 
counsel with me a fact which 1 is now made a matter of reproach 
against me by his enemies. I rejoice to think that there was no 
one in this city who more fully enjoyed his esteem. 2 He had only 
one object in view 3 during his lifetime namely, to relieve the desti- 
tution of his countrymen and free his country from debt. Of that 
country he entertained the highest hopes, 8 and believed frat it would 
one day be great, If he had only lived to see this, he would have 
felt that he had reaped the noblest enjoyment which life can give. 
Death took him while the country was still in poverty and gloom , 
but the loss of life only freed him from anxiety and trouble. 

'p. 9, 9. 2 p. 157, <r. 3 p. 161, i. 

EXERCISE XLV. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic //, cc. 13-15; review exercise, to be dons, 
'without the book). 

I assert, sir, that the joy felt at his death was general. It ex- 
tended, certainly, to all* who objected to servitude. 1 For he was 
really king ; and those, who took upon themselves the responsibility 
of his death, are regarded as the liberators of their country. To 
have been included in that glorious fellowship can never be made a 
reproach to anyone : unless indeed (nisi forte) a man could be 
reproached with having been among the Greek leaders in the 
Trojan horse. No more glorious act was ever performed either in 
this country or in the whole world. Posterity will never forget it ; 
it will be honored (prosequor) with undying remembrance in the 
pages of literature. 

l vb. 

EXERCISE XLVI. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic //, cc. 16-19). 

All men require relaxation, 1 and, even in sorrow and trouble, they 
will jest. If then I jested, even in the midst of our grief and 
misery, it is not a very"serious charge. I could not have annoyed 



358 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

anyone. Certainly material for the exercise of wit was ready to 
hand. But the fact that, instead 2 of criticising, I preferred to jest, 
is a convincing proof of my moderation. Would to Heaven I 
could jest now ! Sad as the time then was, it is worse now. Men 
now feel justified in committing against their country sacrilegious 
crimes which then they would never have attempted crimes which 
can not even be referred to by one with any sense of decency. Ten 
thousand acres of land and sixty millions of serterces 3 have been 
wrested from the state and given to the vilest of the vile. - Can 
any man wonder, then, that our hearts are full of anxiety when reck- 
lessness 4 itself is at the helm of state ? (use g-uberno.) 

1 p. 170, 6; p. 157, f. 2 p. 108, 6. 3 p. 151,^. * 162, 3. 

EXERCISE XLVII. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic II, c. 20-23). 

It is a matter of history, sir, that, with a view to effecting the ruin 
and subversion of the constitution, he immediately sold himself to 
the enemy. Posterity can never forget that by disregard 1 of the 
veto, by gagging members of parliament by abrogating the people's 
rights, he gave the disloyal an excuse for taking up arms against us^ 
No entreaty of ours, 2 no warning^no effort at compromise could 
affect him. We mourn the loss of many men of distinction ; their 
destruction lies at his door. 3 We mourn the loss of armies of 
brave men ; he is responsible. In accordance, therefore, with 
ancient use and wont, this House has put into the hands of the first 
magistrate a weapon to use against him ; and I pray Heaven that 
he may not be able to escape it (25, 5). 

1 P- 43 7- 2 say we, by entreaty, etc. 3 p. 1 73, 3. 

EXERCISE XLVII I. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. 23-26}. 

The conqueror returned with his army from Thessaly and all 
waited to see what course he would pursue. Many did not hesitate to 
believe that all his enemies would be put to the sword 1 and that the 
country would be handed over to the soldiery to be trampled under 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 3">9 

foot. The terror was universal ; 2 many even now are of the opinion 
that he would not have shrunk, had he dared, from committing any 
enormity. 3 But the country was sacred even in the eyes of the mad 
soldiery ; and had he killed the great men who had proved her 
salvation, 4 he would have incurred unpopularity with the veterans, 
whose interests he was so anxious to consult. Some unfortunates 
he even restored from exile, though he seized and sold by auction 
the property of others, and these, too, men whose valor had made 
the. name of this country a name of terror among foreign nations. 

1 P- ! 73> 3- 2sav a H things were held by fear. * 161, i. *"vb. 

EXERCISE XLIX. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. 27-29). 

He claims, sir, that he has now become a virtuous and respectable 
citizen. He pretends (dictito) that this is a just claim : that 1 he has 
ceased owing money, that he has given up revelling and heaping 
up losses at the gambling-table. What assurance ! How men 
will laugh ! Is it consistent with strict morality to make presents 
of money to actors ? to pass pernicious laws ? to take up arms 
against one's country? What position in the party or in the 
country can he expect to have for achievements like these ? As I 
live, I pity the party, I pity the country to which he belongs. As 
(quod) to his having ceased to owe money, you know that by the 
destruction 2 of many nobles of distinction, he has become suddenly 
rich. But you also know that "ill got is ill spent," and that 
Charybdis itself could not engulf the sea with as much speed (adv.} 
as he will run through and devour this ill-acquired property. 

!p. 129, 8. 2 p. 157,^-. 

EXERCISE L. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. 30-32.). 

This policy, sir desirous as I was (177, 4, note) of being of 
service to the country I criticised at length. I said that no 
state official with any sense of honor would ever have surrendered 
one of our colonies to the public enemy. If 1 our first magistrate 



360 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

had endorsed such a proposal, he had no knowledge of the duty of 
a first magistrate ; if he had made any such surrender, he had 
gone much further than he was justified in going. As to his 
solemn assertion 2 that the people were prepared to make the sur- 
render, we should at any rate have been consulted before 3 any 
action had been taken by the government in the matter. In.claim- 
ing the ability to forecast our policy, 4 they have usurped one of our 
most sacred prerogatives. The country no doubt (at emm ; 203, /) 
was poor and loaded with debt. Does that justify her in surrend- 
ering her colonies and selling her honor (honor) ? No nation 
would show so base a spirit. " Seek, then," I said, " re- 
conciliation with us ; order the colony to be recovered ; and do not 
let our children's children weep to hear that our country has received 
such a wound at the hands of one of her citizens." 

*P- ! 35? 3> & 2 P- 99) 6. 3 p. 105, note. *say what we would 
have done; p. 140, 3. 

EXERCISE LI. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic //, cc. 33-35. ) 

Mark now, sir, the extent 1 of his presumption. He approached the 
platform with a crown, which he had brought from home, in his hand; 
and, holding it out to the people, he began a harangue. He said 
that that was a golden 2 day for our country which would see a dia- 
dem placed upon the brows of her most distinguished and loyal 
citizen. He hoped that his enemies would not attempt to disturb 
the peace ; but if they did, he would know what course to take. He 
was not planning a crime or an impiety ; he knew what the people 
would submit to and what they would not. What he was proposing 
was a monarchy, not an absolute despotism ; this was the mandate he 
had received from his countrymen. Let them not fancy that he 
wished to do away with the law; he wished rather to strengthen it. 
If kings had been banished because they had aimed at the enslave- 
ment 3 of the country, kings might be reinstated in order to prove its 
deliverance. 3 

'p. 32, i. 2 p. 173,3- 3 ^ 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 361 

EXERCISE LI I. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic 77, cc. 36-38}. 

Sir Provided that the House does not require a defence of the 
member's acts at our hands, I feel that this matter is no particular 
concern of mine. We have been asked lately to defend a good 
many things which a scrupulous man would perhaps decline to de- 
fend ; but no one can successfully urge such a request as this which 
is now made, without 1 the destruction 2 of government. Laws have 
been passed without our consent ; taxes, direct and indirect, have 
been remitted both to individuals and to whole nations ; citizenship 
has been sold for money ; exemptions have been granted to disloyal 
provinces, and exiles have been restored by force of arms. I do 
not wish to bear hardly upon any man's misfortune ; but, if such acts 
are to stand, nothing can save the country from shipwreck. Again. 
Where is the million of money 3 that waiving in the treasury ? Has 
it been restored to its rightful owners ? 4 ~By no means. It has been 
given to abandoned and disloyal men. This House, sir, in my 
opinion, must soon (brevi) consider what it is going to do in the 
premises (say as to the matter}. With wisdom 5 at the helm of 
state, unjust favors may be withdrawn, our losses may be recouped, 
and our empire once more firmly established. 

^se gum (p. 22, 4.) *vb. 3 p. 151, c. *rel. cl.; p. 159, k. 5 p. 162, 3. 

/ 
EXERCISE LI II. 

(Based on Cicero, Philippic 77, cc. 39-41}- 

In the interest of peace, an investigation 1 into the whole matter 
was ordered to be made by the magistrate with the help of a parlia- 
mentary committee. Many members were cited to appear before 
them, and many others were consulted by letter. No language 
can adequately describe the vehemence (use vehementer) with which 
all attacked the dead senator. Not one of his measures, they 
said, 2 ought to be ratified by parliament. He had sullied the glory 
of his high office. On his authority, lands producing a revenue to 
the state had been sold ; he had settled in our colonies his own in- 
famous boon companions ; he had seized the estates and holdings 
of his neighbors. Was it not within the knowledge of all, that he 



pu 

362 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

had harassed the free towns, profaned our holy religion, and in- 
flicted the deepest wounds upon the country? If they declared 
that the acts of such a man were valid, no one would be safe. Let 
them (they begged) restore the country its rights (indirect; 127). 

*p. 157, c. 2 p. 138, 4. 

EXERCISE LIV. 
(Based on Cicero, Philippic //, cc. 42-44). 

It is within the knowledge of all, sir, that during the absence of 
his colleague 1 ran absence which he did not feel in the least he 
rescinded some of that colleague's most important acts, and that too 
with the intention either of putting money in his own pocket, or else 
of violently disturbing the public peace. He passed laws ; he 
rendered laws null and void. Statues and paintings, left as a legacy 
to the nation, he -carried off before our very eyes to his own house. 
He is convinced that, through force of habit, we have grown callous 
to such enormities, and that the fear of violence is universally felt. 
Would to Heaven that the country would at last avenge her own 
cause ! Let her recall her defenders who, in the interest of 
peace, have thought it their duty to withdraw from among us $ 
and let her remember that there is a wide gulf 2 fixed between, 
peace and slavery. 

*p. 52, 4. 2 p. 173, 3. 

EXERCISE LV. 

{Based on Cicero, Philippic II ; review exercise, to be done without 

the book). 

He imagined, sir, that in this way he would best recommend 
himself to men of his own stamp. 1 He thought that, by declaring 
war upon me, he would show himself not only my enemy but his 
country's ; that by attacking me, he would secure a passport 1 for him- 
self to tb^' hearts of the disloyal. But what charge did he bring 
against me? In the first place, that I was guilty of ingratitude. 2 
This, I consider a most grave accusation and I will answer it 
first. In what was I ungrateful? After accepting kindness at his 
hands, I opposed his candidature. What was the kindness? His 
giving me my life when he might have taken it away, But if that 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 363 

had been a kindness, our glorious liberators would not have earned 
the distinction they .have earned. For did they not take away his 
life from a tyrant who had given them their own ? 

V I73> 3- *<*dj. 

EXERCISE LVI. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. I and 2). 

Therefore, gentlemen, I solemnly beseech you, 1 lay aside your 
fears. You have often declared by word and look that you are 
devoted to the public interest, that you sympathize with the loyal 
party ; to-day, by your acts and ballots, make your sentiments 
clearer than the light. From the day that the prisoner at the bar 
was first induced to enter the political arena, he has always been 
distinguished for noble public service. In comparison with your 
safety, he regards the loudest clamors of your enemies as dust 
in the balance ; 2 he has therefore earned consideration at your hands. 
Decide, then, whether he shall still suffer under the oppression 3 of 
villainy, 4 or whether he shall to-day, through your instrumentality, 5 
awaken to a new life. 2 Do not be disturbed, I pray you, by the 
unwonted appearance of the forum ; the troops stationed there are 
not intended to intimidate, they are intended simply to protect. 

1 p. 166, c; p. 138, 4- 2 P- 173, 3- 3 ^- 4 P- 162, 3. 5 p. 75, 
note i. 

EXERCISE LVI I. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. i and 2; review exercise, to be 
done without the book}. 

You have been selected, gentlemen, from the three honorable orders 
of the state, to sit in judgment upon a worthy and loyal citizen, and 
there are some who wish to terrorize you, and to dictate to you what 
your finding shall be. 1 But I want to give you this warning : 2 Of all 
those who sympathize with the party of order 3 there is not one but 
feels that the question at issue 4 to-day in this court concerns, not 
himself and his children alone, but the safety of the country as well. 
Do not think that it is consistent with 5 wisdom or justice to arm an 
angry mob officially with power to decide with regard to the 
disfranchisement (solus) of anyone not to say, of one who has 



364 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

already been distinguished for patriotism and devotion to the loyal 
cause. I urge you, then, to sit in judgment upon the case your- 
selves, and to bring in a verdict (vb.) that, will be a credit to you 
and not a disgrace. 

*use iudico. 2 -z/&; 161, I. z boni. *"vb.\ 161, 2. 5 59, 2. 

EXERCISE LVIII. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Mil one, cc. 3-5). 

The employment 1 of force, gentlemen, by/ citizens of the same 
country against each other is impossible 2 ^without serious conse- 
quences resulting to the state / and the endorsation 3 of such a pro- 
ceeding by any of you will be a most periloivs step. Everybody 
knows that simply 4 in order to prevent people from avenging 
their own wrongs instead 5 of seeking legal redress our laws refuse 
to sanction the carrying of concealed weapons. But further : any 
one who takes the life of a fellow-citizen, even in self-defence, is, 
with us at least, almost universally 6 regarded as guilty of crime. 
I do not doubt there are some countries call them free, if you 
will (sane) which hold out the sword to their citizens to use against 
each other. But such states, if there are such, pay no light penalty, 
and are never wholly exempt from danger. Do not forget 7 that the 
voice of the law is not heard amid the din of arms ; that if men are 
accorded permission to repel force with force, force will often be 
employed; and, lastly, that your own lives will be exposed to 
treachery and violence which you will be powerless to suppress. 

J p. 50, 14. 2 p. 22, 4. 3 use probo. 4 p. 177, 4, note. 5 p. 108, 6, 
note. 6 use all. 7 p. 26, 3. 

EXERCISE LIX. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. 3-3; review exercise, to be done 
without the book}. 

Remember, too, gentlemen, how often your enemies have found 
fault with me. Owing to my services to the country, I have some 
slight personal influence, I believe, 1 in the House and in the courts 
of law ; and I have always employed it and always shall employ 
it in the defence of members of the loyal party. This the dis- 



EXERCISES Otf CICERO. 365 

loyal can never forget, and they would have crushed me long ago 
by force of arms (165, b), if they could have put me out of the way 2 
with impunity. They assert that no one should be allowed to live 
who has such a preponderating influence in the country that the 
government in its decrees simply registers his views. 3 Such are the 
treasonable and invidious utterances 4 made by these men every day. 

p. 138, 4- V 173, 3- S P- 32, i. 4 p. 161, i. 

EXERCISE LX. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. 6-8). 

He was always one who afforded convincing proofs of patriotism, 
honor, and a sense of justice. As a juror in the courts of law, he 
showed great moral courage ; and, when moving motions before 
the people, he showed utter fearlessness in the expression of his 
sentiments. 1 He held strongly to the conviction 2 that it was 
the duty of the leading men of the country to set themselves in 
opposition 3 to the rashness and fickleness of the mob ; and, 
therefore, his political career associated him closely 4 with the loyal 
party, with which he always possessed the greatest influence. It 
was his belief that, unless the mad extravagances of radical 
politicians (use tribunus) could be checked, the country would be 
ruined ; and certainly no words can express the measure of his 
contempt (use quam and vb.Y for a demagogue. Still he was 
never known to take any step 8 in the interest of his supporters, 5 
as against the general advantage. 

*p. 32, i. 2 say illied enim sibi persuasum habuit ; p. 89, 8. s p. 
1 S7* c - 4 P- *66, c. & suz. 

EXERCISE LXI. 

(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. 6-8 ; review exercise, to be done 
without the book). 

High and low, parliament and people, deplore his death, and 
amid the general regret, all are incensed with indignation to think 
that he should have perished by treachery and violence without 
reaching the natural limit of his life. His name will often be upon 
men's lips. Posterity will mention him as a man of profound, nay 



36(5 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 



almost prophetic insight, of striking (say high; p. 173, 3) moral 
earnestness and the finest culture. In these respects, indeed, he 
will challenge 1 comparison 2 with our greatest men. They will 
recall the roads and other public monuments he built for the 
service (use utor) of the people and they will wish if it were only 
possible that he had been immortal. The distinguished and the 
obscure are alike liable to death ; 3 but what a difference there is 
in the worthiness of their lives ! 

J P- I 73> 35 use dignus qui ; p. in, b. z verb. 3 p. 45, 4. 

EXERCISE LXII. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Mi lone, cc. 9-12}. 

Human nature is so constituted 1 that mankind are never drawn to 
the commission of crime without some expectation of gain (139, i). 
Lend me your attention, therefore, gentlemen, and I will indicate 
briefly the advantages 2 which this unprincipled villain would have 
derived from my client's death. If you have a clear conception (use 
plane) 3 of these, you will acquit the defendant of the criminal charge 
and not bring in a different verdict 3 from what all loyal men would 
wish. There is really no other question than this before the court, 
no other matter demanding from you (p 45, 4) investigation and 
settlement. 3 The thought occurred to him, then, that he would 
have if my client were put out of the way the power to hold 
office for a full year, that he would have a free hand to develop 
the mad schemes 2 which he had already in his mind, and that he 
would be able to submit to the people and impose upon the 
country, with your connivance if not with your support, 4 those 
wonderful laws of his, every one of which, he boasted, was of his 
own invent'on. 5 

x p. 170, 8. 2 i6i, i. 3 p. 157, c. 4 p. 52, 5. ''use vb. 

EXERCISE LXIII. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. 13-16). 

You will ask, gentlemen of the jury, the reasons 1 for his banishment. 
In the first place, his enemies were exasperated against him, and, 
wishing to punish him, they wreaked their cruelty 2 upon him in that 



EXERCISES ON CICERO. 

way It would have been in the interest 3 of the country, if our 
intercession had prevailed and if they had allowed him to remain ; 
but wholly unmoved by our prayers and his own distinguished 
public service, they thrust him forth from his home and country. 
In the second place, the day of the election was at hand, the day of 
competition for the highest office in the gift of the people. And 
there were those who had the audacity 2 to assert that, if my friend 
here were elected, a revolution was impending ; and that he would 
be elected, in spite of this opposition, unless he was expelled from 
the country "Free your country from danger" (they said to tr 
mob); "avenge your wrongs; as long as this wretch lives in the 
place, you will be crushed to the earth by his mad schemes, (indtr.) 
ip. 32, i. 2 p. 157, c. 3 p. 66, 4. 

EXERCISE LXIV. 
(Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. 17-20). 

You must now consider, gentlemen, if the story hangs together 
which you have heard from the witnesses who have given evidence 
upon this point. After doing this, you will be able the better to 
determine which of the two parties really was the aggressor (use 
Mus) The facts always speak for themselves and usually carry 
more weight than anything else. But, first, what was this state- 
ment? 1 My client (they said) had originally no intention c 
returning 2 to the city within a week. In spite of this, he suddenly 
changed his plans and returned immediately. Why (they asked) 
did he take this step ? Why did he set out for the city by night 
and in so much haste? Why? Because he had ascertained, in the 
interval, that his enemy was coming back ; because he wished to 
skulk in the neighborhood of the city until the unfortunate man 
approached and then cut him down. In short, the accused, if he 
had not had malicious thoughts in his heart, 1 would never have 
returned that night to the city at all. 3 Such was their statement ; 
let us now examine its consistency. 4 

a p. '57> * 2 P- 54' 2 8 P' I77 > 4 > note ' 






UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO 
LIBRARY 




Acme Library Card Pocket 

Under Pat. " Ref. Index File." 
Made by LIBRAEY BTTEEAU